Home

Web Server Module User`s Manual

1. 44 Sample screen for disconnect part Microsoft Internet Explorer Jo File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ee Back Stop Refresh Home Search Favorites Media History Address http 192 168 3 3 user smpdscen htm z Go Links Sample screen for disconnect part Disconnect N f aon sma Confirmation screen Result screen A http 77192 168 3 37WSDscntC cgi Microsoft Internet Explorer A http 77192 168 3 3 WSDscntC cgi Confirm 0 amp Language 1 amp Referer user smp lel Ed File Edt View Favorites Tools Help Ea File Edt View Favorites Tools Help Cube eh alea a g e o N ala E Back Stop Refresh Home Search Favorites Media History Back Stop Refresh Home Search Favorites Media History Address http 2 192 168 3 3 WSDscrtE cgi Z Go Links Address http 192 168 3 3AWSDsentC cal Confim O8Language 18Referer 2 Go Links The QJ71 W596 will be disconnect from the network The QJ71WS96 will be disconnect from the network in 10 seconds Are you sure End the browser Oj LLLLEELELELLELELLLLLLLEEELCILLL A cancel Done Intenet E Done Intenet 7 58 7 58 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 5 User Part Errors If an error occurs in a user part setting error communication error etc the corresponding error code is displayed in the user part display area When an error occurred the user part stops operating Ex
2. Twisted pair cable straight 2 Inthe case of Internet connection using ADSL modem ADSL modem LAN LINE Web server module 2 we N f To telephone line y lt a Q gt E gt f N pair cable a Modular jack straight POINT Refer to Section 2 2 and Section 2 4 for the devices required for 10BASE T 100BASE TX connection and the system configuration examples 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 4 2 RS 232 connection This section provides a connection example for use of the RS 232 interface of the Web server module e In the case of Internet connection using analog modem Analog modem Cl we Web server module ami o t Telephone a To a line a I LT r b jack Co Ee a 232 cable For a connector of the web server module use 9 pin D sub Male fixing type Refer to Section 3 2 Refer to Section 2 2 and Section 2 4 for the devices required for RS 232 connection and the system configuration example 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 5 Network Setting of Personal Computer for One to one Connection Connect the Web server module with the personal computer on a one to one basis and set the Web server module from the Web browser on the personal computer This section explains the network setting of the person
3. Proxy server Internet Intra company LAN Client 1 1 11 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION This chapter explains the system configuration of the Web server module 2 1 Applicable Systems This section explains the applicable systems 1 Applicable modules and number of mountable Web server modules The following table shows the CPU module compatible with web server module and the number of mountable web server modules Number of tabl Applicable module ey Ss ee Remarks web server modules QOOJCPU QOOCPU Maximum 24 Q01CPU Samum Q02CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Maximum 64 Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU x1 Refer to the User s Manual Function Explanation Programming Basic of the CPU module CPU module 2 Mountable position on base unit The Web server module can be mounted on any I O slot 2 of the base unit x2 Limited to within the I O point range of the CPU module 3 Application to multiple CPU system The Web server module is compatible with a multiple CPU system When using the Web server module in a multiple CPU system refer to the User s Manual Function Explanation Programming Basic of the CPU module used first 4 Compatible software package The following table shows the systems where the Web server module will be used and the corresponding software package It should be noted that GX Developer is not capable of accessing the PLC CPU via the W
4. setting collects device 2 According to the tag data in tag unit c File transfer by diagnostics function refer to Section 6 11 2 A file is transferred by the Web server module when the setting test of the Web browser is conducted The test file is transferred to the FTP server and a file transfer status is confirmed 6 FUNCTION ee MELSEC Q 2 Setting procedure for FTP client function a Common procedure The common procedure required to use the FTP client function is indicated below Start y Make access target CPU setting on the Access target CPU setting For use of DNS server make the DNS setting on the System setting y Make the required setting for file transfer to FTP sever on the FTP setting v 1 Refer to Section 4 6 Refer to Section 4 6 3 Refer to Section 6 7 3 b Procedure for transferring PUT file by PLC CPU 1 l Collect the tag data or logging data to be transferred by dedicated instruction FTPPUT Create a sequence program FTPPUT instruction Completed For tag function refer to Section 6 3 For logging function refer to Section 6 4 Refer to Section 8 3 c Procedure for transferring GET file by PLC CPU 1 Create a sequence program FTPGET instruction Completed Refer to Section 8 4 d Procedure for transferring file by logging function 1 Make the setti
5. Instruction Create control data in DO and later Create sending data in D100 and later An e mail will be sent ZP WMSEND U0 DO D100 MO MO M1 l Processing after transmission completion M1 Processing after transmission failure m 2 Instruction execution timing X4 WMSEND instruction WMSEND instruction completion device WMSEND instruction completion device 1 Completion Failure Network connection status a Network connection processing E mail sending When abnormally completed a The Web server module is connected to the network When the module is not connected to the network it is automatically connected during execution of the WMSEND instruction and disconnected upon completion of the instruction b The WMSEND instruction is executed The e mail specified by the WMSEND instruction is sent to the mail server c When the e mail transmission to the mail server is completed the WMSEND instruction completion device turns on When the completion device 1 turns on failed an error code is stored into the control data completion status S1 1 Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 3 Sample program The following is a program in which the Web server module mounted in the position of I O number X Y00 to X Y1F sends e mail when M20 is turned ON m MOVP H180 DO Main text included logging da
6. 2 Module with first 5 digits of serial No 07042 or later Reference Added Changed Function Description Section The following applet parts were added User screen creation function g Aes Chapter 7 2 6 1 Audio parts App 13 App 13 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 5 2 Precautions for replacing the old version with the new version This section provides the precautions for replacing the module whose first 5 digits of serial No are 05111 or earlier with the one whose first 5 digits of serial No are 05112 or later 1 Restoration of setting information file The setting information file of the module with first 5 digits of serial No 05111 or earlier can be restored to the module with first 5 digits of serial No 05112 or later However the setting information file of the module with first 5 digits of serial No 051 12 or later can not be restored to the module with first 5 digits of serial No 05111 or earlier An error will occur if such restoration is executed 2 User part parameters that must be set On the module with first 5 digits of serial No 05112 or later the following parameters of the user parts have been changed to the items that must be set When using the following user parts be sure to set the following parameters An error will occur unless any of them is set Initial value of module with Part name Parameter that must be set first 5 digits of serial No 05111 or earlier 1 TAGNO ELMNO1 to ELMNO
7. 6 10 6 35 6 75 6 96 Logging MOMOL cessisse 6 10 7 43 LOGGING SENI oea 6 41 M Method of describing Applet parts in HTML E a tac svt bee ea A 7 4 Modem connection time eeeeeeseeseeneeee 3 17 Monitor function 0 2 ceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetees 6 2 Mounting of battery ssec 4 55 Index 2 N O P R S NAT e a as A 23 Network connection by dial up modem ADSL WDNR atta ae te eaten ater Mite Setar 5 8 Network connection through LAN s 5 1 Network connection Disconnection using processing sequence program 5 18 Network connections ccccceeeeeeeeeeeteees 2 2 Network setting of personal computer for one to one CONNECTION eee eeeeeeeteeeteeeteeeee 4 11 Operation for returning to one to one connection EE EEA A hy fect ahi Seen ide Se hae eaes 5 13 Operation without battery being mounted E cdl ated tll aan telah eae ae 4 59 Part names and functions eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 6 Performance specifications 0 0 3 1 PING test Setting test ceeeeeeseeee 6 126 PING test by IBM PC AT compatible personal COMPUTED ee eee eeeeeeeteeeneeeneeees 6 127 PLC diagnostics monitor 0008 6 18 7 45 PORS ua n niet Grace can te aS eked A 23 Precautions for using monitor function 6 22 Removing battery for storage eee 4 60 Replacing the Compact Flash card 4 52 Returning the Web server module to the Cefault soting aonair 4
8. Click on Update button on the Setting update screen or power the PLC OFF and ON or reset the CPU module to update the settings on the Web server module Refer to Section 4 6 2 Monitor each operation on the monitor screen to Refer to Section 6 2 confirm the setting 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 3 Connecting the Web server module to the network Web server module personal computer Procedures before operation Confirm that the Web server module can access the Refer to Section 4 2 1 2 host station CPU and or other station CPU o s A contract with the Internet service provider is required prior to the Internet connection Create a proper environment for the external device Personal computer so that Internet connection is available Make one to one connection between the Web server Refer to Section 4 5 module and personal computer with a crossing cable to make the network setting Make network setting for the Web server module on Ap System setting Refer to Section 4 6 3 the following screen from the Administrative menu Dial up setting Refer to Section 4 6 4 System setting FTP setting Refer to Section 6 7 3 Dial up setting E mail setting Refer to Section 6 6 3 FTE setting Address notification setting Refer to Section 6 9 2 E mail setting Account setting Refer to Section 4 6 5 Address no
9. Write confirmation device A will be written to 10 according to the component setting Is it OK to proceed Caution Control of the PLC may change Ensure safety before execution Yes Warning Applet Window 2 Parameter Setting Range _ Initial Value Sets the tag where a value will be written with the tag setting No TAGNO 1 to 64 Must be set Refer to Section 6 3 3 Sets the component where a value will be written with the ELMNO i 1 to 64 Must be set component setting No Refer to Section 6 3 3 Depends on the data type Sets the value to be written 1 2 of the Must be set specified tag component Sets the type of the button to be displayed TYPE 3 0 1 0 Standard 0 Standard 1 User specified 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q Setting Range Initial Value Sets the character string to be displayed on the standard button File not set CAPTION 0 i Sets the character size to be displayed on the standard button FONTSIZE TYPE 0 emooio s5 the color of the standard button TYPE 0 Invalid when the user specified button TYPE 1 is selected emooio Sets the file JPG GIF to be displayed on the user specified File not set PICTUREUP button TYPE 1 Not l JPG GIF Invalid when the standard button TYPE 0 is selected displayed Sets the file JPG GIF to be displayed when the user specified Strin Same file as PICTUREDOWN button T
10. a Date The date and time when the event occurred was restored is displayed Example 2002 08 05 08 58 17 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q b Event number 1 The event number of the event occurrence restoration is displayed 2 The event number is the No set in Tag event setting of the event setting c Status The occurrence restoration of the event is displayed d Tag name 1 The name of the tag in which the event occurred was restored is displayed 2 The setting No and tag names set in the tag setting are displayed in the tag name column e Component name 1 The name of the component in which the event occurred was restored is displayed 2 The setting No and component names of Component setting in the tag setting are displayed in the component name column f Condition The monitor condition for the event occurrence restoration is displayed lt gt gt gt lt lt g Trigger value The trigger value for the event occurrence restoration is displayed h Component value The component value at the time of the event occurrence restoration is displayed i E mail sending The e mail transmission status due to event occurrence is displayed E mail transmission has not set for the event that occurred Sendin E mail is being sent according to the setting for the event that 3 occurred Complete E mail was sent according to the setting for the event that occurred ERR h Pane sree
11. 1 The setting side is as follows e User Data are set by the user before execution of the dedicated instruction e System The execution result of the dedicated instruction is stored by the PLC CPU x2 Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code Function 1 The user data file of the Compact Flash card is deleted 2 Executing the same instruction during execution of the instruction is not allowed The second instruction will not be processed In this case even if an error is detected the completion device D 0 and completion status indication flag D 1 do not turn on 3 An error may occur if the same file is concurrently accessed by WFDEL and any other instruction WMSEND FTPPUT FTPGET WFWRITE WFREAD Before executing instructions provide interlocks between the dedicated instructions that will access the same file 4 This instruction is not available for interrupt programs 5 As the user data file a file in the CF USER directory of the Compact Flash card can be specified 6 The execution and normal abnormal completion statuses of the WFDEL instruction can be confirmed using the completion device D 0 and completion status indication flag D 1 a Completion device D 0 This device turns on in the END processing of the scan for which the WFDEL instruction is completed and turns off in the next END processing b Completion status indication flag D 1 This device turns
12. DHCP server IP address subnet mask Automatically obtained from DHCP server Ethernet 0O Personal computer IP address subnet mask Mail server Automatically obtained from DHCP server 7 SMTP POP3 Mount the Web server module to slot 0 of the base unit and power the PLC ON Connect the Web server module to the personal For PC s network setting for one to one connection refer computer with a crossing cable to Section 4 5 On the following screens from the Administrative menu 1 Network setting of Web server module make network setting of the Web server module System setting Account setting E mail setting Address notification setting Power the PLC OFF and connect the Web server For LAN connection refer to Section 4 4 1 module to LAN Power the PLC ON 2 Network connection of Web server module The Web server module is automatically linked to the network at start up Using address notification obtain the Web server 3 Receiving the account notification by personal computer module s address Start a Web browser on the computer and access the 4 Access to Web server module Web server module Monitor device data on the Device monitor screen For device monitor refer to Section 6 2 1 Completed 5 CONNECTING WEB SERVER MODULE TO NETWORK MELSEC Q 1 Network setting of Web ser
13. x lt Block 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION IP filter setting example 4 MELSEC Q When making the IP filter setting take the precautions given in 5 of this section Internet connection a A setting example of enabling access from a mobile personal computer and office is given below 1 System configuration Mobile personal computer 1 R 222 100 100 1 Web server module Internet A ISP DNS server etc 211 100 10 1 IP filter setting Access setting C Pass the IP packet that has not been set in Filter setting Block the IP packet that has not been set in Filter setting e ra ec No 1 233 1 0 10 1 f C Block Pass No 2 2221 00 100 1 1 C Block Pass No 3 A 1 100 10 1 fi C Block Pass Office Proxy server Js 233 10 10 1 LAN Mail server FTP server x1 A static IP address is required to set the IP filter to the mobile personal personal computers A B computer b LAN connection A setting example of enabling access only from and C IP addresses 10 20 30 is given below 1 System configuration Personal computer A Personal computer B 10 20 30 1 10 20 30 2 Personal computer C 10 20 30 3 Proxy server 10 20 30 100 Web server module Personal computer E 10 20 31 2 Pers
14. Intenet 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 2 6 Audio parts Plays the specified audio file wnen the component reaches the set value 1 Specifications _ E EE class Play fileform file form WAV WAV AU o S Component type that Single word Double word Real number Bit can be specified An error occurs when String is specified Device setting value 3 Up to 5 values may be registered range quantity Displayed items TAGNO No of setting ranges RANGENO ELMNO Stop Play audio 1 Play audio2 Playaudio3 Play audio4 Play audio 5 1 Status icon AUDIO1 AUDIO2 AUDIO3 AUDIO4 AUDIO5 nb bb baba HIGH1 HIGH2 HIGH3 HIGH4 HIGHS Ay a ia Ki i Range 1 Range 2 Range 3 Range 4 Range 5 LOW1 4 LOW2 4 LOW3 4 LOW4 4 LOW5 4 Play form 21 1 Status icon Shows the component value is out of the setting range and audio play is being stopped The status does not change even if the icon including its background is left clicked STOPCOLO Shows the component value is within the setting range and the audio is being played Left clicking the icon including its background temporarily stops the audio play PLAYCOLOR Shows the component value is within the setting range and the play l is temporarily stopped Left clicking the icon including its background replay the file from the beginning PAUSECOLOR ma BKCOLOR 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 1 If any setting ranges are
15. MELSEC Q 3 8 21 FTP client status GET area Address 8002 to 8553 The status related to the FTP client function GET can be confirmed The FTP client function GET reads the file of the FTP server to the Web server module Refer to Section 6 7 2 for the FTP client function GET 1 FTPGET instruction execution count storage area The number of times when the FTPGET instruction was executed can be confirmed The transfer log at normal completion can be confirmed in 4 in this section The error log at abnormal completion can be confirmed in 3 in this section a Number of times when FTPGET instruction was normally completed Address 8002 This area stores the cumulative number of times when the FTPGET instruction was normally completed b Number of times when FTPGET instruction failed Address 8003 This area stores the cumulative number of times when the FTPGET instruction failed File transfer count storage area The number of times when the Web server module transferred files can be confirmed The transfer log at normal completion can be confirmed in 4 in this section The error log at abnormal completion can be confirmed in 3 in this section a Number of normally completed FTP transfer GET Address 8004 This area stores the cumulative number of times when the Web server module transferred GET a file from the FTP server b Number of failed FTP transfer GET Address 8005 This area stores the
16. MELSEC Q 4 11 Operation without Battery Being Mounted This section explains the operation without the battery being mounted 1 Shut down operation required when powering off during no battery operation If the file protection battery is not mounted on the Web server module make sure to perform shut down operation at power off of the PLC If the Web server module is powered off when the battery is not mounted saved data such as the setting files and logging data being processed will be lost Operating procedure a Stop a file access Turn File access stop request Y2 from OFF to ON b Confirm that file access has stopped File access status X2 is ON c Power off the PLC File access stop request Y2 Operating Stopped Power off the PLC File access status X2 Failure to observe the above procedure may cause erasure of logging data during processing corruption of data in the standard ROM drive Compact Flash card during access or a file system fault 2 Making battery error undetected during no battery operation a A battery error occurs when the file protection battery is not mounted on the Web server module 1 1 ON is written to the battery status area buffer memory 7 2 The ERR LED turns on and ERR LED status X10 and Other error X1C turn on b By turning ON Battery error detection setting Switch 2 Bit 2 in the switch setting of GX Developer a battery err
17. Precautions for time data handled by Web server module a Before operating the Web server module complete the clock data setting of CPU No 1 For the clock data setting refer to the user s manual of the used CPU module b Errors will be produced in the clock data of CPU No 1 used for the Web server module For accuracy of the clock data refer to the user s manual of the used CPU module c When the Web server module acquires the clock data of CPU No 1 a maximum delay of one second occurs as transfer time Hence an error of one second may be produced in the logging data time on rare occasions when the clock is adjusted Example Error in logging data time 2003 10 01 15 48 32 2 Data are sampled normally at 100ms intervals d The clock data of CPU No 1 is acquired by the Web server module at the timings indicated in 1 Therefore when the clock data of CPU No 1 is changed during operation the time of the Web server module will be changed in a maximum of 60 seconds 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 10 Files Handled by Web Server Module This section indicates the files that can be handled by the Web server module Storage Directory 1_ _ File Creation 2 CSV file that saves tag data Tag file Created when e mail transmission file transfer is performed ROM WWW LOGGING Logging file CSV file that saves logging data or System CF LOGGING Binary CSV file created by the user User data
18. Tag data 01 line g Logging data 01 production mngmt Sedi E 01 me erare a 09 E 02 anes magia am ow g 03 badi r 04 a 05 06 07 LILL PLIL fim fim CS SS n 08 2 When a tag event occurs an e mail is sent to the destination e mail address b Receiving e mail by personal computer 1 The e mail sent by the Web server module is received by the personal computer 2 The e mail format used by the Web server module is as follows E mail address From E mail address of the Web server module Subject 1 Tag name Component name Condition Trigger value Date f Main text set in E mail main text of the Tag event setting 0 to Main text 128 words Tag data TAGU CSV U indicates the tag setting No Logging Data File name set in the Logging setting CSV Attached file data 2 Tag data logging data Attached file capacity Maximum 512k bytes Attached file name 6 FUNCTIONS 1 Subject is as follows Example Production mngmt ProductA 100 2002 07 25 09 37 12 t Date Trigger value Condition Tag name Component name Tag name The tag name set in the Tag setting is displayed e Component name The component name set in Component setting of the Tag setting is displayed Condition Trigger value The condition and trigger value of the tag event are displayed e Date The date of the event occurrence is displayed 2 The CSV format
19. error Continued on the next page 9 38 9 38 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC Q From the previous page Error code Access log initialization error Out of range setting file access error New setting file creation error Setting file update error OAOAh Setting file seek error OAOBh Setting file close error Device specification error Device consistency error OAOEh No administrator authority error 0A10h Excessive number of device points for high speed sampling tag Illegal access log error Failed to initialize the access log The access log is corrupted Access was made to outside the setting file range Failed to create a new setting file Failed to update the setting file Failed to seek the setting file Failed to close the setting file An incorrect device that cannot be handled was specified in the component setting Bits were specified for a word device or any other than bits were specified for a bit device The account of the same name Same account error already exists Deletion of the last user account with administrator authority was attempted Same logging file The logging file of the same name e Specify another logging file name error already exists name The total device points of the high speed sampling tag exceeds 96 points e Check File access status X2 e Execute File access stop cancel Y3 Refer to Section 3 6 2 e
20. ERR 0908h Writing to device is disabled Turn OFF the device write disable signal and re execute back 4 When Data write of the tag setting has been set to Disable writing to a tag component with the CGI write part is not available Refer to Section 6 3 3 for the tag setting When awrite is attempted the following screen appears E http 192 168 3 3 WSWriteC cgi Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back Stop Refresh Home Search Favorites Media History Address http 192 168 3 3 WSWriteC cgi D Go Links ERR 0909h Disable is set in Data write in Tag setting back Enter Enable to Data write in Tag setting and re execute E 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 4 2 CGI read parts When the button is clicked the tag component value is read 1 Specifications Description lt FORM METHOD POST ACTION WSReadC cgi gt lt INPUT TYPE xxxxx NAME TAGNO VALUE yyyy gt lt INPUT TYPE xxxxx NAME ELMNO VALUE yyyy gt lt INPUT TYPE xxxxx NAME MODE VALUE yyyy gt lt INPUT TYPE xxxxx NAME RESULT VALUE yyyy gt lt INPUT TYPE xxxxx NAME REFERER VALUE yyyy gt lt INPUT TYPE xxxxx NAME LANGUAGE VALUE yyyy gt lt INPUT TYPE submit VALUE characters on button gt lt FORM gt EA the TYPE attributes at xxxxx An Fe of specifying them is given
21. MELSEC Q 7 2 10 Device monitor parts A monitor screen having the same display form as in the device monitor of the standard screen is displayed Refer to Section 6 2 1 for the device monitor 1 Specifications DevMon class Display form Same as in the device monitor of the standard screen 2 Parameter mm Value BKCOLOR Sets the background color the background color Selects the display language LANGUAGE T ERE 1 English 0 Japanese 1 English 3 Sample screen for device monitor part The sample screen Smpdvmen htm is stored in the USER directory of the Web server module 4 Precautions for using the device monitor parts Be sure to specify the applet size with the following values Refer to Section 7 2 1 for how to describe the applet size Width Height Japanese LANGUAGE English LANGUAGE 1 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 2 11 Tag data monitor parts A monitor screen having the same display form as in the tag data monitor of the standard screen is displayed Refer to Section 6 2 2 for the tag data monitor 1 Specifications Filename TagMon class Display form Same as in the tag data monitor of the standard screen 2 Parameter mm Value BKCOLOR Sets the background color O the background color Selects the display language LANGUAGE T ERE 1 English 0 Japanese 1 English 3 Sample screen for tag data monitor part The sample screen Smptgmen htm is
22. Since the data in the lowest digit is rounded as indicated above an event occurs in either case when the condition is set to or the trigger value to 123460 in the tag event setting c Condition Select the condition on which the component of the PLC CPU is monitored Component Trigger value The component value is equal to the trigger value are the same The component value is not equal to the trigger value are C t lt gt Tri omponent lt gt Trigger value ie oe d Trigger value Set the trigger value of the condition 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q e Restoration value 1 Set the restoration value to make the event disappear 2 The restoration value can be set when the condition is gt gt lt or lt 3 In the following case the event is restored Component Trigger value Component lt gt Trigger value Component lt gt Trigger value Component Trigger value f Send an e mail when an event occurs 1 Set whether e mail will be sent upon event occurrence or not 2 Refer to Section 6 6 6 for e mail transmission by the event monitor function g Disconnect from the network after sending mail Disable this setting when it is not desired to disconnect the network after sending e mail at event occurrence This setting is available when the Web server module is not continuously connected to the network Refer to Section 5 4 for the procedures for connecting to and disconnecting from the netwo
23. Transfer the setting data file to be edited to the personal computer via FTP Open the setting data file on spreadsheet software etc and edit it Refer to Appendix 6 according to the corresponding setting data file format for the setting data file format Transfer the edited setting data file to the Web server module via FTP CSV import On Data management import the setting data file Confirm that the portions edited on each setting screen of the administrative menu have been changed correctly Delete the setting data file from the standard ROM or Compact Flash card Completed indicates the setting item on Data management Refer to Section 6 10 4 4 Setting example of CSV export import function a In this example 50 tag components of tag setting No 1 are registered The component settings No 2 to 50 are newly registered to the tag setting No 1 where the component setting No 1 has already been registered Refer to Section 6 3 3 for tag setting Before registration After registration Tag ng Home gt Administrative mem gt Tag setting gt Component setting ane aa Tag setting Home gt Administrative mena gt Tag se Add Edit Delete _ Back Add Edit Delete _ Back Ps a E e A AEEA A Bop fm A C 1 powerl 01 Control CPU Single word D500 Decimal 0 decimal places None C 1 power 01 ControlCPU Single word D500 Decimak0 decimal places
24. ar Reference Added Changed Function Description f Section e The following network connection forms are available Network connection form 1 Connection via a router type ADSL modem Section 2 2 2 Connection via a bridge type ADSL modem broadband router e The following connection components are available 1 ADSL modem in which the protocol is PPPoE or PPPoA Connection component 2 Broadband router Section 2 4 3 UPnP compatible 4 POP before SMTP compatible e Achange was made to clear the current error area address 140 to I O signal details Section 3 6 2 145 of the buffer memory by turning on Error clear request Y10 baie l Section 3 7 Buffer memory list e The areas indicated in Section 3 7 1 were added i Section 3 8 e The following setting items were added 1 The Register the above port No to the router s NAT check box was added to the Web server setting 2 FTP server setting System setting 3 aysem eae setting i Section 4 6 3 4 Network diagnosis setting e The following setting items were changed 1 The Network type setting setting field was moved to the top 2 Connecting through LAN was changed to Connecting through LAN or the router e Initial screen was added to the setting item Account setting e Access authority Write was divided into Device write and Tag Section 4 6 5 component write IP filter setting e This setting screen was added Section 4 6 6 d e Different network c
25. 100 350 50 CR LF c The e mail is received by the personal computer Example The following is an example that an e mail sent by the sample program in 3 is received by the personal computer In the case of Microsoft Corporation s Outlook Express 5 5 TEST Bl File Edit View Tools Message Help amp QW amp xX a F G Reply Reply All Forward Print Delete Previous Next Addresses From QU71WS96 lt E mail address for web server module Date Thursday November 14 2002 12 22 PM To EF ee i o mi lt E mail address for designation no 1 Subject TEST lt Subject set in sequence program Attach line1 CS 1 00 KB Logging file set to logging setting no 1 latest TESTMA lt Main text set in sequence program 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 6 6 5 E mail transmission by logging function When a file is saved the Web server module sends an e mail to the destination e mail address Refer to Section 6 4 for details of the logging function 1 Logging setting Refer to Section 6 4 4 a Inthe Logging setting set E mail delivery Send a saved file to the following e mail address and select a destination e mail address External storage setting E mail delivery M Send a saved file to the following e mail address 1 01 m mance Fae E 3 Do not send ne File transfer 7 Transfer a saved file to the following FTP server b When a file is saved an e mail is sent to the destinatio
26. 3 An error may occur if the same file is concurrently accessed by WMSEND and any other instruction FTPPUT FTPGET WFWRITE WFREAD WFDEL Before executing instructions provide interlocks between the dedicated instructions that will access the same file 4 This instruction is not available for interrupt programs 5 As the user data file a file in the CF USER directory of the Compact Flash card can be specified 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION 6 MELSEC Q The execution and normal abnormal completion statuses of the WMSEND instruction can be confirmed using the completion device D 0 and completion status indication flag D 1 a Completion device D 0 This device turns on in the END processing of the scan for which the WMSEND instruction is completed and turns off in the next END processing b Completion status indication flag D 1 This device turns on off according to the completion status of the WMSEND instruction Normally completed Remains off Abnormally completed Turns on in the END processing of the scan where the WMSEND instruction is completed and turns off in the next END processing Operation at execution of WMSEND instruction Error 1 When the WMSEND instruction is completed the completion device bit device set in D 0 turns on in the END processing of the completed scan and turns off in the next END processing When an error occurs the completion device set in
27. 5034 Coe er 5084 Number of components Max 64 Example CSV file display TIME 11 14 2002 16 18 51 11 14 2002 16 19 51 11 14 2002 16 20 51 11 14 2002 16 21 51 11 14 2002 16 22 51 product A 100 100 100 100 product B product C 700 705 710 715 product D 280 282 284 286 139 140 141 142 143 MELSEC Q CR LF CR LF CR LF CR LF CR LF CR LF 1 When the tag whose data are collected at high speed is selected the data are displayed in 100ms units Example 2003 07 01 09 00 00 1 100ms units for high speed collection only Precautions for displaying CSV file on spreadsheet software When a CSV file is opened on spreadsheet software data of date time and some characters such as may not be correctly displayed due to data conversion In this case first open the CSV file with a text editor and confirm that the logging data are contained correctly Then confirm the specifications of the spreadsheet software and make setting so that the file is displayed correctly 6 FUNCTIONS 6 4 3 Setting procedure for logging function MELSEC Q The setting procedure for use of the logging function is indicated below Create a network environment for Web server module to access the Web server module from a personal computer Make access target CPU setting on the Access target CPU setting Set a tag on the
28. A file is transferred GET from the FTP server to the Web server module with this instruction Applicable device Settin Internal d eee Special Index nternal device ecia g File MELSECNET 10 p Constant data System User ra module register Others register Direct Ji a s Bt re gata KH s Sa A A Cao ae a oa re Instruction Execution code condition Command FTPGET Z FTPGET Comm FTPGET f ZP FTPGET Setting data Setting data Setting side x1 Data type Head I O signal of the module Un 00 to FE The first 2 digits when the I O signal is represented in User BIN16bit 3 digits Device Oo Head number of the device that stores the control data User System ee name Head number of the bit device that will be turned on for one scan when the instruction is normally completed se System Bit D 1 also turns on when the instruction is abnormally completed The local devices and the file registers for individual programs do not work as the devices for the setting data 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION 2 AA MELSEC Q Control data Setting Setting side Device Setting data range x1 b15 od b9 b8 b7 b6 b0 0 2 1 0 1 Completion type b7 Set whether or not the clock data will be set to S1 11 to S1 15 Completion in the case of abnormal completion S 0 type transfer 0 Not set form 1 Set 2 Transfer form b8 Specify the tr
29. Automatic connection at e mail transmission or file transfer by logging function When e mail transmission or file transfer is performed the Web server module automatically connects to the network Refer to Section 6 4 Automatic connection at e mail transmission by event function When e mail transmission is performed the Web server module automatically connects to the network Refer to Section 6 5 Connection by Call function Only when modem is connected When the Call function is enabled in the dial up setting making a phone call from a telephone to the Web server module side modem connects the Web server module to the network Refer to Section 4 6 4 2 Network disconnection methods The following indicates how the Web server module disconnects from the network a Disconnection using sequence program When Network disconnection request Y7 turns from OFF to ON in a sequence program the Web server module disconnects from the network Refer to Section 5 4 2 5 CONNECTING WEB SERVER MODULE TO NETWORK MELSEC Q b Disconnection using line disconnection part When a button is clicked in a line disconnection part the Web server module disconnects from the network Refer to Section 7 4 3 c Disconnection using Disconnect function Only when modem is connected When the Disconnect function is enabled in the dial up setting the Web server module automatically disconnects from the network if no access is made
30. Before executing instructions provide interlocks between the dedicated instructions that will access the same file 4 This instruction is not available for interrupt programs 5 As the user data file a file in the CF USER directory of the Compact Flash card can be specified 6 The execution and normal abnormal completion statuses of the WFWRITE instruction can be confirmed using the completion device D 0 and completion status indication flag D 1 a Completion device D 0 This device turns on in the END processing of the scan for which the WFWRITE instruction is completed and turns off in the next END processing b Completion status indication flag D 1 This device turns on off according to the completion status of the WFWRITE instruction Normally completed Remains off Abnormally completed Turns on in the END processing of the scan where the WFWRITE instruction is completed and turns off in the next END processing Precaution 1 The data written at the CSV setting are decimal values When word is specified 32768 to 32767 When byte is specified 128 to 127 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q Operation at execution of WFWRITE instruction Error 1 When the WFWRITE instruction is completed the completion device bit device set in D 0 turns on in the END processing of the completed scan and turns off in the next END processing When an error occurs the comp
31. Displays the logging file name Displays the location where the logging file will be saved Schedule setting Displays the execution timing and conditions for start stop Displays the file capacity number of saved files and operation performed when the number of Saved file setting saved files exceeds the set value External storage setting Displays whether or not the saved file will be sent by E mail delivery or file transfer Edits the selected logging Deletes the selected logging 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 Edit screen Set the tag to be logged execution timing file capacity etc Setting screen Eu Save Back Load Logging setting No Jo gt Tag name 04 process A x File name processA CSV 1 to 8 characters Save in Standard ROM Standard ROM can be selected for saving the setting No 1 to 4 only tting Home gt Administrative mem gt Logging setting gt Edit screen Schedule setting Timing Same as the tag sampling interval Interval specification E0 seconds 1 to 86400 Time specification m ME our minute second Condition for Start Start at start up Do not start Start at the specified time after event occurrence CPU event setting er o Start at the specified time m A ow Condition for Stop Do not stop Stop at the specified time after event occurrence CPU event setting NoJ01 after 60
32. ITAGNAME Tag name Within 16 characters o SAMPLING Execute EXECUTE O HIGHSPEED O Must be set Sampling Execute at high speed X Need not be set Invalid a Set value 1 Underlined set value Example YES Enter alphabetic characters in uppercase 2 Blank A set value need not be entered 3 Setting other than above 1 and 2 Enter any value according to the setting range in the Set value field b Setting requirement This item must be set Always enter a value x This item need not be set invalid It is not necessary to enter a value App 19 App 19 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 6 3 SYSTEM CSV System setting 1 File format Filename sYsTEM CSV File contents System setting Refer to Section 4 6 3 HE NwWTyre WA iptyPe EJ IPADDRESS Ef SUBNET E GATEWAY Mal DNSTYPE Me HTTPTYPE e HTTPPORT ie HTTPNAT File format EE FTPTYPE ee FTPPORT oOo IZE FTPNAT E SYSTEMNAME gt DIAGNOSIS A gt INTERVAL EJ DESTINATION gt EDEVICE Mee ii Ah STARTUP E Label column Cannot be set by the user L Setting area Set by the user App 20 App 20 APPENDIX MELSEC Q System setting Home gt Administrative mem gt System setting Network type setting Connecting through LAN or the router Dial up to the network modem ADSL DoPa Japan only IP address setting Obtain an IP address automatically Use
33. S1 0 Execution type Completion S1 1 p status Number of data S1 2 i to be written Write result S1 3 Number of data File position Number of columns specification Word byte specification File name MELSEC Q Specify the execution type 00004 Binary write 0100H CSV format conversion write da The status of the instruction completion is stored ns 0 Normal completion System Other than 0 Abnormal completion Error code 2 Specify the number of data to be written Word unit When specifying the byte unit in S1 7 also set the number of datain 1 to 480 User word units by converting it into word units With respect to the data specified in S2 the number of actually written data enters here System The unit depends on the word byte specification Set the file position where data will be written e When binary write is specified in S1 0 00000000H Written to the file starting at its beginning 000000014 to FFFFFFFEn Written to the file starting at the specified position 0 The unit depends on the word byte to User specification FFFFFFFFH FFFFFFFFH Added to the end of the file When CSV format conversion write is specified in S1 0 00000000H to FFFFFFFE Written to the file starting at its beginning FFFFFFFFH Added to the end of the file When binary write is specified in S1 0 Always specify 0 0 e When CSV format conversion write is specified in
34. Via Paracelso 12 1 20041 Agrate Brianza Ml Phone 39 039 6053 1 Fax 39 039 6053 312 e mail factory automation itmee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC SPAIN EUROPE B V Spanish Branch Carretera de Rub 76 80 E 08190 Sant Cugat del Vall s Phone 34 9 3 565 3131 Fax 34 9 3 589 2948 e mail industrial sp mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC UK EUROPE B V UK Branch Travellers Lane GB Hatfield Herts AL10 8 XB Phone 44 0 1707 27 61 00 Fax 44 0 1707 27 86 95 e mail automation meuk mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC JAPAN CORPORATION Office Tower Z 14 F 8 12 1 chome Harumi Chuo Ku Tokyo 104 6212 Phone 81 3 6221 6060 Fax 81 3 6221 6075 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC USA AUTOMATION 500 Corporate Woods Parkway Vernon Hills IL 60061 Phone 1 847 478 21 00 Fax 1 847 478 22 83 MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVE TEXEL Electronics Ltd Box 6272 IL 42160 Netanya Phone 972 0 9 863 08 91 Fax 972 0 9 885 24 30 e mail texel_me netvision net il ISRAEL GEVA AUSTRIA UAB UTU POWEL LITHUANIA Avtomatika Sever Ltd RUSSIA Wiener Stra e 89 Savanoriu pr 187 Lva Tolstogo St 7 Off 311 AT 2500 Baden LT 2053 Vilnius RU 197376 St Petersburg Phone 43 0 2252 85 55 20 Phone 370 0 52323 101 Phone 7 812 11 83 238 Fax 43 0 2252 488 60 Fax 370 0 52322 980 Fax 7 812 11 83 239 e mail office geva at e mail powel utu lt e mail as avtsev spb ru
35. jame r m main text to be sent Oo Head number of the bit device that will be turned on for one scan when the instruction is normally completed D fees System D 1 also turns on when the instruction is abnormally completed The local devices and the file registers for individual programs do not work as the devices for the setting data DEDICATED INSTRUCTION ee MELSEC Q Control data Setting Setting side range x1 b15 b13 re b8 b7 k 0 2 1 1 Sore type b7 Set whether or not the clock data will be set to S1 11 to S1 15 in the case of abnormal completion 0 Not set 1 Set 2 Send form b8 to b12 Set the send form of the e mail g Completion Main text b12 hype Send form 0 Main text not sent 1 Main text sent e Attached file b8 to b11 b1 bio bo bs Attacheatie o 0 0 0 Noattachedfile i oo o fraga 1 1 o 0 foggngaa 1 o 1 o Userdatatile binary file L Loli 1 Juserdatatie csvfley The status of the instruction completion is stored Completion iatus 0 Normal completion System Other than 0 Abnormal completion Error code x 2 Set the e mail destination with the set No of E mail address To S1 2 Destination No setting of the e mail setting 1 to 16 User 1 to 16 Destination No Set the tag data or logging data to be attached to the e mail with the Tag Logging i i corresponding No s
36. lt INPUT TYPE xxxxx NAME REFERER VALUE yyyy gt lt INPUT TYPE xxxxx NAME LANGUAGE VALUE yyyy gt lt INPUT TYPE submit VALUE characters on button gt lt FORM gt e Specify the TYPE attributes at xxxxx An example of specifying them is given below TYPE NAME VALUE DESCRIPTION Specify the The text box is displayed text parameter ae ae Pe The value entered into the text box Refer to p becomes a parameter value Sa he Specify the hidden parameter ae parameter value at Nothing is displayed Refer to yyyy submit Need not be Specify the button The button is displayed specified name 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Parameter Setting Range Initial Value Sets the tag where a value will be written with the tag setting No TAGNO 1 to 64 Must be set Refer to Section 6 3 3 Sets the component where a value will be written with the 1 to 64 Must be set component setting No Refer to Section 6 3 3 Depends on the data type Sets the value to be written 1 2 of the Must be set specified tag component Sets whether the confirmation screen will be displayed or not 1 Displayed 0 Not displayed 1 Displayed e Selects how to display the result screen 0 Display the result screen with the Return button 1 Display the result screen with the Close button e Specify this item when a script is described to open the other window and display the result 0
37. lt param name INTERVAL value 1 gt lt applet gt lt Data block part gt lt applet code W SDatblk class codebase PART S width 405 height 65 gt lt param name TAGNO value 1 gt lt param name ELMNO1 value 1 gt lt param name ELMNO2 value 2 gt lt param name ELMNO3 value 3 gt lt param name ELMNO4 value 4 gt lt param name ELMNO5 value 5 gt lt param name DIRECTION value 0 gt lt param name BLKSIZE value 3 gt lt param name NUMCOLOR _ value Black gt lt param name BKCOLOR value White gt lt param name ELMCOLOR _ value Black gt lt param name ELMBKCOLOR value White gt lt param name LNCOLOR value Black gt lt param name APLCOLOR value Gray gt 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q lt param name ELMNAME value 1 gt lt param name DATWIDTH value 100 gt lt param name ELMWIDTH value 100 gt lt param name DATALIGN value 1 gt lt param name ELMALIGN value 2 gt lt param name WRITE value 1 gt lt param name LANGUAGE value 1 gt lt applet gt lt body gt lt html gt c Storage of HTML file Transfer the HTML file to the Web server module by performing FTP operation File storage destination PROM WWW USER SMPBLKEN HTM d Sample screen display Display the sample screen Example When accessing the Web server module by one to one connection Sample screen address http 192 168 3
38. 1 2 This area stores the transfer log No where the latest transfer log is registered 0 No transfer No transfer log registered 1 or more Transfer log No where the latest transfer log is registered x The pointer value of 16 indicates that the latest transfer log is registered in the transfer log 16 area If 33 or more errors occur excess transfer logs are registered to the areas starting from the transmission log 1 area again c Transfer log 1 to 32 Address 6202 to 6553 This area stores the transfer logs of normally completed file transfer The transfer log area is composed of 32 portions of the same data arrangement 1 Address 6202 to 6212 Transfer log 1 6213 to 6223 Transfer log 2 1 1 6543 to 6553 Transfer log 32 i Destination e This area stores the destination FTP server No of the normally completed FTP transfer PUT e The destination FTP server No is set in the FTP server setting Transferred file name This area stores the transferred file name in ASCII code Date and Time This area stores the date and time of file transfer in BCD code b15 to Destination b8 b7 to bO Transferred file name Month 01H to 12h Hour 00x to 23x Second 00n to 59x Year 00H to 99H first 2 digits Year 00H to 99H last 2 digits Day 01H to 311 Minute 00H to 59x Day of the week OH to 6x Date and time 10 3 SPECIFICATIONS
39. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 L LOGGING _ EVENT USER CSV J SETCMD SETCMDEN MONCMD MONCMDEN PARTS IMAGE App 7 ICON SETTINGS SYSTEM LOGGING JUSER HTTP home directory top page storage directory Logging data storage directory Event historical data storage directory User created screen directory Under USER directories can be created by the user The access authority to the created directories is the same as that to USER Setting information file storage directory Setting HTML storage directory Japanese Setting HTML storage directory English Monitor screen HTML storage directory Japanese Monitor screen HTML storage directory English Supplied parts communication parts display parts storage directory Image file storage directory Icon storage directory Setting file storage directory System file storage directory Ba Fed el ee ee EEE Compact Flash card Logging data storage directory User created screen directory Under USER directories can be created by the user The access authority to the created directories is the same as that to USER Setting information file storage directory Standard ROM backup data storage director
40. 3 Sample screen for write button part The following provides an example of creating the sample screen that displays the write button parts The sample screen Smpwbten htm is stored in the USER directory of the Web server module a Tag setting refer to Section 6 3 3 1 Set Data write in the tag setting No 1 to Enable 2 Set the component setting No 1 of the tag setting No 1 ome gt Administrative mem gt Tag setting gt Com inn No Compo mane CPU mm _ Deta type Dees Diy frm Open Opn C 1 device A 01 Control CPU Single word DO Decimal 0 decimal places None 3 Click on the Update button on the Setting update screen to update the setting b Creation of HTML file File name Smpwbten htm The HTML source is indicated below lt DOCTYPE html PUBLIC W3C DTD HTML 4 01 Transitional EN gt lt html gt lt head gt lt meta http equiv Content Type content text html charset iso 8859 1 gt lt meta http equiv Pragma content no cache gt lt title gt Sample screen for write button part lt title gt lt head gt lt body gt lt h1 gt Sample screen for write button part lt h1 gt lt Communication part gt lt applet code WSCom class codebase PART S width 0 height 0 gt lt param name INTERVAL value 1 gt lt applet gt lt Write button part gt lt applet code WSWribtn class codebase PARTS width 100 height 50 gt lt param name TAGNO value 1
41. 4 in this section The error log at abnormal completion can be confirmed in 3 in this section a Number of normally completed e mail transmission Address 5002 This area stores the cumulative number of times when the Web server module sent e mail to the mail server b Number of sent attached files Address 5003 This area stores the cumulative number of times when the Web server module sent e mail with attached file c Number of undelivered e mails Address 5004 This area stores the cumulative number of communication errors that were returned to the Web server module as a result of requesting the mail server to send e mail 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 Error log storage area for abnormal completion The error log of failed e mail transmission can be confirmed a Number of writes for error log Address 5005 1 2 This area stores the cumulative number of errors that were stored into the error log area The error code is stored when e mail transmission error X17 turns on b Error log write pointer Address 5006 1 2 This area stores the error log No of the latest error log 0 No error No error stored 1 or more Error log No of the latest error stored x The pointer value of 16 indicates that the latest error has been stored into the error log 16 area If 17 or more errors occur excess errors are stored into the error log areas starting from the error log 1 area again
42. 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 3 Security precautions for the Web server module The Web server module supports the basic authentication by the user name and password account setting and the IP filter function Refer to Section 4 6 6 however they cannot prevent illegal access from the outside completely When it is required to keep the PLC system safe against illegal access from the outside the user should also take preventive measures It is recommended to use the Web server module paying attention to the following a To prevent illegal access it is recommended to use the Web server module on a LAN When connecting to the Internet it is advisable to connect it via a router and use the security function of the router If access to the Web server module is not made for dial up Internet connection disconnect the Web server module from the network Refer to Section 5 4 When making the account setting pay attention to the following points in order to prevent the account information user name password from missing 1 Avoid simple setting with alphanumeric characters only Make sure to add symbols amp 7 etc to set unpredictable user name and password 2 Delete the default account since it may be used to make illegal access 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 4 6 6 IP filter setting Filter setting Save Cancel MELSEC Q Setting Purpose The
43. 9 and restore the card 2 Precautions on diagnostic time of Compact Flash card a The Web server module executes diagnosis including file restoration of the Compact Flash card when 1 Power is turned OFF and ON or the CPU module is reset 2 The Compact Flash card is inserted while the power is ON b The diagnostic time of the Compact Flash card is lengthened if many files are stored in the card It takes approx 5 seconds for 100 files and approx 10 seconds for 1000 files O Since the following times may be lengthened due to too many files delete unnecessary files 1 Rising time of the Compact Flash card setting status X1 2 Web server module s ready time Rising time of the Module READY X0 3 Precautions for formatting Compact Flash card a Use the formatting function of the Web server module to format the Compact Flash card Refer to Section 6 10 2 b Do not format the Compact Flash card on Windows XP 2000 If it is formatted on Windows XP 2000 by mistake recover it according to the manual of the Compact Flash card 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 Precaution for Compact Flash writes The Compact Flash card has its own lifetime the limited number of writes For details check the specifications of each product Since the lifetime of the Compact Flash card generally varies depending on its free space it is advisable to use
44. Ait tie C 1 02 production rangmt 01 product A 100 Do not send C 2 02 production mngmt 05 pressure gt 80 65 Do not send vi Setting Item Displays the component name Displays the tag event condition Displays the trigger value Displays tne trigger vawe o O Page switching 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Edit screen Home gt Administrative mem gt Event setting gt Tag event setting gt Edit screen Common setting CPU event setting Tag event setting Time Interval eve Tag event settingcedij JSevel Beek Meza Tag event setting No foo Tag name foz production mngmt gt Component name OT product A z Single word Decimal 0 decimal places Condition Trigger value fi 00 Restoration value p Mail setting for event occurrence I Send an e mail when an event occurs M Disconnect fi om the network after sending mail E mail main text Attached file ging data 01 process A 01 i ee ages oe zi 09 E 02 lamg oige n oe E 10 mE 03 aaa ei i 11 E 04 r 12 E 05 E pE E 06 i 14 E 07 E 15 i 03 E 16 E Setting Item Mail setting for event f i Makes setting when sending e mail at event occurrence occurrence Saves the setting Save The settings are updated when the Update button on the Setting update screen is clicked the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is
45. Blank selected at DATATYPE Wh th FORMAT Display form cael Decimal than the above is selected at i EXP Sa Numeral indicates the STRING1 to STRING32 When BIT or STRING is Number of selected at DATATYPE DECIMAL PLACES decimal places When other than the above is oto6 selected at DATATYPE When BIT or STRING is Blank x selected at DATATYPE NONE h h 8 OPERATOR Operator a i PLUS man heateve MINUS is selected a me P MULTIPLY o mE When BIT or STRING is Blank x selected at DATATYPE When NONE i lected at OPERAND Operand meee Blank x OPERATOR When other than the above is 32768 to 32767 selected Must be set x Need not be set Invalid x1 Specify the access target CPU setting No set to the label of CPU CSV An error will occur if the specified access target CPU setting No does not exist in CPU CSV x2 An error will occur if a non existing device is set An error will occur if a device that does not match the data type is set App 34 App 34 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 6 8 LOGGING CSV Logging setting 1 File format File contents Logging setting Refer to Section 6 4 4 6 TAGNO FILENAME SAVEIN TIMING INTERVAL TME locanat 1 ALINE Rom Tag Oo o INTERVAL 0 OOo LOGGINGS 15 CLINE CF TIME 00 00 00 LOGGING60 64 DLINE CF TIME PER PER 00 E Ez y y y Y y STARTEVTNO STARTAFTER STARTTIME STOP STOPEVTNO File format 1000 SIZE 5
46. Continue connection whether the access point and dial pause time are correct Refer to Section 4 6 4 e Check the power supply of the modem cable and line status e Check the dial up setting whether the access point user Failed to connect the line by CALL name and password are correct 0315h CALL connection error f Continue function Refer to Section 4 6 4 e Check the system setting whether Obtain an IP address automatically is selected Refer to Section 4 6 3 The line was disrupted unexpectedly Line disconnection e Check the power supply of the due to cable breakage power off Continue error f i modem cable and line status of the modem or line disruption by the service provider y The DR signal of the modem e Check the power supply of the i 0317h Modem DR signal error Continue turned off modem and cable status Continued on the next page 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC Q From the previous page Error code e Input the phone number in Access point The phone number of the access Access point of the dial up specification error point has not specified setting and try to connect again Refer to Section 4 6 4 Failed to reconnect the line inthe e Check the power supply of the case of unexpected line disruption modem cable and line status Continue Continue Network reconnection 4 f e Check the cable and DHCP 0319h Failed to automatically update the error f s
47. Display the screen with the Return button e Specifies the file name of the execution screen with the absolute path When standard ROM is used USER file name When Compact Flash card is used CF USER file name Clicking the Return Cancel button returns to the execution screen Selects the language of the confirmation and result screens LANGUAGE 1 English 0 Japanese 1 English x1 When operation specification has been set to the target component an inverse operation is performed on the setting value using the operation specification and the result is written to the device Example When 100 is set as the setting value for the component in which Single word has been set as Data type and lt 2 as Operation specification 100 2 50 is actually written to the device Note that an error may be produced between the setting value and the actually written component value Example When 107 is set as the setting value for a component in which Single word has been set as Data type and 2 as Operation specification 107 2 54 is actually written to the device The component value to be displayed on the Tag data monitor is 54 X 2 108 In the above case the following confirmation screen is displayed when CONFIRM 1 Return to the execution screen a to 3 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION AJ http 192 168 3 3 WSWriteC cgi Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit
48. Displayed 0 1 0 Not When 0 Not displayed is set the display lines are not f displayed displayed Sets whether the points specification display box will be displayed 0 Not displayed or not 0 Not displayed 1 Displayed 1 Be sure to set ELMNOs as many as the graph lines specified at GRAPHNO Failure to do so will result in an error Refer to Section 7 5 3 Sample screen for historical graph display part The following provides an example of creating the sample screen that displays the historical graph display parts The sample screen SMPHSGEN HTM is stored in the USER directory of the Web server module a Tag setting refer to Section 6 3 3 logging setting refer to Section 6 4 4 1 Set the component setting No 1 to 5 of the tag setting No 1 a Tag setting Home gt Administrative mem gt Tag setting gt Component setting Add Edit Delete Back ino Compote CPU nm Danie Devin Dip tm pipe C 1 deviceA 01 Control CPU Single word DO Decimalk0 decimal places None C 2 deviceB 01 Control CPU Single word Di Decimal 0 decimal places None C 3 deiet 01 Control CPU Single word D2 Decimal 0 decimal places None C 4 device D 01 Control CPU Single word D3 Decimal 0 decimal places None C 5 deviceE 01 Control CPU Single word D4 Decimal 0 decimal places None 2 Set the logging setting No 1 a Edit Del setting Home gt Administrative mer gt Logging se
49. ELMNO4 value 4 gt lt param names ELMNO5 value 5 gt lt param name GRCOLOR1 lt param name GRCOLOR2 lt param name GRCOLORS3 lt param name GRCOLOR4 lt param name GRCOLORS lt param name BKCOLOR lt param name DSPCOLOR lt param name DSPBKCOLOR lt param name DSPLNCOLOR lt param name APLCOLOR lt param name POINT lt param name UPPER lt param name LOWER lt param name YLINE lt param name XLINE lt param name DSPTIME lt param name DSPDATA lt param name DSPBOX lt applet gt lt body gt lt html gt c Storage of HTML file value Blue gt value Red gt value Green gt value Aqua gt value Maroon gt value White gt value Black gt value White gt value Red gt value Gray gt value 100 gt value 32767 gt value 32768 gt value 10 gt value 15 gt value 1 gt value 1 gt value 1 gt Transfer the HTML file to the Web server module by performing FTP operation File storage destination PROM WWW USER SMPHSGEN HTM 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q d Sample screen display Display the sample screen Example When accessing the Web server module by one to one connection Sample screen address http 192 168 3 3 USER SMPHSGEN HTM Sa
50. LOOBASE TX i 00 n iE pa Cable diameter l IB X4 4 10 n 7 R2 2 i Unit mm in x1 The bending radius near the connectors reference value R1 should be four times as long as the cable s outside diameter or more when connecting the twisted pair cable x2 The bending radius near the connectors reference value R2 should be four times as long as the cable s diameter or more when connecting the RS 232 cable App 1 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 2 Accessible Devices and Ranges This section provides information on the accessible devices and accessible ranges 1 Accessible PLC CPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU QCPU A mode Q02CPU A QO2HCPU A QO6HCPU A A1NCPU AOJ2HCPU A1SCPU A1SCPU S1 A1SHCPU A1SJCPU A1SJHCPU A2CCPU A2CJCPU A2NCPU A2NCPU 1 A2SCPU A2SCPU S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU S1 A1FXCPU A2ACPU A2ACPU S1 A2UCPU A2UCPU S1 AZUSCPU A2USCPU S1 A2ASCPU A2ASCPU S1 A2ZASCPU S30 A2USHCPU S1 ASNCPU ASACPU ASUCPU A4UCPU 2 Accessible routes a Single network Web server module Networks 2 to 7 Relay station Networks Access target CPU A a Network communication route e Network indicates NET 10 H or Ethernet e Relay station is the QCPU Access target CPU PLC series Network communication QCPU Q mode QnACPU QCPU A mode ACPU Accessible Inaccessible i C24 multidrop 1 CC Link i Networ
51. Minute 00x to 59x an error occurs St 15 eee 8 bit Year 00x to 99x First 2 digits of the year Lower 8 bit Day of the week 00x eee to 06x Sat Specify a file name with a character string when attaching a user data file e Specify a name 8 characters period extension 3 characters String User within the specified number of characters When omitting an extension also omit a period Setting Setting side Device Item Setting data range x1 Send data Specify the data subject main text of the e mail to be sent p fie 1 The setting side is as follows e User Data are set by the user before execution of the dedicated instruction e System The execution result of the dedicated instruction is stored by the PLC CPU x2 Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code Function 1 An e mail is sent to the destination e mail address CPU module Web server module Mail server WMSEND Un S1 S2 D Destination No E mail address Destination e mail address Subject Mai Tag Logging No alien Tag data or logging data File name user data file binary CSV Attached file 2 Executing the same instruction during execution of the instruction is not allowed The second instruction will not be processed In this case even if an error is detected the completion device D 0 and completion status indication flag D 1 do not turn on
52. Module access Possible 120 Clear Hold Settings Status of External Power Supply Noise Filter Setting Fuse Status oo Input Type Status of 1 0 Address Verify Agree Remote password setting Error Display Display format wo zrror Present Error No Error p HEX Error History f DEC The display sequence of the error history is from the oldest error The latest error is displayed in the line as under HZW Information Close Display details e Module The following data are displayed Module name Mounting module model name I O address Head I O signal number of target module Implentation position Slot position where the module is mounted Product information Product information The end of the product information indicates the function version of the module The Web server module is available with function version B or later Example B at the end indicates that the module is of function version B e Module access Module access is displayed as possible when Watch dog timer error X1F is off e Status of I O address verify Whether the module set with parameters is consistent with the actually mounted module or not is displayed e Present error The error code of the latest error is displayed Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code e Error display The error codes of the errors that has occurred is displayed 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC Q 2 Checking the LED ON OFF status and switch setting status on
53. Number of 2013 corr 7 Ea 2025 2029 Es 2087 Ea 205 cose saved files Number of the latest saved 2014 2018 2022 2026 2030 2034 2038 2042 2046 2050 file 2015 2019 2023 2027 2031 2035 2039 2043 2047 2051 aan E pate 2 2057 Ea Ea 2069 core Ea En 2085 2000 saved files 053 2057 ER 2054 2058 2062 2066 2070 2074 2078 2082 2086 2090 i 2055 2059 2063 2067 2071 2075 2079 2083 2087 2091 SSS Ea Ee Be RS Ee Ee een ea ee Reed 2 2097 ao 205 ao 21 na a 17 aa ares 2120 saved files 093 es saet latest saved 2095 2099 2103 2107 2111 2115 2119 2123 2127 3131 SSE Se Se Sse ak ee ees hs Saas Number f 7 am 214 214 21 2157 ae aes 2169 saved files 2193 2l aar Ea a as EA f th eee 2134 2138 2142 2146 2150 2154 2158 2162 2166 2170 file 2135 2139 2143 2147 2151 2155 2159 2163 2167 2171 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Logging 1 to 64 Data Area baits am er o 21 am Ea 77 21 Far 21 zies 21 ao 21 as 21 aor w 205 2209 saved files f th a H 2174 2178 2182 2186 2190 2194 2198 2202 2206 2210 a Te j 2175 2179 2183 2187 2191 2195 2199 2203 2207 2211 AS Number of 221 ana a7 7 n 2225 2000 280 2r m 225 ra saved files fth Gon 2214 2218 2222 2226 2230 2234 2238 2242 2246 2250 a a 2215 2219 2203 2227 2231 2235 2239 2243 2247 2251 N es Ea ra Ea 2265 saved fi
54. Online 00011 Hardware test 00024 CH1 self loopback test 0003 CH2 self loopback test 270Fu 9999 Module initialization mode Switch 2 status Default operation setting battery error detection setting logging monitor setting 1 Default operation setting Account setting b0 Module status 0 Operates according to the account setting area 1 Operates according to the default account setting 2 Default operation setting System setting IP filter setting b1 0 Operates according to the system setting IP filter setting Section 4 7 1 Operates according to the default system setting IP filter setting 3 Battery error detection setting b2 0 Detects battery error 1 Not detect battery error 4 Logging monitor setting b4 0 Displays the last update time of the file 0 Not display the last update time of the file ee Switch 3 status Response monitoring time setting 15 to 255 second Response monitoring time x When switch setting 3 is not set or any 3 0 to 14 has been set the response monitoring time is 15 second 5106 Useprohibted Systemae SS yY Oo SiC Module status Battery status Section area 0 Normal 1 Battery error occurrence 4 10 3 Bt09 Use prohibited systemarea CT Module status Section 3 1 10 to 11 pase Number of standard ROM erasure 12to27 Use prohibited System area Network 28 to 29 ay Status Router external IP address area Connection error code 0 Normal Other than 0 Error code Nu
55. Per Per minute can be specified only when Per hour is specified Second 0 to 59 x1 Regardless of this setting logging is performed when the dedicated instruction LOG is executed f Condition for Stop As the condition for stopping logging select any of the following 1 Do not stop e Logging is not stopped e Select this item for continuous logging 2 Stop at the specified time after event occurrence Logging is stopped when the specified time second has elapsed after the specified event occurred Stop at the specified time after event occurrence CPU event setting No 01 7 after 60 seconds 0 to 32767 Tag event setting Jo nd ter 0 nds 0 to 32767 Time Interval event setting after 0 sconds 0 to 32767 t 3 1 2 1 Select any of the event types 2 Select the event setting number 3 Set the logging stop time Specify 0 when stopping logging at event occurrence POINT When above 2 is set as the condition for stop and the event set to the condition for stop occurs twice before the specified time passes the second event is valid as the condition for stop Example When the condition for stop is set to 10 seconds after event occurrence Event Occurrence Occurrence 7 Logging 10 seconds 3 Stop at the specified time Logging is stopped at the specified time Hour 0 to 23 Per Minute 0 to 59 Per Per minute can be specified only when Per hour is spec
56. RANGENO Failure to do so will result in an error Refer to Section 7 5 3 Sample screen for graphic display part The following provides an example of creating the sample screen that displays the graphic display parts The sample screen SMPPICEN HTM is stored in the USER directory of the Web server module a Tag setting refer to Section 6 3 3 1 Set the component setting No 1 of the tag setting No 1 Tag setting Home gt Administrative mer gt Tag setting gt Component setting iio S S Add Edit Delete Back Tag name iem No Component MT Me C 1 deviceA 01 Control CPU Single word DO Decimal 0 decimal places None 2 Click on the Update button on the Setting update screen to update the setting b Creation of HTML file File name SMPPICEN HTM The HTML source is indicated below 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q lt DOCTYPE html PUBLIC W3C DTD HTML 4 01 Transitional EN gt lt html gt lt head gt lt meta http equiv Content Type content text html charset iso 8859 1 gt lt meta http equiv Pragma content no cache gt lt title gt Sample screen for graphic display part lt title gt lt head gt lt body gt lt h1 gt Sample screen for graphic display part lt h1 gt lt Communication part gt lt applet code WSCom class codebase PARTS width 0 height 0 gt lt param name INTERVAL value 1 gt lt applet gt lt Graphic display p
57. Same as the tag sampling interval when high speed logging has been set TAG x When INTERVAL is selected at 1 to 86400 unit seconds TIMING INTERVAL Interval Wh keine en other than the above is Blank selected at TIMING e Hour Minute Second format Hour 00 to 23 PER Minute 00 to 59 PER When TIME is selected at PER can be specified for TIMING Minute only when PER is H specified for Hour Second 00 to 59 Example 9 00 00 17 00 00 PER PER 00 When other than the above is selected at TIMING STARTUP EJ start Condition for After CPU event occurrence Start TAGEVENT i TIMEEVENT Start at the specified time TIME Must be set x Need not be set Invalid gt gt o To ae F o ls 2 2 315 gt a o 3 16 a gt D ar B o 2 5 S S 2 Cc BIS ke O o O JO ee S lg Oo 3 s FE O O 4 gt App 37 App 37 APPENDIX MELSEC Q ee Setting Item Description Set value requirement Event setting STARTEVTNO No 6 The specified STARTAFTER occurrence STARTTIME Specified time Condition for 1a STOP a i Event setting IES STOPEVTNO 7 App 38 time after event When CPUEVENT is selected at START When TAGEVENT is selected at START 1 to 64 1 to 256 When TIMEEVENT is selected 1 to 16 at START When other than the above is Blank selected at START When CPUEVENT is selected at START When TAGEVENT is sele
58. Section 6 9 2 1 App 12 App 12 APPENDIX MELSEC Q From the previous page ee Reference Added Changed Function Description f Section e The following applet parts were added 1 Write button parts 2 Device monitor parts 3 Tag data monitor parts 4 Logging monitor parts 5 Event history monitor parts 6 PLC diagnostics monitor part 7 Self diagnostics monitor parts e The following SSI parts were added 1 SSI read parts e The following CGI parts were added Chapter 7 1 CGI write parts Appendix 5 2 2 CGI read parts 3 Disconnect parts e The following user parts were changed 1 Some parameters of the user parts were changed to the items User screen creation function that must be set Error occurs if not set Refer to Appendix 5 2 for the parameters that must be set 2 In the data block parts a change was made to enable write to a tag component parameters WRITE LANGUAGE were added 3 APLCOLOR was added to the parameters of the graphic display parts e The following dedicated instructions were added 1 FTPGET instruction 2 WFWRITE instruction 3 WFREAD instruction 4 WFDEL instruction Dedicated instruction 3 Chapter 8 e The following dedicated instructions were changed 1 A change was made to enable a user data file to be specified as an attached file in the WMSEND instruction 2 Achange was made to enable a user data file to be specified as a transferred file in the FTPPUT instruction
59. Sip eh Home Seach Favoler Meda Haor Wei Pw Edi house Standard screen HTML Administrative menu L Monitor screen Connecting throngs LAN ete router Dialup to the network modem ADSL DaPaJapan oly Obtain an IP address automaticaly G tse the fing 1P address atten TT Sutmet ack 52550 ooo0o00000c gt Monitor screen display 11 Creation of user screens using parts supplied as standard Creating HTML files using the standard supplied user parts applet SSI CGI parts allows the user to make original Web screens Applet parts SSI CGI parts Mica plover 1 ERT Fe E vev Took Heb Te Es rates Tod Hep So os 9h 4 9 a B m a oa a alea ao adp amp 8 ek So aeh Hoe Seach Fowles Waw Foi Pm Em coe Back Sup Riah Hone sesch Fev Mad acy Wai Pot Edt Deca Ass B Hip 2168 1 ure SMPHSGEN IT SJ Pee juna Ados E Wo 182 168 29 ISERVanovecen hm Eco thks al zl Sample screen for historical graph display part Sample screen for CGI write part 7 Tag iio f j Seel Componeat N el moe l ve Vee foo Wis if i ti fala a z ela C iD 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 12 Compatibility with a variety of connection methods a A connection method that meets a user s network environment can be selected Web server modul External device Client ADSL Analog modem LAN i SS Fo
60. Start Procedure Administrative menu gt E mail setting Setting Screen E mail setting Home gt Administrative mem gt E mail setting Save ce Send e mail account setting SMTP server name 1 to 64 characters E mail address From i 1 to 64 characters User name OERE 1 to 32 characters Password m 0 to 16 characters Confirm password a E mail address To setting No 1 HEE se oe Sod 0 to 64 characters Option setting I POP before SMTP POP server name 1 to 64 characters OOOOOeOeOe Setting Item Send e mail account setting E mail address TO setting Option setting Save Cancel 6 69 Sets the account of the Web server module required to send e mail e Sets the destination e mail address Sets the option related to e mail Saves the setting The settings are updated when the Update button on the Setting update screen is clicked the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset Discards the changed setting and returns to the previous setting 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC O 1 Send e mail account setting The account of the Web server module required to send e mail is set Set the account specified by the Internet service provider and system administrator Refer to Appendix 4 2 for the characters applicable to the send e mail account setting a SMTP server name 1 Set the SMTP server
61. String in the component setting device values may be replaced 2 Tag sampled at high speed a Be sure to create a user set system area in the program memory of the control CPU Refer to REMARKS in Section 6 3 3 b Sampling High speed can be registered to only one tag Multiple setting is not allowed c The access target CPU of the tag component selected to execute Sampling High speed is the access target CPU setting No 1 control CPU Fixed d Total points of 96 or less can be set for the devices of the tag component selected to execute Sampling High speed Precautions for logging function 1 Logging setting Refer to Section 6 4 4 a When the logging file storage has been set to the standard ROM pay attention to the free user area of the standard ROM or the number of writes to standard ROM b E mail transmission File transfer requires several to several tens of seconds depending on the network line and data size Depending on the logging setting the target file may be deleted before e mail transmission or file transfer is completed Examine the settings such as the timing file capacity and number of saved files to increase the time to file deletion 2 High speed logging a Be sure to create a user set system area in the program memory of the control CPU Refer to REMARKS in Section 6 3 3 b A delay may occur in the logging interval depending on the scan time of the control CPU and the t
62. TEHNIKON BELARUS INTEHSIS SRL MOLDOVA CONSYS RUSSIA Oktjabrskaya 16 5 Ap 704 Cuza Voda 36 1 81 Promyshlennaya St 42 BY 220030 Minsk MD 2061 Chisinau RU 198099 St Petersburg Phone 375 0 17 22 75 704 Phone 373 0 2 562 263 Phone 7 812 325 36 53 Fax 375 0 17 22 76 669 Fax 373 0 2 562 263 Fax 7 812 147 20 55 e mail tehnikon belsonet net e mail intehsis mdl net e mail consys consys spb ru Getronics b v BELGIUM Getronics b v NETHERLANDS Electrotechnical RUSSIA Control Systems Pontbeeklaan 43 B 1731 Asse Zellik Phone 32 0 2 467 17 51 Fax 32 0 2 467 17 45 e mail infoautomation getronics com Control Systems Donauweg 2 B NL 1043 AJ Amsterdam Phone 31 0 20 587 67 00 Fax 31 0 20 587 68 39 e mail info gia getronics com Systems Siberia Partizanskaya St 27 Office 306 RU 121355 Moscow Phone 7 095 416 4321 Fax 7 095 416 4321 e mail info eltechsystems ru TELECON CO BULGARIA Beijer Electronics AS NORWAY 4 A Ljapchev Blvd Teglverksveien 1 BG 1756 Sofia N 3002 Drammen Phone 359 0 2 97 44 05 8 Phone 47 0 32 24 30 00 Fax 359 0 2 97 4406 1 Fax 47 0 32 84 85 77 e mail e mail info beijer no INEA CR d o o CROATIA MPL Technology Sp zo o POLAND Drvinje 63 ul Sliczna 36 HR 10000 Zagreb Phone 385 0 1 36 67 140 Fax 385 0 1 36 67 140 e mail PL 31 444 Krakow Phone 48 0 12 632 28 85 Fax 48 0 12 632 47
63. Troubleshooting on e mail Check point bet At e Check the address notification setting The address notification setting is not correct Refer to Section 6 9 2 e Check whether e mail can be sent to the specified destination with a commercial e 7 e Contact the Internet service provider mail software e Contact the administrator of the FTP m e Check whether a file can be transferred to Address is not notified 2 cigs server the specified destination with commercial FTP client software When Notify the global IP address obtained e Use a UPnP enabled router from the router was selected in the address e Select Notify the following HTTP port notification setting the router does not number in the address notification setting support UPnP Refer to Section 6 9 2 say ft e Check the e mail setting period colon The e mail setting is not correct i etc Refer to Section 6 6 3 Check whether e mail can be sent to the specified destination with commercial e mail e Contact the Internet service provider software e e Check the e mail account assigned by the The e mail account is not correct E Internet service provider E mail is not sent The PLC CPU has been powered on right e Power on the PLC a few minutes after after powered off power off The mail server of the Internet service e In the option setting of the e mail setting provider requires POP authentication at e mark POP before
64. When the number of saved files exceeds the above set value As the operation to be performed when the number of saved files exceeds the set value select either of the following 1 Overwrite 2 Stop k E mail delivery Send a saved file to the following e mail address Set whether the saved file will be sent by e mail or not 1 Not checked E mail is not sent 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 Checked e When the file is saved it is attached to e mail and sent e Refer to Section 6 6 5 for the e mail transmission by the logging function 3 E mail addresses 1 to 3 Select the e mail addresses set in the E mail address TO setting of the E mail setting Refer to Section 6 6 3 for the E mail setting l File transfer Transfer a saved file to the following FTP server Set whether the saved file will be transferred to the FTP server or not 1 Not checked The file is not transferred 2 Checked e When the file is saved it is transferred to the FTP server e Refer to Section 6 7 6 for the file transfer by the logging function 3 Transfer target Select the FTP server name set in the FTP setting Refer to Section 6 7 3 for the FTP setting 3 Setting method and precautions for high speed logging a Setting method for high speed logging When performing high speed logging make the following settings in the logging setting Only one high speed logging can be registered For other than the following the user can set as desired 1 T
65. b Format consisting of label column item row and setting area Description Item row Cannot be set by the user Cannot be edited rem raene SRVPUNG_ NERVAL BEFORE LOGENE mor i unenfexecure fo no Jenee race tunes nonsese fo feee maos tunec_ wor pes ee vo aco ionen eoe e o O eej __ File format Setting area Set by the user For the setting items of each file refer to Appendix 6 3 and later Label column Set by the user For the labels of each file refer to Appendix 6 3 and later CPU CSV TAG CSV COMPONENT CSV LOGGING CSV FTP CSV CPUEVT CSV TAGEVT CSV TIMEEVT CSV ACCOUNT CSV Applicable file App 17 App 17 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 2 Precautions for editing a setting information file a Space All spaces are regarded as part of the item An error will occur if a space is used in an inapplicable setting item b Upper case lower case The setting information files are case sensitive c Special characters 1 Line feed When entering a Line feed type n Example An error occurred in Line A nTake corrective action 2 sign When entering type 3 Comma When entering a enclose an entire item with double quotation marks When EXCEL is used however it is not necessary since double quotation marks are automatically added when a file is saved in CSV format Example As the temperature was abnormal the machine stopped App 1
66. eeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeas 3 46 3 8 17 Access target CPU setting status area Address 4000 to 4071 0 eeeeeecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeetetieeeeeeaes 3 47 3 8 18 E mail transmission status area Address 5000 to 5984 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeaeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeas 3 48 3 8 19 FTP server status area Address 6000 to 6001 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeenaeeeatens 3 51 3 8 20 FTP client status PUT area Address 6002 to 6553 ooo eee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeas 3 51 3 8 21 FTP client status GET area Address 8002 to 8553 ececceceeseeeeeeeceeeeaeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeaeseeeeeeaeeaes 3 54 3 8 22 Module initialization request area Address 9999 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeenaeeees 3 56 3 9 Time Data Hamelin ea a nes aed eA ev ed e TAE E AAEE EA aed ARTERE SERET 3 57 3 10 Files Handled by Web Server Module ccccecceseeeeceeeeceeseeseceeceeeeaecaeceeseaeeaesaeseeseaesaesaeseeeeaeeaseeeeaeeaes 3 58 4 4 Handling Precautlons iictesiei a a EE EA EE EET AEE NEEN E EEEE 4 1 4 2 Set up and Procedure before Operation ccccecceseseceececeeseeececeeeeaecaeceeeeeeeaesaeseeseaesaesaeseeseaneeseeeeateats 4 2 43 Part Names and Functions ceecceeceeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeesaeesaeeeaeeeaeesaeesaeesaeesaeesaeesaeesaeesaeeseeseeaeeteeeeeseees 4 6 4A Gable COmmectiony Arrian ananiona iania aieia aanre atanena iaaa aai ed re An adeb enddi Naa
67. example MITSUBISHI Enter an e mail address To of the personal computer E mail address To settin We 3 e No 1 example pcmailaddress ne j 4 Address notification setting Refer to Section 6 9 2 IP address setting Item Set value e Select Notify the IP address set in the System setting screen Notification IP address e Select Notify the HTTP port number set in the System setting screen E mail notification setting Set value e Select Notify an IP address at network connection IP address notification e Select E mail address TO No 1 as the destination of IP address notification 5 Account setting Refer to Section 4 6 5 Item Set value Enter the following setting for the accounting setting No 1 Delete the default account Account setting No 1 e User name administrator001 e Password example QU71WS96ADMIN e Confirm password example QU71WS96ADMIN After changing the setting make sure to click on the Save button The settings are updated when the Update button on the Setting update screen is clicked the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset x Note that the settings of the System setting and Dial up setting are not updated even if the Update button is clicked 5 CONNECTING WEB SERVER MODULE TO NETWORK MELSEC Q 3 Network connection of Web server module a Since Automatic connection to network at start up
68. is selected in the tag setting the access target CPU setting No 1 control CPU must be set Fixed c Data type 1 Select the data type of the collected data device data Single word Set for data of single word Double word Set for data of double word Real number Set for data of real number Bit Set for bit data Enabled for bit device String Set for character string 2 For a word device Single word Double word Real number or String can be selected For a bit device Bit can be selected 3 When Bit has been selected data in 1 bit unit 0 1 is handled 4 When String has been selected set the number of characters 1 to 32 bytes When the data type is String the device value is as described below e When the device value is not ASCII code it is replaced by a period 2Ep e When the device value is a comma 2C it is replaced by a period 2Ex To differentiate it from the delimiter of the CSV file e When the device value is a termination character NULL code 00k the subsequent character data are ignored The character string is regarded as completed d Device 1 Specify the device type and actual device number 2 Device specification by qualification indexing digit specification bit specification to word device is not available 3 Refer to Appendix 2 for the accessible devices 4 When Sampling Execute at high speed is selected in the tag setting set the device wit
69. is set in the automatic network connection setting at start up on the System setting screen the Web server module automatically makes network connection at start up b Using GX Developer confirm the following connection status of the Web server module to the network with input signals of the buffer memory and the PLC CPU 1 Module READY X0 is on 2 Network connection status X4 is on 3 IP address and subnet mask storage areas in the network connection status area e IP address buffer memory 55 to 56 e Subnet mask buffer memory 57 to 58 c When connection to the network fails connection error X19 turns on and an error code is stored into the connection error code area buffer memory 30 Take corrective measures according to the troubleshooting In the network connection status area buffer memory 28 to 69 the current network connection status of the Web server module can be confirmed 4 Receiving the account notification by the personal computer By the address notification setting the URL of the Web server module is sent by e mail to the destination e mail address Example In the case of Microsoft Corporation s Outlook Express 5 5 QJ71WS96 URL Information OF x File Edit View Tools Message Help amp GQ ve S amp S xX a v G Reply Reply All Forward Print Delete Previous Next Addresses From QU71WS96 Date Tuesday November 12 2002 10 27 AM To ni ee ed i Subject 0J71W596 URL Inform
70. is turned from OFF to ON c A telephone call is made to the Web server module side modem when the CALL function is set Refer to Section 4 6 4 d E mail transmission file transfer is performed 3 The Web server module is disconnected from the network Disconnection trigger when a Network disconnection request Y7 is turned from OFF to ON b No access is made from the external device within the preset time when the disconnection function is set Refer to Section 4 6 4 c E mail transmission file transfer is completed when connected for transmission transfer above 2 d d Line disconnection is requested from the user screen disconnection by line disconnection part e Disconnection is made by the Internet service provider f The modem is powered off or the cable is disconnected Network connection status 1 Is on while the Web server module is processing for connection to the network during dialing or authentication Turns on in response to any of the connection triggers shown in 2 of X4 2 Upon completion of the network connection processing Network connection status X4 or Connection error X19 turns on a When the network connection is normally completed Network connection status X4 turns on b When the network connection is failed Connection error X19 turns on anda corresponding error code is stored into the connection error code area buffer Network memory 30 connection Connection tri
71. it is required to set the DNS server in DNS server setting of the system setting Refer to Section 4 6 3 b Login user name Set the login user name for the FTP server c Login password Confirm login password 1 Set the login password for the FTP server 2 To confirm the login password set the login password again to Confirm login password d Directory path Set the FTP server directory path on the FTP server Use as the separation character of the directory After changing the settings make sure to click on the Save button The settings are updated when the Update button on the Setting update screen is clicked the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 6 7 4 File transfer by PLC CPU PUT This section explains the FTPPUT instruction used to transfer a file with a sequence program H ZP FTPPUT FTP server Transfer destination No Tag Logging No File name 4 File BIN CSV Tag Logging data user data file A Web server module 1 Head I O number of Web server module 2 Control data transfer destination No tag logging No etc Set the transfer destination FTP server set in the FTP setting the tag logging data of the file to be transferred etc 3 Completed bit 4 File Tag data logging data user data file 1 File transfer by sequence program The following explains th
72. jV 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 gt IN IK IX IE lt IC IA loa JD IO Jv Ion Pare IN amp x jZ lt ce O ZI ZI r Jaz le J Z IO Im 1m Ju lo lw gt TIMID IO W I gt lo jo IN Jo OIA JH N o 4 Phone number x 0 to 9 P and pcan be used The hatched area is available iN 10 Pah RIN amp x jz I lt ce 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F App 9 App 9 APPENDIX App 10 MELSEC Q 5 Characters a CPU name Tag name Component name and Comment display parts All characters can be used However double quotation is not available Also comma is not available with the exception of the comment display parts E mail main text in the event setting system name All characters can be used However double quotation is not available App 10 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 5 Improvement of Web Server Module Functions This section explains the functions added to changed from the old version by the improvement of the Web server module functions and provides the precautions for replacing the old version with the new version Appendix 5 1 Functions added to changed from old version This section explains the functions added to changed from the old version 1 Module with first 5 digits of serial No 05112 or later
73. o 6002 Number of times when the FTPPUT instruction was normally completed ol 6003 Number of times when the FTPPUT instruction was abnormally completed o Number of normally completed FTP transfers PUT ol Number of abnormally completed FTP transfers PUT o Number of writes for error log ol i o Error log 1 o Error log 2 Error log 3 FTP client Status PUT Error th Error log 5 Error log 6 Error log 7 Error log 8 Error log 9 Error log 10 Error log 11 Error log 12 Error log 13 Error log 14 Error log 15 Same as Error log 1 Error log 16 Same as Error log 1 ite poi FTP client status Section 16203 to 6208 pyr cae Transfer log 1 3820 2 Refer to 7 for assignment of each area 6554 to 8001 Use prohibited ystem area m 3 fe Q fo O me D O Q 5 2 2 Error code Transfer destination Transferred file name g 2 a Same as Error log 1 Same as Error log 1 Section ame as Error log 1 3 8 20 Same as Error log 1 ame as Error log 1 ame as Error log 1 ame as Error log 1 Same as Error log 1 Same as Error log 1 Same as Error log 1 i gt E ae Same as Error log 1 Same as Error log 1 Same as Error log 1 a a n wan A k gja S15 go v 5 5 a a Q 12 T o Q Q o o c co Z jz pax Py Gm D o lo 2 2 215 Fag kes 2 Transfer destination Continued on the next page 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q From the precedin
74. the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset Discards the changed setting and returns to the previous setting a IP address notification Notify an IP address at network connection 1 Address notification is made to the selected destination e mail address when connecting to network 2 The destination e mail address set in the e mail setting can be selected b IP address notification Include IP address to e mail of WMSEND instruction When this setting is valid e mail is sent by the WMSEND instruction with URL data attached at the end of the main text c IP address notification Include an IP address to e mail of event monitor function When this setting is valid e mail is sent with URL data attached at the end of the main text when an event occurs After changing the settings make sure to click on the Save button The settings are updated when the Update button on the Setting update screen is clicked the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset 6 102 6 102 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Execution of address notification a When the external device is notified of the IP address when network connection is made 1 Address notification e mail is sent to the selected destination e mail address when network connection is made 2 The send e mail form is as indicated below http IP address HTTP port number 3 E mail is received by the personal computer Exampl
75. the global IP address obtained from the router in the address notification setting this area stores the global IP address assigned to the router 2 Connection error code Address 30 a The error code output at the time of network connection processing Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code b The connection error code is stored in binary when Connection error X19 turns on c The connection error code is cleared when 1 The network is connected normally by making reconnection Network connection status X4 turns on or 2 The PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset 3 Number of successful connection Address 31 number of failed connection Address 32 This area stores the cumulative numbers of successful failed network connection 4 Number of connection tries by request signal Y5 Address 33 This area stores the cumulative number of attempted connection to the network by Network connection request Y5 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 5 Number of connection tries by automatic connection Address 34 This area stores the cumulative number of attempted automatic connection from the Web server module to the network Refer to X4 of Section 3 6 2 1 for the trigger of connection to the network 6 Number of reconnection tries Address 35 a This area stores the number of reconnection to the network b When connection is cut off unintentionally due to cable disconnection in the ne
76. width 0 height 0 gt lt param name INTERVAL value 1 gt lt applet gt lt Comment display part gt lt applet code WSCmt class codebase PARTS width 500 height 50 gt lt param name TAGNO value 1 gt lt param name ELMNO value 1 gt lt param name FONTSIZE value 30 gt lt param name DEFCMT value Ready se lt param name DEFCOLOR value Black gt lt param name BKCOLOR value White gt lt param name RANGENO value 1 gt lt param name LOW 1 value 32768 gt lt param name HIGH1 value 0 gt lt param name CMT1 value A trouble occurs in device A gt lt param name COLOR1 _ value Red gt lt applet gt lt body gt lt html gt c Storage of HTML file Transfer the HTML file to the Web server module by performing FTP operation File storage destination ROM WWW USER SMPCMTEN HTM 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q d Sample screen display Example When accessing the Web server module by one to one connection Sample screen address http 192 168 3 3 USER SMPCMTEN HTM Sample screen for comment display part Microsoft Internet Explorer _ jo x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help oe 2 p3 B w Back Stop Refresh Home Search Favorites History Mail Print Edit Discuss Address http 192 168 3 3 user SMPCMTEN HTM v Go Links E Sample screen for comment display part A trouble occurs in device A g EJ Done
77. 0 Constant data System User module register Others register Direct Ji 3 Haar Poe Shee ee A es ae A a ee E eee en on eee Instruction Execution code condition Command WFDEL ZWFDEL Command f _ ZP WFDEL Setting data Setting data Description Setting side 1 Data type Head I O signal of the module Un 00 to FE The first 2 digits when the I O signal is represented in User BIN16bit 3 digits Device ote ceranancanweancen ow Head number of the bit device that will be turned on for one scan when the instruction is normally completed i or System Bit D 1 also turns on when the instruction is abnormally completed The local devices and the file registers for individual programs do not work as the devices for the setting data Control data Setting Setting side Device Item Setting data range x1 Specify the execution type i ae i yP 00001 S 0 Execution type 0000H Binary file 0100 User H 01001 CSV format file f The status of the instruction completion is stored Completion tai 0 Normal completion System RERS Other than 0 Abnormal completion Error code 2 Specify a file name with a character string f Specify a name 8 characters period extension 3 characters File name ae ie String User within the specified number of characters When omitting an extension also omit a period 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q
78. 0 Not repeat __1 Repeat Repeat 1 Sets the operation to be performed when the component 0 PLAYMODEL1 4 value exceeds the setting range during audio file play Stop op 0 Stop 1 Continue 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q Setting Rangel Initial Value LOW2 HIGH2 AUDIO2 REPEAT2 Set the setting range 2 The setting is the same as the setting range 1 PLAYMODE2 LOW3 HIGHS AUDIO3 REPEATS Set the setting range 3 The setting is the same as the setting range 1 PLAYMODE3 LOW4 HIGH4 AUDIO4 REPEAT4 Set the setting range 4 The setting is the same as the setting range 1 PLAYMODE4 LOW5 HIGHS AUDIO5 REPEATS Set the setting range 5 The setting is the same as the setting range 1 PLAYMODE5 PLAYCOLOR Set the color of the icon indicating the play status String Red LNCOLOR Set the border color of the icon 1 Be sure to set the values of LOW HIGH and AUDIO for the same quantity specified in RANGENO Otherwise an error occurs Refer to Section 7 5 x2 When using Microsoft VM AU files only can be set If a WAV file is specified an audio file format error OBO8h occurs 3 When using Microsoft VM setting is not allowed It operates as REPEAT 1 Repeat Even if setting has been made it will be ignored 4 In the REPEAT and PLAYMODE settings select any of the following operations When an event occurs 1 Playing the audio file once while the component value is within th
79. 0B24h Incorrect packet error corrupted Section 6 11 Display i e Check the power supply of the modem cable and line status e Check the set value for the Communication parts Jhe set vaie tor thie parameter parameter INTERVAL of the 0B25h INTERVAL of the communication tic Display parameter error Bride wrono ordutotikarand communication part p 9 ge Refer to Section 7 2 1 Continued on the next page 9 41 9 41 Display 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC Q From the previous page Error code 100Eh 20091 System error e System error 1 Continue to 20FFh 4000h ia Errors detected by the access target CPU Cointe 4FFFh Refer to the user s manual of the access target CPU module System error e System error 1 Display on a i e Check the CPU in the access f 9008h Send buffer full No send buffer is available path Display System error e System error 1 Continue The issued processing code e Check the CPU in the access 9E20h Processing code error Continue cannot be processed by the target path a e Check the device type input in The device type specified for the 9E81h Device type error the device monitor or component Continue access target station is Invalid i setting The device number specified for e Check the device number input in 9E82h Device number error the access target station is outside the device monitor or component Continue the range setting points
80. 1 Tag setting Refer to 1 kolo Edit screen Tag setting Refer to 2 2 Component setting Refer to 3 Edit screen Component setting Refer to 3 1 Tag setting Administrative menu Tag setting gt Select Tag setting No and click on Edit gt Edit screen Tag setting 2 Component setting Administrative menu gt Tag setting gt Select Tag setting No and click on Component setting gt Component setting Click on Add Select component setting No and click on Edit gt Edit screen Component setting 1 Tag setting Make tag setting Up to 64 tags can be set Setting screen ra Tag setting Home gt Administrative mem gt Tag setting Edit Delete Component setting ee Se Update vetore bogging Deta verte C I 10 seconds Not execute Disable C 2 prodwtionmngmt 10 seconds Not execute Disable wy Setting Item Update before logging Displays Whether tag collecting is executed or not before logging 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 Edit screen Tag setting Set the tag name tag collecting interval Sampling etc Setting screen ues Tag setting Home gt Administrative mer gt Tag setting gt Edit screen Taz setting Save Back Load Tag name Jine within 16 characters Sampling Not execute G Execute Interval 10___ seconds 1 to 32767 C Execute a
81. 12 Logging MONON paS socane aaa Aaaa AAEE AEA RAA ENAA DEARA SEREAS ENAERE ANEA 7 43 7 2 13 Event history Monitor parts 0 cece eeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeseeesaeesaeesaeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseaseeeseeeeeeetaaes 7 44 7 2 14 PLC diagnostics monitor Parts ccccceccececceceeeeceeceeeesecaeeeseaesaecaeseeesaesaesaeseeeeaesaesaeseeesaeseseeseaeeates 7 45 7 2 15 Self diagnosticS monitor parts ceeeeeecee cee ceeeeeeeeceeeeaeeaecaeeeeeeaesaecaeseeeeaesaeseeseaesaesaeseetaeeeeseeseeeaees 7 46 PO SOP ANS seats tee eal elas epee he Neely see Saclay sens alana ware yeaa elas cata ett elvis cect ie 7 47 TO lOO lMOAC PANS ATEA AEEA cecal des ch cecal A cea ase cee aee en dace eh vee otek ae ese oh ts oe Ee at 7 47 TA CGI Parts ue ie Benn ate WAR ate he Eaves Ae ened WA ie avin ee eo ae 7 49 FAN CGI write parts a5 vice Vinheta th naaa inate de edhe de meine dels ada ey ran ete 7 49 fA2 CGl read pantsSiicvivecd naa a a Shatin a ee aad 7 54 LASS DISCOMMOGT DANS E EE E A AE dyes peed idepens N A E tees eect tieeci eats 7 57 AD Usor Part EOS a Sy cracd avenede a a aveteie dshevi dustits aa a E todas 7 59 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION 8 1 to 8 36 S Dedicated Instruction List n ini taint ohn ant nl dal chins ani hniannihniatnielunieas 8 1 8 2 WMSEND INSIrUCtig nisi avec raras aieeaa aaaea aa aan aa naa Ea aa a aa aaa eaaa a e anaia aae OaE 8 2 8 3 FTPPUT IMStrUction seien aA AAEE E AERA EA N 8 7 8 4 FIPGET INStrUCtON presunan a a T aai
82. 13 55 54 2003 11 01 13 56 04 2003 11 01 13 56 14 2003 11 01 13 56 24 2003 11 01 13 56 34 2003 11 01 13 56 44 After event occurrence logging 2003 11 01 13 56 54 stops in specified time Data before and after event occurrence are always located in the latest positions occurrence Since the tag data collected by the Web server module are logged it is required to make tag setting in advance when using the logging function 6 FUNCTIONS 6 4 2 Logging file MELSEC Q This section explains logging files 1 Where logging files are saved a b 2 a Logging files are stored into standard ROM or Compact Flash card When a logging file is created the directory of the file name set at File name in the logging setting is created under the following directory and the logging file is stored there 1 When standard ROM is specified ROM WWW LOGGING 2 When Compact Flash card is specified CF LOGGING Example When the logging file of file name LOGNAME is stored into standard ROM Standard ROM ROM WWW LOGGING LOGNAME LOGNAME CSV 00000001 CSV t 00000002 CSV t 00000003 CSV t 00000004 CSV t 00000005 CSV 00000006 CSV Currently logging file Saved file oldest to Saved file newest File capacity and processing performed when file becomes full File capacity The capacity of a logging f
83. 16 9 16 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC Q From the previous page Error code System setting file read error Dial up setting file read 0302h error PPP negotiation error DHCP parameter acquisition error 0305h 0306h 0307h 0308h System error Modem initialization error Addition command error Failed to read the system setting file The setting file is destroyed Failed to read the dial up setting file The setting file is destroyed Failed in authentication at the time of dial up connection Failed to obtain the network parameter data from the DHCP server when Obtain an IP address automatically is set for LAN connection Failed to issue AT command for modem initialization at the time of dial up connection Failed to issue the Additional command AT commana at the time of dial up connection e After initialization of the module is complete Refer to Section 4 13 make the system setting refer to Section 4 6 3 After initialization of the module is complete refer to Section 4 13 make the dial up setting Refer to Section 4 6 4 e Check the dial up setting whether the user name and password are correct Refer to Section 4 6 4 e Check the power supply of the modem cable and line status Continue e Check the system setting whether Obtain an IP address automatically has been selected Refer to Section 4 6 3 e Check the status of connection with the DHCP s
84. 18296 2002 11 14 20 04 04 123466 21466 2002 11 14 20 04 05 iors igre aos 28078 25075 2002 11 14 20 04 06 is77e azze 3776 25776 27776 2002 11 14 20 04 07 22521 30521 2002 11 14 20 04 08 26251 31285 2002 11 14 20 04 03 23404 28132 2002 11 14 20 04 10 32336 anao 1 ca 25140 2002 11 14 20 04 11 res 27986 eS 21986 2002 11 14 20 04 12 26304 18304 2002 11 14 20 04 13 23667 15667 2002 11 14 20 04 14 Ee a aesa 14918 12918 2002 11 14 20 04 15 EE 9347 2002 11 14 20 04 16 ans aas amns ss 6195 2002 11 14 20 04 17 11038 303 7038 5039 3038 2002 11 14 20 04 18 7886 ndy E E zi Done Intenet 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 2 9 Write button parts The specified value is written to the specified tag component Only the user having the tag component write authority is allowed to write a value to a tag component with the write button part Refer to Section 4 6 5 for the user authority 1 Specifications Description Filename ssi name WSWhribitn class Component type that can Single word Double word Real number Bit String be specified Written items TAGNO ELMNO Set value DATA Standard button TYPE 0 7 Click niic BTNCOLOR CAPTION FONTSIZE mm oO oO oO o User specified button TYPE 1 O0000000000000 Click Display form oo00001 C gt 1 t PICTUREUP PICTUREDOWN lt looooo00 Write confirmation dialog box CONFIRM LANGUAGE
85. 2 SINGLE D1008 COMPONENT64 1 Pressure 1 DOUBLE D5000 COMPONENT64 2 Opening 2 REAL W100 File format Item row Cannot be set by the user Label column Setting area Set by the user Tag setting Component setting Home gt Administrative mem gt Tag setting gt Edit screen Component setting Tag name 02 production mnomt E Component setting No jor z Component name productA within 16 characters CPU name 01 Control CPU Data type Single word gt Number of characters Ma to 32 Device ps0 Display form Decima E Number of decimal places 0 co to 6 ay 7 Operator None e Set the items of component setting No 1 to 64 COMPONENT64 64 i Denotes component setting No Denotes tag setting No COMPONENT1 1 to COMPONENT64 64 The labels as many as the number set at COMPNUM of TAG CSV must be set The setting of more labels is ignored Example When 10 is set at COMPNUM of label TAG5 in TAG CSV For COMPONENT CSV labels COMPONENT5 1 to COMPONENT5 10 must be set App 33 App 33 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 3 Setting items Setting Item Description Set value requirement a E CoMPNAME componentrame S name Within 16 characters Le 1 to 64 fixed to 1 for high EJ cPUNO CPU name Access target CPU setting No a ae iil sampling tag Singleword o word SINGLE DOUBLE Ses REAL BIT number of characters EB pevce When BIT or STRING is
86. 268 269 to 276 277 to 284 293 to 300 309 to 316 317 to 324 325 to 332 341 to 348 349 to 356 365 to 372 373 to 380 Use prohibited 382 to 383 JIP filter 1 Use prohibited monitor cycle 1000 to 1003 1004 to 1007 1008 to 1011 1012 1013 to 1075 2012 2013 2014 to 2015 2016 to 2267 2268 to 2999 Use prohibited Tag status Logging status Login history 8 Login history 9 Login history 10 From Number of login times Login history write pointer User number Source IP address MELSEC Q the preceding page ot Reference Initial value i section Login history 1 Login type 1 Web login 2 FTP login Date and Time 1 Same as Login history 1 Same as Login histo Same as Login history 1 Same as Login history 1 Login history 7 Same as Login history 1 Same as Login history 1 Same as Login history 1 Same as Login history 1 1 Same as Login history 1 Login history 11 Same as Login histo Same as Login history 1 Same as Login history 1 Same as Login history 1 Same as Login history 1 System area Number of times when IP packet is blocked System area Current cycle Unit Second Maximum cycle Unit Second System area Tag setting data Tag collection data Tag collection error data Tag collection 1 error code The composition of each area is the same as that of the tag error code Refer to 2 for assignment of eac
87. 3 3 indexen htm x Go Links i Menu a CENE a Location daso amp MITSUBISHI IMIS EG Select a setting screen gai Q Shows the location of A z Administrative menu TOP page Home gt Administrative mem the currently displayed screen ution 1 Make sure to click on the Save button to ensure that your settings on each screen are saved Switching to another screen or prematurely ending the browser without clicking on the Save button will result in any setting changes to be lost Caution 2 Click on the Update button from the Setting update screen to ensure the QJ71WS96 operates using the most upto date settings In the event that the Update button is not clicked the most upto date settings can still be updated when the PLC CPU is reset or the power is toggled from OFF to ON Settings made in System setting and Dial up setting are not updated by clicking the Update button They are updated only when the PLC CPU is reset or powered on a F Setting of IP addresses and other system settings TY System setting Must be always set ean Setting for dial up connection Gy Dial up setting Set it when connecting to Intemet Service Provider ISP via a modem Setting for Access Target CPU pig Access target CPU setting Set it when accessing CPU including multiple CPU connected in PLC to PLC networks L e MELSECNET H Click on the button to move to the Administrative menu top page or the
88. 3 80 gt QJ71WS96 lt a gt lt body gt lt html gt t Set at Link character string HTTP port number IP address 6 106 6 106 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 6 10 Data Management Function This section explains the data management function designed to operate the Compact Flash card set in the Compact Flash card slot of the Web server module 6 10 1 Backup Restore function 1 About backup restore function Using the Compact Flash card the setting information logging data user HTML and event history stored in the standard ROM can be backed up restored a File transfer from standard ROM to Compact Flash card backup On the data management screen back up the setting information logging data user HTML and event history stored in the standard ROM by transferring them to the Compact Flash card b File transfer from Compact Flash card to standard ROM restore On the data management screen restore the setting information logging data user HTML and event history backed up in the Compact Flash card by transferring them to the standard ROM PLC Web server module PLC CPU Standard ROM Compact Flash card Backup TTT ELL lt Setting information Setting information Logging data Restore Logging data User HTML SELLE LLL User HTML Event history Event history 2 Backup restore target directory The following table shows the
89. 3 USER SMPBLKEN HTM 44 Sample screen for data block part Microsoft Internet Explorer oT x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help El Gh te amp Back Stop Refresh Home Search Favorites Media History Mail Print Edit Discus Address je http 192 168 3 3 user smpblken htm i S z Go Links Sample screen for data block part device C 16045 E Done D Intemet 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 2 3 Level display parts The percentage of the specified component value to the whole maximum and minimum range is displayed 1 Specifications Description Beem Slee class Display shape shape Rectangular displa Component type that can Single word Double word Real number be specified An error occurs when Bit or String is specified Displayed items TAGNO ELMNO Maximum limit 1 Current value display box DSPDATA UPPER e aes ol BKCOLOR DSPCOLOR 100 lt DSPBKCOLOR DIRECTION 2 Alarm line lt __ gt DATWIDTH 2 Alarm line DSPEMER Minimum limit LOWER lt Maximum j APLCOLOR alarm value UPPEREMER DSPCOLOR 1 Current value display box lt Minimum alarm value LOWEREMER Normal level Level too high Level too low DSPCOLOR Max alarm value Min alarm value is exceeded is exceeded F LEVCOLOR UPPERCOLOR LOWERCOLOR Display form Vertical display horizontal display can be se
90. 5 Access target CPU Section Sets the connection path to the access target CPU setting 4 6 7 TAG Foes Tag setting Makes setting for tag data collection Section 6 3 Y Logging setting Sets the logging intervals file capacity etc of logging data Section 6 4 p FTP setting Makes the setting to log in to the FTP server Section 6 7 od E mail setting Sets the send server e mail address etc Section 6 6 gt u Event setting Sets the event monitor conditions Section 6 5 Address notification Makes the setting to notify the external device of the Web server module s a f Section 6 9 setting URL Section I Account setting Sets the account for making access to the Web server module 465 IP fil y Sets the IP address at which access to the Web server module is Section ia iter setting enabled disabled 4 6 6 er D Backs up restores and formats the compact flash card and performs Section ala Managemen CSV export import 6 10 sie f Conducts connection tests such as e mail transmission file transfer and Section ay Setting test PING tests 6 11 Esg Access log Displays the access log to the Web server module Section 6 8 e Setti d Updates the setting made in the Administrative menu on the Web server Section eiting upaate module operation 4 6 2 3 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 6 I O Signals for PLC CPU 3 6 1 I O signals list The following is the I O signal list of the Web server module for the PLC CPU The assignm
91. 7 8632 36 00 26 e mail STC Drive Technique RUSSIA ul Bajkalskaja 239 Office 2 23 RU 664075 Irkutsk Phone 7 3952 24 38 16 Fax 7 3952 23 02 98 e mail privod irk ru STC Drive Technique Poslannikov Per 9 str 1 RU 107005 Moscow Phone 7 095 790 72 10 Fax 7 095 790 72 12 e mail info privod ru RUSSIA RUSSIA RUSSIA RUSSIA RUSSIA AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE CBI Ltd Private Bag 2016 ZA 1600 Isando Phone 27 0 11 928 2000 Fax 27 0 11 392 2354 e mail cbi cbi co za SOUTH AFRICA Aa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION Gothaer Strasse 8 D 40880 Ratingen Phone 49 2102 486 0 Hotline 49 1805 000 765 Fax 49 2102 486 7170 www mitsubishi automation de megfa mail meg mee com www mitsubishi automation com
92. 8379 to 8390 to 8401 to 8412 to file name 8318 8329 8340 8351 8362 8373 8384 8395 8406 8417 Dat 8319 to 8330 to 8341 to 8352 to 8363 to 8374 to 8385 to 8396 to 8407 to 8418 to as 8322 8333 8344 8355 8366 8377 8388 8399 8410 8421 SS T SaaS Nae ee aa a a eS SS aa Sie 8422 8433 8444 8455 8466 8477 8488 8499 8510 8521 Transferred 8423 to 8434 to 8445 to 8456 to 8467 to 8478 to 8489 to 8500 to 8511 to 8522 to file name 8428 8439 8450 8461 8472 8483 8494 8505 8516 8527 Dat 8429 to 8440 to 8451 to 8462 to 8473 to 8484 to 8495 to 8506 to 8517 to 8528 to als 8432 8443 8454 8465 8476 8487 8498 8509 8520 8531 SS iS a aS source Transferred 8533 to 8544 to file name 8538 8549 Date 8539 to 8550 to 8542 8553 3 29 3 29 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q x9 The following shows the assignment of the tag event monitor 1 to 256 error code area address 10192 to 10447 Name Tag Event Monitor 1 to 256 Error Code Area E E ea ew Sa eae aa ee SSS saa SSE SE aS aS Sa ES Ses SSS Lakes e se SE See ea Ee aE a SS Tarela la Ts le T Ta TSN ee A SE 22 ak az az a ea SSS le 2S ae Se ee Se eS SN w SaaS se ele leleyii aka w SSS sae aS ae Se ahaa Ee aE a es SSS ak SE aa SE 2 2a Ee Sea w a ea a Ts loloy l S TT o l w C lwl el w Se 2S w l o l e l w l a C a a Seas sea Sa See E C Tal e eN e l a l S l e l e a S a SSS Tal aE SES 2 e e Se ae Sea A pt ge tata tte tata tg 150 C ta se
93. Application Section 1 By describing an applet part in HTML it is downloaded and displayed in the described position The display is updated automatically Applet parts pay p y e Section 7 2 Several seconds to several ten seconds are required to display it first 2 Used to create a graphical screen 3 Java VM is required in the client side Web browser 1 1 By embedding a part in HTML it is converted into a tag component name tag component value according to the parameters when it is read by the Web browser Section 7 3 The display is not updated automatically SSI Server Side Include parts 2 Used to create a character based screen 1 By linking a part to a button arranged in HTML a tag component value is written read when the button is clicked CGI Common Gateway i Section 7 4 The display is not updated automatically Interface parts 2 Used to create a character based screen 1 For how to download Java VM refer to Section 3 1 Remarks 2 3 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 1 2 Precautions for user screen creation function This section provides precautions for the user screen creation function Refer to Section 7 1 3 for precautions for the user screen for cellular phone display 1 Precautions for describing HTML file on user screen a Be sure to set the user part parameters that must be set Failure to do so will result in an error b The file name
94. CPU x2 Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION Function anana a Oo Oo A TS FS UL MELSEC Q A user data file binary CSV is transferred from the specified source FTP server to the Web server module Executing the same instruction during execution of the instruction is not allowed The second instruction will not be processed In this case even if an error is detected the completion device D 0 and completion status indication flag D 1 do not turn on An error may occur if the same file is concurrently accessed by FTPGET and any other instruction WMSEND FTPPUT WFWRITE WFREAD WFDEL Before executing instructions provide interlocks between the dedicated instructions that will access the same file This instruction is not available for interrupt programs The file is transferred to the CF USER directory of the Compact Flash card If a file of the same file name already exists the old file is overwritten by the new file The execution and normal abnormal completion statuses of the FTPGET instruction can be confirmed using the completion device D 0 and completion status indication flag D 1 a Completion device D 0 This device turns on in the END processing of the scan for which the FTPGET instruction is completed and turns off in the next END processing b Completion status indication flag D 1 This device turns on off according to the complet
95. Continued on the next page 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC Q From the previous page Error code Backing up Restoring Multiple CPU setting error At start up or setting update the following was detected e File access was attempted during backup in Data management At other than start up or setting update the following was detected in the logging function or dedicated instruction e File access was attempted during backup in Data management At other than start up or setting update the following was detected in the dedicated instruction or user parts e File access was attempted during backup in Data management At start up or setting update the following was detected e File access was attempted during restore in Data management At other than start up or setting update the following was detected in the logging function or dedicated instruction e File access was attempted during restore in Data management At other than start up or setting update the following was detected in the dedicated instruction or user parts e File access was attempted during restore in Data management Invalid setting was made in Multiple CPU specification of the access target CPU setting e Execute after confirming completion of backup in Status of Data management Refer to Section 6 10 4 Continue Display e Execute after confirming f re Continue completion
96. D 1 turns on and an error code is stored into the completion status word device set in S1 1 Sequence program Scan ied Scan eee Scan Scan seein a a ES al WMSEND instruction I Instruction execution Completion device Completiondevice 1 When abnormally completed Pi SENS A E E oN A Se Spc See eel kip WALA AE Nyt ote mre NLS tee ete ER The name of the file attached to the e mail sent by the WMSEND instruction is as follows For tag data TAGU CSV O indicates tag setting No For logging data current file File name set in the logging setting For logging data saved file Saved file name When sending the logging data or user data file do not delete the target file until its transmission is completed A transmission error will occur if the target data i e the data to be sent is deleted before completion of the transmission When deleting execute it after the completion device D 0 has turned on When the dedicated instruction is abnormally completed the abnormal completion signal D 1 turns on and a corresponding error code is stored into the completion status S1 1 Check the error status according to the error code and take corrective action Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q Program example Program with which the Web server module mounted in the position of I O numbers X Y00 to X Y1F send
97. D me E E ER gt oe yiee E 15 a H ia R gt 04 E WA gt 05 E 18 N m TJ 07 la 20 idi 2 Label Sc to Set the items of tag event setting No 1 to 256 EE GEVTOSS Enter only the necessary labels Labels that are not set need not be entered 3 Setting items Setting Item Description Set value requirement E tacno Tag name Tag setting No 1 1 to 64 ome cr COMPONENTNO _ Component name Component setting No 2 3 1 to 64 i O po EQUAL NEQUAL N GREATER CONDITION Condition EGREATER LESS ELESS O Must be set x Need not be set Invalid App 50 App 50 APPENDIX MELSEC Q i Setting Item Description Set value requirement Numerical value integer TRIGGER Trigger value g real number When NEQUAL or EQUAL is Blan Restoration selected at CONDITION RESTORATION value When other than the above is Numerical value integer ii at CONDITION Pes number om Send an e mail Mak EMAIL when an event Disconnect from When YES is the network selected at mail WEE NESE a When NO is selected at EMAIL_ is selected at EMAIL E mail main text When When YES is selected at EMAIL is selected at EMAIL to characters Etor When NO is selected at EMAIL _ Blank es a When YES is NOE e selectedat Tagdata IAG APPEND Attached file EMAIL eer nial Data LOGGING When When NO is selected at EMAIL_ is selected at EMAIL When TAG is selected at APPEND TS APPTAG Tag
98. Different network communication route Network NET IKH CC Link IER Networ wh IPA gt sairo Mo IEE gt Siation Ne i 2 Label DXN babe scription S CPU Set the items of access target CPU setting No 1 Must be set Only CPUNAME can be set The settings of the other setting items are invalid Set the items of access target CPU setting No 2 to 64 CPU2 to CPU64 Enter only the necessary labels Labels that are not set need not be entered App 27 App 27 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 3 Setting items Settin ee ee meee orl uirement cusam O CPUNAME lcpUnme o name Within 16 characters 16 characters o aceU moss aora IEF SERIES PLC series OCEM AMO QCPUA QNACPU ACPU No specification When acpu cPunon 2 O isselectedat fcpuno2 2 MULTI CPU Multiple CPU ISERIES cPUNo3s 3 specification cPUNo4 4 When other than the above is Blank x selected at SERIES Bi No specification 1 ther station OTHER STATION aoe bs Other station Single network E specification Other station Different network DIFFERENT I IDO jl Is When SINGLE NET 10 H NET10 Aa GG Link CCLINK NETI Network Eien ETHERNET When NO is selected at OER ang Bew STATION When SINGLE or DIFFERENT is selected at OTHER STATION and NET10 1 to 239 NETNO1 Network No or ETHERNET is selected at NET1 When other than the above is Blank z selected When SINGLE or DIFFERENT is sele
99. Discuss Address http 192 168 3 3 user smprdsen htm v Go Links aj Sample screen for SSI read part product amount is 100 now Tag component value of Tag setting No 1 Tag component Component name of Tag setting No 1 setting No 1 Component setting No 1 i E Done Intemet 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 4 CGI Parts This section explains the CGI parts A CGI parts list is given below Reference Part Name Function i Section When the button is clicked the specified value is written to the tag component CGI write parts i Section 7 4 1 value CGI read parts When the button is clicked the tag component value is read Section 7 4 2 When the button is clicked the Web server module is disconnected from the Disconnect parts eee Section 7 4 3 network 7 4 1 CGI write parts When the button is clicked the specified value is written to the tag component value Only the user having the tag component write authority is allowed to write a value to a tag component with the CGI write part Refer to Section 4 6 5 for the user authority 1 Specifications Description lt FORM METHOD POST ACTION WSWriteC cgi gt lt INPUT TYPE xxxxx NAME TAGNO VALUE yyyy gt lt INPUT TYPE xxxxx NAME ELMNO VALUE yyyy gt lt INPUT TYPE xxxxx NAME DATA VALUE yyyy gt lt INPUT TYPE xxxxx NAME CONFIRM VALUES yyyy gt lt INPUT TYPE xxxxx NAME RESULT VALUEs yyyy gt
100. ELMNO gt lt br gt lt hr gt lt input type submit value Read gt lt input type hidden name MODE value 1 gt lt input type hidden name RESULT value 0 gt lt input type hidden name LANGUAGE value 1 gt lt input type hidden name REFERER value user smprdcen htm gt lt form gt lt body gt lt html gt c Storage of HTML file Transfer the HTML file to the Web server module by performing FTP operation File storage destination ROM WWW USER Smprdcen htm d Sample screen display Display the sample screen Example When accessing the Web server module by one to one connection Sample screen address http 1 92 168 3 3 USER Smprdcen htm Result screen Blea A http 192 168 3 3 WSReadC cai Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ea a a Ey ia amp B amp i fe A Back Stop Refresh Home Search Favorites Media History Back Stop Refresh Home Search Favorites Meda History Address http 192 168 3 3 user smprdcen htm v Go Links Address http 27192 168 3 3 WSReadC cgi z Go Links E 100 ti Sample screen for CGI read part aein Tag No e LLL Component No 1 Bacay TUTE LELEELLLEELO LLE E Done Intenet Z Done Intemet 7 56 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 4 3 Disconnect parts When the button
101. EMC and Low Voltage DireCtives ccscccceeceeseeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaesaeseeseaeeaesaeseeeeaeeaaes A 20 How to Use This Manual eceecceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeesaeesaeesaeesaeeeaeeeaeesaeesaeesaeesaeeseeeseeeseeseeseseeeseaeseeeteneeeaes A 21 Generic Terms and Abbreviations ccceccecceseeeeceeeeeeeseeeeceeceeeaeeaecaeeeeeaecaesaeseeeeaesaesaeseessaesaeseeseesaeseeseaeeaees A 22 Meanings and Definitions Of Terms ccecseecceeeceeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeaeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaneeaeeeeesseeeeeeeeneeaees A 23 PACKING LIS a a a soeascunahesideg abeaacen ebeusiug abe saeus besides areaaten ensue de seeen Setiteg deeds dente eee ee A 24 1 OVERVIEW 1 1to 1 11 1 1 Features 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1to2 8 2elsADpliGCable SVStSIM Seis td eee ee aN ee A ee ht ie ee he ie ah os ee he Ls hg 2 1 2 2 Network COnmOctiOns ys ozs a Ta beech e aa aaa eaa pee ghanebened pet eedh area aed a e Aaaa aaia aia 2 2 2 3 System Configuration for Initial Setting Maintenance and Inspection ccccecceseeeeeeeteeteeeeeeeteeaes 2 4 2 4 Connection Device iisipin aa aae a a eo aaa aaa aiba Saada Aaa Naa ieai 2 5 2 5 Checking Function Version ssiri aaant a apaina iaa a aanneem a airada aaa a taaan da a aa a saantia a Tiis 2 8 3 1 Performance Specifications sieniin anaandaa aaa iaee aiaia aeiaai 3 1 3 2 RS 232 Connector Specifications ccecceccecsecceceeseeececeeeeeeeaecaeeeeesaecaesaeseaeeeseeseaesae
102. FTP port FTPTYPE number When SPECIFY is selected at 1024 to 65535 FTPTYPE Register the above port No FTPNAT to the router s NAT Do not mark Oooo Mark System name setting Execute twork DIAGNOSIS ESYA diagnoses ping INTERVAL Sending interval DESTINATION Destination Followin EDEVICE oe external device Automatic network STARTUP connection setting at start up App 23 a o When YES is selected at 10 to 3600 unit seconds DIAGNOSIS When NO is selected at Blank DIAGNOSIS When YES is Gateway Gateway selected at Following Following DIAGNOSIS external device When NO is selected at Blank DIAGNOSIS When YES is selected at DIAGNOSIS and FOLLOWING 1 to 64 characters is selected at DESTINATION When other than the above is selected No connection to network at start up Automatic connection to network at start up Must be set x Need not be set Invalid App 23 APPENDIX Appendix 6 4 DIALUP CSV Dial up setting 1 File format MELSEC Q DIALUP CSV File contents Dial up setting Refer to Section 4 6 4 ME CMETHOD gt USERNAME EF PASSworD WZ Nuveen E gt NumBER2 Rae NUMBER3 EA DMETHOD EE RETRY Me CHANGEPOINT el SPEED ike TIMEOUT A gt PAUSE MODEM USERNAME PASSWORD 012 3456 7890 012 3456 7891 TONE 3 YES 9600 90 3 em gt ATCOMMAND IES gt CALL NO IES gt DISCONNECT NO gt DTIME E Label c
103. IP filter function identifies the IP address of the access source to restrict access to the Web server module The IP filter function applies to all access of the Web FTP etc to the Web server module In IP filter setting make the setting necessary to use the IP filter function Start Procedure Administrative menu IP filter setting Setting Screen raat z a IP filter setting HOME gt Administrative meru gt IP filter setting Save Access setting Pass the IP packet that has not been set in Filter setting Block the IP packet that has not been set in Filter setting Filter setting a CT No l tis Block Pass No 2 j ia Block C Pass No3 fl Block Pass saa O Bock C Pass No 5 E e i Block Pass No 6 E eei Block Pass No ass Block Pass No pooo Block Pass Setting Item Access setting Sets the action to be taken when the received IP packet does not meet the filter setting conditions Sets the IP addresses of the access sources and the actions of the IP filter Saves the settings The settings are updated when the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset Cancels the new settings and returns to the old settings 1 Access setting 2 Set the action pass block to be taken when the received IP packet does not meet all the filter setting conditions Filter setting Set the IP addresse
104. Refer to Section 6 5 3 E gt TIMeEevT E Label column Cannot be set by the user L Setting area Set by the user EVENT CSV Event setting Common setting File format pp Event setting Home gt Administrative mem gt Event se Common setting CPU event setting Tag event setting TimefInterval event setting Common setting Save Cancel JE gt vo of CPU event historical data O Lines 0 to 1000 Paearnieoy No of tag event historical data 0 Lines 0 to 1000 Clear history BEEBE No of timesinterval event historical data 0 Lines 0 to 1000 Gleer history 2 Label Setting Label Description Set value requirement EEC CPUEVT No of CPU event historical data 0 to 1000 unit lines home E TAGEvt No of tag event historical data 0 to 1000 unit lines Soa E TiMEEVT No of time interval event historical data 0 to 1000 unit lines i Must be set x Need not be set Invalid App 45 App 45 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 6 12 CPUEVT CSV Event setting CPU event setting 1 File format File name CPUEVT CSV File contents Event setting CPU event setting Refer to Section 6 5 3 EJ y CPUEVT5 a YES EMAIL DISCONNECT YES NO YES YES NO y APPEND Error occurred on Line A nPerform recovery Error occurred on Line B nPerform recovery Assembly line stopped LOGGING File format E7 y y y y y y APPTAG APPLOGGING EM
105. SES Se ae Lae ae Sea eas C Cale Seas Ate Ae a SS as Soe SSS Se SE Sea Se Se ae Se aes C C e l ae ae l we a ea Ses eas SS Ca eN e l e N se se ae aes l A C CaN N A N a e 2 l A l A C ia Sse SES d Sse ae l Si Bea es C a 22a Ps 2 g 2 lla a l a e eee C tTa eN a N a l e l wae aE aE wae C Taea N e T 245 l 246 l e l e e l 2502 CO Tala T ae eS 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 8 Buffer memory details This section explains the buffer memory details POINT 1 The value stored into the buffer memory is cleared when the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset Normally this area need not be read Read as necessary when maintenance is performed 2 When a value of 65536 or more is stored in the area consisting of one word a count is stopped at FFFFH 65535 3 If a value of more than two words is stored in the area consisting of two words a count is stopped at FFFFFFFFH 4294967295 3 8 1 Module status area Address 0 to 11 The Web server module LED ON OFF status intelligent function module switch setting status battery status etc can be confirmed Refer to corresponding sections in Section 3 7 3 8 2 Network connection status area Address 28 to 69 The connection status of the Web server module to the network can be confirmed 1 Router external IP address Address 28 to 29 When the Web server module connects to the Internet after selection of Notify
106. Select the IP address of which the external device will be notified Notify the IP address set in the System setting screen Select this item when notifying the external device of the IP address set in the system setting Refer to Section 4 6 3 Notify the global IP Select this item when connecting through a router address obtained from the The WAN side Internet side IP address is obtained from the router router 71 and notified Notify the following IP a E na Select this item when notifying the specified IP address address x1 When the router is incompatible with UPnP the Web server module cannot obtain the global IP address from the router Obtain the static global IP address from the Internet service provider and specify the obtained IP address at Use the following IP address 2 When Notify the following IP address has been selected set the IP address in decimal number Example 192 168 3 3 3 Set the IP address after consulting the network administrator person in change of network planning IP address management etc b Specify the notification HTTP port number 1 Select the HTTP port number of which the external device will be notified It is recommended to use the default value 80 of the HTTP port number Notify the HTTP port f Select this item when using the HTTP port number set in the system number set in the setting System setting screen 2 When Notify the following HTTP
107. Since an error occurred e mail transmission failed indicates the error code 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 Time Interval event The time interval event history is monitored The contents of ROM WWW EVENT TIMWATCH CSV are displayed Event type Time Interval event x Load a b c Date Event number E mail sending 2002711713 18 05 47 1 200271 1 13 18 06 47 j1 2002711 13 18 07 47 1 2002711713 18 08 47 1 2002 11 13 18 09 47 1 None 1 1 1 None None None None 2002 11 13 18 10 47 2002 11 13 18 11 47 2002 11 13 18 12 47 None None None a Date The date and time when the event occurred is displayed Example 2002 08 05 08 58 17 b Event number 1 The event number of the event occurrence is displayed 2 The event number is the No set in CPU event setting of the event setting c E mail sending The e mail transmission status due to event occurrence is displayed Noe sd E mail transmission has not set for the event that occurred E mail is being sent according to the setting for the event that occurred Complete E mail was sent according to the setting for the event that occurred ERR h a Since an error occurred e mail transmission failed indicates the error code Sending 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 6 2 5 PLC diagnostics monitor Setting Purpose This monitoring function is used t
108. Switch 1 Mode setting Switch 2 Default operation setting Battery error detection setting Logging monitor setting Switch 3 lower byte Response monitoring time setting Switch 4 to 5 For system use Do not set 1 Mode setting Switch 1 Select the operation mode for Web server module Tests the ROM RAM switch settings Refer to Section 4 8 3 Tests the self diagnostics for CH1 Refer to Section 4 8 1 Tests the self diagnostics for CH2 Refer to Section 4 8 2 00011 Hardware test 00024 CH1 Self loopback test 0003H CH2 Self loopback test 9999 Ke eee ait Initializes the module to default setting Module initialization mode 270FH Refer to Section 4 13 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 2 Default operation setting Battery error detection setting Logging monitor setting switch 2 b15 to b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b0 Speccify 0 x Switch2 Logging monitor setting Default operation setting Account setting 0 Operates according to the account setting 1 Operates according to the default setting User name QJ71WS96 Password MITSUBISHI Access authority 0 Not display the latest file update time 1 Displays the latest file update time Battery error detection setting 0 Detects battery error Device write Tag component write 1 Not detect battery error Administrator Initial screen Standard screen top page Default operation setting
109. T aaa i 6 86 6 7 3 FTP SUING stirs heel ae eet i eel eel ellen adele dele i 6 89 6 74 File transfer by PLC GRU PUT feces sccesccs les aniisi anaiai raaa ta aona aaa man aana Taia an da aiaa inneas 6 91 6 7 5 File transfer by PLC CPU GET ceceeceeeeeeseeeeeeceeeeeeeaeceeeeeeeaesaeseeseeeeaecaeseeseaesaesaeseeeeaesaneeseaeeaees 6 94 6 7 6 File transfer by logging tunctionN sareartean E A E I A 6 96 6 0 AGGESS LOO FUNCION anaa aiae A ARET RA RAE ERE TAATA EERE OIA RARR IRAR TER AATA 6 97 6 9 Address Notification Function ecceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeecaeseaeeeateeaeeeaeenas 6 99 6 9 1 Address notification function ssssesseeseesessesessrssnssrstnstnstnstustnntnntuntnntuntnatuntnntnntutnntnanntatntnannnenana 6 99 6 9 2 Address notification setings sneri aaan aa A A AA 6 100 6 10 Data Management FUNCOM rs penrai a kne eTe ANENE EAEE E ERARE EEEE TA EE 6 107 6 10 1 Backup Restore fUnCtion eccceccceccceccceceeeeececeeeeeneeenseeseeceesseesseeseesseeseeeseesneeseeesneeeeesneeseeetaes 6 107 6 10 2 Format function s 2 sna auians tinge aerate ae aged a nea at ad 6 109 6 10 3 CSV export import FUNCTION 2 2 cece eeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaecaeseeseaeeaesaeseeseaesaesaeseeseaesaesaeseeesaseeseaeeaeeas 6 110 6 10 4 Data management nairean ai i a nh iva avn iv 6 115 6 11 Diagnostics FUNCION iarr o e AE EAE E eee eee 6 120 611 1 Diagnostics TUNCHON naaa AA AA AE EA 6 120
110. TIY EAN es Lh 4 Tr 2 C aan When LED cover is opened 7 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q PJ ame escription 10BASE T Used for connecting Web server module to 10BASE T 100BASE TX ven server module recognizes 10BASE T 100BASE TX according to the external 3 RS 232 interface connector Used for connecting Web server module to RS 232 a EJECT button Used for ejecting a Compact Flash card from Web server module TM Compact Flash card 5 pe Slot for mounting a Compact Flash card onto Web server module mounting slot Compact Flash card TM i Cover for Compact Flash card mounting slot mounting slot cover 6 Battery Battery for file protection Connector pin for battery lead Battery connector pin The battery lead is not connected to the connector at shipment to prevent battery consumption 1 LED display HI 1 OBA SE TX l LED status Normally operating RUN It may take some time until RUN LED turns ON after the module is started Watch dog timer error occurrence Hardware error OFF Normal operation on sd Module continue error Flickering Module stop error CH2 side data receiving or data sending CH2 SD RD Data not transmitted 100Mbps 100M 10Mbps CH1 side data receiving or data s
111. Tag data Logging Data 2 When attaching tag data select the tag data set in the tag setting Refer to Section 6 3 3 for the tag setting 3 When attaching logging data select the logging data set in the logging setting Refer to Section 6 4 4 for the logging setting Send to 1 to 16 1 Select the destination of e mail 2 Select the e mail address set in the E mail address TO setting of the E mail setting Refer to Section 6 6 3 for the E mail setting 3 In the selection field for Send to the setting No and e mail address of the E mail address TO setting are displayed After changing the settings make sure to click on the Save button The settings are updated when the Update button on the Setting update screen is clicked the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 3 Tag event setting Make setting to monitor the tag data compared with the trigger value Up to 256 tag event settings are available Tag event monitoring is executed every time the target tag is collected by the Web server module Tag event setting screen p Event setting Home gt Administrative mem gt Event setting gt Tag event setting Common setting CPU event setting Tag event setting Timefnterval event setting Tag event setting Edit Delete Page switching 1 64 65 128 129 192 193 256 ino Teena Component ane Condition Traps vae Resotonvae Esl
112. Temporary Files Screen Delete Temporary Files Delete the following temporary files V Downloaded Applets V Downloaded Applications IV Other Files Cancel To shorten the page display time the Web browser saves one displayed pages in a special folder temporary Internet files 6 FUNCTIONS e f MELSEC Q Security level setting In the security level setting of the Web browser set the security level of the Internet and Intranet zones to Default Level Example In the case of Microsoft Windows 98 operating system or Microsoft Corporation s Internet Explorer 5 5 Tools gt Internet Options gt lt Security gt tab General Security Content Connections Programs Advanced Select a Web content zone to specify its security settings m Internet Local intranet Trusted sites Restricted sites Internet This zone contains all Web sites you haven t placed in other zones Security level for this zone Move the slider to set the security level for this zone Medium low Same as Medium without prompts Most content will be run without prompts Unsigned ActiveX controls will not be downloaded T Appropriate for sites on your local network intranet Custom Level Default Level i Cancel Apply Detailed setting In the advanced settings of the Web browser set to Restore Defaults Example In the case of Microsoft Windows 98 operating system or Micro
113. The old data before overwrite are lost Web server module Web browser Standard screen Administrative menu Standard ROM Writing set data oo00000000000000000C gt Overwriting set data Change the setting and lt QIDDOO00000000000000 lick on the Save button On setting screens of the Administrative menu make sure to click on the Save button after changing the settings Switching to another screen or ending the Web browser before clicking on the Save button deletes the new settings 3 Updating the Administrative menu settings a Update on the Setting update screen 1 Click on the Update button on the Setting update screen to update the settings on the Web server module pe Click on the Update button to ensure the QJ71WS96 operates using the most upto date settings Be sure to confirm the safety before execution Caution Settings in System setting and Dial up setting and IP filter setting are not updated To update these settings reset PLC CPU Data collection such as logging may be paused during update Internet 2 Inthe following message box confirm that the settings have been updated The settings have been updated The QJ7TWS96 has started operation using the new settings 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q b Update by powering off the Web server module and on or resetting the CPU module Powering the PLC o
114. Transferred file name This area stores the transferred file name in ASCII code Date and Time This area stores the date and time of file transfer in BCD code b15 to b8 b7 to bO Error code Source Transferred file name Fat ear 0069 fat 2 a Year 00h to 99n last 2 digits Day 01H to 31n Minute 00x to 59x Day of the week 0x to 6x Date and time 4 Transfer log storage area for normal completion The transfer log of normally completed file transfer can be confirmed Number of writes for transfer log Address 8200 a 1 2 This area stores the cumulative number of registrations to the transfer log area This area stores the transfer log when the Web server module transferred GET a file from the FTP server normally Transfer log write pointer Address 8201 1 This area stores the transfer log No where the latest transfer log is registered 0 No transfer No transfer log registered 1 or more Transfer log No where the latest transfer log is registered x The pointer value of 16 indicates that the latest transfer log is registered in the transfer log 16 area If 33 or more errors occur excess transfer logs are registered to the areas starting from the transmission log 1 area again 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q c Transfer log 1 to 32 Address 8202 to 8553 This area stores the transfer logs of normally completed file transfer The transfer
115. View Favorites Tools Help el a f Back Stop Refresh Home Search Favorites Media History Address http 192 168 3 3WSWiteC cai x Go Links Although 107 has been specified E 108 will be written to device A according to the component setting Is it OK to proceed Caution PC control may be affected Be sure to confirm the safety before execution E cancel E Done Intemet x2 When a real number is written to the target component a rounding error may be produced 3 Sample screen for CGI write part The following provides an example of creating the sample screen that displays the CGI write parts The sample screen Smpwtcen htm is stored in the USER directory of the Web server module a Tag setting refer to Section 6 3 3 1 Set Data write in the tag setting No 1 to Enable 2 Set the component setting No 1 of the tag setting No 1 Home gt Administrative mem gt Tag setting gt Component setting Add Edit Delete Back ee ver ino component mine OPU mane Dante Dea Disa fm Opn C 1 device A 01 Control CPU Single word DO Decimal 0 decimal places None 3 Click on the Update button on the Setting update screen to update the setting b Creation of HTML file File name Smpwtcen htm The HTML source is indicated below lt DOCTYPE html PUBLIC W3C DTD HTML 4 01 Transitional EN gt lt html gt lt head gt lt meta http equiv Conte
116. Web server module or external device PiNGtetreutt PING test result 2002 11 12 14 18 58 2002 11 13 18 41 27 External device name 192 168 3 1 External device name 192 168 3 1 IP address 192 168 3 1 IP address 192 168 3 1 Normally completed No response from the extemal device is identified When normally completed When abnormally completed 6 126 6 126 6 FUNCTIONS 6 11 3 PING test by IBM PC AT compatible personal computer MELSEC Q The following provides an example that the PING command is issued from the external device IBM PC AT compatible personal computer to the Web server module connected to the same Ethernet LAN to confirm the existence of the Web server module Example of confirming the Web server module by the external device at the same network address 1 2 6 127 Specifying method PING IP address Example of PING test execution IP address of Web server module 192 168 3 3 When the test has abnormally completed confirm the following and conduct the PING test again e Network setting of the Web server module or external device e Connection status of the Web server module or external device Example In the case of Microsoft Windows 98 operating system 3 MS DOS Prompt oO an a E SJE A Microsoft R gt Windows 98 lt C Copyright Microsoft Corp 1981 1999 IC WINDOWS gt cd C gt ping 192 168 3 3 Pinging 192 168 3 3 with 32 bytes of data Reply from
117. When a composite system of MELSECNET 10 and Ethernet is used specify a single network since Ethernet is regarded as MELSECNET 10 3 Other station Coexistence network Select this setting when making access to the other station CPU via two types of networks Two different types of networks are used in system communications eg transmission from MELSECNET 10 to CC Link or Q series C24 to MELSECNET 10 e Network communication route Different network communication route Set the network type network No start I O address and station No to be accessed The setting items change depending on the set network POINT 1 For access to the other station CPU the routing parameters must also be set in addition to this setting For the routing parameters refer to the manual of the network module 2 After changing the settings make sure to click on the Save button The settings are updated when the Update button on the Setting update screen is clicked the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset 3 Precautions for access target CPU setting a Web server module requires preparatory time to communicate with the access target CPU when the Update button on the Setting update screen is clicked the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset Therefore it may take several minutes before the communication will be available if many access target CPUs are set Confirm that the setting update has b
118. When using Microsoft VM an audio part of the same file name is specified in multiple audio parts An audio file of incompatible format was specified e Replace it with a normal audio file Display e Specify an audio file of a different file name e To specify an audio file of the Display same file name use Java VM of Sun Microsystems Inc Same file specification error Delore tie Monor Eroan was e Wait until the monitor screen is displayed completely the displayed letel screen update was performed SE OVCO NESON The form of the data being s Check the setting or the 0B10h String format error e component specified in the user Display so romme maa e e Confirm the device No in the tag setting and execute again 0B11h aoe a Nosis Outside Ue conien the number of devicd Display points of the access target CPU and execute again e Confirm the device name in the A tag setting and execute again 0B12h ae device er in devicewas e Confirm the device supported by Display the access target CPU and execute again e Check the network connection status by the PING test Refer to Section 6 11 0B23h Communication error An error occurred during e Check the power supply of the Display communication modem cable and line status e Reexamine the Java VM installation status Refer to Section 3 1 Remarks 3 c e Check the network connection The communication packet is Status by the PING test Refer to
119. a tag event turns on 0 Event not occurred 1 Event occurred b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bd b4 b3 b2 bi bO Address 3101 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 21 c A tag event occurs when the monitoring condition set in Tag event setting of the event setting is satisfied 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 Tag event monitor error data Address 3102 a This area stores the tag event monitor error data b The bit corresponding to the tag event setting No of a tag event monitor error turns on 0 No tag event monitor error occurred 1 Tag event monitor error occurred b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bd b4 b3 b2 bi bO Address 3102 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 c The following is observed when a tag event monitor error occurs Example When an error occurs in tag event monitor of the tag event setting No 16 e Tag event monitor error X14 turns on e Tag event monitor error data area address 3102 bit 15 of the buffer memory turns on e The error code is stored into the tag event monitor 16 error code area address 3118 of the buffer memory 4 Tag event monitor 1 to 16 error code Address 3103 to 3118 The error code that indicates the error status is stored into the corresponding tag event setting No area Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code 3 8 16 Time Interval monitor status area Address 3200 to 3217 The status related to the time event monitor
120. address To setting No does not exist in EMAIL CSV App 48 App 48 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 6 13 TAGEVT CSV Event setting Tag event setting 1 File format Event setting Tag event setting Refer to Section 6 5 3 6 ITEM TAGNO COMPONENTNO CONDITION TRIGGER RESTORATION TAGEVT1 a EQUAL i TAGEVT2 a NEQUAL 1 TAGEVT129 5 EGREATER 100 90 TAGEVT256 64 a LESS 1 0E 10 1 1E 10 y BODY APPEND Assembly process A started NONE Assembly process A ended Pressure level is abnormal nOperation stopped nCheck LOGGING File format K E 7 7 7 APPTAG APPLOGGING ENA EMAIL2 EMAIL3 EMAIL4 EMAILS YES YES NO ks no ps no NO NO Label column Cannot be set by the user Setting area Set by the user App 49 App 49 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Event setting Tag event setting pp Event setting Home gt Administrative mem gt Event setting gt Tag event setting gt Edit screen Co setting CPU event setting Tag event setting Time Interval event setting Tag event setting edit Save Back Load Tag event setting No foot Tag name 02 production mngmt Component name 01 productA f Single we Condition E Trigger value 100 Restoration value 0 Mail setting for event occurrence Pr Send an e mail when an event occurs nnect from the network after sending mail File format Continued
121. also stored into the tag event status area 2 buffer memory 3100 to 3118 Refer to Section 3 8 15 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC Q How to turn off the ERR LED is explained below 1 Turning on Error clear request Y10 during module continue error occurrence while the ERR LED is on turns off the ERR LED and turns off X10 to X19 and X1C 7 During module stop error occurrence while the ERR LED is flickering turning on Error clear request Y10 does not turn off the ERR LED In this case power off the PLC and then on or reset the CPU module Error clear request Y10 Error detection signal LED OFF A X10 to X19 X1C Error occurrence 2 Turning on Error clear request Y10 also clears the following areas e Current error area address 140 to 145 of the buffer memory e Latest error code displayed in the system monitor of GX Developer refer to Section 9 2 2 LED OFF 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC Q 9 2 2 System monitor The Web server module status can be checked from the System monitor 1 Checking the module status and error code on the Module s Detailed Information screen of the diagnostics function Start up procedure GX Developer Diagnostics System monitor Module s detailed information Module s Detailed Information Module Module Name QU71WS96 Product information 041220000000000 B 1 0 Address 0 Implementation Position Main Base OSlot Module Information
122. an error occurs at execution of the logging setting No 16 e Logging error X12 turns on e Logging error data area address 2008 bit 15 of the buffer memory turns on e The error code is stored into the logging 16 error code area address 2072 of the buffer memory 4 Logging data 1 to 64 Address 2012 to 2267 This area stores information on the errors that occurred in the logging function The logging data area is composed of 64 portions of the same data arrangement a Error code The error code that indicates the error status is stored into the corresponding logging setting No area where a logging error occurred Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code b Number of saved files This area stores the number of currently saved files c Latest saved file number This area stores the latest saved file number b15 to b8 b7 to bO 2016 to 2019 Logging data 2 Number of saved files 3 2264 to 2267 Logging data 64 Latest saved file number 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 8 12 CPU event monitor status area 1 Address 3300 to 3375 The status related to the CPU event monitor function can be confirmed Refer to Section 6 5 for the CPU event monitor function 1 CPU event setting data Address 3300 to 3303 a This area stores information on whether CPU event setting in the event setting has been made or not b The bit corresponding to the preset CPU event setting No turns on 0 Not set 1 Set
123. and parameters of a user part are not case sensitive c When the contents of the user screen have been changed delete the temporary Internet files cache and then retrieve the user screen using the Web browser Refer to Section 6 2 7 1 for how to delete the temporary Internet files Precautions for sample screens The Web server module has sample screens for each user part in the ROM WWW USERY directory Before starting actual operation delete all sample screen files To prevent them from being written to the devices that use the sample screens The sample screen can be restored by initializing the module Refer to Section 4 13 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 2 Applets Parts This section explains the applet parts Java applets An applet parts list is given below Reference Section e Integrates the communications of all applet parts in the Communication parts WSCom class ee poneet mane ran Comer Section 7 2 1 e When using applet parts be sure to describe only one communication part before the applet parts in HTML Displays in table form the components as many as the Data block parts 3 specified blocks within the specified tag data Section 7 2 2 Writing to the specified tag component is also available Displays the percentage of the component value to Level display parts WSLevel class pay P ge p Section 7 2 3 the whole maximum and minimum range Displays the specified graphic when
124. andankiad a Va aaia aii take 4 8 4 4 1 10BASE T 100BASE T X connection 000 eeeeeceeceeceeeeeeceeecaeceeeeaeeaecaeeeeeeaaeeaecaesaeseaesaesaeseeeeeeetaeeaneaeaes 4 9 4 4 2 RS 232 COMMECTION 0 cceccesceeececeeceeseeeeceeeneeaecaecaeesaeeaecaecaeesaeeaecaeeaeeaesaecaecaeseaesaesaesaeeeaeeaesaeeeeseaeeaes 4 10 4 5 Network Setting of Personal Computer for One to one CONNECTION ccccceceeseeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeesaeeees 4 11 4 6 Setting from Web BrowSel cccsceccecssscesceeceeseeseeeeeeaeeseesaeeaesaeeaeesensaseaeeaansasaeeaeesansaesesaeeseseateaeneaneaseaes 4 16 4 6 1 Display of standard SCE z 5 5cc ace odes duct oitect aa ducted deeneds dastigh denedg dateeds dened deteatin 4 16 4 6 2 Common operations for the Standard SCION cccceccessecceceeeeeeeeceeeeaeeaeceeseeeeaesaeseeseaesaesaeseeeeaeeaes 4 19 4 6 3 SYStEMVSSUIMG esccs2stepscediais etal Seeeaelahi eee cagecieet Pesta deca Marea AAA aaae aa danada araa AAPA aS EAEAN sina 4 22 4 64 Dial up Setting 4 i bassin ar i ie ae rn ie en ie vi ee ie eee 4 27 A 6 5 ACCOUNUSCIING iis Velie ei le ee ln i i eel 4 32 4 6 6 P filter setting is nifaat TA A A A AAA 4 37 4 6 7 Access target OPU SEtNGi aiiis iarta tan eaaa aeaea aaa aasa a haaien Eaa meee aiaa 4 41 4 7 Intelligent Function Module Switch Setting cccceccecceseeeeceeceeeeseeeeceeeeeeeaecaeseeeeeesaesaeseeseaesaeseaseeeeaneaes 4 44 4 8 Self diagnosticS FUNCtION cccceccescesececcecee
125. area Address 140 to 145 oo ceccececeeeseeeececeeeseecaeceeeeeesaecaesaeseaesaesaeseeseaetaeeaneateaes 3 33 3 8 6 Error log area Address 150 to 247 oo eeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeseaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeeseaeenaeenas 3 34 A 14 A 14 3 8 7 Login history area Address 250 to 380 oo eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaneatenas 3 35 3 8 8 IP filter area Address 382 tO 383 ee eeceeeeeeceeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseaeseaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaeenaeeeaseaeeeaeenas 3 36 3 8 9 Collection monitor cycle area Address 800 to 803 cecceseeeeececeeeeeceeeeeeeaesaeeeeeaeeaeeaeseeseaeeaes 3 36 3 8 10 Tag status area Address 1000 to 1075 ee eeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeaeeeas 3 38 3 8 11 Logging status area Address 2000 to 2267 ooo eececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeenaeeeaeenaeens 3 39 3 8 12 CPU event monitor status area 1 Address 3300 to 3375 cecceceeseseeeeeceeteeeeseeeeeeaeeeseeeeaeeaes 3 41 3 8 13 CPU event monitor status area 2 Address 3000 to 3018 cccceccecesseeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeseeeeaeeaes 3 42 3 8 14 Tag event monitor status area 1 Address 10000 to 10447 oo eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeas 3 43 3 8 15 Tag event monitor status area 2 Address 3100 to 3118 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesas 3 45 3 8 16 Time Interval monitor status area Address 3200 to 3217
126. aroun When TOP is selected at Blank ert INITIAL EJ FILENAME Initial file name When FOLLOWING is selected 1 to 64 characters at TOP Must be set x Need not be set Invalid x1 An error will occur if no user with administrator authority has been set App 60 App 60 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 6 17 IPFILTER CSV IP filter setting 1 File format tem S S OOO Dei CSCidC PFILTER CSV File contents IP filter setting Refer to Section 4 6 6 ME access BLOCK gt IPADDRESS1 192 168 0 0 Ef vaski 16 EF FILTER PASS IPADDRESS2 __ 10 20 30 00 MASK2 24 FILTER2 PASS IPADDRESS3 __ 10 20 30 40 MASK3 32 FILTERS BLOCK IPADDRESS4 MASK4 FILTER4 IPADDRESS5 _ 10 20 30 50 MASK5 32 FILTERS BLOCK IPADDRESS32 MASK32 FILTER32 E Label column Cannot be set by the user File format L Setting area Set by the user IP filter setting raat Ha IP filter setting HOME gt Administrative mem gt IP filter setting Pass the IP packet that has not been set in Filter setting Block the IP packet that has not been set in Filter setting Pc Pas seen enon Acton No 1 Block C Pass No 2 Block C Pass Block Pass Block Pass Block Pass Block Pass Block Pass Ae Block Pass g App 61 App 61 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 2 Label Setting Label Description Set value requirement Pass the IP packet that
127. assignment of the transfer PUT log 1 to 32 area address 6202 to 6553 Transfer PUT Log 1 to 32 Area Name ee ae ee ee ee ee ee es ee ee eee ae destination file name 6208 6219 6230 6241 6252 6263 6274 6285 6296 6307 Date 6209 to 6220 to 6231 to 6242 to 6253 to 6264 to 6275 to 6286 to 6297 to 6308 to 6212 6223 6234 6245 6256 6267 6278 6289 6300 6311 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 destination Transferred 6313to 6324to 6335to 6346to 6357to 6368to 6379 to TR 6319to 6330to 6341to 6352to 6363to 6374to 6385to 6396to 6407to 6418 to 6322 6333 6344 6355 6366 6377 6388 6399 6410 6421 E aad aa a ae ea es a ee ee destination file name 6428 6439 6450 6461 6472 6483 6494 6505 6516 6527 6432 6443 6454 6465 6476 6487 6498 6509 6520 6531 Seer eh se destination file name 6538 6549 6542 6553 8 The following shows the assignment of the transfer GET log 1 to 32 area address 8202 to 8553 Transfer GET Log 1 to 32 Area Sa Ska a eS gegen ae ee rl 8202 8213 8224 8235 8246 8257 8268 8279 8290 8301 Transferred 8203 to 8214 to 8225 to 8236 to 8247 to 8258 to 8269 to 8280 to 8291 to 8302 to file name 8208 8219 8230 8241 8252 8263 8274 8285 8296 8307 Date 8209 to 8220 to 8231 to 8242 to 8253 to 8264 to 8275 to 8286 to 8297 to 8308 to 8212 8223 8234 8245 8256 8267 8278 8289 8300 8311 E e a a ee ee O 8312 8323 8334 8345 8356 8367 8378 8389 8400 8411 Transferred 8313 to 8324 to 8335 to 8346 to 8357 to 8368 to
128. b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi Address 3300 neps papae n 0 9 8 716 5 4 3 2 1 3301 3302 3303 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 2 CPU event occurrence data Address 3304 to 3307 a This area stores the CPU event occurrence results b The bit corresponding to the CPU event setting No of a CPU event turns on 0 Event not occurred 1 Event occurred b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO Address 3304 16 15 14 1312 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3305 3306 3307 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 c ACPU event occurs when the monitoring condition set in CPU event setting of the event setting is satisfied 3 CPU event monitor error data Address 3308 to 3311 a This area stores the CPU event monitor error data b The bit corresponding to the CPU event setting No of a CPU event monitor error turns on 0 No CPU event monitor error occurred 1 CPU event monitor error occurred b15 b14 a b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bd b4 b3 b2 bi bl Address 3308 3309 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 19 18 17 3310 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 3311 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q c The following is observed when a CPU event monitor error occurs Example When an error occurs in CPU event monitor o
129. b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b0 Address 2000 1615 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2001 2002 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 2003 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 2 Logging execute data Address 2004 to 2007 a This area stores the logging execution results b The bit corresponding to the executed logging setting No turns on 0 Logging not executed 1 Logging executed b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b0 Address 2004 16 15 14 13 12 11 io 9 8 7z e6els5s 4 s 2 1 2005 2007 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 c Logging is executed at the following timings 1 At the specified time or specified time interval when Schedule setting has been set in the logging setting 2 When the dedicated instruction LOG is executed 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 Logging error data Address 2008 to 2011 a This area stores the logging error data b The bit corresponding to the logging setting No of a logging error turns on 0 No logging error 1 Logging error detected b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b0 Address 2008 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2009 32 31 2010 48 47 2011 64 63 62 61 c The following is observed when a logging error occurs Example When
130. backup of the data management The lower 4 bits indicate the data where the error occurred BitO Setting information Bit1 Logging Data Bit2 User HTML Bit3 Event history An error occurred during execution of restore for the data management The lower 4 bits indicate the data where the error occurred BitO Setting information Bit1 Logging Data Bit2 User HTML Bit3 Event history The setting information file structure of the restore source CF card is not correct An attempt was made to restore the backup data of a new version Before the processing being executed in the data management was completed the next processing was executed A battery voltage has been droped or battery connector is disconnected The request packet and the response packet are mismatched in APS e Check the free space of the CF card e Check whether the CF card is set securely Refer to Section 4 9 e Check the CF card for a fault Perform disk check and formatting on the personal computer e Check that the backup data exists in the backup folder of the CF card e Check whether the CF card is set securely Refer to Section 4 9 e Check the CF card for a fault Perform disk check and formatting on the personal computer e Use the CF card backed up correctly Refer to Section 6 10 e Confirm the serial No of the Display Display Display module Refer to Appendix 5 2 e After confirming
131. been powered on right e Power on the PLC a few minutes after Web server module after powered off power off e Enter the Web server module address as follows When accessing by the Internet Explorer the 9 E P ftp lt User name gt lt Password gt lt Web user authentication screen was not server module address or host name gt displayed Example In the case of factory setting fto QJ71WS96 MITSUBISHI 192 168 3 3 426 Data connection e Reduce the number of files to be transferred FTP transfer has been executed with many i i f error error occurs during oe at one time and execute the FTP instruction files specified at one time file transfer via FTP again 9 Troubleshooting on data management and Compact Flash card Symptom Check point The Compact Flash card has not been Data cannot be backed i i 7 e Format the Compact Flash card ormatted up onto the Compact mr S Flash card The standard ROM or Compact Flash card e Wait until the access of the standard ROM is being accessed or Compact Flash card is completed Data cannot be restored from the Compact Flash card Compact Flash card The Compact Flash card is being e Wait until the access of the Compact cannot be formatted accessed Flash card is completed The standard ROM or Compact Flash card e Wait until the access of the standard ROM h is being accessed or Compact Flash card is
132. below TYPE NAME VALUE DESCRIPTION Specify the The text box is displayed parameter name Se value entered into the text box Refer to 2 becomes a parameter value Specify the Specify the hidden parameter ae parameter value at Nothing is displayed Refer to yyyy Nood not Specify the button 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION 2 Parameter MELSEC Q Setting Range Initial Value Sets the tag to be read with the tag setting No TAGNO 1 to 64 Must be set Refer to Section 6 3 3 Sets the component to be read with the component setting No 1 to 64 Must be set Refer to Section 6 3 3 ELMNO Selects the data type to be read 0 Read the tag component name 1 Read the tag component value Selects how to display the result screen 0 Display the result screen with the Return button 1 Display the result screen with the Close button e Specify this item when a script is described to open the other window and display the result e Specifies the file name of the execution screen with the absolute path When standard ROM is used USER file name When Compact Flash card is used CF USER file name Read the tag component value 0 Display the screen with the Return button Return to the execution screen Refer to 3 Clicking the Return button returns to the execution screen Selects the language of the result screen LANGUAGE 0 1 1 English 0 Japanese 1 English 3 S
133. by logging function E mails are sent by the Web server module according to the logging setting of the Web browser An e mail is sent when a file is saved A fixed subject fixed main text and a CSV format attached file of logging data can be sent Web server module converts tag data into logging data 1 According to logging event ay Web server module a TID TE Subject HE ASCII data oO TT Main text gt When file is saved ASCII data m m ji Logging data nnn Atacnea nes mE Mail server pene CSV data 3 E mail is sent when a 2 According to the tag file is saved setting collects device data for each tag 4 E mail transmission by diagnostics function Refer to Section 6 11 2 E mail is sent by the Web server module when the setting test of the Web browser is conducted An e mail including a fixed subject and main text is sent for the e mail sending test 6 FUNCTIONS 6 6 2 Setting procedure for e mail function MELSEC Q The following is the setting procedure for use of the e mail function 1 Common procedure The common procedure for this function is shown below Create a network environment for Web server module to access the Web server module from a personal computer Res SSE For use of DNS server make the DNS setting on the System setting Make the required setting for sending e mail on the E mai
134. c Error log 1 to 16 Address 5007 to 5342 This area stores the error logs of failed e mail transmission The error log area is composed of 16 portions of the same data arrangement 1 Address 5007 to 5027 Error log 1 5028 to 5048 Errorlog2 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 5322 to 5342 Error log 16 Error code This area stores the error code that indicates the error status Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code To e This area stores the destination e mail address No of the undelivered e mail e The destination e mail address No is set in E mail address TO setting of the E mail setting Subject This area stores the first 15 words of the e mail subject Date and Time This area stores the date and time of e mail transmission in BCD code b15 to b8 b7 to bO E 0 Error code 1 TO 2 to Subject 15 words 16 17 Month 014 to 12h Year 00x to 99n last 2 digits 18 Hour 004 to 23x Day 01 to 31H pats 19 Second 004 to 59x Minute 00x to 59x and time v 20 Year 004 to 99n first 2 digits Day of the week 0x to 6x 3 49 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 4 Transmission log storage area for normal completion The transmission log of normally completed e mail transmission can be confirmed a Address 5345 to 5364 Number of writes for transmission log Address 5343 1 This area stores the cumulative number of registrations to the transmission log area 2
135. classpath gt set class path 7cp p lt path gt prepend path to class path cp a lt path gt append path to class path n lt namespace gt Namespace in which to run p pauses before terminating if an error occurs verify all classes y 7d lt name gt lt value gt define system property va execute AppletViewer PALES print verbose stack traces requires debug classes prof options enable profiling prof for help Classname CLASS file to be executed Arguments command line arguments to be passed on to the class file 2 gt Downloading Microsoft VM When Microsoft VM has not been installed or the Build number of Microsoft VM is earlier than 3309 download Microsoft VM of the latest version Windows Update etc from the Microsoft Corporation Home Page 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 Downloading Sun Microsystems Inc Java VM and confirming its version a Downloading Sun Microsystems Inc Java VM When using Sun Microsystems Inc Java VM download it from the Sun Microsystems Inc Home Page b Confirming version The version can be confirmed by choosing the following Control gt Java Plug in gt lt lt About gt gt tab gt Java TM Plug in Control Panel on Windows c Precautions for use of Java VM of Sun Microsystems Inc 1 Installation When installing Java VM of Sun Microsystems Inc into an English operating system OS select Custom Setup and enable the
136. completed 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC Q Check point The following occurs e Whether the power status is ON or OFF be when accessing the sure to execute the file access processing Compact Flash card before removing or replacing the Compact from a personal Flash card Refer to Section 4 9 computer etc e The file size is displayed as 0 byte Whether the power status is ON or OFF the e Spaces are added to file access was not stopped before removing the end of the file or replacing the Compact Flash card data e A message of file error file entry error or file size error is displayed and the file cannot be opened e Execute either of the following to restore the erroneous Compact Flash card 1 Set the erroneous Compact Flash card into the Web server module again Execute the file access stop processing and remove the card Refer to Section 4 9 2 Use the chkdsk command at the command prompt of Microsoft Windows for restoration Files on Compact Flash card are cleared at power off The Compact Flash card is an inapplicable e Change the Compact Flash card type 10 Troubleshooting on communication between Web server module and access target CPU Check point f e Clear the remote password setting for the Access to other station A remote password has been set to the GX ae GX Developer communication port UDP IP of Q series E71 on the target or relay station canno
137. completed Perform the next processing Format failed According to the error code confirm the error definition and take corrective action Refer to Section 9 3 Status Update Displaying current data management execution status 2002 11 13 18 31 57 2002 11 13 18 31 57 format completed POINT 1 Depending on the data volume to be backed up restored it may take some time until the processing is completed Start the next processing after confirming that the executed operation has been completed on the Status section 2 When the Compact Flash card is formatted the data stored in the Compact Flash card are all deleted 6 117 6 117 6 FUNCTIONS 4 6 118 MELSEC Q Execution of CSV export Export the setting data to the CSV file a Select the standard ROM or Compact Flash card as a location from which the setting data file will be exported CSV export Execute Exporting the setting information to CSV files Standard ROM CompactFlash card Click the Execute button to execute CSV export On Status confirm the CSV export execution status As the drive name the destination drive name standard ROM or Compact Flash card is displayed Click the Update button to confirm the current status When CSV export is being executed click the Update button again to confirm that the executed operation is completed 1 When normally completed CSV export is complete Start
138. component next No after the last component In the case of the above screen the edit screen for setting No 5 is displayed Edits the selected component Deletes the selected component The settings of the components after the deleted setting No are shifted up x When the component has been set with the user part of the user screen creation function reexamine the parameters since the setting No is changed Refer to Chapter 7 for the user part 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Before making component setting it is required to make tag setting on the Edit screen Tag setting If any component has a wrong device number in the component setting the other component that has a device of the same access target CPU will also result in an error Reexamine the device numbers set in the component setting Component setting Component ame CPU name 01 Control CPU D20000 Wrong device number 01 Control CPU DO 05 QCPU001 Tag data monitor Component name Value 01 A ERRFFFEh lt 4 Device number error FFFEh 02 B ERRFFFEh lt 4 As component A of the same access 03 C 100 target has an error component B also results in error 4 Edit screen Component setting Set the access target CPU data type access device etc Setting screen a Tag setting Home gt Administrative mem gt Tag setting gt Edit screen Component setting Save
139. component setting Is it OK to proceed Caution Control of the PLC may change Ensure safety before execution Yes No Warming Applet Window x2 When a real number is written to the target component a rounding error may be produced 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 1 The tag component test may affect the control of the PLC Ensure safety before execution Tag component test target day will be written to 1500 according to the component setting Is it OK to proceed Caution Control of the PLC may change Ensure safety before execution Yes No Warning Applet Window 2 A user without the tag component write authority is not allowed to conduct the tag component test When the tag component test is attempted the following screen appears Tag data monitor No write authority is identified Log in again with a user name that has write authority enabled and then execute again ERR 0903h OK Warning Applet Window 3 When Device write disable request YA has been set to Disable the tag component test is not available When the tag component test is attempted the following screen appears Tag data monitor x Writing to device is disabled Turn OFF the device write disable signal and re execute ERR 0908h OK Warning Applet Window 4 When Data write of the tag setting has been set to Disable the tag component test is not available Refer to Section
140. cumulative number of communication errors that were returned to the Web server module as a result of requesting the FTP server to transfer GET a file Error log storage area for abnormal completion The error log of failed file transfer can be confirmed a Number of writes for error log Address 8006 1 This area stores the cumulative number of errors stored in the error log area 2 An error code is stored when FTP transfer error X18 turns on b Error log write pointer Address 8007 1 This area stores the error log No of the latest error log 0 No error No error stored 1 or more Error log No of the latest error stored x The pointer value of 16 indicates that the latest error has been stored into the error log 16 area 2 If 17 or more errors occur excess errors are registered to the error log areas starting from the error log 1 area again 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address 8008 to 8019 Error log 1 8020 to 8031 Errorlog2 8188 to 8199 Error log 16 MELSEC Q Error log 1 to 16 Address 8008 to 8199 This area stores the error logs of failed file transfer The error log area is composed of 16 portions of the same data arrangement 1 Error code This area stores the error code that indicates the error status Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code Source This area stores the source FTP server No when a communication error occurs The source FTP server No is set in the FTP server setting
141. devices and the file registers for individual programs do not work as the devices for the setting data 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION oe MELSEC Q Control data Setting Setting side Device Setting data range x1 ps E a A b8 b7 b6 0 fee o tee Iae o 1 1 Completion type b7 Set whether or not the clock data will be set to S1 11 to S1 15 in the case of abnormal completion 0 Not set Completion 1 Set 0 type transfer 2 Transfer form b8 to b10 form Specify the transfer file type b10 bo b8 Attachedfile o o o Tajdata gt O Tag data 1 o o Logging data o o Userdatafile binary file o 4 Userdatatile CSVfile The status of the instruction completion is stored Completion 0 Normal completion Other than 0 Abnormal completion Error code 2 Set the transfer destination of the file with the corresponding setting No Transfer No in the FTP setting 1 to 16 User 1 to 16 Transfer destination No status Set the tag data or logging data to be transferred with the corresponding No set in the Tag setting or Logging setting 1 to 64 User 1 to 64 Setting No of tag data or logging data to be transferred Set the logging data to be transferred as a file P 0 The current latest file is transferred 3 ies 1 to FFFFFFFFu The specified saved file is transferred Example When attaching 00000010 CSV set 00000010H HA Whether the clock data of S1 12
142. display box DSPTIME DSPCOLOR 2002 07 12 10 18 50 DSPBKCOLOR 2 Parameter Setting Range Initial Value Sets the logging data for historical graph display using the loggin LOGNO ae graph elsplay using me 099 1064 Must be set setting No Refer to Section 6 4 4 GRAPHNO 1 Sets the number of graph lines Must be set Sets the component for historical graph display using the ELMNO1 to ELMNOS p E e Ra K S 1to64 Must be set a setting No Refer to Section 6 3 3 eoe eer dpe aaa suing Rod 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q intial Value DSPCOLOR Sets the character color of the numeric value and time DSPBKCOLOR Sets the background color of the numeric value and time DSPLNCOLOR Sets the display line color string Red APLCOLOR Sets the background color undrawn area of the Java applet POINT Sets the number of logging data records to be displayed 5 to 100 UPPER Sets the maximum limit value 2147483648 32767 to LOWER Sets the minimum limit value 2147483647 32768 0 Without Sets the number of logging data for the interval in which the f f ays 0 to 99 vertical axis vertical axis lines to be drawn line Sets the number of horizontal axis lines 0 to 99 oo Sets whether the logging time display box will be displayed or not 0 Not 0 Not displayed 1 Displayed displayed Sets whether the numeric display box will be displayed or not 0 Not displayed 1
143. error The number of device points e Check the device number input in Number of device A 9E83h specified for the access target the device monitor or component Continue station is outside the range setting Boooh s Errors detected in the CC Link system to i Continue Refer to the CC Link system master local module user s manual BFFFh Co00h Errors detected in the Ethernet interface module to Continue Refer to the Ethernet interface module user s manual CFFFh FOOOh i Errors detected in the MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 network system oiire o FEFFh Refer to the MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 network system reference manual FFDOh System error System error 1 Continue Monitor condition Data cannot be read since the e Delete the monitor condition 1 FFDih o a l ESOS te Continue dissatisfied error monitor condition is not satisfied using GX Developer Continued on the next page 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC Q From the previous page Error code a Eon System error FFDAh T C set values were written to the FFD5h ROM operation error PLC CPU during ROM operation pun l FEDBn 9M error FFDEh FEDFh Incorrect access target The setting of the access target error CPU is incorrect FFEOh FFEEh Enen t oa FFDAn puu Enon System error The station No or network number is outside the range or has been set incorrectly Station No network number error Cont
144. error log area can be confirmed on the following diagnostic screen a Error history of self diagnostics monitor Refer to Section 6 2 6 b Error Display in system monitor of GX Developer Refer to Section 9 2 2 2 The error log area can be cleared in either of the following methods a Execute in self diagnostics monitor Refer to Section 6 2 6 b Switch the power OFF and then ON or reset the CPU module 3 8 7 Login history area Address 250 to 380 The history of login to the Web server module via the Web or FTP can be confirmed 1 Number of login times Address 250 to 251 This area stores the cumulative number of login times to the Web server module using Web or FTP 2 Login history write pointer Address 252 a This area stores the login history No with which the latest login history has been stored 0 No login history No login history stored 1 or more Login history No of the latest login history stored The pointer value of 16 indicates that the latest login history has been stored into the login history 16 area b If 17 or more errors occur the login history is stored into the login history areas starting from the login history 1 area again 3 Login history 1 to 16 Address 253 to 380 This area stores the history of login to the Web server module via the Web or FTP The login history area is composed of 16 portions of the same data arrangement a User number 1 This area stor
145. event status E ON Event occurrence OFF Not occurred F Use prohibited yF X6 PECIFICATION SE US MELSEC Q Signal Direction Web server module gt PLC CPU Signal Direction PLC CPU Web server module Device Device Signal name Signal name No No ERR LED status v10 Error clear request ON On Flicker OFF Off ON Error clear requested OFF Tag collection error X11 Y11 ON Error occurrence OFF Normal Logging error X12 gging Y12 ON Error occurrence OFF Normal CPU event monitor error X13 Y13 ON Error occurrence OFF Normal Tag event monitor error X14 Y14 ON Error occurrence OFF Normal Time event monitor error v15 ON Error occurrence OFF Normal Access target CPU error ON Error occurrence OFF Normal E mail transmission error U hibited ON Error occurrence OFF Normal ers FTP transfer error vie ON Error occurrence OFF Normal Connection error Y19 X17 X19 ON Error occurrence OFF Normal a Use prohibited Other error X1C Y1C ON Error occurrence OFF Normal 7 Use prohibited Watch dog timer error X1F Y1F ON Error occurrence OFF Normal Important Do not output turn on the signal marked use prohibited among the I O signals for the PLC CPU Doing so can cause malfunction of the PLC system 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 6 2 I O signals details The following table shows the details of the I O signals of the Web server module 1 Input signals E 1 Turns on whe
146. file of the tag data is as follows Component name 1 Component name 2 Component name 3 CR LF Component value 1 Component value 2 Component value 3 CR LF Example Product A Product B Product C CR LF 100 350 50 CR LF c The e mail is received by the personal computer Example In the case of Microsoft Corporation s Outlook Express 5 5 production mngmt product A 100 2002 11 14 14 01 05 File Edit View Tools Message Help amp Wm g S amp S xX a F E3 Reply Reply All Forward Print Delete Previous Nest Addresses From QJ71WS96 Date Thursday November 14 2002 2 01 PM To UW ae oe oe Subject production mngmt product A 100 2002 11 14 14 01 05 Attach PS product1 CS 1 52 KB Production manegement Main text set on the Tag monitor setting within the Event setting Product A 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 3 E mail transmission by time interval event a Time Interval event setting Refer to Section 6 5 3 1 Inthe Time interval event setting set Send an e mail when an event occurs and set the E mail main text Attached file and Send to ie Event setting Home gt Administrative mem gt Event setting gt Time Interval event setting gt Edit screen on setting CPU eve Time Interval event setting edit Save Back Load Time Interval event setting No 01 E Time Interval Time specification 00 a 00 z oo E hour minute second Interval specifi
147. file or event history file by FTP operation Device test from device monitor screen standard screen ae o O Tag component test from tag data monitor screen standard screen Write from user screen write parts to tag component x E E a a ce e ea Access to administrative menu standard screen x x x o Read uite of user screen file by FTP operation X Read wite of user datafile by FTP operation o x XL LO Deletion of logging file or event history file by FTP operation x x x Accessible x Inaccessible 1 To the account of the normal user the device write tag component write administrator authority is not given Start Procedure Administrative menu Account setting Refer to 1 gt Select the account setting No to be edited and click on Edit gt Edit Screen Refer to 2 4 32 4 32 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 1 Account setting a Make account setting Up to 16 accounts can be set b Prior to shipment the following default account is registered for the Web server module as the account setting No 1 The default account can be edited e User name QU71WS96 e Password MITSUBISHI e Access authority Device write Tag component write Administrator e Initial screen Standard screen top page Top page index htm Setting screen i Account setting Home gt Administrative mem gt Account setting Edit Delete T se
148. from the FTP server when M25 is turned ON M25 XO MOVP H100 D70 CSV file transfer clock data setting not required Transfer source No 1 MOVP DATA CSV D86 File name M10 MII eee ee ee eee ee eee eee 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 6 7 6 File transfer by logging function When a file is saved the Web server module transfers a logging file to the destination FTP server Refer to Section 6 4 for details of the logging function 1 Logging setting Refer to Section 6 4 4 a Inthe Logging setting set File transfer Send a saved file to the following FTP server and select the transfer destination FTP server name E mail delivery 7 Send a saved file to the following e mail address File transfer M Transfer a saved file to the following FTP server 1 01 d b When afile is saved a logging file is transferred to the destination FTP server 2 Format of transferred file The following table shows the format of the file transferred by the Web server module to the FTP server Filename Saved filename Example 00000009 CSV File data Saved file File capacity Maximum 512k bytes 3 Precautions for transferring a file by logging function File transfer requires several to several tens of seconds depending on the network line and data size When When the number of saved files exceeds the above set value Overwrite has been set in the Logging setting an error occurs if the target file is de
149. gt lt param name ELMNO value 1 gt lt param name DATA value 10 gt lt param name TYPE value 0 gt lt param name CAPTION value Write gt lt param name FONTSIZE value 20 gt lt param name BTNCOLOR value Gray gt lt param name APLCOLOR value Gray gt lt param name CONFIRM value 1 gt lt param name LANGUAGE value 1 gt lt applet gt lt body gt lt html gt 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q c Storage of HTML file Transfer the HTML file to the Web server module by performing FTP operation File storage destination ROM WWW USER Smpwbten htm d Sample screen display Display the sample screen Example When accessing the Web server module by one to one connection Sample screen address http 192 168 3 3 USER Smpwbten htm 44 Sample screen for write button part Microsoft Internet Explorer or x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help e a 3 E Back Stop Refresh Home Search Favorites Media History Mail Print Edit Discuss Address http 192 168 3 3 USER smpwbten htm x Go Links Sample screen for write button part i Write z Applet started Intemet e Precautions for using the write button parts 1 Writing a value to a tag component with the write button part may affect the control of the PLC CPU Ensure safety before execution When CONFIRM 1 the following confirmation screen appears Write confirmation
150. have been executed internally 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 6 9 Address Notification Function 6 9 1 Address notification function The address notification function notifies the external device of the URL of the Web server module by E mail or FTP When network connection is made the global IP address is assigned from the Internet service provider to the Web server module When the external device is notified of the IP address that the Web server module has obtained through address notification access to the Web server module is enabled FTP server FTP notification Web server module C E mail notification o OO o L erai SZ http 192 168 3 3 External device 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 6 9 2 Address notification setting Setting Purpose 1 In the IP address setting set the IP address and HTTP port number of which the external device will be notified by E mail or FTP 2 In the e mail notification setting set the destination e mail address and address notification timing when IP address notification is made by e mail 3 In the FTP notification setting set the transfer destination FTP server when IP address notification is made by file transfer Start Procedure 1 IP address setting refer to 1 Administrative menu Address notification setting lt lt IP address setting gt gt tab IP address setting 2 E mail notification setting refer to 2 Ad
151. in the procedure given in Section 6 10 3 3 c While CSV export import is being executed in the data management do not switch power from on to off reset the CPU module or perform management menu operation To do so can cause the setting information file to be corrupted or cleared d As the setting information file includes the password and other important information and its information may be obtained illegally delete the file from the standard ROM or Compact Flash card after the setting is completed A 9 Precautions for access to Web server module 1 Monitor screen and user screen a Since the monitor screens and user screen use the Java applet JavaVM is g required for the Web browser to execute the applet Refer to Section 3 1 Remarks 2 and 3 Displaying each monitor screen and user screen may take a little while When displaying a monitor or user screen on the Web browser do not switch the screen to another or update the setting until it is displayed completely If communication is interrupted due to some reason while monitoring the system from a monitor or user screen or if monitoring is executed before connecting the Web server module to the network the monitor or user screen may not be correctly displayed on the Web browser even after restoration or restart of communications If communication is interrupted while monitoring the system from the monitor screen the monitor screen may not b
152. instruction is stored by the PLC CPU x2 Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code Function 1 A command is issued to the logging setting to perform one record logging 2 Regardless of the Schedule setting in the logging setting one record loggings of the setting No set in S 2 to S 5 are performed However high speed logging cannot be specified An error will occur if high speed logging is specified 3 Executing the same instruction during execution of the instruction is not allowed The second instruction will not be processed In this case even if an error is detected the completion device D 0 and completion status indication flag D 1 do not turn on 4 This instruction is not available for interrupt programs 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q 5 The execution and normal abnormal completion statuses of the LOG instruction can be confirmed using the completion device D 0 and completion status indication flag D 1 a Completion device D 0 This device turns on in the END processing of the scan for which the LOG instruction is completed and turns off in the next END processing b Completion status indication flag D 1 This device turns on off according to the completion status of the LOG instruction Normally completed Remains off Abnormally completed Turns on in the END processing of the scan where the LOG instruction is completed and turns off in the next END proces
153. is selected the data cannot be written from Tag component test in the Tag data monitor or the user screen write part After changing the settings make sure to click on the Save button The settings are updated when the Update button on the Setting update screen is clicked the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC O 3 Component setting Set components for each tag Up to 64 components can be registered for each tag Component setting is registered in order of serial numbers starting from the setting No 1 Component registration is not valid with any omitted setting Setting screen Home gt Administrative mem gt Tag setting gt Component setting Delete Back SS avas ore enl eri ee 9 product A 01 Control CPU Single word D500 Decimal 0 decimal places product B 01 Control CPU Single word D501 Decimal 0 decimal places product C 01 Control CPU Single word D502 Decimal 0 decimal places product D 01 Control CPU Single word D503 Decimal 0 decimal places Setting Item Tag name Displays the setting No and name of the tag being edited Operator Displays whether a mathematical operation is specified for the collected data or not or the p specified mathematical operation Displays the addend subtrahend multiplier or divisor of the mathematical operation Adds an component Clicking on the Add button displays the setting edit screen for new
154. j tting Edit Delete F Sa tag SEDES m i Teamy ee e re a a Era ae ET e C 1 systeml systeml CSV Standard ROM same as the tag sampling interval Start at start up Donotstop Specification for number of lines 1000Lines Do not add Do not add Do not add 1 Overamite Donot send Do not transfer 3 Click on the Update button on the Setting update screen to update the setting 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION b Creation of HTML file File name SMPHSDEN HTM The HTML source is indicated below lt DOCTYPE html PUBLIC W3C DTD HTML 4 01 Transitional EN gt lt html gt lt head gt lt meta http equiv Content Type content text html charset iso 8859 1 gt lt meta http equiv Pragma content no cache gt lt title gt Sample screen for historical data display part lt title gt lt head gt lt body gt lt h1 gt Sample screen for historical data display part lt h1 gt lt Communication part gt lt applet code WSCom class codebase PART S width 0 height 0 gt lt param name INTERVAL value 1 gt lt applet gt lt Historical data display part gt lt applet code W SHstdat class codebase PARTS width 655 height 400 gt lt param name LOGNO lt param name XNO lt param name ELMNO1 lt param name ELMNO2 lt param name ELMNO3 lt param name ELMNO4 lt param name ELMNO5 lt param name NUMCOLOR lt param name NMBKCOLOR lt param name ELM
155. log area is composed of 32 portions of the same data arrangement 1 Source This area stores the source FTP server No of the normally completed FTP transfer GET The source FTP server No is set in the FTP server setting 2 Transferred file name This area stores the transferred file name in ASCII code 3 Date and Time This area stores the date and time of file transfer in BCD code b15 to b8 b7 to bO Source to Transferred file name 6 10 Year 00x to 99n first 2 digits Address 8202 to 8212 Transfer log 1 8213 to 8223 Transfer log 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8543 to 8553 Transfer log 32 N Year 004 to 99n last 2 digits Day 01H to 31h Minute 00n to 591 Day of the week 0x to 6x Date and time 3 8 22 Module initialization request area Address 9999 Use this area when returning the Web server module to the factory setting Refer to Section 4 13 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 9 Time Data Handling Error This section explains the time data handled by the Web server module 1 Time data handled by Web server module The Web server module acquires and uses the clock data of CPU No 1 at the following timings e When the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset e Every 60 seconds The time data is used mainly for the time stamp of logging and event history files and the time specification of logging and event monitor
156. lowercase Whe Blok Red Green Maroon Nay owe Tea b RGB value After set the RBG value represented in hexadecimal Example FFFFFF White 000000 Black FF0000 Red 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 2 2 Data block parts The components as many as the specified blocks within the specified tag data are displayed in table form Writing to the specified tag component is also available Only the user having the tag component write authority is allowed to write a value to a tag component with the data block part Refer to Section 4 6 5 for the user authority 1 Specifications Filename WSDatbkk class Number of block Maximum 64 blocks for the component number Component type that w Single word Double can be specified 1 Component word Real number Bit String Displayed items ooo name display TAGNO ELNINO cell ELMNO2 3 m DIRECTION BLKSIZE APLCOLOR 2 Component value display cell 3 Tag component test dialog box 2 Component value display cell LNCOLOR 1 Component name display cell ELMNAME ELMCOLOR ELMALIGN ELMBKCOLOR NUMCOLOR DATALIGN o DATWIDTH Display f isplay form ane o ELMWIDTH 3 Tag component test dialog box WRITE LANGUAGE Double clicking the WRITE or LANGUAGE component value display cell opens the tag component test dialog box Refer to Section 6 2 2 2 for the tag co
157. mail S ttinG aneteri e e e aa aaea 6 69 Buffer memory details 00 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 31 E mail transmission Address notification Buffer Memory list ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 17 TUNCHION wee eek aie died 6 102 E mail transmission Event monitor function Pg NN a eae dee th ats te Sat AAT 6 77 Cable CONNECTION e ceeeeeceeteeee eee eeteeteeeees 4 8 E mail transmission Logging function 6 75 CGI o ULC 7 49 E mail transmission Setting test 6 123 CGI read pats cececeeeeceeeseeeeeeeseeeeneetees 7 54 E mail transmission WMSEND instruction CGI write Pparts ccccccessesseesesseeeseeeneees PAAQ Gassaazduashstacusuaveadathraaccateasagcesaaaana faerie aeaand 6 71 8 2 CH1 self loopback test 4 47 Error code liSt ceeceeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeateneeeas 9 13 CH2 self loopback test 4 48 Event history Monitor eee 6 13 7 44 Checking function VersiOn cccceeeeeeees 2 7 Event monitor function 6 13 6 48 6 77 Comment display parts ceeeeeeeeee 7 17 Event Sting eoteko eie eren ean AREER 6 52 Common operations for the standard screen 4 19 External dimensions s App 1 Communication part ccceeeeseeeeeeteenees 7 4 Compact Flash card CF oo A 23 F Component Setting ceceeseeeeeereeeeeeees 6 31 File transfer Address notification function 6 105 Connection device 2 5 File transfer FTPPU
158. make sure to perform the shut down operation described in Section 4 11 Failure to observe the above procedure may cause erasure of logging data during processing corruption of data in the standard ROM drive Compact Flash card during access or a file system fault 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 10 3 Battery replacement This section explains the battery replacement of the Web server module The battery of the Web server module is used for file protection It is required to replace the battery when the voltage of the Web server module battery has dropped 1 Checking the Web server module for a battery voltage drop a Check for a battery voltage drop in the battery status area buffer memory 7 b The following results at battery error 1 1 ON is written to the battery status area buffer memory 7 2 The ERR LED turns on and ERR LED status X10 and other error X1C turn on The file contents will not be erased as soon as the battery error occurs but may be erased if the battery error occurrence is overlooked c Finish battery replacement while the total of the latch time after Battery status area has turned on is within the specified time battery error detection program example tic Turns Y100 on UO G7 KI 01100 when battery error occurs 2 Web server module battery Q6BAT life a The following table shows the Web server module battery life per Battery life Ener
159. me ao WOP Wo D60 Deletes one saved file of logging data MOVP K1 D62 Logging No 1 oov Ho D63 Saved file No Deletes the oldest file ZP LOGDEL U0 D60 M8 M8 nnn een pE Normal processing i kli Abnormal processing i 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q 8 8 WFWRITE Instruction The device data of the PLC CPU are written to the user data file of the Compact Flash card Applicable device Settin Internal devi Sea Special Index nternal device ecial g File MELSECNE Tl 0 p i Constant data System User module register Others register Direct J 4 a Bit S1 fore wed eS Instruction Execution code condition Command WFWRITE Z WFWRITE Comm WFWRITE f ZP WFWRITE Setting data Setting data Setting side 1 Data type Head I O signal of the module Un 00 to FE The first 2 digits when the I O signal is represented in User BIN16bit 3 digits Head number of the device that stores the control data User m a name Head number of the device that stores the data usr O Head number of the bit device that will be turned on for one scan when the instruction is normally completed ae System Bit D 1 also turns on when the instruction is abnormally completed The local devices and the file registers for individual programs do not work as the devices for the setting data 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION Control data Setting Setting sid range 1
160. name using the IP address or domain name 2 When using the domain name set as follows e Enter all the host and domain names into the SMTP server name setting column Example mailserver ne jp roof Host Domain KKK x When using the domain name it is required to set the DNS server in DNS server setting of the System setting Refer to Section 4 6 3 b E mail address From Set the e mail address of the Web server module c Username Set the user name for the mail server d Password Confirm password 1 Set the password for the mail server 2 To confirm the password set the password again to Confirm password 2 E mail address To setting Set the e mail address of the transmission destination Up to 16 destination e mail addresses can be registered Refer to Appendix 4 2 for the characters applicable to the destination e mail address 3 Option setting a POP before SMTP 1 Enable this setting when the specification of the mail server is POP before SMTP 2 When POP before SMTP is selected set the IP address or domain name as the POP server name Refer to the above 1 a for the setting method POINT After changing the settings make sure to click on the Save button The settings are updated when the Update button on the Setting update screen is clicked the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 6 6 4 E mail transmi
161. network at execution of any of the following operations it automatically disconnects from the network after completion of the corresponding operation However if any of these is executed with the Web server module connected to the network Network connection status X4 is ON the Web server module does not disconnect from the network after completion of the operation Execution of dedicated instruction WMSEND FTPPUT FTPGET E mail transmission file transfer by logging function E mail transmission by event function 5 CONNECTING WEB SERVER MODULE TO NETWORK MELSEC Q 3 Combinations of network connection and disconnection methods Combinations of the network connection and disconnection methods are indicated below Disconnection i i Disconnection Disconnection Disconnection method nae using Disconnect using using line function Connection sequence disconnection disconnection Only when modem method program part Automatic is connected Automatic connection at start up Connection using sequence program Automatic connection at execution of dedicated instruction WMSEND FTPPUT FTPGET Automatic connection at e mail transmission or file transfer by logging function Automatic A Set to Disconnect connection at e mail transmission by f Set to Not disconnect event function Connection by Call function Only when modem is connected O Can be disco
162. normal complit confirm gt RST M301 Normal c ompletio n confir med lt Clear abnormal complt confirm gt RST M302 Abnormal complet ion conf irmed lt Clear connect error code confirm MOV HO D302 Connecti on error code co nf irmed lt Confirming connection gt Y5 X5 800 Connecti Connecti Connecti on regue on proce on conti st ssing rmed lt Connection reguest OFF gt Y5 X6 RST Y5 Connecti Connecti Connecti on regue on compl on regue st ete st lt Normal completion confirmed ON gt X4 a E M301 Connecti Normal c on statu ompletio n confir med lt Abnormal completion confirmed OND gt X19 SET M302 Connecti Abnormal on error complet ion conf irmed lt Confirming connection error code gt UO MOV G30 D302 Connecti Connecti on error on error code code co nfirmed 5 CONNECTING WEB SERVER MODULE TO NETWORK MELSEC Q Network disconnection processing lt Disconnection reguest ON XO X4 Y5 Y7 M200 SET Y7 Module R Connecti Connecti Disconne Disconne Di sconne EADY on statu on regue ction re ction co ction re s st guest mmand guest lt Clear disconnect complt confirm RST M401 Disconne ction co molt co nf i rmed lt Confirming disconnection Y7 XT s S Disconne Disconne Disconne ction re ction pr ction co guest ocessing nf irmed lt Disconnection reguest OFF Y7 X8 RST Y7 Disconne ction re guest Disconne Disconne ction re ctio
163. of a tag event turns on 0 Event not occurred 1 Event occurred b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO Address 10064 16 15 14 6e l5 4 3 2 1 10065 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 19 18 17 10066 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 10067 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 10068 80 79 78 70 69 68 67 66 65 10069 96 95 94 82 81 10070 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 10071 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 10072 144 143 142 141 140 139 138 137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130 129 10073 160 159 158 157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 149 148 147 146 145 10074 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 169 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 10075 192 191 190 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 179 178 177 10076 208 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 199 198 194193 10077 224 223 222 221 220 219 218 217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 209 10078 240 239 238 237 236 235 234 233 232 231 230 226 225 10079 256 255 254 253 252 251 250 249 248 247 246 242 241 c A tag event occurs when the monitoring condition set in Tag event setting of the event setting is satisfied 3 Tag event monitor error data Address 10128 to 10143 a This area stores the tag event monitor error data b The bit corresponding to the tag event setting No of a tag even
164. of restoration in Status of Data management Refer to Section 6 10 4 Display e Check the access target CPU setting Refer to Section 4 6 7 Continued on the next page 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC Q From the previous page Error code The network No start I O Network address or station No set in communication route Network communication route of error the access target CPU setting is outside the range othe Invalid setting was made in Tag sampling interval i Sampling Interval of the tag setting error i setting Invalid setting was made in Update before logging of the tag setting or the tag setting file is destroyed Update before logging setting error Invalid setting was made in Data 062Ah Data write setting error write of the tag setting or the tag setting file is destroyed Invalid setting was made in File File name setting error name of the logging setting Invalid setting was made in 062Bh Component setting Component setting of the tag error setting or the tag setting file is destroyed The access target CPU specified No CPU specification in the component setting does not error exist or the access target CPU has been deleted The device specified in the component setting is not Data type incorrect consistent with the data type A error device other than a bit device was specified as a bit device or vice versa i The number of characters E
165. of the instruction is not allowed The second instruction will not be processed In this case even if an error is detected the completion device D 0 and completion status indication flag D 1 do not turn on 4 This instruction is not available for interrupt programs 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q The execution and normal abnormal completion statuses of the TAG instruction can be confirmed using the completion device D 0 and completion status indication flag D 1 a Completion device D 0 This device turns on in the END processing of the scan for which the TAG instruction is completed and turns off in the next END processing 5 Completion status indication flag D 1 This device turns on off according to the completion status of the TAG instruction Normally completed Remains off Abnormally completed Turns on in the END processing of the scan where the TAG instruction is completed and turns off in the next END processing Operation at execution of TAG instruction Error Program example M22 p MOVP H43 D42 ZP TAG U0 D40 m m XO M5 When the TAG instruction is completion the completion device bit device set in D 0 turns on in the END processing of the completed scan and turns off in the next END processing When an error occurs the completion device set in D 1 turns on and an error code is stored into the completion status word device se
166. of the station Continue No in the access target CPU setting Refer to Section 4 6 7 e Check the device type input in FFFDh Device type error The device type is incorrect the device monitor or component Continue setting e Check the device number input in Device number error The device number is incorrect the device monitor or component Continue setting FFFFh Systemeror de System error t 1 The possible cause is a system error of the Web server module Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 2 Conduct the hardware test again Refer to Section 4 8 3 If the error occurs again the possible cause is a system error of the Web server module Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 3 The possible cause is a hardware fault of the Web server module Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem APPENDIX APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 1 External Dimensions an 90 3 54 On al aes P S H d RI L H 1 27 4 1 08 Fy A App App 1 gt F a CH1 10BASE T H
167. of the tag setting 3 Tag collection error data Address 1008 to 1011 a This area stores the tag collection error data b The bit corresponding to the tag setting No of a tag collection error turns on 0 No tag collection error 1 Tag collection error detected b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO Address 1008 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1009 1010 1011 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q c The following is observed when a tag collection error occurs Example When an error occurs in tag collection of the tag setting No 16 e Tag collection error X11 turns on e Tag collection error data area address 1008 bit 15 of the buffer memory turns on e The error code is stored into the tag collection 16 error code area address 1027 of the buffer memory 4 Tag collection 1 to 64 error code Address 1012 to 1075 The error code that indicates the error status is stored into the corresponding tag setting No area Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code 3 8 11 Logging status area Address 2000 to 2267 The status related to the logging function can be confirmed Refer to Section 6 4 for the logging function 1 Logging setting data Address 2000 to 2003 a This area stores information on whether logging setting has been made or not b The bit corresponding to the preset logging setting No turns on 0 Not set 1 Set b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
168. on at completion of disconnection made by Network disconnection request Y7 Does not turn on by any connection trigger other than Network disconnection request Y7 shown in 3 of X4 2 Turns off when Network disconnection request Y7 turns off Network disconnection all request Y7 Network Network disconnection X8 disconnection processing X7 completion Network disconnection completion X8 Network connection status X4 x1 When Network disconnection request Y7 is turned on while Network connection status X4 is off Network disconnection processing X7 turns off and Network disconnection completion X8 turns on immediately CPU RE 1 Turns on when a CPU event occurs event sta 2 Turns off when a CPU event is restored 1 Turns on when a tag event occurs Tag event status 2 Turns off when a tag event is restored 1 Is on while the ERR LED is on during module continue error occurrence or flickering during module stop error occurrence 2 Turns off when the ERR LED turns off by turning on Error clear request Y10 with the ERR LED status i ERR LED on Not for the case of flickering ERR LED 3 While the ERR LED is on or flickering when X10 is on one or more of X11 to X19 and X1C turns on 1 Turns on when an error of the tag collection occurs Tag collection 2 When this turns on an error code is stored into the tag status area buffer memory 1000 error to 1075 3 Turns
169. pair cable that meets IEEE802 3 10BASE T 100BASE TX standards a For 100Mbps Use either of the following cables 1 Unshielded twisted pair cable UTP cable Category 5 2 Shielded twisted pair cable STP cable Category 5 b For 10Mbps Use either of the following cables 1 Unshielded twisted pair cable UTP cable Category 3 4 5 2 Shielded twisted pair cable STP cable Category 3 4 5 During the high speed communication 100Mbps via 100BASE TX connection a communication error may occur due to the effect of high frequency noise generated from the device other than PLC depending on the installation environment Take the following countermeasures on the Web server module side to eliminate the effect of high frequency noise 1 Wiring e Do not bundle the twisted pair cables with the main circuit or power cables or bring them close to each other e Make sure to place the twisted pair cable in a duct Cable e In the environment where the cable is susceptible to noise use the shielded twisted pair cable STP cable 10Mbps communication e Connect the 10Mbps compatible device with Web server module and then transmit the data to the device at transmission speed of 10Mbps 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 6 RS 232 cable Use the RS 232 compliant cable of up to 15m Recommended cable 7 0 127 _IP HRV SV Specify the number of pairs in L for 13 pairs specify 7 0 127 13P HRV SV Oki Electric Cable Company
170. port number has been selected set the HTTP port number in decimal number 1024 to 65535 HTTP port number 3 Set the HTTP port number after consulting the network administrator person in change of network planning IP address management etc After changing the settings make sure to click on the Save button The settings are updated when the Update button on the Setting update screen is clicked the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset 6 101 6 101 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 E mail notification setting Make e mail notification setting Setting Screen lt a Address notification setting Home gt Administrative mem gt Address notification setting gt E mail notification setting IP address setting E mail notification setting FTP notification setting E mail notification setting Save IP address notification M Notify an IP address at network connection E mail address To E mail address To 01 ees m ma ag Vv 09 E 02 m a oem ia g Vv 10 E 03 as mg Vv 11 E 04 E 12 E 05 E 13 E 06 E 14 E 07 E 15 ii 08 E 16 E I Include IP address to E mail of WMSEND instruction I Include IP address to E mail of event monitor function Setting Item IP address notification Sets the destination e mail address and address notification timing Saves the setting The settings are updated when the Update button on the Setting update screen is clicked
171. power7 1 SINGLE D506 DEC 0 NONE 9 COMPONENTI 8 power 8 1 SINGLE D507 DEC 0 NONE 10 COMPONENTI 9 power 9 1 SINGLE D508 DEC 0 NONE 11 COMPONENT1 10 power 10 1 SINGLE D509 DEC 0 NONE Te 46 COMPONENTI 45 power 45 1 SINGLE D544 DEC 0 NONE 47 COMPONENTI 46 power 46 1 SINGLE D545 DEC 0 NONE 48 COMPONENT1 47 power 47 1 SINGLE 0546 DEC 0 NONE 49 COMPONENTI 48 power 48 1 SINGLE D547 DEC 0 NONE 50 COMPONENTI 49 power 49 1 SINGLE D548 DEC 0 NONE 51 COMPONENT1 50 power 50 1 SINGLE 0549 DEC 0 NONE 52 53 I Il lt gt b COMPONENT lal Ready Drag amp drop 6 113 Personal computer side mp File Edt View Go Favorites Help Ea x 4 x Up Cut Copp Pase Undo Delete Properties Address ja C WINDOWS Desktop temp Name Size Type Modified F COMPONENT CSV 3KB Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values Fie 10 21 03 4 28 PM X Tag csv 1KB Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values File 10 21 03 4 12 PM 2 objects Z56KB E My Computer Web server module side ROM W WW USER CSV rosoft Internet Explorer File Edt View Go Favorites Help D o x Up Cut Copy Paste Undo Delete Properties Address ftp 7 192 168 3 3 ROM WWW USER CSV z Go Links Name Size Type Modified J ACCOUNT CSV 116 bytes Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values File 10 21 03 4 14 PM 8 ADDRESS CSV 456 bytes Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values F
172. refer to Section destroyed 6 4 4 again pee Invalid setting was made in Logging time setting nee e Check the logging setting Time Interval specification of the i error Refer to Section 6 4 4 logging setting e After initializing the module refer f Invalid setting was made in Save Logging storage i f to Section 4 13 perform the in of the logging setting or the 7 i setting error f ee logging setting refer to Section logging setting file is destroyed Logging capacity Invalid setting was made in File e Check the logging setting Sto setting error capacity of the logging setting Refer to Section 6 4 4 P 0636h Number of saved files Invalid setting was made in No of e Check the logging setting Sto setting error saved files of the logging setting Refer to Section 6 4 4 j o Invalid setting was made in No of e Check the event setting CPU event historical PAE ees CPU event historical data of the Common setting Stop data number error event setting Refer to Section 6 5 3 data number error Lope Invalid setting was made in No of e Check the event setting Tag event historical oo tag event historical data of the Common setting Stop event setting Refer to Section 6 5 3 Time Interval monitor Invalid setting was made in No of e Check the event setting historical data number time interval event historical data Common setting Stop error of the event setti
173. sending 8 Comma Line feed 10 TMES Data character string length 19 Event number 2 E mail sending 8 Comma Line feed 4 CPES Size of data written to the event history file in the case where a CPU event occurs TGES Size of data written to the event history file in the case where a tag event occurs TMES Size of data written to the event history file in the case where a time interval event occurs App 64 App 64 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 7 5 Size for file writing by dedicated instruction The size of data written to the file by a dedicated instruction can be obtained from the following 1 WFWRITE instruction O ooo o ooa O Binary writing WFS DIN x2 Word WFS Data character string length 1 Comma 1 x DTN Line feed 1 x LINE CSV format specification LINE DTN No of columns conversion Byte WFS Data character string length 2 Comma 1 x DTN x 2 Line feed 1 x LINE specification LINE DTN x 2 No of columns x1 Data character string length is 1 to 6 depending on the specified device value x2 Data character string length is 1 to 4 depending on the specified device value WFS Size of data written to the file by the WFWRITE instruction DTN No of request data to be written in units of words LINE No of lines 2 FTPGET instruction FCS File size specified by the FTPGET instruction FCS Size of the file to which data are written by the FTPGET in
174. series in the access A request invalid for the access i Processing mode error target CPU setting Continue target CPU was sent f Refer to Section 4 6 7 e Check the U_AG_ of the buffer memory specified in Device Continue Intelligent function The specified intelligent special module error function module is faulty f monitor or Component setting e Check the CPU in the access OOESh Other data error Request data is erroneous pak Continue The request sent to the link Pa module on the access route is Link specification error to the accessible range Continue invalid Unsupported access route n a oT TS The link interruption has occurred re i e Make the module return to the OOE9h Link time out at the access target during Continue j link on the access route processing Continued on the next page e Review the access route referring Refer to Appendix 2 TROUBLE SHOOTIN 9 OU SHOOTING MELSEC Q From the previous page Error The receive buffer of the access e Check the hardware of the OOEAh Special module BUSY target is full or is not ready for intelligent special function Continue reception module The receive buffer of the access OOECh Access target BUSY target is full or is not ready for e Check the access target Continue reception Th link Make th dule return to th OOFOh Link error e request was sent to a lin e Make the module retur
175. specify 0 Number of i eee e When CSV format conversion read is specified in S 0 columns f 3 User ont Specify the number of columns from which data will be read specification im 0 Number of columns not specified Written to 1 row Other than 0 Written to the specified number of columns Specify the word or byte unit Word byte tant 0 Word 0 1 User specification 1 Byte 3 Specify a file name with a character string e Specify a name 8 characters period extension 3 characters i to File name an String User S 13 within the specified number of characters e When omitting an extension also omit a period Set the file position from where data will be read e When binary read is specified in S 0 00000000H Read from the beginning of the file 00000001H to FFFFFFFEu Read from the specified position of the j file i O ni The unit depends on the word byte File position POON FFFFFFFEH User specification i FFFFFFFFH Cannot be set f R we Ty FFFFFFFEH e When CSV format conversion read is specified in S 0 00000000H to FFFFFFFE Read from the specified row of the file S S 1 S 2 S 3 S 4 S 5 S 6 S 7 S 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q Read data Setting Setting side Device Item Setting data range Read data The read data are stored see n 1 The setting side is as follows e User Data are set by the user before execution o
176. standard ROM drive life 737000 40 7MB 18542 days 50 8 years LS Write size to logging file at one time x For calculation of the size of the data written to the standard ROM drive per day refer to Appendix 7 1 Checking standard ROM drive usage Used condition of a standard ROM drive can be checked by the number of standard ROM erasure in the buffer memory area buffer memory 10 to 11 When a standard ROM is erased frequently take appropriate measures such as stopping logging or changing the storage location of the logging file to Compact Flash card 2 Checking the Build number of Microsoft VM and downloading Microsoft VM a Checking the Build number of Microsoft VM By entering jview on the MS DOS Prompt command prompt screen the Build number of Microsoft VM can be checked as shown below x When not displayed as below Microsoft VM has not been installed and must be installed Refer to b Execution example The following is an example in which the above operation is executed on the MS DOS prompt of Microsoft Windows 98 operating system In this case the Build number of Microsoft VM is 3802 2 MS DOS Prompt Ol x auto uee Bl se al Microsoft R gt Command line Loader for Java Version 5 0 3802 Copyright lt C Microsoft Corp 1996 2000 All rights reserved Usage JView options lt classname gt arguments Options 7 displays usage text cp lt
177. test transfers a test file to the FTP server set in the FTP setting to confirm the file transfer status 4 A PING test issues the PING command to the specified external device mail server FTP server etc to confirm the existence of the external device Start Procedure 1 Access target CPU test refer to 1 Administrative menu gt Setting test lt lt Access target CPU test gt gt tab gt Access target CPU test 2 E mail sending test refer to 2 Administrative menu gt Setting test gt lt lt E mail sending test gt gt tab gt E mail sending test 3 File transfer test refer to 3 Administrative menu Setting test lt lt File transfer test gt gt tab File transfer test 4 PING test refer to 4 Administrative menu Setting test gt lt lt PING test gt gt tab PING test 6 121 6 121 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 1 Access target CPU test Conduct an access target CPU test Setting Screen cess target CPU test Access target CPU test Test Select an access target CPU and click on Test button Access target CPU 01 Control CPU z Setting Item Access target CPU Sets the access target CPU Conducts an access target CPU test Test execution Conduct an access target CPU test 1 Select the access target CPU set in the access target CPU setting Access target CPU test Test Select an access target CPU and click on Tes
178. the File open error At other than start up or setting standard ROM eee following was e Check the CF card Refer to E Pre P Section 9 1 9 es e Failed to open the logging file or event history file Continued on the next page 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC Q From the previous page Error Error definition Corrective action Error type code At start tti date the A t start up tee update e By FTP operation refer to following was detected Stop i Section 6 7 delete unnecessary e Failed to create a file File creation error At other than start up or setting update the following was detected e Failed to create a file At start up or setting update the P g up e By FTP operation refer to following was detected Section 6 7 delete unnecessary e Failed to write a file o613h Fi i Kraner cs i files to secure a free space in the ile write error other than start up or settin P 9 standard ROM or CF card files to secure a free space in the standard ROM or CF card e Check the CF card Refer to Continue Section 9 1 9 update the folowing was e Check the CF card Refer to Continue Areon Section 9 1 9 e Failed to write a file At start up or setting update the i e By FTP operation refer to following was detected Section 6 7 delete unnecessary e Failed to create a directory i i files to secure a free space in the 0614h Directory creation error At othe
179. the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic controller device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the programmable logic controller applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the programmable logic controller range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults their local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at the users discretion Microsoft Windows Windows NT are r
180. the Web browser or downloaded by FTP operation At event occurrence e mail can be sent as necessary Used to send e mail E mail function E mail transmission by PLC CPU Section 6 6 E mail transmission by event monitor function Used to transfer a file between the Web server module and external device FTP function FTP server function Section 6 7 FTP client function Access log function Used to record access from the external device to the Web server module Section 6 8 Address notification function Used to notify the external device of the Web server module address Section 6 9 Backs up restores the standard ROM formats the compact flash card and Section Data management function f performs CSV export import O k oO Section Diagnostic function Used to perform self diagnostics and connection test of the Web server module User screen creation Creates user original Web screens using the standard supplied user parts Chapter 7 function applet SSI CGI O pery 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 4 Dedicated Instruction List The following is a list of the dedicated instructions available for the Web server module St ee Reference Application Instruction Description Section E mail transmission WMSEND Section 8 2 FTPPUT Transfers PUT a file to the FTP server Section 8 3 Tag FTPGET Transfers GET a file from the FTP server Section 8 4 Issues a tag collection command Triggers a tag c
181. the card with sufficient free space For the size of the data written to the Compact Flash card refer to Appendix 7 2 When the power is turned off while data are being written to the Compact Flash card the writing will not be completed However as the Web server module automatically executes file restoration when powered on again usually the power can be turned off without performing the file access stop card lifetime limited number of 4 9 2 Setting Removal of Compact Flash card This section explains the setting removal of the Compact Flash card Setting the Compact Flash Card Setting of Compact Flash card Insert Compact Flash card Refer to Section 3 Is power ON YES Check if Compact Flash card has been set in Web server module securely If Compact Flash card setting status X1 turns ON it indicates proper setting Completed Turn PLC ON 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q Removing or Replacing the Compact Flash Card Before removing or replacing the Compact Flash card be sure to stop the file access by the following procedures Removal Replacement of Compact Flash card J Turn PLC ON Is power ON YES Stop file access and disable read from write to Compact Flash card Refer to Section 1 y Remove Compact Flash card Refer to Section 4 YES Insert a new Compact Fl
182. the device of the component setting is incorrect or component setting Refer to Stop an unusable device was specified Section 6 3 3 e After initializing the module refer The logging setting file is to Section 4 13 perform the Logging setting error l i Stop destroyed logging setting refer to Section 6 4 5 again e After initializing the module refer CPU event settin to Section 4 13 perform the g The event setting file is destroyed P Stop error CPU event setting refer to Section 6 5 3 again Component device error e After initializing the module refer ot to Section 4 13 perform the tag Tag event setting error The event setting file is destroyed Stop event setting refer to Section 6 5 3 again e After initializing the module refer Time Interval event to Section 4 13 perform the The event setting file is destroyed op pS P Stop setting error time interval event setting refer to Section 6 5 3 again e After initializing the module refer The data of the network path of Access target CPU re to Section 4 13 perform the the access target CPU setting is i Stop setting error access target CPU setting refer destroyed y j to Section 4 6 7 again At start up or setting update the following was detected z oe e By FTP operation refer to Stop e Failed to open the logging file or Section 6 7 delete unnecessary event history file A files to secure a free space in
183. the following IP address IP address 192 168 3 3 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 server address automatically Use the following DNS server address File format Use the default HTTP port number 30 Use the following HTTP port number Continued HTTP port number 1024 to 6 Register the above port No to the router s NAT FTP server setting Use the default FTP port number 21 Use the following FTP port number FTP port number 1024 to Register the above port No to the router s NAT System name setting System name fou7Iws96 1 to 32 characters Network diagnosis setting Execute network diagnoses ping Sending interval seconds 10 to 3600 Destination g external device 1 to 64 characters Automatic network connection setting at start up No connection to network at start up Automatic connection to network at start up 2 Label Setting Label Description Set value requirement Connecting through LAN or the LAN Network type __ router a NWTYPE setting Dial up to the network modem ADSL DIALUP Obtain an IP address IPTYPE IP address automatically AUTO iia Use the following IP address SPECIFY Qx e N be set x Need not be set Invalid App 21 App 21 APPENDIX MELSEC Q td Setting Label Description Set value requirement When AUTO is selected at abe mca IPADDRESS IP address When SPECIFY is selected at IP address decimal IP
184. the output signals from the PLC CPU to the intelligent function module If data is written to the System area or the Use prohibited signal is output there is a risk that the PLC system may malfunction A CAUTION e Do not bundle the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit or power lines or bring them close to each other The distance of 100mm 3 9inch or more should be ensured Failure to do so may cause malfunctions due to noise e Do not power off a station where this module is mounted and do not reset the PLC CPU while storing the settings into the standard ROM of the module using a Web browser This may make the data unstable within the standard ROM and require resetting and re storing or it may cause a failure or malfunctions of the module Installation Precautions A CAUTION e Use the PLC in the environment specified in the user s manual of the CPU module Failure to do so may cause electric shock fires malfunctions product deterioration or damage e While pressing the installation lever located at the bottom of module insert the module fixing tab into the fixing hole in the base unit until it stops Then securely mount the module with the fixing hole as a supporting point Incorrect mounting may cause malfunctions failures or a fall of the module The module should be secured with screws in an environment of frequent vibration e Before mounting dismounting the module be sure to shut o
185. the p network f Disconnect function The line is disconnected when there is no access request within the specified time limit 1 Set whether the disconnection function will be enabled or not Disable Enable 2 When the external device makes no access within the set time after connecting the web server module to the network using the disconnection function the web server module automatically sets the time to disconnect from the network 1 to 30 minutes 1 1 No access condition indicates that data is not sent from the personal computer etc on the network to the Web server module However when the personal computer that sends data periodically exists on the network and unintentional data is sent to the Web server module the Web server module judges it as access and therefore disconnection may not be made in the preset time 1 When dial up connection cannot be made normally make the default operation setting of the switch setting using GX Developer to examine the setting again Refer to Section 4 7 for the switch setting using GX Developer 2 After changing the settings make sure to click on the Save button The settings in Dial up setting are updated when the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q The following table indicates the setting necessity of the dial up setting for the network connection method here el connecti
186. to S1 15 is enabled or disabled 11 Clock set flag is stored 0 Disable 1 Enable Upper 8 bit Month 01H to 121 Lower 8 bit Year 00x to 99x Last 2 digits of the year Upper 8 bit Hour OOH to 23H Lower 8 bit Day 01H to 31h Upper 8 bit Second 00H to 59H Lower 8 bit Minute OOH to 59H Upper 8 bit Year 00H to 99x First 2 digits of the year Lower 8 bit Day of the week 00H Sun to 06H Sat Specify a file name with a character string when attaching a user data file e Specify a name 8 characters period extension 3 characters within the specified number of characters Clock data Set only when ove error occurs e When omitting an extension also omit a period 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION Function MELSEC Q A tag data logging data or user data file binary CSV is transferred to the specified destination FTP server Executing the same instruction during execution of the instruction is not allowed The second instruction will not be processed In this case even if an error is detected the completion device D 0 and completion status indication flag D 1 do not turn on An error may occur if the same file is concurrently accessed by FTPPUT and any other instruction WMSEND FTPGET WFWRITE WFREAD WFDEL Before executing instructions provide interlocks between the dedicated instructions that will access the same file This instruction is not available fo
187. to be monitored Up to four components can be specified 1 b Specify the maximum and minimum values and No of horizontal grid lines in the graph 1 1 Scale maximum 200 2 Scale minimum 0 3 No of horizontal grid lines 3 X 4 Points 20 x 5 Refresh graph 1 Specify the maximum value of the graph Can be entered as a decimal integer or real number form decimal exponential form 2 Specify the minimum value of the graph Can be entered as a decimal integer or real number form decimal exponential form 3 Specify the No of horizontal grid lines in the graph Setting range 0 to 9 4 Specify the point number of the displayed logging data Setting range 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000 10000 5 The graph is refreshed in accordance with the settings of 1 to 4 c The stored values for the components at the time of logging are displayed 1 Horizontal axis Logging date and time example 2002 08 05 08 58 17 At the left end the date and time of the oldest data in the graph display range is displayed At the right end the date and time of the latest data in the graph display range is displayed Vertical axis Value stored in the component As the maximum value the value set in Scale maximum is displayed As the minimum value the value set in Scale minimum is displayed 2 The graph lines are displayed in different colors by comp
188. to set LOWs HIGHs and CMTs as many as the quantity specified at RANGENO Failure to do so will result in an error Refer to Section 7 5 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION 3 MELSEC Q Sample screen for comment display part The following provides an example of creating the sample screen that displays the comment display parts The sample screen SMPCMTEN HTM is stored in the USER directory of the Web server module a Tag setting refer to Section 6 3 3 1 Set the component setting No 1 of the tag setting No 1 a Tag setting Home gt Administrative mem gt Tag setting gt Component setting Add Edit Delete Back Tag name item Component mine CPU zaro _ Dete type Dovie Dip tmp Ope C 1 deviceA 01 Control CPU Single word DO Decimal 0 decimal places None 2 Click on the Update button on the Setting update screen to update the setting b Creation of HTML file File name SMPCMTEN HTM The HTML source is indicated below lt DOCTYPE html PUBLIC W3C DTD HTML 4 01 Transitional EN gt lt html gt lt head gt lt meta http equiv Content Type content text html charset iso 8859 1 gt lt meta http equiv Pragma content no cache gt lt title gt Sample screen for comment display part lt title gt lt head gt lt body gt lt h1 gt Sample screen for comment display part lt h1 gt lt Communication part gt lt applet code WSCom class codebase PARTS
189. to the Web server module for the specified period of time Refer to Section 4 6 4 d Automatic disconnection after completion of dedicated instruction WMSEND FTPPUT FTPGET When the Web server module has automatically connected to the network at execution of the dedicated instruction it automatically disconnects from the network after the dedicated instruction is completed Refer to Chapter 8 e Automatic disconnection after e mail transmission or file transfer by logging function When the Web server module has automatically connected to the network at e mail transmission or file transfer it automatically disconnects from the network after e mail transmission or file transfer Refer to Section 6 4 f Automatic disconnection after e mail transmission by event function When the Web server module has automatically connected to the network at e mail transmission with Disconnect from the network after sending mail enabled in the event setting the Web server module automatically disconnects from the network after e mail transmission Refer to Section 6 5 When Disconnect from the network after sending mail was disabled in the event setting the Web server module does not disconnect from the network after e mail transmission 1 Before the Web server module is disconnected from the network a measure for the next network connection should have been taken 2 When the Web server module has automatically connected to the
190. torque range Module fixing screw usually not required M3 screw 1 x1 The module can be easily fixed onto the base unit using the hook at the top of the module However it is recommended to secure the module with the dedicated fixing screws if it is subject to significant vibration or shock 0 36 to 0 48 Nem 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 2 Set up and Procedure before Operation The following provides pre operation procedure 1 Accessing the host CPU from the Web server module Web server module personal computer IP address 192 168 3 3 IP address 192 168 3 O Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Procedures before operation i i aoe 4 Mount a battery to the Web server module Refer to Section 4 10 2 y Mount a Web server module onto the base unit Make one to one connection between the Web server Refer to Section 4 5 module and personal computer with a crossing cable to make the network setting Set various functions from the Administrative menu Refer to Chapter 6 Tag setting Logging setting Event setting Click on Update button on the Setting update Refer to Section 4 6 2 screen or power the PLC OFF and ON or reset the CPU module to update the settings on the Web server module Monitor each operation on the monitor screen to Refer to Sectio
191. type that can Single word Double word Real number be specified An error occurs when Bit or String is specified Displayed items LOGNO Line for numeric display Set to the position where Numeric display box numeric value is to be displayed e component names This line position is changeable and current values at the 1 Graph Vertical axis by clicking on a vertical line display line position 2002 07 12 10 18 00 Data 1 100 Data 2 466 Data 3 932 Display form Horizontal axis Scroll bar 2002 07 12 10 16 40 2002 07 12 10 18 50 Points 70 V 4 Logging time display box 3 Points specification display box Leftmost time Displays the oldest time data Changes the number of points within the graph display range Rightmost time Displays the current time data within the graph display range APLCOLOR 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 1 Graphic display No of graphs GRAPHNO YLINE DSPLNCOLOR AS BKOLOR ELMNO1 GRCOLOR1 pT ELMNO2 gt GRCOLOR2 ELMNO3 gt GRCOLOR3 2 Numeric display box DSPDATA DSPCOLOR Display form continue 2002 07 12 10 18 00 Data 2 Data 3 DSPBKCOLOR 3 Points specification display box DSPBOX DSPCOLOR Points DSPBKCOLOR 4 Logging time
192. values stored in the target CPU rat e Tag data monitor This screen is used to monitor tag data that has been created from the tag Fi setting screen ie Logging moniter P screen is used for logging tag data values that have been stored as a CSV Bal A n This screen is for monitoring various CPU Tag and Time Interval event Gl Event history monitor istorical data as a list This screen is for monitoring the PLC CPU operation status including error amp PLC diagnostics monitor tus and historical error data Eel Self diagnostics monitor This screen is for monitoring the QJ71WS96 operation status OPYRIGHT C 2003 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED E Done Intemet Menu items Monitors device values Tag data monitor Monitors tag data y Logging monitor Monitors logging data ES Section 6 2 Ee Event history monitor Monitors event historical data PLC diagnostics monitor Monitors PLC CPU operation status Ea Monitors PLC CPU operation staus re Self diagnostics monitor Monitors Web server module operation status 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 2 Administrative menu Screen name 44 QJ71WS96 Microsoft Internet Explorer BEE Screen name will be File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ea f 6 D 3 JBP amp amp E displayed Back Stop Refresh fone Search Favorites Media History Mail Print Edit Discuss Address Wtay 192 168
193. versions of stored pages Every visit to the page c Gi C Never u start Internet Explorer Temporary Internet files folder Current location C AWINDOWS T emporary Internet Files Amount of disk space to use 4 624 MB Move Folder View Files View Objects 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 2 The old screen the one saved in the temporary Internet files may be displayed unchanged if the file is read from the User HTML Edit screen etc In that case delete the temporary Internet files cache of the Web browser and read the file again Example In the case of Microsoft Windows 98 operating system or Microsoft Corporation s Internet Explorer 5 5 Tools gt Internet Options gt lt General gt tab gt Temporary Internet Files Delete Files gt Delete Files Screen Delete Files Delete all files in the Temporary Internet Files folder You can also delete all your offline content stored locally iE Cancel Example When using Java VM of Sun Microsystems Inc for lt applet gt Control Panel gt Java gt lt General gt tab gt Delete Files gt Delete Temporary Files Screen Delete Temporary Files Delete the following temporary files MV Downloaded Applets V Downloaded Applications MV Other Files Cancel POINT To shorten the page display time the Web browser saves one displayed pages
194. with a continue error Warning RUN The PLC CPU is running with a continue error System Error The PLC CPU is in a stop error status or cannot communicate with the target PLC CPU e g network error 1 In the QCPU Q mode function version A QCPU A mode QnACPU and ACPU a warning STOP does not occur when the PLC CPU is stopped with a continue error A system error occurs 2 When the PLC CPU returns to the status other than the specified condition the event is restored When more than one condition have been specified the event is restored when the PLC CPU returns to the status other than all the conditions Send an e mail when an event occurs 1 Set whether e mail will be sent upon event occurrence or not 2 Refer to Section 6 6 6 for e mail transmission by the event monitor function 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Disconnect from the network after sending mail Disable this setting when it is not desired to disconnect the network after sending e mail at event occurrence This setting is available when the Web server module is not continuously connected to the network Refer to Section 5 4 for the procedures for connecting to and disconnecting from the network for non continuous connection E mail main text 1 Enter the main text of e mail 0 to 256 characters 2 Refer to Appendix 4 5 for the characters applicable to the e mail main text Attached file 1 Select the file attached to the e mail None
195. write from Web browser to PLC CPU Using the standard screen or user screen device data or tag data can be written from the Web browser to the PLC CPUs While data can be written in word unit ON OFF data can be used for ON OFF operation in bit unit Web server module External device Client Requests for writing in the device test or a m MELSECNETIH etc ma 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 5 Event monitoring History display Event monitor function The Web server module can monitor the PLC CPU status CPU monitor tag data tag monitor and time time interval monitor and store the historical data of occurred events into CSV files The stored files can be displayed in a Web browser or downloaded by FTP operation The e mail transmission at event occurrence is also available 2 According to event setting Web server module performs monitoring Time interval monitor External device Client 3 Displays event histrical data on the Event history monitor Event setting Event history monitor Eventtype name name value Tag event P A P 120 pf Ecsite Date Status 28 Component condition EE Process A Temperature 30 name m llerocess al waere gt 200 02 07 01 0
196. 0 English LANGUAGE 1 1024 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 3 SSI Parts This section explains the SSI parts An SSI parts list is given below Reference Part Name Function Section By embedding an SSI part in HTML a tag component name or tag component SSI read parts y ae P 9 P 9 P Section 7 3 1 value is displayed 7 3 1 SSI read parts By embedding an SSI part in HTML a tag component name or tag component value is displayed 1 Specifications Description lt exec cgi WSReadS cgi TAGNO xx ELMNO xx MODE xx gt 2 Parameter Setting Range Initial Value Sets the tag to be displayed with the tag setting No 1 to 64 Must be set Refer to Section 6 3 3 Sets the component to be displayed with the component setting i 1 to 64 Must be set No Refer to Section 6 3 3 Selects the data type to be displayed 1 Display the 0 Display the tag component name tag component 1 Display the tag component value value 3 Sample screen for SSI read part The following provides an example of creating the sample screen that displays the SSI read parts The sample screen Smprdsen htm is stored in the USER directory of the Web server module a Tag setting refer to Section 6 3 3 1 Set the component setting No 1 of the tag setting No 1 a Tag setting Home gt Administrative mem gt Tag setting gt Component setting Add Edi Delete Back iene Component zamo CPU _ De
197. 0 08 20 19 02 75 Setting Item Logging name Selects the logging name to perform the logging monitor Specified file Selects the logging data file to perform the logging monitor Display form Selects List or Graph Loads logging data Open file Saves the logging file to the personal computer File download 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 1 Logging name a Set the logging data to perform the logging monitor b Select the tag name set in the logging setting Refer to Section 6 4 4 for the logging setting c The Logging name drop down list displays the setting No and tag names of the logging setting 2 Specified file a Set the logging data file to perform the logging monitor b Select the file from the current file and saved files of the logging data specified as the logging name Specified file product1 ies lt Present file product _ EENS 202302_00000001 CSY product1_20031008_202654_00000002 CSY product1_20031008_202714 o0000003 CS lt Saved file 3 Display form Select the display form of the logging monitor List Logging data are displayed in list form Graph Logging data are displayed in graph form 4 List Logging data are displayed in list form Display form Logging name Specified file 2 product
198. 0 100 123 PECIFICATION aaa a MELSEC Q 3 8 10 Tag status area Address 1000 to 1075 The status related to the tag function can be confirmed Refer to Section 6 3 for the tag function 1 Tag setting data Address 1000 to 1003 a This area stores information on whether tag settings have been made or not b The bit corresponding to the preset tag setting No turns on 0 Not set 1 Set b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b0 Address 1000 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 24 1 1001 32 31 1002 48 47 1003 64 63 62 61 2 Tag collection data Address 1004 to 1007 a This area stores the tag collection results b The bit corresponding to the executed tag setting No turns on 0 Not collected 1 Collected b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bd b4 b3 b2 bi bO Address 1004 16 15 14 13 1 2 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 43 21 1005 30 29 28 1006 1007 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 c Tag collection is executed at the following timings 1 At start up of the Web server module or during the collection interval time in the case that Execute at high speed has been set in the collection specification of the tag setting 2 When the dedicated instruction TAG is executed 3 When logging is performed in the case that Update before logging has been set in the collection specification
199. 00 2 hen After writing the PLC parameters to the PLC CPU power the PLC off and then on or reset the CPU module The settings made on the corresponding setting screen of the standard screen of the Web browser are enabled 5 CONNECTING WEB SERVER MODULE TO NETWORK MELSEC Q 5 4 Network connection disconnection procedures for non continuous connection This section explains the network connection and disconnection methods and their combinations and the procedures for connecting to and disconnecting from the network with sequence programs 5 4 1 Network connection and disconnection methods and their combinations This section provides the network connection and disconnection methods and their combinations 1 Network connection methods The following indicates how the Web server module connects to the network a Automatic connection at start up When Automatic connection to network at start up is set in the system setting the Web server module automatically connects to the network at a start Refer to Section 4 6 3 Connection using sequence program When Network connection request Y5 turns from OFF to ON ina sequence program the Web server module connects to the network Refer to Section 5 4 2 Automatic connection at execution of dedicated instruction WMSEND FTPPUT FTPGET When the dedicated instruction is executed the Web server module automatically connects to the network Refer to Chapter 8
200. 000 x40 o0o00 0000 0000 0000 0000 x50 ooo00 0000 0000 0000 0000 x60 o0o00 0000 0000 0000 0000 x70 o0o00 0000 0000 0000 0000 x80 ooo00 0000 0000 0000 0000 x90 oo000 0000 0000 0000 0000 xao oo000 0000 0000 0000 0000 xB0 oo0o00 0000 0000 0000 0000 xco o0o00 0000 0000 0000 0000 xno oo000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Since the monitor screens use the Java applet Java VM is required for the Web browser to execute the applet Refer to Section 3 1 2 3 for how to download Java VM 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 6 Setting from Web Browser It is required to make setting from the Web browser to use the Web server module The Web server module has the standard screen for setting monitoring the Web server module 4 6 1 Display of standard screen The following shows the display of the standard screen Although English and Japanese versions are provided when a browser in English is used the standard screen is displayed in English The language to be used will be automatically determined according to the language of the browser x When displaying the TOP page of the standard screen using an operating system and a Web browser of English version do not click on the Japanese button provided for link to the Japanese version Doing so may display an incorrect screen Z QJ71WS96 Microsoft Internet Explorer Bel File Edt View Favoites Tools Help i Specify the web one Ei a 7 server
201. 0000 For high speed logging 100 to 10000 lt 17 Size specification L KE to 512 For high speed logging 10 to 512 lt 4 l 18 Time specification fu a oo A 00 E day hour minute lt __ __ fe Saved file name M Add the name specified at File name B M Add the date lt _ _ _ M Add the time 2 Number of saved files ho a to 1000 When the number of saved files exceeds the above set value Overwrite Delete the oldest file and keep on logging Stop Stop logging External storage setting E mail delivery M Send a saved file to the following e mail address 25 gt 1 ai a EOS oe el tT E Piei gt 2 Do not send x gt 3 Do not send ea File transfer I Transfer a saved file to the following FTP server 2 Label XN mwa scription O LOGGING1 to Set the items of logging setting No 1 to 64 LOGGING64 Enter only the necessary labels Labels that are not set need not be entered App 36 App 36 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 3 Setting items ae Setting Item Description Set value requirement E tacno Tag name tag setting No 1 2 1 to 64 FILENAME File name x3 4 1 to 8 characters Ea Standard ROM ROM Save in 5 Compact Flash card SAVEIN Fixed to Compact Flash card when the label is any of LOGGINGS5 to LOGGING64 or high CF x speed logging has been set Same as the tag sampling TAG interval Timing INTERVAL TIME Fixed to
202. 01 Control CPU Single word D508 Decimal 0 decimal places None c c c c c c c c C 01 Control CPU Single word D509 Decimal 0 decimal places None 01 Control CPU Single word Decimal 0 decimal places 01 Control CPU Single word Decimal 0 decimal places 01 Control CPU Single word Decimal 0 decimal places 01 Control CPU Single word Decimal 0 decimal places 01 Control CPU Single word Decimal 0 decimal places 01 Control CPU Single word Decimal 0 decimal places 12 Delete the setting data file from the standard ROM J Completed 6 114 6 114 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 6 10 4 Data management Setting Purpose In data management the backup restore format operation using the Compact Flash card and the export import operation of the setting data file can be performed Start Procedure Administrative menu gt Data management Setting Screen cr Data management Home gt Administrative mer gt Data management Backup Execute Backing up data in standard ROM to a CompactFlash card I Setting information I Logging data I User HTML I Event history Restore Execute Restoring data in CompactFlash card to a standard ROM I Setting information I Logging data I User HTML I Event history Format Execute Formatting a CompactFlash card I Please check here to enable formatting of a CompactFlash card CSV export Execute Exporting the setting information to CS
203. 03 10 20 14 21 20 BEEE Eror onpeii Standard ROM Web server module side File Edt View Go Favorites Help Ea z x BF e ra x S Up Cut Copp Paste Undo Delete Properties Address ftp 27192 168 3 3 ROM WWW USER CSV z Go Links Name Size Type Modified x JACCOUNT CSV 116 bytes Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values File 10 21 03 4 14 PM 3 ADDRESS CSV 456 bytes Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values File 10 21 03 4 14 PM COMPONENT CSV 124 bytes Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values File 10 21 03 4 14 PM 3 CPU CSV 132bytes Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values File 10 21703 4 14 PM 3 CPUEVT CSV 222 bytes Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values File 10 21 03 4 14 PM 3 DIALUP CSY 164 bytes Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values File 10 21 03 4 14 PM 3 EMAIL CSV 175 bytes Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values File 10 21 03 4 14 PM Drag amp drop 3 EVENT CSV 31 bytes Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values File 10 21 03 4 14 PM 3 FTP CSV 45bytes Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values File 10 21 03 4 14 PM 3 IPFILTER CSY 1 04KB Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values File 10 21 03 4 14 PM X LOGGING CSV 213bytes Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values File 10 21703 4 14 PM bad SYSTEM CSV 276 bytes Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values File 10 21 03 4 14 PM 98 bytes Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values File 10 21 03 4 14 PM 3 TAGEVT CSVY 220 bytes Mic
204. 070 oY emea i ns browser iE 4 Sending e mail upon event occurrence is External device Web server S available Client E mail occurred Logging data 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 1 Event history file The following conditions can be set as event history conditions and an event history file is created for each event history condition a CPU event 1 The PLC CPU status system error RUN STOP PAUSE etc set in CPU event setting of the event setting is monitored 2 Storage File name CPUWATCH CSV e Storage location Standard ROM ROM WWW EVENT 3 File format Refer to Section 6 2 4 2 for details of each item Data Event number Status CPU name ___ Operation status E mail sending CR LF 2002 11 29 12 15 00 1 Occurrence 01 Control CPU Warning RUN _ Complete CR LF 2002 11 29 12 30 00 Restoration 01 Control CPU Warning STOP CR LF a b Tag event 1 The tag data collected by the Web server module and set in Tag event setting of the event setting is compared with the condition value lt gt lt lt gt gt 2 Storage e File name TAGWATCH CSV e Storage location Standard ROM ROM WWW EVENT 3 File format Refer to Section 6 2 4 3 for details of each item Data Event number Status Tag name Component name Condition 2002 11 29 12 15 00 1 Occurrence 01 Tag data 1 01
205. 12 TIME N 4 10 10 2 FTP B o J5 O o _ No 0 C Item row Cannot be set by the user Ezi Label column Setting area Set by the user E mo JOVERWAME 1 fo mo fo OvERWRITE 2___ NO no no Jo App 35 App 35 APPENDIX MELSEC Q pte scription Logging setting gE Lo ir ome gt Administrative memu gt Logging setting No fo z Tag name 04 processa E File name processa CSV 1 to 8 characters Save in Standard ROM FA cstandard ROM can be selected for saving the setting No 1 to 4 only Schedule setting Timing Same as the tag sampling interval Interval specification bo i o 86400 oA C Time specification TEZ oH hour minute s 4 Ka Condition for Start Start at start up Do not start Start at the specified time after event occurrence CPU event setting 001 afte seconds 0 to 32767 Tag event setting o after 0 seconds 0 to Timer etting No after seconds 0 to 32 Start at the specified time g o 00 Be hour minute second lt 4 i Condition for Stop Do not stop Stop at the specified time after event occurrence CPU event setting No 91 after 60 Y seconds 0 to 32767 File format C Tag event setting Continued Time Interval event setting C Stop at the specified time 00 ad oo a ad hour minute seco Saved file setting File capacity Specification for number of lines 1000 _ Lines 1 to 1
206. 124 Malm Phone 46 0 40 35 86 00 Fax 46 0 40 35 86 02 e mail info beijer se ECONOTEC AG Postfach 282 CH 8309 N rensdorf Phone 41 0 1 838 48 11 Fax 41 0 1 838 48 12 e mail info econotec ch SWITZERLAND GTS Dar laceze Cad No 43 Kat 2 TR 80270 Okmeydani Istanbul Phone 90 0 212 320 1640 Fax 90 0 212 320 1649 e mail gts turk net TURKEY CSC Automation Ltd UKRAINE 15 M Raskova St Fl 10 Office 1010 UA 02002 Kiev Phone 380 0 44 238 83 16 Fax 380 0 44 238 83 17 e mail csc a csc a kiev ua Electrotechnical RUSSIA Systems Siberia Shetinkina St 33 Office 116 RU 630088 Novosibirsk Phone 7 3832 22 03 05 Fax 7 3832 22 03 05 e mail info eltechsystems ru Elektrostyle ul Garschina 11 RU 140070 Moscow Phone 7 095 514 9316 Fax 7 095 514 9317 e mail info estl ru Elektrostyle Krasnij Prospekt 220 1 Office No 312 RU 630049 Novosibirsk Phone 7 3832 10 66 18 Fax 7 3832 10 66 26 e mail info estl ru ICOS RUSSIA Industrial Computer Systems Zao Ryazanskij Prospekt 8a Office 100 RU 109428 Moscow Phone 7 095 232 0207 Fax 7 095 232 0327 e mail mail icos ru NPP Uralelektra ul Sverdlova 11a RU 620027 Ekaterinburg Phone 7 34 32 53 27 45 Fax 7 34 32 53 27 45 e mail elektra etel ru SSMP Rosgidromontazh Ltd 23 Lesoparkovaya Str RU 344041 Rostov On Don Phone 7 8632 36 00 22 Fax
207. 192 168 3 3 i TTL 64 Reply from 192 168 3 b i TTL 64 Reply from 192 168 ime TTL 64 Reply from 192 168 3 i TIL 64 Ping statistics for 192 168 3 3 Packets Sent 4 Received 4 Lost lt z loss gt Approximate round trip times in milli seco Minimum ims Maximum ims Average N gt M2 MS DOS Prompt AIE Aw 3 se al Microsoft R gt Windows 98 O gt Copyright Microsoft Corp 1981 1999 IC WINDOWS gt cd C gt ping 192 168 3 3 Pinging 192 168 3 3 with 32 bytes of data Request timed out Request timed out Requ timed out Request timed out Ping statistics for 192 168 3 3 Packets Sent 4 Received Lost 4 100x loss Approximate round trip times in milli seconds Minimum ms Maximum ms Average Gms N gt When normally completed When abnormally completed 6 127 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION This chapter explains the user screen creation function 7 1 User Screen Creation Function 7 1 1 User screen creation function The user screen creation function allows users to display a user original monitor screen in the Web browser by creating an HTML file and registering it into the Web server module Describing a Mitsubishi supplied user part applet SSI or CGI part in HTML displays tag data or logging data on the user screen The Mitsubishi supplied user parts are indicated below Reference Outline
208. 2 Clicking on the Clear history button clears the historical data of the CPU event history file CPUWATCH CSV b No of tag event historical data 1 Set the number of tag event historical data 1 to 1000 lines For the processing performed when the number of tag event historical data is exceeded refer to Section 6 5 1 2 2 Clicking on the Clear history button clears the historical data of the tag event history file TAGWATCH CSV c No of time interval event historical data 1 Set the number of time interval event historical data 1 to 1000 lines For the processing performed when the number of time interval event historical data is exceeded refer to Section 6 5 1 2 2 Clicking on the Clear history button clears the historical of the time interval event history file TIMWATCH CSV 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 CPU event setting Make setting to monitor the operation status of the PLC CPU Up to 64 CPU event settings are available CPU event setting screen Home gt Administrative mer gt Event setting gt CPU event setting pp Event setting Common setting cru event si setting Tag ge CPU event setting E Delete isin cabal INS Nona STOF Nona RUN Warming STOP Wanne RUN sytem enor PAUSE caer 1 O1 Control CPU 5 seconds Set Not set Not set Not set Not set Notset Do not send setting Time Interval event setting C 2 O1 Control CPU 5 seconds Not set Not set Set No
209. 2 11 07 10 13 14 QJ71WS96 FTP login 192 168 3 1 17 2002 11 07 10 13 16 QJ71WS96 FTP login 192 168 3 1 18 2002 11 07 10 13 19 QJ71WS96 FTP login failure 192 168 3 1 19 2002 11 07 10 13 24 QJ71WS96 FTP login failure 192 168 3 1 20 2002 11 07 10 14 08 QI71WS96 FTP login 192 168 3 1 Setting Item Displays the time when access was made Displays the user name who made access Displays the operation performed for access Source IP address Displays the IP address of the access source Clears the access log Up to 500 records can be saved by the access log 1 Time The time when access was made is displayed Example 2002 07 18 19 42 01 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC O 2 User name a The user name who made access is displayed b Set the user name in the account setting Refer to Section 4 6 5 for the account setting 3 Operation The following table explains the operations performed for access setting was made FTP setting FTP setting was made E mail setting E mail setting was made Event setting Event setting was made Address notification setting Data was restored from the Compact Flash card 4 Source IP address The IP address of the access source is displayed in decimal Example 192 168 3 1 Address notification setting was made 5 Precautions for using the access log function Though several login records may be registered for one login it is not an error because several logins
210. 3 3 3 3 3 2 j 2 o o Jo o o o Jo JO JO Jo oO gt jg 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 So 3 g z l Sls g g lg g S S S S g S g g g 2 S 5 SIS 5 JS IS IS 1S JR IS 2 g o Jo InN lo jaja Jo r 3 je D gt jo jN O jo Jo o Jo Jo Jo Jo Jo jo 1 15 2 2 2 Q IR IR IR IR IR IR IR IR a ea 3 3 3 3 3 o o o jo Jo jo Jo jo ha Qa atoll DSR e IO 10 JO 10 JO 190 Oo O 9 D Q o lo o o l 6 j jo JO jo Jo j D fe o j o o ja jajajajajajaja Q ajaja 2 jo jo o jo jo jo jo o to o o o to 3376 to 3999 Use prohibited System area 4000 to 4003 Access target CPU setting data 4004 to 4007 Access target CPU error data Access target 4008 CPU setting Th it f h is th that of th 3 8 17 composition of each area is the same as that of the 8 status Access target CPU 2 to 64 p 4009 to 4071 access target CPU 1 error code error code Refer to 5 for assignment of each area 407210 4999 Use prohibited_ Systemarea S o o oi Continued on the next page gt fo O D N 7 D x iS D 2 O U c amp ae D 3 fe S Q fe Q D Section 3 SPECIFICATIONS 5365 to 5984 E mail transmission status E mail transmission status 1 MELSEC Q From the preceding page Address oak i Reference 7 Application Name Initial value Decimal section MjIJZIZIZIZI ZIiz 3 Jeo fe fe Je jefe Q 3 3 3 3 3 3 o lolo lololo O
211. 32767 C Execute at high speed Interval 1 x100 milliseconds 1 to 600 T Update before logging Data write Disable Enable Label O Description Set the items of tag setting No 1 to 64 EH TAGi to TAG64 Enter only the necessary labels Labels that are not set need not be entered 3 Setting items Setting Item Description Set value ee ct acna O E TAGNAME Tagname o name Within 16 characters 16 characters aa EE E SAMPLING Sampling EXECUTE HIGHSPEED O Must be set x Need not be set Invalid App 31 App 31 APPENDIX MELSEC Q bow Setting Item Description Set value Pa uirement When NOT is selected at Blank SAMPLING i EXECUTE is sel INTERVAL Aen RES UTE is Coleco at e a aa ani Ee SAMPLING When HIGHSPEED is sel SN PIGS sl Tenn urie 100r8 1 to 600 196001008 x 100ms at SAMPLING Update before Mark ES IEJ BEFORE LOGGING k oe ogging Donotmak O WRITE Data write ENBE O COMPNUM Number of components 0 to 64 Must be set x Need not be set _ x1 Execute at high speed can be registered to only one tag An error will result if multiple high speed sampling tags are set App 32 App 32 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 6 7 COMPONENT CSV Tag setting Component setting 1 File format Filename COMPONENT CSV File contents Tag setting Component setting Refer to Section 6 3 3 COMPONENTI m2 COMPONENT
212. 41 to 42 This area stores the total time of connection to the network from the start up time of the Web server module Unit Minute 13 LAN connection time Address 43 to 44 Modem connection time Address 45 to 46 ADSL connection time Address 49 to 50 This area stores the time of the network connection for each connection method Unit Minute 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 14 Current connection time Address 53 to 54 This area stores the time of current connection to the network Unit Minute 15 Network setting status of Web server module Address 55 to 68 This area stores the setting status of the network where the Web server module is currently connected a IP address Address 55 to 56 b Subnet mask Address 57 to 58 c Default gateway Address 59 to 60 d DNS server address 1 Address 61 to 62 e DNS server address 2 Address 63 to 64 f HTTP port number g Connection method Address 66 This area stores the method of connection to the network 0 LAN connection 1 Modem connection 3 ADSL connection h Access point Address 67 This area stores the access point of the Internet service provider as the access point setting number on the Dial up setting screen 1 to 3 Access point setting number i FTP port number Address 68 16 Number of disconnections from user screen number of disconnections by line disconnection part Address 69 This area stores the cumulative
213. 5 Occurrence 01 Control CPU ormal STOP None 11 07 2002 11 02 30 1 Restoration 01 Control CPU ormalRUN 1 07 2002 11 02 35 Occurrence 01 Control CPU ormal STOP None 1 07 2002 11 02 40 Restoration D1 Control CPU Normal RUN Five lines of event historical data from the oldest are deleted and the latest data is stored in the Date Event number Status CPU name Operation status E mail sending 1 07 2002 11 02 20 Restoration 01 Control CPU Normal RUN sixth line 1 07 2002 11 02 25 Occurrence 01 Control CPU Normal STOP None 1407 2002 11 02 30 Restoration 01 Control CPU Normal RUN 1407 2002 11 02 35 Occurrence 01 Control CPU Normal STOP None 1407 2002 11 02 40 Restoration 01 Control CPU Normal RUN so 11 07 2002 11 02 45 1 Occurrence 01 Control CPU Normal STOP None 6 5 2 Setting procedure for event monitor function The setting procedure for using the event monitor function is indicated below Create a network environment for Web server module to access the Web server module from a personal Refer to computer Section 4 6 y Make access target CPU setting on the Access Refer to target CPU setting Section 4 6 7 y When monitoring tags or sending tag data by e mail Refer to make tag setting on the Tag setting Section 6 3 3 When sending logging data by e mail make the Refer to setting on the Logging set
214. 6 3 3 for the tag setting When the tag component test is attempted the following screen appears Tag data monitor Disable is set in Data Write in T ag setting Enter Enable to Data Write in Tag setting and re execute ERR 0909h Warming Applet Window 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 6 2 3 Logging monitor Setting Purpose This monitoring function displays the logging data that have been collected by the Web server module with the logging function Refer to Section 6 4 for the logging function The display form is selectable from List or Graph The contents of the logging file located under ROM WWW LOGGING or CF LOGGING are displayed Start Procedure Monitor screen gt Logging monitor list gt Select Graph as Display form gt Logging data graph Setting screen Eel Logging monitor Home gt Monitor screen gt Logging monitor Display form List z Load Logging name Specified file 2 production mngmt X product1 CS gt Open file Date product x I product B x product C product D x 2003 10 08 20 04 02 0 0 0 2003 10 08 20 05 02 10 5 2003 10 08 20 06 02 20 10 2003 10 08 20 07 02 30 16 2003 10 08 20 08 02 40 20 2003 10 08 20 09 02 50 256 2003 10 08 20 10 02 60 30 2003 10 08 20 11 02 70 36 2003 10 08 20 12 02 80 40 2003 10 08 20 13 02 90 45 2003 10 08 20 14 02 50 2003 10 08 20 15 02 55 2003 10 08 20 16 02 60 2003 10 08 20 17 02 65 2003 10 08 20 18 02 70 2003 1
215. 6 Web server module hereafter referred to as the Web server module When applying the following program examples to the actual system make sure to examine the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems 1 1 Features This section explains the features of the Web server module 1 Remote monitoring of PLC CPU via Internet The Web server function allows users to monitor PLC CPUs at a remote location using a commercially available Web browser on a personal computer connected to the Internet Intranet Internet General public line Internet service provider ISP Internet service provider ISP 2 Accesses from personal computer to Web server module Intranet Factory Production site Personal computer 1 Web server module collects device data 3 Using Web browser Be ign gage toy gga ie pear aim aim ge controls and monitors the PLC field devices 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 2 Collection Display of tag data Tag function A set of individual PLC CPU s device data on a network is entered as a tag and the Web server module collects those device data in tag unit The collected data can be displayed in a Web browser by specifying a tag name 2 Collects device data in tag unit according to the tag setting Web server module External device 3 Specifies a tag Client nam
216. 61 RS 232 connection cccceeceeseeeseeeteeeteeeeeees 4 10 RS 232 CONNECHON ceccecceeseeeteseeeeeesseesseeeeees 3 5 Self diagnostics fUNCTION ceceeeeereeeeeee 4 47 Self diagnostics monitor 008 6 20 7 46 Setting from Web browse ccceeeeees 4 16 Setting test s n As les win adtieda iia ahs 6 121 Setting update eee eeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeteeeeeeeteeeaes 4 20 Setting Removal of Compact Flash Card 4 51 Set up and procedure before operation 4 2 SMT A a A T A 23 SMTP Servel sietni aa 6 70 Software specifications eeeeseeeeeseeee eee 3 2 SSFpanS rran Aniara a TAa SIN ade 7 47 Index 2 SSI read pants deitate ei ena aaa 7 47 System configuration 2 1 System configuration for initial setting maintenance and inspection s s s 2 4 System MOon ItOr ce eeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 9 11 System Setting cececeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 18 4 22 T DEE a PEET E ATE E ehh aan A 23 Tag Component test 00 eeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeeeees 6 7 Tag data monitor ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 6 7 42 Tag event setting eee eeeeeeseeteeeteeteeeneees 6 58 Tag fUNCTION ceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeteeeeteeeeees 6 6 6 26 TAG instruction 8 15 Tag Settings sini oie ie ies 6 28 Time data handling 3 57 Time Interval event Setting ce eeeeeeeeees 6 62 Transmission and I F specifications 3 1 Trouble shooting 9 1 U UPAR sar
217. 64 Data block parts 2 Level display parts TAGNO ELMNO TAGNO ELMNO RANGENO 3 Graphic display parts LOW1 to LOW5 HIGH1 to HIGHS PICTURE1 to PICTURES File not set not displayed TAGNO ELMNO RANGENO 4 Comment display parts LOW1 to LOW5 HIGH1 to HIGHS CMT1 to CMT5 File not set not displayed Historical h displ LOGNO istorical gra ispla sap pay GRAPHNO 5 parts ELMNO1 to ELMNO5 ae LOGNO Historical data display XNO 6 parts ELMNO1 to ELMNO10 a jo fa Joa jo fo e a E a T os App 14 App 14 APPENDIX App 15 MELSEC Q 1 When the above user parts are used on the module whose first 5 digits of serial No are 05111 or earlier they operate with the initial values indicated above x2 Be sure to set ELMNO1 Failure to do so will result in an error Set ELMNO1 to ELMNO64 consecutively Failure to do so will result in an error x3 Be sure to set LOWs HIGHs and PICTUREs as many as the quantity specified at RANGENO Failure to do so will result in an error x4 Be sure to set LOWs HIGHs and CMTs as many as the quantity specified at RANGENO Failure to do so will result in an error 5 Be sure to set ELMNOs as many as the graph lines specified at GRAPHNO Failure to do so will result in an error x6 Be sure to set ELMNOs as many as the quantity specified at XNO Failure to do so will result in an error Deletion of temporary Internet files When the Web server module has been re
218. 8 App 18 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 3 How to use the setting information file formats The following describes how to use the setting information file formats given in this section and later Indicates the file name and corresponding setting screen Indicates the setting screen corresponding to the label column and item row in the file format and its explanation Indicates the setting screen name and set value input condition APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 6 6 TAG CSV Tag setting 1 File format TAG CSV Tag setting Refer to Section 6 3 3 File format Label TAG 1 to TAG64 N Item Description ITEM __ TAGNAME SAMPLING _ INTERVAL BEFORE LOGGING WRITE TAG1 LineA EXECUTE 10 NO ENABLE TAG2 LineB HIGHSPEED 1 NO ENABLE TAGS Line C NOT YES ENABLE TAG64 Line D EXECUTE 1 NO DISABLE E ttem row Label column Setting area Set by the user Cannot be set by the user Tag setting Tag senting No E Tag name fine T wii 16 charg Sampling C Not execute ga Execute Interval 10 seconds 1 to 32767 lt 100 milliseconds 1 to 600 C Execute at high speed Interval gt Update before logging Data write Disable Enable 2 Label Description Set the items of tag setting No 1 to 64 Enter only the necessary labels Labels that are not set need not be entered requirement 3 Setting items Set value
219. 82 e mail krakow mopl pl AutoCont CZECH REPUBLIC Control Systems s r o Nemocnicni 12 CZ 702 00 Ostrava 2 Phone 420 59 6152 111 Fax 420 59 6152 562 e mail consys autocont cz louis poulsen DENMARK industri amp automation Geminivej 32 DK 2670 Greve Phone 45 0 70 10 15 35 Fax 45 0 43 95 95 91 e mail pia lpmail com UTU Elektrotehnika AS P rnu mnt 160i EE 11317 Tallinn Phone 372 0 6 51 72 80 Fax 372 0 6 51 72 88 e mail utu utu ee ESTONIA Beijer Electronics OY FINLAND Ansatie 6a FIN 01740 Vantaa Phone 358 0 9 886 77 500 Fax 358 0 9 886 77 555 e mail info beijer fi UTECO A B E E 5 Mavrogenous Str GR 18542 Piraeus Phone 302 0 10 42 10 050 Fax 302 0 10 42 12 033 e mail sales uteco gr GREECE Meltrade Automatika Kft 55 Harmat St HU 1105 Budapest Phone 36 0 1 2605 602 Fax 36 0 1 2605 602 e mail office meltrade hu HUNGARY SIA POWEL Lienes iela 28 LV 1009 Riga Phone 371 784 22 80 Fax 371 784 22 81 e mail utu utu lv LATVIA Sirius Trading amp Services srl ROMANIA Str Biharia No 67 77 RO 013981 Bucuresti 1 Phone 40 0 21 201 1146 Fax 40 0 21 201 1148 e mail sirius siriustrading ro INEA d o o SLOVENIA Stegne 11 SI 1000 Ljubljana Phone 386 0 1 513 8100 Fax 386 0 1 513 8170 e mail inea inea si Beijer Electronics AB SWEDEN Box 426 S 20
220. 9 00 00 Occurrence Process a water level gt 02 07 01 12 55 10 Occurrence Process A Pressure gt Tee gt 02 07 02 14 10 00 Occurrence Process A Temperature 1 Makes event setting using Web z F o a __ browser J E 4 Sending e mail upon event occurrence is External device Web server ae available Client E mail a Keres Tag data Logging data occurred 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 6 Storage of logging data before and after event occurrence Logging Web server ee occurrence After event occurrence logging stops in specified time function By setting the occurrence of an event as the start stop condition of logging logging data before and after event occurrence can be stored This enables only necessary data to be stored without the logging data before and after event occurrence being buried in the file 2003 11 01 13 54 00 2003 11 01 13 54 14 oo 2003 11 01 13 54 34 2003 11 01 13 54 44 2003 11 01 13 54 54 J 2003 11 01 13 56 04 J 2003 11 01 13 55 14 Data before and after 2003 11 01 13 55 34 always located in the 2009 11 01 13 55 44 latest positions 2003 11 01 13 55 54 2003 11 01 13 56 04 2003 11 01 13 56 14 2003 11 01 13 56 24 2003 11 01 13 56 34 2003 11 01 13 56 44 2003 11 01 13 56 54 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 7 Data transmiss
221. 99 This area stores the error logs of failed file transfer The error log area is composed of 16 portions of the same data arrangement 1 Error code This area stores the error code that indicates the error status Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code 2 Destination e This area stores the destination FTP server No when a communication error occurs e The destination FTP server No is set in the FTP server setting 3 Transferred file name This area stores the transferred file name in ASCII code 4 Date and Time This area stores the date and time of file transfer in BCD code b15 to b8 b7 to bO Address 6008 to 6019 Error log 1 6020 to 6031 Error log 2 1 1 1 1 eo Ay 1 1 1 1 1 1 6188 to 6199 Error log 16 N Error code Destination Transferred file name 7 11 Year 00 to 99u first 2 digits Year 00 to 99n last 2 digits Day 01h to 31h Minute 00x to 591 Day of the week 0x to 6x Date and time 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 4 Transfer log storage area for normal completion The transfer log of normally completed file transfer can be confirmed a Number of writes for transfer log Address 6200 1 2 This area stores the cumulative number of registrations to the transfer log area This area stores the transfer log when the Web server module transferred PUT a file to the FTP server normally b Transfer log write pointer Address 6201
222. A2UCPU S1 A2USCPU A2USCPU S1 A2ZASCPU A2ASCPU S1 A2ASCPU S30 AZUSHCPU S1 ASNCPU A3ACPU A3UCPU and A4UCPU Abbreviation for Control amp Communication Link Ethernet Generic term for 1OOBASE TX 10BASE T 10BASE5 and 10BASE2 network systems Ethernet module Abbreviation for E71 QE71 or Q series corresponding E71 E71 Generic term for AJ71E71N3 T AJ71E71N B5 AJ71E71N B2 A1SJ71E71N3 T A1SJ71E71N B5 and A1SJ71E71N B2 GX Developer Generic product name for product types SWnD5C GPPW E SWnD5C GPPW EA SWnD5C GPPW EV and SWnD5C GPPW EVA n indicates Version 4 or later EA means a volume license product and EV an upgraded product MELSECNET H Abbreviation for Q corresponding MELSECNET H network system MELSECNET 10 Abbreviation for AnU or QnA Q4AR corresponding MELSECNET 10 network system QCPU A mode Generic term for QOD2CPU A QOD2HCPU A and QO6HCPU A QCPU Q mode Generic term for QOOJCPU QOO0CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU QO02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU Generic term for AJ71QC24 AJ71QC24 R2 AJ71QC24 R4 A1SJ71QC24 A1SJ71QC24 R2 AJ71QC24N AJ71QC24N R2 AJ71QC24N R4 A1SJ71QC24N and A1SJ71QC24N R2 Generic term for AJ71QE71N3 T AJ71QE71N B5 AJ71QE71N B2 A1SJ71QE71N3 T A1SJ71QE71N B5 and A1SJ71QE71N B2 Generic term for Q2ACPU Q2ACPU S1 Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU and Q4ARCPU Q series co
223. AIL1 EMAIL2 EMAIL3 EMAIL4 EMAIL5 NO NO y EMAIL6 Label column Cannot be set by the user Setting area Set by the user App 46 App 46 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Event setting CPU event setting A Event setting Home gt Administrative mem gt Event setting gt CPU event setting gt Edit screen Common setting CPU event setting Tag event setting TimnefInterval event setting CPU event settingtedity Save Back Masa CPU event setting No 01 E CPU name 01 Control CPU Interval 5 seconds 1 to 86400 cE Normal STOP I Normal RUN E WRG vanne stor Warming RUN HA ES System error I PAUSE El Mail setting for event occurrence PT Send an e mail when an event occurs PM Disconnect from the network after sending mail E mail main text File format Continued 01 line 1 B ta 01 pre 7 lt 4 ib Eor E ME a a i bi 29 18 ieee ner 945 19 gt 04 i b 27 PAo gt 05 A 28 PA gt 06 a 29 22 D Pi 30 23 p gt 08 Pi 31 E Label Label Description Saar to Set the items of CPU event setting No 1 to 64 EE Evre Enter only the necessary labels Labels that are not set need not be entered 3 Setting items Setting Item Description Set value requirement mc CPUNO CPU name Access target CPU setting No 1 1 to 64 ee ae Inteval 0 86400 unit seconds O Mark ee EJ Nstop Normal STOP onot
224. Back Load Tag name f 02 production mnamt Fa Component setting No jor Component name fproductA within 16 characters CPU name 01 Control CPU E Data type Single word Number of characters Fa to 32 Device pso CO O Display form Decimal Number of decimal places 0 0 to 6 Operator None NNN 32768 10 32707 Setting Item o Sets a mathematical operation to be performed for the collected data or no mathematical ratoN operation to be performed Set the numeric value to be mathematically operated for the collected data pe Saves the setting Savel The settings are updated when the Update button on the Setting update screen is clicked the PLC powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset Up to setting number 1 can be selected 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q a Component name within 16 characters 1 Set the component name 2 Refer to Appendix 4 5 for the characters applicable to the component name b CPU name 1 Set the access target CPU 2 Selects the CPU name set in the access target CPU setting Refer to Section 4 6 7 for the access target CPU setting 3 The CPU name drop down list displays the setting No and CPU names of the access target CPU setting Example 01 Control CPU 4 By default the host CPU of the Web server module is set as the access target CPU setting No 1 5 When Sampling Execute at high speed
225. Bis tes Execution of the device test was 41 55 Device write disable i e Turn off Device write disable i attempted when Device write Display device test error R request YA and execute again disable request YA is on Display Device write disable Execution of the tag component tt De i e Turn off Device write disable tag component test test was attempted when Device Display es request YA and execute again error write disable request YA is on Write disable setting Execution of the tag component e Set Enable to Data write in 0909h tag component test test when Disable was set to the tag setting and execute Display error Data write in the tag setting again Refer to Section 6 3 3 gong System error System error 21 a oaooh gt f osprey e Check File access status X2 Access log open error Failed to open the access log e Execute File access stop cancel Display Y3 Refer to Section 3 6 2 e Check File access status X2 Access log read error Failed to read the access log e Execute File access stop cancel Display Y3 Refer to Section 3 6 2 f e Check File access status X2 Access log registration f Failed to register the access log e Execute File access stop cancel Display Y3 Refer to Section 3 6 2 e Check File access status X2 Access log close error Failed to close the access log e Execute File access stop cancel Display Y3 Refer to Section 3 6 2
226. Bul 1 2 SOtting M E E A A R 6 121 6 11 3 PING test by IBM PC AT compatible personal computer ecceseeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeteeeeaeeeeeeeenees 6 127 7 1 User Screen Creation FUNCtion ccccecceeceeccecceceeseeeeceeeeeeeaecaecaeeeaeeaecaeeaeseaesaesaesaeeaesaeseeeaesaesaeeeeseaeeats 7 1 7 1 1 User screen creation fUlcCtion ssassn aaa A A R 7 1 7 1 2 Precautions for user screen Creation FUNCTION 00 2 eeceeeceeeeteeeteeeteeeeeeeeeeteeeteeteeteeeseeseeeseneeeneeaaes 7 2 Fed E RAMUS si Sarcu ace eazev ice dsc E ase EE E E ET E E E 7 3 7 2 1 Method of Describing Applet Parts in HTML cece eeceseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeseeesaeseeeeeeeseneeaes 7 4 72 2 Data DIOCK Palit lt 2 3 inet er nen een ae aera teen atone A tan aone ele 7 6 2 3 Level display Darts ie v is ce ne el a Asin AS nh al MAG a a a ne a eneds 7 10 72 4 Graphic display Parts a a aa E a ae nee aE aaa eee Eaa aa aa Aaaa raaa aa S painaa a aata 7 14 7 2 5 Comment display parts ccccccccececceseeseceeceeeeeeeaecaeceeeeaecaecaeseeeeaesaesaeseaeeaesaeseeseaesaesaeseeseesaeseeseateaees 7 17 T26 Audio parts rnnr n alert a a aa aa aia a a 7 21 7 2 7 Historical graph display PariS saraa raa araa RA AA ERE EE AREI I AE TR 7 27 7 2 8 Historical data display Parts areara iiir iii Ai 7 32 259 AN MO DURON OSa a ole ola le ait 7 36 71210 Device monitor Pants ss a aa A A A A 7 41 F214 Tag Gata montor pantser r Ea a ERE ETEEN EARN EE E KERATAN nares 7 42 7 2
227. COLOR lt param name ELMBKCOLOR lt param name TIMECOLOR lt param name TMBKCOLOR lt param name APLCOLOR lt param name ITEMWIDTH lt param name NALIGNMENT lt param name IALIGNMENT lt applet gt lt body gt lt html gt c Storage of HTML file value 1 gt value 5 gt value 1 gt value 2 gt value 3 gt value 4 gt value 5 gt value Black gt value White gt value Black gt value White gt value Black gt value White gt value Gray gt value 100 gt value 1 gt value 2 gt Transfer the HTML file to the Web server module by performing FTP operation File storage destination ROM WWW USER SMPHSDEN HTM MELSEC Q 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q d Sample screen display Display the sample screen Example When accessing the Web server module by one to one connection Sample screen address http 192 168 3 3 USER SMPHSDEN HTM Sample screen for historical data display part Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ea e eh Ala m alB 34 Back Stop Refresh Home Search Favorites Histoy Mail Print Edt Discuss Address hitp 192 168 3 3 user SMPHSDEN HTM Go Links zj P P Sample screen for historical data display part device A device B device C device D device E 2002 11 14 20 04 01 ssf ISH IS 1m 12195 4 2002 11 14 20 04 02 7o so nh 13109 15109 2002 11 14 20 04 03 10236
228. CPU side Q series E71 or QE71 Also set parameters in the Station No lt gt IP information of the Q series corresponding E71 or QE71 At that time specify any of the IP address computation system table exchange system and use together system as the Station No lt gt IP information system x2 Use the access target CPU side QnACPU or QE71 of 9707B year and month of manufacture or later x3 Use the access target CPU side CC Link master local module of software version S or later App 3 App 3 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 3 Accessible device Device 1 QCPU QCPU Function input FX x x x Function output FY Current value C CN 4 ss ii SC Current value C CN 4 Retentive timer eae mw y ox V ee ions O 8 x Link output Jn Y 6 Link relay Jn B 6 Link direct device Link register Jn W 6 Link special register Jn SW 6 App 4 APPENDIX MELSEC Q x1 The local devices and the file registers for individual programs of the Q QnA series PLC CPU are not accessible by specifying the program name Do not use the local device and file registers for individual programs since correct read write may not be available x2 Specify SM for the QOPU Q mode QnACPU or specify M9000 or later for the QCPU A mode ACPU 3 Specify SD for the QOPU Q mode QnACPU or specify D9000 or later for the QCPU A mode ACPU 4 The device name can be specified by using either symbol x5 Sp
229. Cancel Discards the changed setting and returns to the time interval event setting screen Select time interval event setting No and click on Load Loads the parameters of the No selected in time interval event setting No and displays them on the Edit screen a Time interval For the timing at which an event occurs select either of the following 1 Time specification e An event occurs at the specified time Hour 0 to 23 Per Minute 0 to 59 Per Per minute can be specified only when Per hour is specified Second 0 to 59 e An event does not occur when the Web server module is started 2 Interval specification An event occurs once when the Web server module is started or when the setting is updated and thereafter at the specified interval 1 to 86400 seconds b Send an e mail when an event occurs 1 Set whether e mail will be sent upon event occurrence or not 2 Refer to Section 6 6 6 for e mail transmission by the event monitor function c Disconnect from the network after sending mail Disable this setting when it is not desired to disconnect the network after sending e mail at event occurrence This setting is available when the Web server module is not continuously connected to the network Refer to Section 5 4 for the procedures for connecting to and disconnecting from the network for non continuous connection d E mail main text 1 Enter the main text of e mail 0 to 256 characters 2
230. Check File access status X2 Display e Execute File access stop cancel Y3 Refer to Section 3 6 2 e Check File access status X2 Display e Execute File access stop cancel Y3 Refer to Section 3 6 2 e Check File access status X2 Display e Execute File access stop cancel Y3 Refer to Section 3 6 2 e Check File access status X2 Display e Execute File access stop cancel Y3 Refer to Section 3 6 2 e Check File access status X2 e Execute File access stop cancel Y3 Refer to Section 3 6 2 e Check File access status X2 Display Display e Execute File access stop cancel Y3 Refer to Section 3 6 2 e Check the device in the Display component setting Refer to Section 6 3 3 e Check the data type of the Display component setting Refer to Section 6 3 3 e Specify another user name Refer to Section 4 6 5 e Enter at least one more user Display Display account with administrator f Display authority before deletion Refer to Section 4 6 5 Display e Check the component setting of the high speed sampling tag refer to Section 6 3 3 and Display make setting so that the total device points do not exceed 96 points Continued on the next page 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC Q From the previous page Error code Duplicate high speed sampling tag specification error 0A12h High speed sampling tag CPU specification erro
231. Component datat gt 2002 11 29 12 30 00 aw f Restoration l 01 Tag data1 01 Component data1 gt Trigger value Component value E mail sending CR LF mw i CRLF oF EJ tr c Time Interval event 1 The time or interval set in Time Interval event setting of the event setting is monitored 2 Storage e File name TIMWATCH CSV e Storage location Standard ROM ROM AWWW EVENT 3 File format Refer to Section 6 2 4 4 for details of each item Data Event number E mail sending CR LF 2002 11 29 12 15 00 1 Complete CR LF 2002 11 29 12 30 00 1 None CR LF 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 When the number of event historical data exceeds the limit In each event history file the following operation is performed when the number of event historical data set in Common setting of the event setting exceeds the limit a Half of the event historical data are deleted starting from the oldest data b The latest data are saved into the line after the remaining data Example When the number of CPU event historical data has been set to 10 Date Event number Status CPU name Operation status E mail sending 1407 2002 11 Occurrence Contro 1 07 2002 Restoration Contro 11 07 2002 Occurrence Contro 1 07 2002 11 Restoration Contro 1 07 2002 11 Occurrence 11407 2002 11 02 20 1 Restoration 01 Control CPU Normal RUN _s 1407 2002 11 02 2
232. DY X0 3 Compact Flash card formatting a Use the formatting function of the Web server module to format the Compact Flash card Refer to Section 6 10 2 b Do not format the Compact Flash card on Windows XP 2000 If it is formatted on Windows XP 2000 by mistake recover it according to the manual of the Compact Flash card A 12 A 12 4 Precaution for Compact Flash card lifetime limited number of writes The Compact Flash card has its own lifetime the limited number of writes For details check the specifications of each product Since the lifetime of the Compact Flash card generally varies depending on its free space it is advisable to use the card with sufficient free space For the size of the data written to the Compact Flash card refer to Appendix 7 2 INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi MELSEC Q series general purpose PLC Before using the equipment please read this manual carefully to fully understand the functions and performance of the Q series PLC so as to ensure correct use CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS visjecsictist aaeanoa heave ferns laaa ana aAa Aaaa deea a Tiaa a Saana tsa sae A 1 PARON e EA TE A TE A ite ste feces bev ateatesdectecs been tia whe teres A 5 Operating Instructions araen ene a white eta einen int A 6 GOIN TIEN TS ae via so oes ieee Sos cs tach Secs nh eth T A cca eg boats cea rary beac hd Sareea becuase atest eotee Al cata A 14 Compliance with the
233. Device write Tag component write Administrator Set the device write tag component write administrator authority 4 34 4 34 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q e Initial screen 1 The initial screen can be set to be displayed when the address http IP address of the Web server module is specified from the Web browser Make this setting when it is desired to change the top page of the standard screen refer to Section 4 6 1 to a user specified screen Setting item Top page index htm Select this item to display the top page of the standard screen User specified screen Select this item to display the specified user screen 2 When User specified screen has been selected set the address of the user screen to be displayed 1 to 64 characters 1 2 e User screen of standard ROM Example USER xxxx htm e User screen of Compact Flash card Example CF USER xxxx htm 1 When the specified file does not exist the top page of the standard screen is displayed 2 To display the top page of the standard screen at the time of login using the account for which the user specified screen is selected specify http IP address index htm as the URL address of the Web browser After changing the settings make sure to click on the Save button The settings are updated when the Update button on the Setting update screen is clicked the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset
234. E Disconnect time Jat DISCONNECT When other than the above is Blank x selected Must be set x Need not be set Invalid x1 USERNAME PASSWORD and NUMBER1 can all be blanked However if any one of the three has been set the other two must also be set They cannot be blanked App 26 App 26 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 6 5 CPU CSV Access target CPU setting 1 File format Po emn o O Dein O Filename cPu csv File contents Access target CPU setting Refer to Section 4 6 7 CPUNAME MULTI CPU OTHER STATION NET1 Contorol CPU QCPU Assembler QCPU 1 SINGLE ETHERNET CPU5 Painter QNACPU DIFFERENT NET10 CPU60 Welde ACPU SINGLE CCLINK Item row Cannot be set by the user Label column Setting area Set by the user File format Access target CPU setting Access target CPU setting Home gt Administrative mema gt Access target CPU setting gt Edit screen Save Back Load Access target CPU No Joz CPU name process A within 16 characters PLC series QCPU Q mode Multiple CPU specification No specification x Other station specification No specification Other Station Single network C Other Station Different network Network communication route Network NET OGH CCC Link CEthemet C24 lt Ea Network No i Network No on the communication route E o 0 Start 1O of source station op Station No K Destination station No
235. E SHOOTING 6 Troubleshooting on logging MELSEC Q Symptom Check point at e Check the access target CPU setting The access target CPU setting is not correct Refer to Section 4 6 7 Tag setting is not correct e eheen We laa zang 9 i Refer to Section 6 3 3 Logging cannot be performed Logging data are improper High speed logging cannot be performed Not execute has been set in Sampling of the tag setting The logging setting is not correct Storage area of the logging file has no free space The Compact Flash card has not been set The Compact Flash card has not been formatted Sampling Execute at high speed was not selected in the tag setting A user setting system area was not created in the control CPU of the Web server module e Set Execute in Sampling of the tag setting Refer to Section 6 3 3 e Check the logging setting Refer to Section 6 4 4 e By FTP operation delete unnecessary files to make a free area for logging files Section 6 7 1 e By the LOGDEL instruction delete the saved logging files Refer to Section 8 6 e Set the Compact Flash card Refer to Section 4 9 e Format the Compact Flash card Refer to Section 6 10 4 e Select Sampling Execute at high speed in the tag setting Refer to Section 6 3 3 e Create a user setting system area using GX Developer Refer to Section 6 3 3 REMARKS 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC Q 7
236. ER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Parameter TEN Setting Item Description Initial Value Range h f hic displ ing th tting No TAGNO Sets the tag data or graphic display using the tag setting No iioi Mag nese Refer to Section 6 3 3 h f hic displ ing th ELMNO Sele the component for grap ic display using the component i064 Mustbeset setting No Refer to Section 6 3 3 Sets the default graphic file JPG GIF Strin File not set DEFPICTURE Displayed when the component value is outside the setting range g Not JPG GIF It is required for users to prepare the graphic to be set displayed RANGENO 1 Sets the quantity in the setting range Must be set LOW1 Sets the minimum limit of the setting range 1 2147483648 Must be set to S HIGH1 Sets the maximum limit of the setting range 1 2147483647 Must be set r Sets the display graphic file JPG GIF in the setting range 1 Strin PICTURE1 Displayed when the component value is in the setting range 1 JPG T Must be set etting range 1 It is required for uses to prepare the graphic to be set Set the setting range 2 The setting is the same as the setting range 1 Set the setting range 3 The setting is the same as the setting range 1 Set the setting range 4 The setting is the same as the setting range 1 APLCOLOR Set the background color undrawn area of the Java applet 1 Be sure to set LOWs HIGHs and PICTUREs as many as the quantity specified at
237. From the Web server module the file stored in the external device FTP server can be read and written The following three methods are available for transferring a file by this function a File transfer by PLC CPU 1 FTPPUT instruction The tag data logging data user data file stored in the Web server module can be written to an external device FTP server PLC CPU Program HgHzp rTPpuT H Web server module External device FTP client FTP server Write Upload TELL 2 oO I Ea a a i o FTPGET instruction The user data file stored in the external device FTP server can be read to the Web server module PLC CPU Program HHizp FTPGET H Web server module External device FTP server FTP client Read Download Pane e ALLLECEELLELE 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q b File transfer by logging function A file is transferred by the Web server module according to the logging setting of the Web browser When a file with full data is saved the logging file is transferred to the FTP server 1 According to the logging event setting Web server module logs PLC CPU tag data Web server module fone gt Oo y TUTTI 2 l When file with full A data is saved 3 File is transferred gt when it is saved FTP server FE
238. HTML before applet parts e Perform tag setting Refer to Section 6 3 3 e Perform logging setting Refer to Section 6 4 4 e Check the setting of the component specified in the user part e Check that the logging file has not been deleted by FTP e Check that the logging file has not been deleted due to excessive number of saved files e Execute history clear from the event setting and create the event history file again Display Display Display Display e Check the network connection status by the PING test Refer to Section 6 11 e Check the power supply of the modem cable and line status Display e Add the parameters Display e Use a personal computer with audio replay hardware built in e Replace the audio replay hardware Display n e Continued on the next page 9 40 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC Q From the previous page Error code e Specify a WAV or AU format audio file e For use of Microsoft VM specify an AU format audio file e For specification of a WAV format Display audio file use the Sun Microsystems Inc Java VM Audio file format e Specify an audio file encoded in error PCM format The audio file size exceeds e Specify an audio file of 1MB or Disol 1MB less isp ay More than 32 audio files have ee been specified e Specify 32 audio files or less Display The audio file is corrupted Unable to detect this when using Microsoft VM
239. High speed logging is performed when Execute at high speed is selected for the specified tag setting No Only one high speed logging can be registered An error will occur if multiple high speed loggings are set x3 An 8 digit hexadecimal numeral cannot be set Example AAAABBBB x4 Multiple files of the same name cannot be specified An error will occur if files of the same name exist x5 ROM can be selected at only SAVEIN of LOGGING1 to LOGGING4 x6 Specify the event setting No set to the label of CPUEVT CSV TAGEVT CSV or TIMEEVT CSV An error will occur if the specified event setting No does not exist in CPUEVT CSV TAGEVT CSV or TIMEEVT CSV x7 When high speed logging has been set the setting range is 100 to 1000 x8 When high speed logging has been set the setting range is 10 to 512 x9 Specify the e mail address To setting No set to the label of EMAIL CSV An error will occur if the specified e mail address To setting No does not exist in EMAIL CSV x10 Specify the FTP server setting No set to the label of FTP CSV An error will occur if the specified FTP server setting No does not exist in FTP CSV App 41 App 41 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 6 9 FTP CSV FTP setting 1 File format Po emn o O Dein FTP CSV File contents FTP setting Refer to Section 6 7 3 ITEM SERVERNAME USERNAME PASSWORD IRECTORY FTP1 111 222 111 222 USER1 PASSWORD1 FTP5 WWW FTP abc ne jp USER2 PASSWORD2 DATA FT
240. Intemet 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 2 4 Graphic display parts The specified graphic is displayed when the component reaches the set value 1 Specifications Description Filename W8SPictur class Display file form JPEG GIF Component type that Single word Double word Real number Bit can be specified An error occurs when String is specified Device setting value J Up to 5 graphics may be registered range quantity Displayed items TAGNO No of setting ranges RANGENO ELMNO Default picture Set picture 1 Set picture 2 Set picture 3 Setpicture4 Set picture 5 DEFPICTURE PICTURE1 PICTURE2 PICTURE3 PICTURE4 PICTURE5 oo Esp Op Operation Operation Operation Operation 2 3 4 5 Display form 1 a Te N pi eration 1 APLCOLOR HIGH1 oe HIGH2 HIGH3 HIGH4 HIGH5 Range 1 Range 2 Range 3 Range 4 Range 5 LOW1 4 LOW2 4 LOW3 4 LOW4 4 LOW5 4 When the component value falls within the setting range set picture is displayed When the component value is out of the setting range default picture is displayed 1 If the setting ranges overlap the graphic having the setting range of the lower number is displayed Displayed pictures HIGH 42 oss Set picture 1 PICTURE1 HIGH 1 sees derea tte tte Set picture 2 Because set PICTURE2 range 1 has priority set picture 1 is ispl A LOWI See ne ee displayed Set range 1 LOW S84 sheet eee Set range 2 7 US
241. Limited 7 Internet service provider The following table provides the specifications of the Internet service provider to be connected to the Web server module Specifications PPP Point to Point Protocol Authentic method PAP or CHAP Operable without authentication IP address Global IP address must be assigned 3 E mail When being set SMTP server must be prepared x3 When using a UPnP incompatible router type ADSL modem or broadband router it is necessary for the user to make a contract on a static IP address with an Internet service provider and make the NAT setting of the router 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 5 Checking Function Version This section explains how to check the function version of the Web server module 1 Checking at SERIAL section in the rating plate on the Web server module MITSUBISH MODEL MAC ADD Serial No first 5 digits Function version Compliant standard hasta ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN 2 Checking with GX Developer The function version of the Web server module is shown on the Product Information List or Module s Detailed Information screen of GX Developer The following explains how to check the function version on the Product Information List screen Refer to Section 9 2 2 for the Module s Detailed Information screen e The function version of the Web server module is displayed in the Ver column Startup procedure Diagnostics System mon
242. MTP YES P gt POPSERVER abc ne jp E Label column Cannot be set by the user Setting area Set by the user App 43 App 43 APPENDIX MELSEC Q E mail setting E mail setting Home gt Administrative mem gt E mail setting _Save Cancel Send e mail account setting SMTP server name CII p 1 to 64 characters E mail address From GPE 1 to 64 characters User name _ amp 1 to 32 characters Password i 0 to 16 characters Confirm password sd E mail address To setting File format Continued Option setting Bi POP before SMTP PPOP server name 1 to 64 characters 2 Label Setting Label Description Set value requirement IBM swresenven SMTP servername tt 64 characters O HB Frov E mail address From tt 64 characters O HB username Username tt SR characters O HEM Passworo Password Ot YS charactors or Blank O to T01 to T016 E mail address To setting No 1 to 16 0 to 64 characters or Blank POPbefore Mark YES POPBEFORESMTP SMTP Donotmak CUNO bed AMM R 1 to 64 characters POPSERVER POP server POPBEFORESMT name When NO is selected at Blank x POPBEFORESMT Must be set x Need not be set Invalid App 44 App 44 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 6 11 EVENT CSV Event setting Common setting 1 File format EVENT CSV File contents Event setting Common setting
243. Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help amp Back Stop Refresh Home Search Favorites Media History z Go Links al Address http 192 168 3 3 WSWiiteC cgi 100 will be written to device A Is it OK to proceed Caution PC control may be affected Be sure to confirm the safety before execution cancel 2 A user without the tag component write authority is not allowed to write a value to a tag component with the CGI write part When awrite is attempted the following screen appears AJ http 192 168 3 3 WSWriteC cgi Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edt View Favorites Tools Help Ea amp M S ix gt Back Stop Refresh Home Search Favorites Media History Address http 192 168 3 3 wSWwhiteC cai x Go Links ERR 0903h No write authority is identified Log in again with a user name that has write authority enabled and then execute again back 3 When Device write disable request YA has been set to Disable writing to a tag component with the CGI write part is not available When awrite is attempted the following screen appears Aq http 192 168 3 3 WSWriteC cgi Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help amp Back A ala E Stop Refresh Home Search Favorites Media History z Go Links Address je http 192 168 3 3AwSWriteC cgi
244. NCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 PING test Conduct a PING test Setting Screen Home gt Administrative mem gt Setting test gt PING test CPU test E mail sending test File transfer test PING test PING test Execute Enter an external device name IP address or host name and click on Execute button Setting Item External device name __ Sets the external device name Execute Conducts a PING test Test execution Conduct a PING test 1 Set the external device name using the IP address or host name domain name PING test Execute Enter an external device name IP address or host name and click on Execute button External device name 192 168 3 1 When using the host name for setting make the following setting Refer to Appendix 4 2 for the characters applicable to the external device name e Enter all the host and domain into the external device name setting column Example user001 ne jp hse Host Domain x When using the host name for setting it is required to set the DNS server in DNS server setting of the system setting Refer to Section 4 6 3 2 Click on the Execute button to execute the PING test 3 The PING test result is displayed When the test has abnormally completed confirm the following and conduct the PING test again e Network setting of the Web server module or external device e Connection status of the
245. None coa C 2 power2 Ol Control CPU Single word D501 Decimal O decimal places None C 3 power3 Ol ControlCPU Single word D502 Decimmal O decimal places None C 4 powers O1 Control CPU Single word D503 Decimal O decimal places None C 5 powers Ol Control CPU Single word D504 Decimal O decimal places None C 6 powers O1 Control CPU Single word D505 Decimal O decimal places None C 1 power Ol Control CPU Single word D506 Decinmal O decimal places None C 8 powers Ol ControlCPU Single word D507 Decimal O decimal places None C 9 powerd Ol ContolCPU Single word D508 Decinmal O decimal places None C 10 poweri Ol Control CPU Single word D509 Decimal O decimal places None mP ry C 45 powers O1 ControlCPU Single word D544 Decinmal O decimal places None C 46 power 46 Ol Control CPU Single word D545 Decimal O decimal places None C41 power Ol Control CPU Single word D546 Decitmal O decimal places None C4 power ss Ol Control CPU Single word D547 Decimal 0 decimal places None C 49 powers Ol Control CPU Single word D548 Decimal 0 decimal places None C 50 powers0 O1 Control CPU Single word D549 Decinmal O decimal places None ME 6 111 6 111 6 FUNCTIONS b Start l Operation procedure Execute CSV export Exporting the setting information to CSV files Standard ROM CompactFlash card Status Update Displaying current data management execution status E 2002 1020 1421 19 20
246. O D260 Execution type MOVP ABCD D268 File name ZP WFDEL uo D260 M40 M40 MA E Rinne E obi ste be 7 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING 9 1 Trouble Shooting RUN LED does not turn on ERR LED is on or flickering Module READY X0 does not turn on or it takes a long time to turn on Compact Flash card setting status X1 does not turn on or it takes a long time to turn on MELSEC Q First check the module status and network connection status of the Web server module according to 1 and 2 in this section and then read the troubleshooting of the corresponding function 1 Troubleshooting on LED display and I O signal Check point Watch dog timer error X1F is on The battery is not connected or the battery voltage has dropped Any of Error detection signals X11 to X19 X1C is on X11 Tag collection error X12 Logging error X13 CPU event monitor error X14 Tag event monitor error X15 Time event monitor error X16 Access target CPU error X17 E mail transmission error X18 FTP transfer error X19 Connection error X1C Other error Check the error code in System monitor of GX Developer The module is not ready Many files are stored in the set Compact Flash card The file access stop status is active X2 is on Many files are stored in the set Compact Flash card e Wait until the module starts e f the watch dog timer error is ON please co
247. O JO JO JO JO jo Q a ja ja ja ja ja ia jia Q JQ Q Q ja ja ja jo j o o o o jo io 0 0 o o Continued on the next page 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q From the preceding page Address rae me Reference Application Name Initial value i Decimal section 3200 3201 3202 3203 3204 3205 3206 3207 3208 3209 3210 3211 3212 3213 3214 3215 3216 3217 3218 to 3299 Use prohibited ystem area 3300 to 3303 3304 to 3307 3308 to 3311 CPU event 3312 monitor status 1 CPU event monitor 1 error code 1 The composition of each area is the same as that of the 3313 to 3375 CPU eventi neyo ete 08 CPU i monitor 1 error code error code Refer to 4 for assignment of each area a 3 D Q lt 0 3 n fo 2 te Q D D n A fan J3 3 Oo o lt S Oo b Bee m S JS 3 3 O Jo 5 2 3 2 O o F g 0 o 2 Ig S g Qo O o Q 0 Time Interval event monitor status Section 3 8 16 Time event monitor 11 error code Time event monitor 15 error code Section 3 8 12 ojoo Ola djaja gjaja ja jala lalz lz Ujoj 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 CCJC o o o o o o o Jo o j O o jo o o jo jo jo jo jo jo jo jo lt s JS lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt I lt lt lt lt lt D D o o o 2 2 2 j 2 3 a 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 a 2 2 2 3 83 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
248. OM RAM switch setting of the Web server module 2 Setting test by Web browser refer to Section 6 11 2 On the Setting test screen of the Administrative menu an access target CPU test e mail sending test etc can be performed from the Web server module a Access target CPU test Whether normal access can be made to the access target PLC CPU set in the access target CPU setting is confirmed b E mail sending test E mail is sent to the destination e mail address set in the e mail setting to confirm the e mail send status c File transfer test A test file is transferred to the FTP server set in the FTP setting to confirm the file transfer status d PING test The PING command is issued to the specified external device mail server FTP server etc to confirm the existence of the external device 3 PING test by IBM PC AT compatible personal computer refer to Section 6 11 3 The PING command can be issued from the external device IBM PC AT compatible personal computer to the Web server module to confirm the existence of the Web server module 6 120 6 120 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 6 11 2 Setting test Setting Purpose 1 An access target CPU test confirms whether normal access can be made to the access target PLC CPU set in the access target CPU setting 2 Ane mail sending test sends e mail to the destination e mail address set in the e mail setting to confirm the e mail transmission status 3 A file transfer
249. P address setting Save Cancel Notification IP address Notify the IP address set in the System setting screen Notify the global IP address obtained from the router Notify the following IP address P address Notify the HTTP port number set in the System setting screen Notify the following HTTP port number Notify an IP address at network connection 6 pan Pelee ee es il Vv m 7 es 10 Eee mes it oN 04 12 Ig 05 13 File format 11 Se 14 Continued 12 FO 15 IRA gt 03 16 Include IP address to E mail of WMSEND instruction l Include IP address to E mail of event monitor function Notify an IP address at network connection Target FTP server name Notification i Target FTP server name Notification Pio 01 Fee Vv 26 jeanne PA gt 03 28 MO PE 05 30 Lal 31 S 32 m Option setting Notification filename QJ71 WS96 HTM 1 to 8 characters Character string for link QJ71WS96 within 64 characters App 56 App 56 APPENDIX 2 Label Setting Label Description Set value requirement Notification IP IPTYPE address IPADDRESS IP address Notification PORTTYPE HTTP port number PORT Notify an IP address at ECONNECTION network connection E mail address to EMAIL1 to EMAIL16 To 1 to 1614 Include IP address to E WMSEND mail of WMSEND instruction Include IP E EI EVENT nodes to mail of event
250. P port number 80 1024 to 65535 Use the following HTTP port number Network type setting 0 Connecting through LAN or the router 1 Dial up to the network modem ADSL Automatic network connection setting at start up 0 No connection to network at start up 1 Automatic connection to network at start up FTP server setting System setting 0 to 1023 Use the default FTP port number 21 status area 1 1024 to 65535 Use the following FTP port number Web server setting Register the HTTP port number to NAT of the router 0 Not register 1 Register FTP server setting Register the FTP port number to NAT of the router 0 Not ae e ee 1 Register 87 to 89 Isystemarea eee area Dial method 0 Tone 1 Pulse Section N Oo Section 4 6 3 foo mare foe wo R Section o a o far Section 4 6 4 Dial up setting Number of retries status area a Change access point automatically 0 None 1 Provided Modem attribute Communication speed Unit bps Continued on the next page N rs EA 711072 731074 75t076 71078 ES ee EE o 3 18 3 18 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q From the preceding page Address oe t Reference i Application Name Initial value Decimal section 941097 Use prohibited Systemarea Ci o doo Modem attribute Call timeout Unit Second ol o Modem attribute Dial pause time Unit Second o 100 to 132 Dial up settin Mooem a
251. P10 11 22 11 22 USER3 PASSWORDS DATA XYZ FTP16 WWW FTP xyz ne jp PASSWORD4 ry E Item row Cannot be set by the user L Label column Setting area Set by the user File format FTP setting p FTP setting Home gt Administrative mem gt FTP setting gt Edit screen Save Back Load Ei FTP server setting No E 25 FTP server name 192 168 3 10 1 to 64 characters Login user name QJ71W596 1 to 32 characters Login password 0 to 16 characters Confirm login password pana E Directory path QJ71W596 USEP 0 to 64 characters 2 Label XN mwa scription O Set the items of FTP server setting No 1 to 16 FTP1 to FTP16 Enter only the necessary labels Labels that are not set need not be entered 3 Setting items et Setting Item Description Set value f requirement SERVERNAME Target FTP server name 1 to 64 characters ER PASSWORD Login password 0 to 16 characters or Blank E DIRECTORY Directory path 0 to 64 characters or Blank Must be set x Need not be set Invalid App 42 App 42 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 6 10 EMAIL CSV E mail setting 1 File format EMAIL CSV File contents E mail setting Refer to Section 6 6 3 E SMTPSERVER abc ne jp gt FRom webserver abc ne jp EJ USERNAME Ef PASsworD address1 abc ne j address2 abc ne j address5 abc ne j address6 abc ne j address7 abc ne j File format vam gt POPBEFORES
252. PU module is reset 4 13 request 2 Module initialization request 3 Completed The system is set up Other than 3 Failed The system is set up Tag event 10000 to Section 10015 an status 1 Tag event monitor setting data Zz 38 14 10016 to a 10063 a pronibiteg yem sa ee es ee aie 1 Tag event occurrence data Scion 10079 e 9 3 8 14 10080 to ox 1 01 27 T PU ee sa ae ee Tag event 1012310 monitor status 1 Tag event monitor error data section 10143 1 3 8 14 10144 to re 10192 Tag event monitor 1 error code Tag event 10193 to monitor status 1 The composition of each area is the same as that of Section 10447 Tag event monitor 2 to 256 error code the tag event monitor 1 error code 1 3 8 14 4 1 Refer to 9 for assignment of each area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q x1 Can be used in the product whose first 5 digits of serial No are 05112 or later Assigned as system area for the product earlier than that x2 The following shows the assignment of error code area for the tag collection 1 to 64 address 1012 to 1075 Tag Collection 1 to 64 Error Code Area A ea a Ne ee a ee ga a a re ee SSS BS Ee ES eee ee ea Se a E ae ea ee ee ee eee ee ee ee ESS Rea Eee See Sea Se eae ee aS a ee SSS Seal eae 3 The following shows the assignment of the logging 1 to 64 data area address 2012 to 2267 Logging 1 to 64 Data Area ban ES a at g i also ey re eT
253. Refer to Appendix 4 5 for the characters applicable to the e mail main text FUNCTION ai MELSEC Q e Attached file 1 Select the file attached to e mail None Tag data Logging Data 2 When attaching tag data select the tag data set in the tag setting Refer to Section 6 3 3 for the tag setting 3 When attaching logging data select the logging data set in the logging setting Refer to Section 6 4 4 for the logging setting f Send to 1 to 16 1 Select the destination of e mail 2 Select the e mail address set in the E mail address TO setting of the E mail setting Refer to Section 6 6 3 for the E mail setting 3 Inthe selection field for Send to the setting No and e mail address of the E mail address TO setting are displayed After changing the settings make sure to click on the Save button The settings are updated when the Update button on the Setting update screen is clicked the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 6 6 E mail Function This section explains the e mail function 6 6 1 E mail function The e mail function sends the data tag data logging data user data file which were collected by the Web server module from the PLC CPUs to a remote external device by e mail There are the following four methods for sending e mail with this function 1 E mail transmission by PLC CPU E mails are sent by the dedicated instructio
254. Refer to Section 7 2 1 for how to describe the applet size Width Japanese LANGUAGE 0 Engish LANGUAGE 1 sz0_ 00 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 2 13 Event history monitor parts A monitor screen having the same display form as in the event history monitor of the standard screen is displayed Refer to Section 6 2 4 for the event history monitor 1 Specifications EveMon class Display form Same as in the event history monitor of the standard screen 2 Parameter mm Value BKCOLOR Sets the background color O the background color Selects the display language LANGUAGE T ERE 1 English 0 Japanese 1 English 3 Sample screen for event history monitor part The sample screen Smpevmen htm is stored in the USER directory of the Web server module 4 Precautions for using the event history monitor parts Be sure to specify the applet size with the following values Refer to Section 7 2 1 for how to describe the applet size Width Height Japanese LANGUAGE 0 1054 English LANGUAGE 1 1054 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 2 14 PLC diagnostics monitor parts A monitor screen having the same display form as in the PLC diagnostics monitor of the standard screen is displayed Refer to Section 6 2 5 for the PLC diagnostics monitor 1 Specifications DiaMon class Display form Same as in the PLC diagnostics monitor of the standard screen 2 Parameter mm Va
255. S 3 Confirmation of CH2 self loopback test result a Check the CH2 self loopback test result according to the ERR LED status ERR LED status CH2 self loopback test result Off Completed On Failed b When the test is completed set the mode to Online in Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module of GX Developer and reset the PLC CPU Switch 1 0000x c When the test has failed reconnect or rewire the cable correctly and conduct the CH2 self loopback test again to confirm that the test is completed 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 8 3 Hardware test Conduct a test related to the ROM RAM switch setting of the Web server module 1 Operation mode setting for Web server module a In Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module of GX Developer set the mode to Hardware test Switch 1 0001H b Write the PLC parameters to the PLC CPU 2 Execution of hardware test a Set the PLC CPU to a STOP status b Reset the PLC CPU c After the PLC CPU is reset the following hardware test is executed automatically During the test the ERR LED flickers 1 ROMcheck This test reads the ROM data and conducts sum check 2 RAM check This test reads the test data written to the RAM and checks the consistency 3 Switch setting check This test checks whether the switch settings are within the allowable ranges or not However Mode setting test of Switch 1 i
256. S1 0 A ss Specify the number of columns where data will be written 0 Number of columns not specified Written to 1 row ene Other than 0 Written to the specified number of columns Specify the word or byte unit 0 Word 0 1 User 1 Byte Specify a file name with a character string jan me e Specify a name 8 characters period extension 3 characters R er String User within the specified number of characters e When omitting an extension also omit a period 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q Send data Setting Setting side Device Item Setting data range x1 S2 0 to Written data Specify the data to be written User S2 n FFFFH 1 The setting side is as follows e User Data are set by the user before execution of the dedicated instruction e System The execution result of the dedicated instruction is stored by the PLC CPU x2 Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code Function 1 The device data of the PLC CPU are written to the user data file of the Compact Flash card in binary or CSV format 2 Executing the same instruction during execution of the instruction is not allowed The second instruction will not be processed In this case even if an error is detected the completion device D 0 and completion status indication flag D 1 do not turn on 3 An error may occur if the same file is accessed by WFWRITE and any other instruction WMSEND FTPPUT FTPGET WFREAD WFDEL
257. SMTP check box and mail transmission POP before SMTP set the POP server name Contact the Internet service provider for the b Refer to Section 6 6 3 above e Check the access target CPU setting The access target CPU setting is not correct Refer to Section 4 6 7 TORF e Check the event setting condition etc The event setting is not correct Refer to Section 6 5 3 e Check whether e mail can be sent to the specified destination with commercial e mail software e Check whether a file can be transferred to the specified destination with commercial FTP client software Event is not notified e Contact the Internet service provider e Contact the administrator of the FTP server 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC Q 8 Troubleshooting on FTP Check point File cannot be i e Check the module status and network The Web server module is not connected to transferred to the Web connection status of the Web server the network correctly CD f server module module Refer to 1 2 in this section Re u e Check the FTP setting The FTP server setting is not correct Refer to Section 6 7 3 Check whether a file can be transferred to the specified destination with commercial e Contact the administrator of the FTP server FTP client software e Check the FTP account assigned by the The FTP account is not correct File cannot be Internet service provider transferred from the The PLC CPU has
258. Second 2 Maximum cycle Address 802 to 803 This area stores the maximum time interval of tag collection in the past Unit Second 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q a Collection monitor cycle The Web server module performs tag collection logging and event monitoring in this order Example When the same time value is set to the Tag collection interval logging interval and event interval Sampling cycle Tag collection tH 4 i Logging m s No event Event detected Event processing E H 1 l i 1 l a 1 Event monitoring H i I I l 1 i i i b Influence of tag collection logging and event monitor on execution intervals In the following cases the processing of tag collection logging or event monitor will delay 1 When the maximum cycle time is longer than the time set to tag collection logging or event monitor 2 When the tag collection logging or event monitoring are overlapped with the execution of the dedicated instruction or the FTP Web browser operation Sampling cycle 1 L l t I 1 l l l l l l 1 I l Tag collection tH i HA f s 1 9 l l l l l l l i i i 1 l l l l l l l l i 1 1 I 1 Logging A l A ee l l l l 1 l l 1 l l i i i i Event monitoring H H l l l l l l l l l l l l Example When logging timing is delayed TIME device A device B 11 14 2002 14 20 15 100 123 11 14 2002 14 20 20 97 125 11 14 2002 14 20 25 101 125 11 14 2002 14 20 3
259. Send Logging data 01 process A C 2 Interval specification 3600seconds Send Logging data 02 process B Setting Item Edits the selected time interval event Deletes the selected time interval event Edit screen Home gt Administrative mem gt Event setting gt Time nt etting gt Edit screen C on se CPU s T e ig Timet erv e Time Interval event setting edit Save Back Load Time Interval event setting No Time Interval Time specification 17 z foo x 00 x hour minute second C Interval specification seconds 1 to 86400 Mail setting for event occurrence M Send an e mail when an event occurs M Disconnect from the network after sending mail TIME 17 00 00 Attached None file Tag data 01 line 1 Logging data 01 process A z Sena to E mail address To E mail address To 01 i ei V a9 E 02 ee a ee eae CT 10 E 03 emai E p m ir E 04 E 12 fa 05 E 13 E 06 fa 14 E 07 E 1 E 08 E 16 E 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Setting Item Description Time Interval Sets the monitoring time interval Mail setting for event Makes setting when sending e mail at event occurrence occurrence Saves the setting Savel The settings are updated when the Update button on the Setting update screen is clicked the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset
260. Support for Additional Languages setting 4 Combinations of Operating Systems OS and Web browsers The following table shows the combinations of the Operating Systems OS and Web browsers The proper operation as a client computer has been confirmed 1 2 Operating system OS Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 0 English version English version Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 5 6 0 English version English version Microsoft Windows NT Workstation Operating System Version 4 0 English version English version Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System English version English version English version English version Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 0 Japanese version Japanese version Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 5 6 0 Japanese version Japanese version Microsoft Windows NT Workstation Operating System Version 4 0 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 5 6 0 Japanese version Japanese version Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 5 6 0 Japanese version Japanese version Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 5 6 0 Japanese version Japanese version 1 When displaying the TOP page of the stan
261. System setting 0 Operates according to the system setting 1 Operates according to the default system setting IP address 192 168 3 3 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Connecting through LAN or the router Use the default HTTP port number 80 Use the default FTP port number 21 System name QJ71WS96 Does not execute network diagnoses Ping Automatic connection to network at start up Default operation setting IP filter setting 0 Operates according to the IP filter setting x A switch setting error 0180h will occur during hardware 1 Operates according to the default IP filter test if this area is other than 0 setting The IP packet with no filter setting is passed Without filter setting a Default operation setting bit 0 1 For the account setting system setting and IP filter setting whether the default setting is enabled or not is set in this setting 1 Account setting bit 0 0 Operates according to the account setting 1 Operates according to the default setting 2 System setting and IP filter setting bit 1 0 Operates according to the system setting IP filter setting 1 Operates according to the default setting POINT Use the default setting when changing the setting of the Web server module connected with the personal computer on a one to one basis b Battery error detection setting bit 2 This setting is provided to determine whether battery error detection is
262. T instruction 6 91 8 7 Connection via ADSL modem File transfer Logging function 6 96 aidai i iii 2 2 2 5 4 9 4 23 4 28 4 31 File transfer Setting test 6 125 Index 1 Index 1 Format FUNCTION eao 6 109 PIP Stas tha tis lirics lig che Sone A 23 FTP client fUNCtiON ccccceeceeeseeeeeteeeees 6 86 FTP fUNCtiOn iaaii ia 6 83 FTP notification setting 6 105 FTP Server function ce eeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeateees 6 83 FIP Setting ueiaire ve i 6 87 FTPGET instruction 6 94 8 11 FTPPUT instruction cccccseessseeee 6 91 8 7 FUNCHON list ia a 3 6 6 1 G Graphic display parts cecceseseeeeeeeee 7 14 H Hardware test eeceeeesseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeatenas 4 49 Historical data display parts eee 7 32 Historical graph display parts 7 27 ATEM inienn eee A 23 FUP ith ett eet heii et vee A 23 O signals details 0 0 0ean eene 3 11 VOSign lslistisii iiai ii 3 9 IOM Piane e a a i aak A 23 Intelligent function module switch setting e E T A 22 4 44 IP filter setting crimon 4 37 ISP Internet service provider 0 01 A 23 L LAN connection cccccccesesssreeees 2 2 4 9 4 23 LAN Connection time eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeees 3 17 Level display parts ccceceeeeeseeeeeeeeenteees 7 10 LOG instruction 000 0 ceceeeeeeeeeeeeteeteeeeeeeeeeees 8 18 LOGDEL instruction s s s 8 21 Logging function
263. TYPE When AUTO is selected at IPTYPE an SUBNET Subnet mask When SPECIFY is selected at Subnet mask decimal IPTYPE When AUTO is selected at IPTYPE When SPECIFY is selected at GATEWAY Default gateway IPTYPE and GATEWAY is Default gateway decimal selected at DESTINATION When other than the above is Default gateway decimal or Le selected blank Obtain a DNS server address AUTO DNSTYPE DNS server automatically setting Use the following DNS server SPECIFY address When AUTO is selected at Blank DNS1 DNS server DNSTYPE address 1 When SPECIFY is selected at DNS server address 1 cz DNSTYPE decimal or blank When AUTO is selected at E DNS2 DNS server DNSTYPE address 2 When SPECIFY is selected at DNS server address 2 DNSTYPE decimal or blank Use the default HTTP port DEFAULT HTTPTYPE Web server number 80 setting Use the following HTTP port SPECIFY number When DEFAULT is selected at Blank EJ HTTPPORT HTTP port HTTPTYPE number When SPECIFY is selected at 1024 to 65535 HTTPTYPE Register the Mark HTTPNAT above port No to the router s 5 i k NAT o not mar Use the default FTP port number DEFAULT CIPTYPE FTP server 21 setting Use the following FTP port SPECIFY number Must be set x Need not be set Invalid Blank App 22 App 22 APPENDIX MELSEC Q paa Setting Label Description Set value requirement When DEFAULT is selected at Blank x FTPPORT
264. Tag setting Make logging setting on the Logging setting secs ceil Perera oo When sending a saved file by e mail make e mail setting on the E mail setting When transferring a saved file to the FTP server make destination FTP server setting on the FTP setting Completed Refer to Section 4 6 Refer to Section 4 6 7 Refer to Section 6 3 3 Refer to Section 6 4 4 Refer to Section 6 6 3 Refer to Section 6 7 3 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC O 6 4 4 Logging setting Setting Purpose Make the setting for logging tag data Start Procedure Administrative menu gt Logging setting refer to 1 gt Select logging setting No and click on Edit gt Edit screen refer to 2 1 Logging setting Make logging setting Up to 64 logging settings can be performed Setting screen E ng Edit Delete F Schedule setting Saved file setting External storage setting mame condition for start conditionforsiop Fil capacity Nam Date Tine Nunber of saved ile Overvite C 1 process A processA CSV Standard ROM same as the tag sampling interval Start at start up CPU event No 1 after 60 seconds Specification for number of lines 1000Lines Add Add Add 100 Overwrite 01 etme erent meee Do not transfer j j Setting Item Selects the logging No to be edited or deleted Item Displays the logged tag name
265. The upper byte is basically ignored However a switch setting error 0180h Response monitoring time will be will occur during hardware test if the upper byte is other than 0 automatically default value 15 seconds if it is not set or set to any of 0 to 14 Operation procedure Make setting from the I O assignment setting screen of GX Developer cee Teo aT RE Cepu ewig ee UST im a I O assignment setting screen Set the following to the slot mounted with the 170 Assignment a ee Web server module 0 0 inteli ITWS96 32points OOO eied Type Select Intelli Dale tre Model name Enter the model name of the Web server module z Points Select 32 points gene ai rae aaa oa ned el Giger Start Enter the head I O number of Stoned stna oa the Web server module G Auto Detailed setting Specify the control CPU of the z ain Web server module aie Settings should be set as same when _Diversion of multiple PLC parameter _Read PLC data using multiple PLC Acknowledge XY assignment Mul ting Default Check End Cancel Switch setting for 1 0 and intelligent function module b Intelligent function module switch setting screen Ino tomet e Click on the Switch setting on the I O z CTi CT Model name Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3f Switc
266. This area stores the transmission log when the Web server module sent e mail to the mail server normally Transmission log write pointer Address 5344 1 This area stores the transmission log No where the latest transmission log is registered gt 0 No transmission No transmission log registered 1 or more Transmission log No where the latest transmission log is registered x The pointer value of 16 indicates that the latest transmission log has been registered in the transmission log 16 area 2 If 33 or more transmission logs occur excess transmission logs are registered to the areas starting from the transmission log 1 area again Transmission log 1 to 32 Address 5345 to 5984 This area stores the transmission logs at normal completion of e mail transmission The transmission log area is composed of 32 portions of the same data arrangement 1 To e This area stores the destination mail address No of the normally completed e mail e The destination mail address No is set in E mail address TO setting of the E mail setting 2 Subject This area stores the first 15 words of the e mail subject 3 Date and Time This area stores the date and time of e mail transmission in BCD code b15 to b8 b7 to bO 0 TO to Subject 15 words A Month 014 to 12h Year 00 to 99n last 2 digits Hour 00n to 23 Day 01h to 31H D t ate Second 00u to 59x Minute 00x to 59x and time 19
267. U setting No 16 e Access target CPU error X16 turns on e Access target CPU error data area address 4004 bit 15 of the buffer memory turns on e The error code is stored into the access target CPU 16 error code area address 4023 of the buffer memory 3 Access target CPU 1 to 64 error code Address 4008 to 4071 The error code that indicates the error status is stored into the corresponding access target CPU setting No area Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code 3 8 18 E mail transmission status area Address 5000 to 5984 The status related to the e mail function can be confirmed Refer to Section 6 6 for the e mail function 1 WMSEND instruction execution count storage area The number of times when the WMSEND instruction was executed can be confirmed The transmission log at normal completion can be confirmed in 4 in this section The error log at abnormal completion can be confirmed in 3 in this section a Number of times when WMSEND instruction was normally completed Address 5000 This area stores the cumulative number of times when WMSEND instruction was normally completed b Number of times when WMSEND instruction failed Address 5001 This area stores the cumulative number of times when WMSEND instruction failed E mail transmission count storage area The number of times when the Web server module sent e mail can be confirmed The transmission log at normal completion can be confirmed in
268. UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 6 7 Access target CPU setting Setting Purpose Sets the connection path to the access target CPU When performing device monitor tag setting etc specify the CPU name set in this setting Start Procedure Administrative menu Access target CPU setting Refer to 1 gt Select the access target CPU setting No to be edited and click on Edit gt Edit Screen Refer to 2 1 Access target CPU setting Make access target CPU setting Up to 64 access target CPUs can be set At shipment the control CPU is registered for the Web server module as the access target CPU setting No 1 The registration of the control CPU as the access target CPU No 1 is fixed and only the CPU name is changeable Setting screen 5 Access target CPU setting Home gt Administrative mem gt Access target CPU setting Edit Delete PE KAAN RAT name series s n Y m spec n 2 Pork Nowa stn 10 Stan No Mero stoke sen 10 ston no C 1 Control CPU QCPU Q mode No specification No specification C 2 process A QCPU Q mode No specification Other Station Single network NET 10 H 1 1 C 3 process B OCPU Q mode No specification Other Station Coexistence network NET 10 H 1 2 CC Link 0 1 Setting item Other station specification Displays whether other station is specified or not Network communication route Displays the network type netwo
269. V files Standard ROM CompactFlash card CSV import Execute Importing the setting information from CSV files Standard ROM CompactFlash card Status Update Displaying current data management execution status Not mee Setting Item Backing up the standard ROM data to the Compact Flash card Restoring the backup data of the Compact Flash card to the standard ROM 6 115 6 115 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 1 Execution of backup Back up the standard ROM data to the Compact Flash card a Select the standard ROM data to be backed up Backup Execute Backing up data in standard ROM to a CompactFlash card M Setting information M Logging data M User HTML M Event history b Click on the Execute button to execute backup c On the Status section confirm the backup execution status Click on the Update button to confirm the current status When Backing up appears click on the Update button again to confirm that the executed operation has been completed Backup completed Backup is completed Perform the next processing Backup failed According to the error code confirm the error definition and take corrective action Refer to Section 9 3 Status Update Displaying current data management execution status 2002 11 13 18 32 39 2002 11 13 18 32 43 Backup completed 2 Execution of restore Restore the backup data of the Compact Flash card t
270. WFWRITE instruction Refer to Appendix 7 5 WEN No of file writings using the WFWRITE instruction per day FCS Size of data written to the file using the FTPGET instruction FTP client function Refer to Appendix 7 5 FCN No of file writings using the FTPGET instruction FTP client function per day FSS Size of data written to the file by FTP server function Refer to Appendix 7 6 FSN No of writes to the file by FTP server function per day App 63 App 63 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 7 3 Size of data written to logging file The size of data written to the logging file can be obtained from the following pe ore LSn Time character string length 19 Comma 1 TAGL Line feed 1 Logging cycle is 1 LNn LTn INTn second or more TAGL Component 1 character string length 2 Comma 1 Component 2 character string length 2 Comma 1 Component n character string length 2 Line feed 1 Logging cycle is less LSn Time character string length 19 Comma 1 TAGL Line feed 1 INTn than 1 second LNn LTn High speed logging TAGL Component 1 character string length 2 Comma 1 Component 2 character string 1 length 2 Comma 1 Component n character string length 2 Line feed 1 1 When high speed logging is used data are stored to the Compact Flash card once per second x2 The character string length of the component is based on the data type
271. When other than the above is Blank selected at CMETHOD When MODEM or DOPA i an irae 3 0 to 255 unit times Number of selected at CMETHOD EJ RETRY i retries When ADSL is selected at Blank MODEN A Change access DOPA is CHANGEPOINT point selected at Do not mark automatically CMETHOD When ADSL is selected at Blank CMETHOD O Must be set x Need not be set Invalid App 25 App 25 APPENDIX MELSEC Q he Setting Label Description Set value requirement When MODEM or DOPA is 9600 19200 38400 57600 Communication selected at CMETHOD 115200 speed When ADSL is selected at Blank CMETHOD When MODEM or DOPA is lected at CMETHOD 90 to 180 unit seconds selected a TIMEOUT Calling timeout When ADSL is selected at Blank x CMETHOD When MODEM is selected at 1 to 30 unit seconds A CMETHOD PAUSE Dial pause time When other than the above is Blank selected at CMETHOD ATcormnand When MODEM or DOPA is Additional AT command 1 to ATCOMMAND additional selected at CMETHOD 64 characters or blank setting When ADSL is selected at CMETHOD Wh ia Disable MODEM is 14 CALL Call functi selected at EN nction peace CMETHOD nape When other than the above is Blank selected at CMETHOD When MODEM is Disconnect selected at DISCONNECT j function When MODEM is selected at CMETHOD and YES is selected 1 to 30 unit minutes DTIM
272. X2 h card Open the LED cover which is situated on the Web server module front and remove the Compact Flash card slot cover 1 Put your finger at the bottom of the LED cover and lift the LED cover open 2 Put your finger at the top of the Compact Flash card slot cover and then remove it Insert the Compact Flash card When inserting the Compact Flash card into the Web server module pay attention to the orientation of the Compact Flash card Push the Compact Flash card securely into the slot until it is flush with the EJECT button 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION LED cover a Pawl position EJECT button Z sil i gt oO p h Insert in Orientation of this direction Compact Flash e card Compact Flash card Compact Flash card slot onse Thr c Lower the LED cover until it clicks When the Compact Flash card is set the Compact Flash card slot cover cannot be attached to the Web server module Save the removed Compact Flash card slot cover carefully 4 Removing Compact Flash card a Open the LED cover which is situated on the Web server module front and remove the Compact Flash card slot cover LED cover EJECT button EJECT button Remove in this direction SS Compact Flash card Compact Flash card slo
273. YPE 1 is clicked JPG ale set at Invalid when the standard button TYPE 0 is selected ay PICTUREUP Selects the language of the write confirmation dialog box 0 Japanese 1 English 1 When operation specification has been set to the target component carry out an inverse operation to operation specification for the setting value and write the result to the device Example When 100 is set as the setting value for the component in which Single word has been set as Data type and lt 2 as Operation specification 100 2 50 is actually written to the device Note that an error may be produced between the setting value and the actually written component value Example When 107 is set as the setting value for a component in which Single word has been set as Data type and 2 as Operation specification 107 2 54 is actually written to the device The component value to be displayed on the Tag data monitor is 54 X 2 108 In the above case the following confirmation screen is displayed when CONFIRM 1 Although 107 has been specified 108 will be written to device A according to the component setting Is it OK to proceed Caution Control of the PLC may change Ensure safety before execution Yes No LANGUAGE 0 1 1 English Warming Applet Window x2 When areal number is written to the target component a rounding error may be produced 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q
274. YPE I card Numberofmountablecards S D O Number of occupied I O points 32 points 1 slot I O assignment intelligent 32 points Maximum number of writes for Maximum 100 000 times to one area refer to Remarks 1 Standard ROM Flash ROM 1 Obtained from CPU No 1 every 60s Refer to Section 3 9 V DC internal current consumption 0 65A xternal dimensions 98 3 86 in H x 27 4 1 08 in W x 90 3 54 in D mm 0 17kg 0 37Ib x1 Web server module recognizes 10BASE T 10BASE TX according to the external device For connection with the hub that does not have the auto negotiation function set the hub side to the half duplex communication mode x2 Distance between the hub and node 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Software specifications connectable nodes HTTP version Web server Standard ROM Maximum 5MB User area capacity When Compact Flash card is used Maximum 1GB Including the home page capacity and logging capacity Parts for creating Java applet 15 types SSI 1 type CGI 3 types user screen The file included as standard can be used cannot be created by the user Internet Explorer 5 5 6 0 of Microsoft Corporation Refer to 4 in Remarks 3 POR Microsoft VM Build number 3309 or later 1 Refer to 2 in Remarks Sun Microsystems JRE J2SE v1 4 1_02 or later Refer to 3 in Remarks Attached file format MIME Format Communication wita SMTP send server port number 25 mail server meen eh
275. Year 00u to 99n first 2 digits Day of the week 0 to 6x 3 50 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 8 19 FTP server status area Address 6000 to 6001 The status related to the FTP server function can be confirmed Refer to Section 6 7 1 for the FTP server function 1 Number of successful login Address 6000 This area stores the cumulative number of successful login to the FTP server 2 Number of failed login Address 6001 This area stores the cumulative number of failed login to the FTP server 3 8 20 FTP client status PUT area Address 6002 to 6553 The status related to the FTP client function PUT can be confirmed The FTP client function PUT writes the file of the Web server module to the FTP server Refer to Section 6 7 2 for the FTP client function PUT 1 FTPPUT instruction execution count storage area The number of times when the FTPPUT instruction was executed can be confirmed The transfer log at normal completion can be confirmed in 4 in this section The error log at abnormal completion can be confirmed in 3 in this section a Number of times when FTPPUT instruction was normally completed Address 6002 This area stores the cumulative number of times when FTPPUT instruction was normally completed b Number of times when FTPPUT instruction failed Address 6003 This area stores the cumulative number of times when FTPPUT instruction failed 2 File transfer count storage area The
276. a aao dpe cet ae 8 11 8 5 TAG nSt CUO Mam ann Sea aati aeaaea adaa vases aAA REENA Aea eo AAN aSa a aA IANA OA eN a AERP Laaa Siad ENARA aE aiig 8 15 8 6 LOG Instruction save iein a r a ee ee ee 8 18 8 7 LOGDEL INStrUCION a e eee aean ae eaa a in ea aa a ea a eee res 8 21 8 8 WFW RITE Instruc hon iA AA AAA ARA 8 24 8 9 WFREAD IStruction eneen oni nEn NENTEN EET EDAEN EAT AAEE ARE nRT E AEA EAT DAKEE Sa ERENER A ETATS 8 29 8 T0 WFDELC Instituci N nen a a iA R eaten ela eaten ERTE ET 8 34 9 4 Trouble Shooting siikais enaa a aaa aaa aa aa a a aa e aaa eE aeania ies 9 1 9 2 EFFON COGS wes siccsecciccshocs e a a a a a a a a neste 9 9 9 2 1 ADOUVENO COI Barrin wets eel ete altel etn en AEE ee elt 9 9 9222 SVSTSMIMOMION PAE ak Ais wok cs al Ales oh ies eek aa cand Mig eas oak Nee ead a ee ea Les ise a ee oes 9 11 9 3 Error G de Lists 2 08 awnd Wan eaten RG ave eh avec Ad ee ened einen ere 9 13 Appendix 1 External DiM Nnsions cceccceccescceeceteeeteeeneceeeeeeeeeseesseesseesseessecseesneeseeseeesneesneesneesneeeneeenes App 1 Appendix 2 Accessible Devices and RaAnges eceeceeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeeeateas App 2 Appendix 3 Directory Structure ccccecceceeseeseceeceeeeseesecaeceeeeaecaeceeseaeeaeeaesaeseeeeaesaesaeseaesaceeseeesaesaeseseeeeateaes App 6 Appendix 4 Applicable Characters and ASCII Code Tables by Setting IteMS cceceseeeeeeees App 8 Appendix 5 Improvement o
277. a transfer KX MOVP H480 D20 clock data setting required MOVP KI D22 Transfer destination No 1 MOVP K3 D23 Logging No 3 DMOVP HO D24 Logging history No latest ZP FTPPUT U0 D20 M2 M2 M3 e AA ENA E E RE Normal processing M3 Fn ne _ ____ Abnormal processing 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC O 4 Format of transferred file The following table shows the form of the file transferred by the Web server module to the FTP server Tag data TAGO CSV O indicates the tag setting No File name Logging Data File name set in the logging setting CSV File data 1 Tag data logging data user data file File capacity Maximum 512k bytes 1 The CSV format file of the tag data is as follows Component name 1 Component name 2 Component name 3 CR LF Component value 1 Component value 2 Component value 3 CR LF Example Product A Product B Product C CR LF 100 350 50 CR LF 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 6 7 5 File transfer by PLC CPU GET This section explains the FTPGET instruction used to transfer a file with a sequence program FTP server Read 1 Head I O number of Web server module 2 Control data transfer source No file name etc Set the transfer source FTP server preset in the FTP setting the file name to be transferred etc 3 Completion bit 1 File transfer by sequence program The following explains the method of transfer
278. access cannot be made by the Web browser 1 Processings for module initialization to default setting The following table explains the processings performed during the operation in 2 of this section Refer to Appendix 3 for the directory structure of the Web server module Ee file delete Deletes all logging files Event Event history file delete file delete Deletes all event history files User HTML file delete and Deletes all user HTML files sample file restoration Restores the sample files stored prior to shipment 2 Procedure to return the Web server module to the default setting a Set to the module initialization mode in the switch setting of GX Developer Set 9999 Decimal to Switch 1 Refer to Section 4 7 for the switch setting of GX Developer Switch setting for 1 0 and intelligent function module Input format DEC Model name Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5 o PLC a Of 0 Intelli DJ71WS96 2 fe b After writing the PLC parameters to the PLC CPU power off the PLC and then on or reset the CPU module 1 is stored into the module initialization request area buffer memory 9999 In the module initialization mode c Writing 2 to the module initialization request area buffer memory 9999 of the buffer memory executes the initialization processing of the Web server module d The following results when the module initialization processing is comp
279. ade Connection to the Internet service provider is not stable e g connection not possible sometimes or disrupted The URL is not correct e Check the URL The mode is not Online e Set the mode to Online The Web server module is not connected to e Connect the Web server module to the the network X4 ON network Refer to Section 4 6 3 There is cable disconnection in the e Connect the cable securely connection path connection path firewall or proxy server setting The personal computer has any problem e Replace the personal computer Check if the another Web site is displayed e Update the Web browser correctly or not e Install the OS again b Internet connection Check point Corrective action The Internet service provider setting is not e Check the Internet service provider setting correct The connection path to the Internet service e Check the connection path to the Internet provider is not correct service provider e Move the Internet service provider A mobile device is used to make connection i f connection device to a place of strong radio from a place of weak radio waves waves e Take measures against noise in the There is the influence of noise from the connection path to the Internet service surroundings provider c ADSL connection via router Symptom Check point ADSL connection via router cannot be made l e Select Connecting through LAN or r
280. aeseeseataeseeseeetaesaeseeseaeeaees 6 40 64 4 Logging setih enra aE EE alee eae ee a ites 6 41 6 5 Event Monitor Functioni ciignina nina iad nla A AA 6 49 ES 1 Event montor UNCION iane Ene R ETETA TE axtevegt nen vet NATES EENET NEET EAEE 6 49 6 5 2 Setting procedure for event monitor FUNCTION ececeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaecaeseeeeeesaesaeseeseaeeaesaeeeetaees 6 51 6 5 3 Event SOING Mis c esc irie ia eel A cee peel eet etl RT ee eee N 6 52 6 6 E mail FUNGON raii aia aa hee Pac Pa sie sack a Dade A AE AA cack RETA RR AIL Aa T AA A asic 6 65 PEE alne aa a R O I eee errr eee 6 65 6 6 2 Setting procedure for e mail FUNCTION ceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeaeseeeaesaeceeseaesaesaeseeseaetaneeseaeeaees 6 67 peo Emails atigi anA a Nahe Ag nda E Adit A AA 6 69 6 6 4 E mail transmission by PLC CPU Mw eeececcecceceeeeceeceeeeeeceecaeeeeeeaesaecaeseeeeaesaeseeseaesaesaeseeseaeeaesineaeeaees 6 71 6 6 5 E mail transmission by logging function 0 00 eee eee eeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeteeeseeeseeseeteeeseeeseeteeteeeteeeseeeteaes 6 75 6 6 6 E mail transmission by event monitor FUNCTION 0 ee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeteeteeeseeeteeeeeteeeteeeteateats 6 77 6 7 FIF EUNCION ccercect even 8 ects E EE a 6 83 Eoi FTP server TUMCHON sxc czces sees ces tac ctes E veceh cashes tat secede sees verses cagsbees del eee REA 6 83 A 16 A 16 6 762 FTP chent functo Manninen nan a Pagoda ove cake Sue Duval cute Suen Sua ttudeh ove cul tn due aaa
281. afa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MELSEC System Q Programmable Logic Controllers User s Manual QJ71WS96 Web Server Module Art no 149241 01 04 2005 A aa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION Version D ersion e SAFETY PRECAUTIONS e Be sure to read these instructions before using the product Before using this product read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and handle the product correctly with full attention to safety Note that these precautions apply only to this product Refer to the user s manual of the CPU module for the PLC system safety precautions In this manual the safety instructions are ranked as DANGER and CAUTION a D DANGER Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury N CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage a Note that failure to observe the CAUTION level instructions may lead to serious results depending on the circumstances Be sure to observe the instructions of both levels to ensure personal safety Please keep this manual in an accessible place and be sure to forward it to the end user Design Instructions lt DANGER e When controlling a running PLC e g modifying data establish an interlock circuit in a sequence program for safety of the overall system Also
282. ag name Select the tag set to Sampling Execute at high speed 2 Savein Fixed to Compact Flash card 3 Timing Fixed to Same as the tag sampling interval b Precautions for high speed logging 1 Be sure to create a user setting system area in the program memory of the control CPU Refer to Section 6 3 3 Remarks 2 Depending on the scan time of the control CPU and or the time of access from the peripheral device intelligent function module to the PLC CPU a time lag may occur in the logging interval After changing the settings make sure to click on the Save button The settings are updated when the Update button on the Setting update screen is clicked the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 1 When the file storage has been set to the standard ROM When the logging file storage has been set to the standard ROM in the logging setting pay attention to the setting of the free space of the user area in the standard ROM or the number of write times to standard ROM 1 2 x1 For the free space of the user area it is required to consider the capacity of the logging file user HTML file and user data file User area capacity of standard ROM 5MB x2 For the size of the data written to the standard ROM drive refer to Appendix 7 1 2 Confirming the usage status of the standard ROM drive The usage status of the standard ROM drive can be confirmed as the number of
283. ah ee eee eae A 23 WR taste ded eaaa a ia aSa Naa A 23 User part errors ccecccecceseeceeeseeteeeteeeeeeeeses 7 59 User screen creation function cece 7 1 W Web browser setting item list eee 3 8 WE DEL instruction eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 34 WEREAD instruction eeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeees 8 29 WEFWRITE instruction 8 24 WMSEND instruction cceeeeeees 6 71 8 2 Write button parts 0 eee eeeeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 7 36 Index 3 Index 3 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the lon
284. al computer when the Web server module and personal computer are connected on a one to one basis 1 System configuration for one to one connection Web server anes Crossing cable Personal computer 2 Network setting of personal computer a Set the personal computer and the Web server module to the same network address Set the same value __ Set different values Network l Network i IP address 192 168 3 3 J 192 168 3 1 e Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 A Web server module personal computer b Make the network setting of the personal computer on the TCP IP Properties screen Example In the case of Microsoft Windows 98 operating system Control panel Network gt lt Configuration gt tab gt TCP IP Properties Screen gt lt IP Address gt tab 21x Configuration Identification Access Control TCP IP Properties BE Bindings Advanced NetBIOS DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration IP Address An IP address can be automatically assigned to this computer If your network does not automatically assign IP addresses ask your network administrator for an address and then type itin the space below C Obtain an IP address automatically Specify an IP address IP Address 192 168 3 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 p Cancel c Restart the personal comput
285. ample When an error occurred in a data block part lt n QERROR BOOhELMNOS Co Example When an error occurred in an SSI read part EEEE part Microsoft Internet Explorer MEE File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ea 4 amp F 3 amp gt Back Stop Refresh Home Search Favorites Media History Address http 192 168 3 3 user smprdsen htm z Go Links Sample screen for SSI read part product amount ERRFFFENDow E Done Intenet Example When an error occurred in a CGI write part A http 192 168 3 3 WSWriteC cgi Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edt View Favorites Tools Help Ea cae Back Stop Refresh Home Search Favorites Media History Address http 192 168 3 3AvSWiiteC coi z Go Links q ERR 0902h The item with no setting is specified Check the setting and re execute back ZJ Done Intenet To restore the user part eliminate the error cause according to the error code and update the display screen in the Web browser Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION The dedicated instructions are designed to facilitate programming for using the functions of the intelligent function module 8 1 Dedicated Instruction List This chapter explains the following dedicated instructions Reference Application Instruction Description a Sen
286. ample screen for CGI read part The following provides an example of creating the sample screen that displays the CGI read parts The sample screen Smprdcen htm is stored in the USER directory of the Web server module a Tag setting refer to Section 6 3 3 1 Set the component setting No 1 of the tag setting No 1 EA Tag setting Home gt Administrative mem gt Tag setting gt Component setting Add Edit Delete Back ino Compote CPU nm Danie Dev Dip tmp Ope C 1 device A 01 Control CPU Single word DO Decimal 0 decimal places None 2 Click on the Update button on the Setting update screen to update the setting 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION Execution screen 44 Sample screen for CGI read part Microsoft Internet Explorer MELSEC Q b Creation of HTML file File name Smprdcen htm The HTML source is indicated below lt DOCTYPE html PUBLIC W3C DTD HTML 4 01 Transitional EN gt lt html gt lt head gt lt meta http equiv Content Type content text html charset iso 8859 1 gt lt meta http equiv Pragma content no cache gt lt title gt Sample screen for CGI read part lt title gt lt head gt lt body gt lt h1 gt Sample screen for CGI read part lt h1 gt lt form method post action W SReadC cgi gt Tag No lt br gt lt input type text size 4 name TAGNO gt lt br gt Component No lt br gt lt input type text size 4 name
287. ampling interval 1 to 600 x100ms Tag data are collected once when the Web server module is started or the setting is updated and thereafter are collected at the specified interval 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 Update before logging e When this setting is valid tag collection is executed before logging regardless of the settings of the above 1 to 3 e Set this item when it is desired to execute tag collection in synchronization with logging x1 Regardless of this setting tag collection is performed when the dedicated instruction TAG is executed Take the following precautions when Execute at high speed is selected 1 Be sure to create a user setting system area in the program memory of the control CPU Refer to Remarks in this section Execute at high speed can be registered to only one tag Multiple setting not allowed The access target CPU of the tag component that selected Execute at high speed is the access target CPU setting No 1 control CPU Fixed The device of the tag component that selected Execute at high speed can be set within a total of 96 points Example When the component data types are all set to Double word 2 points up to 48 component settings can be registered c Data write Disable Enable 1 Set whether data can be written to the tag or not Disable Write to the tag data device is disabled Enable Write to the tag data device is enabled 2 When Disable
288. and read the data from the Web server module to the device data of the PLC CPU with the WFREAD instruction 1 PLC CPU Web server module External device FTP server FTP client Program CF file 2 read command H gt ZP WFREAD 3 Cc 1 CK K m E BERGER RRR Recipe data 1 Transfer the recipe data created with the personal computer to the Web server module 2 Give a file read command from the user screen 3 Read the recipe data to the PLC CPU with the dedicated instruction WFREAD Eldre rer 1 File transfer to the Web server module can also be performed with the dedicated instruction FTPGET b WFWRITE instruction The device data of the PLC CPU can be written to the user data file of the compact flash card mounted on the Web server module PLC CPU Web server module Program HEHZP wFwRiTE H _ a Ree ey ot 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 10 Easy Web server Web server module system configuration by setting in Web browser Setting in a Web browser allows easy Web server system configuration Once the Web server module is connected to the network users can monitor device data on the standard screen of the Web server module Web server eee Personal computer Web browser Various settings Administrative menu aur a lt Gloooooooo00 ates ET ran SEERA Various settings fiiis MITSUBISHI A AJ ae ajn 4 m E
289. ansfer error transfer or the file of the transfer Pa Continue aon specified in the dedicated source is missing f instruction Refer to Section 8 3 8 4 e Check whether the transfer source file is deleted e Check the logging setting Refer to Section 6 7 6 3 Continued on the next page e Check the FTP transfer destination No of the logging A file send request was issued to FTP transfer oe setting refer to Section 6 4 4 or ae the FTP transfer destination No r destination No non dedicated instruction refer to Continue that has not been set in the FTP E setting error Section 8 3 8 4 setting 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC Q From the previous page Error code FTP server control port connection error FTP server control port 0805h f disconnection error FTP server login error FTP server command excute error FTP server data transferport connection error FTP server data transfer port disconnection error FTP file transfer not allowed E mail setting file error Failed to connect to the control port of the FTP server Failed to disconnect the FTP server control port Failed to login to the FTP server Failed to execute the FTP command to the FTP server Failed to connect to the data transfer port of the FTP server Failed to disconnect the FTP server data transfer port In switch setting an FTP file transfer request was issued during default oper
290. ansfer file type 0 A user data file binary file is transferred 1 A user data file CSV file is transferred The status of the instruction completion is stored Completion siais 0 Normal completion System Other than 0 Abnormal completion Error code 2 Transfer source Set the file transfer source with the setting No of FTP setting S 2 1 to 16 User No 1 to 16 Transfer source No is As in the left Upper 8 bit Month 01H to 12H Lower 8 bit Year OOH to 99H Last 2 digits of the year eos U 8 bit Hour 00H to 23x L 8 bit Day 01H to 31h er 8 bit Hour OOH to 23H Lower 8 bit Da H to 31H Set only when pp 5 Upper 8 bit Second 00H to 59H Lower 8 bit Minute OOH to 591 Whether the clock data of S1 12 to S1 15 is enabled or disabled S 11 Clock set flag is stored 0 1 0 Disable 1 Enable an error occurs Upper 8 bit Year OOH to 99x First 2 digits of the year Lower 8 bit Day of the week 00H Sun to 06H Sat Specify a file name with a character string when attaching a user data file e Specify a name 8 characters period extension 3 characters ae H String User within the specified number of characters e When omitting an extension also omit a period x1 The setting side is as follows e User Data are set by the user before execution of the dedicated instruction e System The execution result of the dedicated instruction is stored by the PLC
291. ansfer test CPU test E mail sending test File transfer test PING test File transfer test Transfer Select a FTP server and click on Transfer button FTP server name 01 epee x Setting Item Sets the FTP server name Transen o Conducts a file transfer test Test execution Conduct a file transfer test 1 Select the FTP server name set in the FTP setting File transfer test Transfer Select a FTP server and click on Transfer button FTP server name 01 pean ee z 2 Click on the Transfer button to execute the file transfer test 3 The file transfer test result is displayed When the test has abnormally completed confirm the error definition and take corrective action according to the error code File transfer test result 2002 11 29 15 36 00 anai IP address 211 129 14 202 Complete ERR 0000h The test file was transferred On the FTP server side confirm that the test file has been transferred Back File transfer test result 2002 11129 14 32 44 Failed ERR 08044 The test file could not be transferred Check that the FTP server setting and operation are correct and then execute the file transfer test again Back 4 The file data transferred to the FTP server is as indicated below File name QU71WS96 HTM File data Example Test 2002 07 27 14 35 34 When normally completed When abnormally completed 6 125 6 125 6 FU
292. apsed TAG Specified time elapsed LOGGING File format YES YES EMAIL14 EMAIL15 EMAIL16 NO NO NO NO NO L Label column Cannot be set by the user Ei Setting area Set by the user App 52 App 52 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Event setting Time Interval event setting Aut Event setting Home gt Administrative mem gt Event setting gt Time Interval event setting gt Edit screen Common setting CPU event setting Tag event setting Time Interval event setting Time Interval event setting edit Save Back Load ER Time Interval event setting No Jor z 2 ig Time Interval Time specification 17 f 00 00 chour minute second J Interval specification seconds 1 to 86400 p Mail setting for event occurrence E gt Send an e mail when an event occurs IV Disconnect from the network after sending mail E mail TIME 17 00 00 main text File format Continued Attached None Tag data meo oi Logging data 01 process A gt lt 4 uni 11 e EC OO lt 0 IKE gt imni lt a gt 04 Di 15 gt 05 5 e lt I 17 eel lt EG 18 pa EG a Label Label Description gg MEV to Set the items of time interval event setting No 1 to 16 ER cev 6 Enter only the necessary labels Labels that are not set need not be entered 3 Setting items Setting Item Description Set value r
293. art gt lt applet code WSPictur class codebase PART S width 100 height 100 gt lt param name TAGNO value 1 gt lt param name ELMNO value 1 gt lt param name DEFPICTURE value GREEN JPG gt lt param name RANGENO value 1 gt lt param name LOW 1 value 32768 gt lt param name HIGH1 value 0 gt lt param name PICTURE1 value RED JPG gt lt param name APLCOLOR __ value Gray gt lt applet gt lt body gt lt html gt c Storage of HTML file Transfer the HTML file to the Web server module by performing FTP operation File storage destination PROM WWW USER SMPPICEN HTM d Sample screen display Display the sample screen Example When accessing the Web server module by one to one connection Sample screen address http 192 168 3 3 USER SMPPICEN HTM Sample screen for graphic display part Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ea e a Ala amp 3B 3E E Back Stop Refresh Home Search Favorites History Mail Print Edit Discuss Address http 192 168 3 3 user SMPPICEN HTM z Go Links Peer Sample screen for graphic display part tees E Done Intemet 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 2 5 Comment display parts The specified comment is displayed when the component reaches the set value 1 Specifications Description Filename si name WSCmt class Number of displa Po Up to 32 cha
294. ash card Refer to Section 3 Cancel file access stop and enable read from write to Compact Flash card Refer to Section 2 Important Failure to observe the above procedure may cause erasure of logging data during Turn PLC OFF processing corruption of data in the Compact Flash card during access or a file system fault For a Compact Flash card fault refer to Section 9 1 9 1 Stopping file access a Stop a file access 1 Turn File access stop request Y2 from OFF to ON b Confirm that file access has stopped 1 Compact Flash card setting status X1 is OFF 2 File access status X2 is ON 3 Turn File access stop request Y2 from ON to OFF 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION Compact Flash card setting status X1 MELSEC Q File access stop request Y2 Operating Stopped File access status X2 2 Canceling file access stop status a b Compact Flash card setting status X1 3 Setting Compact Flas a Cancel the file access stop status 1 Turn File access stop cancel request Y3 from OFF to ON Confirm that the file access stop status has been cancelled 1 Compact Flash card setting status X1 is ON 2 File access status X2 is OFF 3 Turn File access stop cancel request Y3 from ON to OFF File access stop request Y3 Stopped Operating File access status
295. ation 5 CONNECTING WEB SERVER MODULE TO NETWORK MELSEC Q 5 Access to Web server module a Start a Web browser on the personal computer and enter the Web server module address obtained by the address notification function b When the user authentication screen is displayed at the time of access to the Web server module enter the account Setting in 2 5 Username administrator001 Password example QU71WS96ADMIN c The standard screen is displayed in the Web browser When using a modem for connection make the dial up setting as shown below For other than the following the setting is the same as the one for ADSL Item Set value Connection method Select Modem Connection account Enter the account obtained from the Internet service provider Enter the access point of the Internet service provider Access point e Point phone number 1 example 000111222 Dial method Select Tone Retry Set the number of retries to 3 times Set the communication specifications between the Web server module and the modem e Communication speed 115200 bps e Calling timeout 100 seconds e CALL function Enable e Disconnect function Enable 5 minutes Modem attribute 5 CONNECTING WEB SERVER MODULE TO NETWORK MELSEC Q 5 3 Operation for Returning to One to one Connection This section explains the operation for returning to one to one connection If connection of the W
296. ation The e mail setting file is missing or destroyed e Check the FTP setting Refer to Section 6 7 3 e Check the network connection status by the PING test Refer to Section 6 11 e Check the FTP server status of Continue the transfer destination e Power on the PLC a few minutes after power off e Check the connection with the FTP server Continue e Check the FTP server status of the transfer destination e Check the FTP setting Refer to Section 6 7 3 e Check the connection with the FTP server Continne e Check the FTP server status of the transfer destination e Check the connection with the FTP server e Check the FTP server status of the transfer destination Continue e Check that the FTP server of the transfer destination has write authority e Check the FTP setting Refer to Section 6 7 3 e Check the connection with the Continue FTP server e Check the FTP server status of the transfer destination e Check the connection with the FTP server Continue e Check the FTP server status of the transfer destination e Reset the default operation setting of the switch setting Continue Refer to Section 4 7 e After initializing the module refer to Section 4 13 perform the e mail setting refer to Section 6 6 3 again Continued on the next page 9 35 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC Q From the previous page Error Incorrect e mail address No error E
297. authentic method is used for the PPP connection CF A storage card stipulated in the CF and Compact Flash Specification published by the Compact Flash Association DHCP is an abbreviation for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP This protocol automatically assigns the IP address subnet mask DNS server address etc in response to a request from the DHCPU client Q QO 3 5 w Q Camal 1 D n O w 5 o DNS is an abbreviation for Domain Name System NS This system translates IP addresses into domain names easy for the user to remember and manages them TP FTP is an abbreviation for File Transfer Protocol This protocol is designed to transfer a file HTML HTML is an abbreviation for Hyper Text Makeup Language This language is used to describe Web pages HTTP HTTP is an abbreviation for Hyper Text Transfer Protocol This protocol is designed to send receive the WWW data World Wide Web of the Internet ICMP is an abbreviation for Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP This protocol is designed to transfer errors that occur on the IP network and various data related to the network ISP Internet service ISP is an abbreviation for Internet Service Provider provider It is a company that provides services for connection to the Internet NAT is an abbreviation for Network Address Translator This function makes conversion between the private IP address and global IP address PAP is an abbreviation for Passwo
298. based on the transport regulations Refer to Appendix 8 for details of the controlled models REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date_ _ Manual Number Dec 2002 SH NA 080320E A First Printing Apr 2003 SH NA 080320E B Correction Operating Instructions Section 4 9 1 Section 9 1 1 9 Addition Section 4 9 2 Nov 2003 SH NA 080320E C The whole manual was reexamined with the enhancement of the Web server module functions Refer to Appendix 5 for the enhancement of the Web server module functions Apr 2005 SH NA 080320E D Correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Operating Instructions Section 2 4 1 2 5 1 Section 3 1 2 Section 4 9 1 Section 6 3 3 REMARK 6 4 4 REMARK Section 7 2 Section 9 1 5 9 3 064Ch Appendix 5 2 2 Addition Section 7 2 6 Section 9 3 0B07h OBO8h OBOYh Appendix 5 1 2 Appendix 7 Japanese Manual Version SH 080319 F This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2002 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Operating Instructions This section explains the precautions in the following order Precautions for network conne
299. be made or not at a start setting at start up Saves the settings The settings are updated when the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset Discards new data and return to the old setting 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 1 Network type setting Set the connection method of the Web server module to the network a Select the connection method of the Web server module to the network Connecting through LAN ok Select this item when connecting through LAN or the router or the router Dial up to the network Select this item in the case of Internet connection using dial up Modem ADSL connection When connecting to the Internet make the setting necessary for the Internet connection in the dial up setting Refer to Section 4 6 4 2 IP address setting Set the IP address for the Web server module a Select the IP address obtaining method Obtain an IP address _ Se Select this item when obtaining the IP address automatically automatically Use the following IP A y ae Select this item when using the specified IP address address b When Use the following IP address has been selected set the IP address subnet mask and default gateway in decimal number 1 IP address Set the IP address for the Web server module Example 192 168 3 3 2 Subnet mask Make setting when using a subnet mask The devices on the same network must have a common subnet
300. be sure to read the manual carefully and ensure safety before making controls such as change of operation status Especially when controlling a PLC from a remote location via the Internet problems on the PLC side may not be dealt with promptly due to abnormal data communication Establish an interlock circuit in a sequence program e For the operation status of each station in the event of a communication error in the data link see the manual for each data link Failure to do so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction e When the e mail function is utilized it may take time to send e mail or is disabled depending on the status of the send server transmission path receive server and or receive device To ensure the safety of the PLC system provide calling circuits using lamps and buzzers e Provide a safety circuit outside the PLC so that safety of the whole system can be ensured against an external power failure or PLC failure Failure to do so may cause an accident due to false output or malfunction e If it is necessary to ensure the security of the PLC system against unauthorized and illegal access from external devices via the Internet appropriate measures firewall etc must be taken by the user Design Instructions lt gt DANGER e Do not write any data into the System area of the buffer memory of the intelligent function module Also do not output turn on the Use prohibited signal which is one of
301. cation 3600 seconds 1 to 86400 Mail setting for event occurrence M Send an e mail when an event occurs M Disconnect from the network after sending mail tting Ta setting Timefint setting E mail Time Interval monitoring main text Attached None file Tag data 01 line 1 z Logging data 01 line 1 a Send to E mail address To E mail address To i 09 i baran a 10 m co mr r 1 E 04 E 12 m 05 E 13 fai 06 E 14 la 07 E 15 fai 08 r 16 fii 2 When atime interval event occurs an e mail is sent to the destination e mail address 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q b Receiving e mail by personal computer 1 The e mail sent by the Web server module is received by the personal computer 2 The e mail format used by the Web server module is as follows E mail address From E mail address of the Web server module Subject gt 1 Time Event Date Main text set in E mail main text of the Time Interval event setting 0 to 128 words Tag data TAGL CSV U indicates the tag setting No Logging Data File name set in the Logging setting CSV Attached file data 2 Tag data logging data Attached file capacity Maximum 512k bytes 1 Subject is as follows Example Time Event 2002 07 25 09 39 11 t Date Main text Attached file name e Date The date of the event occurrence is displayed 2 The CSV format file of the tag data is a
302. cess stop cancel request Y3 and execute again after File access status X2 has turned off Refer to Section 3 6 2 X2 e Execute after setting the CF card Refer to Section 4 9 9 26 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC Q From the previous page Error code At start up or setting update the following was detected e Accessing an unformatted CF card was attempted At other than start up or setting update the following was detected in the logging function dedicated Unformatted CF card instruction or user parts e Execute after formatting the CF error e Accessing an unformatted CF card Refer to Section 6 10 card was attempted Continue At other than start up or setting update the following was detected in the dedicated instruction or user parts e Accessing an unformatted CF Display card was attempted At start up or setting update the following was detected e Accessing the CF card was attempted during CF card formatting At other than start up or setting update the following was detected in the logging function or dedicated instruction Continue CF card formatting Acasio the ecard wae e Execute after formatting the CF card Refer to Section 6 10 attempted during CF card formatting At other than start up or setting update the following was detected in the dedicated instruction or user parts Display e Accessing the CF card was attempted during CF card formatting
303. ck the connection with the mail server Continue e Check the mail server status of the send destination e Power on the PLC a few minutes after power off e Check the connection with the mail server e Check the mail server status of cone the send destination Continued on the next page 9 36 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING E mail main text send 0817h error Attached file send error SMTP server logout error E mail sending not possible POP server login error Address notification setting file error System setting file error Account setting file error Failed to send the e mail main text Failed to send the attached file Failed to disconnect from the mail server SMTP server In switch setting an e mail sending request was issued during default operation Failed to connect to the mail server POP server The address notification setting file is missing or destroyed The system setting file is missing or destroyed The account setting file is missing or destroyed MELSEC Q From the previous page Error e Check the connection with the mail server e Check the mail server status of the send destination e Check the connection with the mail server e Check the mail server status of the send destination e Check the logging setting Refer to Section 6 6 5 3 e Check the connection with the mail server e Check the mail server status of the send desti
304. click on gt Edit screen 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 1 Common setting Make common setting Setting Screen pp Event setting Home gt Administrative mem gt Event setting gt Common setting Common setting CPU event setting Tag event setting Time nterval event setting Common setting _Save Cancel Common setting No of CPU event historical data 0 Lines 0 to 1000 Glearhistory No of tag event historical data P Lines Oto 1000 Clear history No of time interval event historical data 0 Lines 0 to 1000 Clear history Setting Item Description No of CPU event historical rae Sets the number of CPU event historical data No of tag event historical AS data Sets the number of tag event historical data No of time interval event historical data Clear history Clears all historical data of each file Saves the setting Save The settings are updated when the Update button on the Setting update screen is clicked the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset Back Cancel Discards the changed setting and returns to the Common setting screen Sets the number of time interval event historical data a No of CPU event historical data 1 Set the number of CPU event historical data 1 to 1000 lines For the processing performed when the number of CPU event historical data is exceeded refer to Section 6 5 1 2
305. color of the component value display cell String ELMCOLOR S Sets the character color of the component name display cell String ELMBKCOLOR Sets the background color of the component name display cell String LNCOLOR Sets the line color String APLCOLOR Sets the background color undrawn area of the Java applet String not 1 oa Displayed i 0 Not displayed 1 Displayed Display amp d Sets the width of the data cell 1 to 1000 ELMNAME DATWIDTH In the vertical direction DIRECTION 0 sets the width of th ELMWIDTH on P rN 1 to 1000 110 component name display cell DATALIGN ELMALIGN Sets whether the component name display cell will be displayed or Sets the alignment of the component value display cell joa 1 Right 0 Left 1 Right 2 Centered alignment Sets the alignment of the component name display cell 0 to 2 2 Centered 0 Left 1 Right 2 Centered WRITE Sets whether data can be written to a tag component or not i 0 Write 0 Write disabled 1 Write enabled disabled Selects the language of the tag component test dialog box LANGUAGE geag g P 9 1 1 English 0 Japanese 1 English x1 Be sure to set ELMNO1 Failure to do so will result in an error Set ELMNO1 to ELMNO64 consecutively Failure to do so will result in an error Refer to Section 7 5 0 0 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 Sample screen for data block part The following provides an example of creating the sample scr
306. connect to the network Be sure to make this setting to use the Web server module Start Procedure Administrative menu System setting Setting Screen DE Save Cancel Network type setting etting Home gt Administrative mem gt System setting Connecting through LAN or the router C Dial up to the network modem ADSL DoPa Japan only IP address setting Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address IP address 192 168 3 3 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway DNS server setting Obtain a DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server address DNS server address 1 DNS server address 2 Web server setting Use the default HTTP port number 80 Use the following HTTP port number ITTP port number 1024 to 65535 I Register the above port No to the router s NAT FTP server setting Use the default FTP port number 21 Use the following FTP port number FTP port number 1024 to 65535 I Register the above port No to the router s NAT System name setting System name OJ71WS96 1 to 32 characters Network diagnosis setting I Execute network diagnoses ping Automatic network connection setting at start up No connection to network at start up Automatic connection to network at start up Setting Item Automatic network connection Set whether automatic network connection will
307. cted 1 to 32767 unit seconds at START When TIMEEVENT is selected at START her than th i When other than the above is Blank selected at START e Hour Minute Second format 00 to 23 PER 00 to 59 PER PER can be specified for Hour Minute When TIME is selected at START Minute only when PER is specified for Hour Second 00 to 59 Example 9 00 00 17 00 00 PER PER 00 selected at START TAGEVENT When CPUEVENT is selected at STOP When TAGEVENT is selected at STOP When TIMEEVENT is selected at STOP Es When other than the above is selected at STOP 1 to 256 1to 16 Must be set x Need not be set Invalid App 38 APPENDIX MELSEC Q bow Setting Item Description Set value requirement When CPUEVENT is selected at STOP The specified ee is selected t9 39767 unit seconds a STOPAFTER time after event When TIMEEVENT is selected occurrence at STOP When other than the above is Blank x selected at STOP e Hour Minute Second format Hour 00 to 23 PER Minute 00 to 59 PER When TIME is selected at PER can be specified for STOPTIME Suscneaiime hoe ped ele ial aaa specified for Hour Second 00 to 59 Example 9 00 00 17 00 00 PER PER 00 selected at STOP E Specification for number of lines CAPACITY File capacity Size specification Time specification When LINE is selected at 1 to 10000 7 unit line CAPACITY EEA LINE Line When other than the abov
308. cted at Ou to FEO hexadecimal xadecima OTHER STATION and CCLINK s EJ oi Start O or C24 is selected at NET1 When other than the above is Blank selected O Must be set x Need not be set Invalid App 28 App 28 APPENDIX MELSEC Q i Setting Item Description Set value requirement STATION1 NET2 When NET10 or ETHERNET When SINGLE jis selected at or Station N selected at i ion No peas OTHER STAION i When NO is selected at OERE STAION DIFFERENT is selected at CCLINK Network STRION x4k5K6 When other than T above is Blank selected at OTHER STAION S When DIFFERENT is selected at OTHER STATION and 1 to 239 NET10 or ETHERNET is EER NETNO2 Network No selected at NET2 When other than the above is Blank x selected When DIFFERENT is selected at OTHER STATION and CCLINK or C24 is selected at Ou to FEO hexadecimal or is selected a 102 Start I O NET2 Wh her than th i en other than the above is Blank 3 selected When NET10 ETHERNET A 11064 Wh is selected at si NET2 DIFFERENT is When CCLINK selected at i lected at 0t0 63 is selected a STATION2 Station No OTHER es STATION When C24 is selected at NET2 When other than the above is Blank selected at OTHER STATION App 29 App 29 Must be set x Need not be set Invalid APPENDIX App 30 MELSEC Q When other than QCPU is selected at SERIES NO can
309. ction Precautions for performance specifications Precautions for security Precautions for tag function Precautions for logging function Precautions for user screen creating function Precautions for other functions Precautions for access to Web server module Precautions for battery Precautions for using Compact Flash card Precautions for network connection 1 Infrastructure for Internet connection For devices applicable to the Web server module for the Internet connection or Internet service providers refer to Section 2 4 Note that Internet connection of the Web server module may not be available in some regions or in some countries depending on the Internet infrastructure In this case please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative SF OAOANDOARWN orwrrrvrvrvr rere 2 Connection to mail server or FTP server Powering on the PLC immediately after powering it off may cause failure to connect to the mail server or FTP server After powering it off wait for several minutes before turning it on Precautions for performance and specifications 1 Number of writes to standard ROM flash ROM Data can be written to the same area of a standard ROM up to 100 000 times and there are some write restrictions standard ROM drive life Refer to Section 3 1 Remarks 1 for the life of the standard ROM drive and how to check the used condition 2 Time handled by Web server module Refer to Section 3 9 Trans
310. ction 4 12 Itis recommended to back up the standard ROM data setting information logging data user HTML etc to the Compact Flash card periodically in case of corruption of data in the standard ROM drive Refer to Section 6 10 Precautions for use of Compact Flash card 1 Removal or replacement of Compact Flash card a Be sure to stop file access before removing or replacing the Compact Flash card Refer to Section 4 9 2 b Failure to observe the procedures indicated in Section 4 9 2 may result in erasure of logging data during processing corruption of data in the Compact Flash card during access or a file system fault c If a Compact Flash card fault has occurred refer to Section 9 1 9 and restore the card 2 Diagnostic time of Compact Flash card a The Web server module executes diagnosis including file restoration of the Compact Flash card when 1 Power is turned OFF and ON or the CPU module is reset 2 The Compact Flash card is inserted while the power is ON b The diagnostic time of the Compact Flash card is lengthened if many files are stored in the card It takes approx 5 seconds for 100 files and approx 10 seconds for 1000 files O Since the following times may be lengthened due to too many files delete unnecessary files 1 Rising time of the Compact Flash card setting status X1 2 Web server module s ready time Rising time of the Module REA
311. cution status EE 2002 10 20 14 26 31 2003 10 20 14 26 32 Import completed rive name Standard ROM 2 When abnormally completed e According to the error code confirm the error status and take corrective action Refer to Section 9 3 e According to the file name label name or item name confirm the error detected location and reexamine the setting Status Update Displaying current data management execution status 2003 10 20 15 46 44 2003 10 20 15 46 44 Import failed ERR 04361 Standard ROM COMPONENT CSY COMPONENTI 2 ke CPUNO 6 119 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 6 11 Diagnostics Function This section explains the function to diagnose the hardware fault and setting of the Web server module 6 11 1 Diagnostics function The following explains the method to diagnose the hardware fault and setting of the Web server module 1 Self diagnostics test by switch setting of GX Developer refer to Section 4 8 A self diagnostics test can be conducted by switch setting of GX Developer a CH1 self loopback test refer to Section 4 8 1 Conduct a self loopback test to make a hardware check including the communication function of the CH1 10BASE T 100BASE TX interface b CH2 self loopback test refer to Section 4 8 2 Conduct a self loopback test to make a hardware check including the communication function of the CH2 RS 232 interface c Hardware test refer to Section 4 8 3 Conduct a test related to the R
312. d 1 Refer to Appendix 6 2 2 for the precautions for editing the e mail main text x2 Specify the e mail address To setting No set to the label of EMAIL CSV An error will occur if the specified e mail address To setting No does not exist in EMAIL CSV App 54 App 54 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 6 15 ADDRESS CSV Address notification setting 1 File format File name _ ADDRESS CSv File contents Address notification setting Refer to Section 6 9 2 EE PTYPE SYSTEM gt PADDRESS EJ PORTTYPE SYSTEM EF PorRT E gt ECONNECTION YES EJ Eva YES EA EMAi2 YES EF Evai NO ER gt Emai YES I EMAILS YES EE EMAIL6 YES B gt EMAIL7 YES IEJ EMAIL8 YES E gt EMAILS YES fe EMAIL10 YES I gt EMAIL11 YES a gt EMAIL12 YES EJ EMAIL13 YES ey EMAIL14 YES A gt EMAIL15 YES A gt EMAIL16 YES P gt WMSEND NO File format eee EVENT YES EZ FCONNECTION NO a gt SERVER1 E gt SERVER2 A gt SERVERS EJ SERVER4 BJ SERVERS E gt SERVER6 kii SERVER7 EA gt SERVERS ERI SERVER9 Z gt SERVER10 E gt SERVER11 R gt SERVER12 RYA SERVER13 R gt SERVER14 EE SERVER15 M gt SERVER16 gt FILENAME QU71WS96 A gt LINK QU71WS96 E Label column Cannot be set by the user Setting area Set by the user App 55 App 55 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Address notification setting IP address setting tification s ome gt Administrative mem gt n setting gt IP ade tting E mail no setting FTP not I
313. d gt Please type your user name and password Site 192 168 3 3 Realm 0J71W596 User Name jews Password meee o IV Save this password in your password list Cancel The top page of the standard screen is displayed on the Web browser 3 Z QJ71WS96 Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edt View Favorites Tools Help Eis ef aea aae2s e 6 E Back Stop Refresh Home tes Media History Mail Pint Edt Address htip 192 168 3 3 indexen him SUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED D Intemet Prior to shipment the IP address of the Web server module is set as indicated below e IP address 192 168 3 3 e Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Prior to shipment the account of the Web server module is set as indicated below e User name QU71WS96 All in uppercase e Password MITSUBISHI All in uppercase e Access authority Device write Tag component write Administrator e Initial screen Standard screen top page Top page index htm The top page displayed when the address of the Web server module is specified can be changed on the account setting screen Refer to Section 4 6 5 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 2 Saving the Administrative menu settings a Onsetting screens of the Administrative menu change the settings and then click on the Save button b Clicking on the Save button writes the new settings over the set data of the Web server module
314. d file name Saved file is sent by E mail or transfered External storage setting 3 When the number of saved files exceeds the set value When the according set value number of saved files exceeds the set value operation is performed to the setting of When the number of saved files exceeds the above in the logging setting a When Overwrite is selected Deletes the oldest file and keeps on logging b When Stop is selected Stops logging A logging saved file number over error 615h occurs Refer to Section 9 3 The number of saved files f When the number of saved files Saved file name exceeds the set value exceeds the above set value Stop Overwrite Logging is stopped When the number of saved files is 5 FOGNAME CSV al The oldest file is deleted and logging 00000002 CSV continues 00000003 CSV 00000004 CSV 00000005 CSV 00000006 csV _ lt Saved file newest indicates the setting item of logging setting 6 FUNCTIONS 4 File format The file format of a logging file is shown below TIME Component name 1 Component name 2 Component name 3 Component name 4 Component name 5 1 gt 2002 07 01 09 00 00 1 p 10 123 2123 1280 2002 07 01 09 05 00 2 k 97 125 2 544 1280 2002 07 01 09 10 00 3 10 125 J 2343 2300 2002 07 01 09 15 00 4 10 123 2438 3504 2002 07 01 09 20 00 5 f 103 f 126 l 2 397
315. dard screen using an operating system and a Web browser of English version do not click on the Japanese button provided for link to the Japanese version Doing so may display an incorrect screen x2 When displaying the standard screen of English version using an operating system and a Web browser of Japanese version words and phrases used by the operating system e g the Cancel button to a confirmation message are displayed in Japanese 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 5 Relationship between scan time of PLC CPU and maximum delay time of high speed sampling DT 2 X ST 5 unit ms DT Maximum delay time of high speed sampling See below ST Scan time of PLC CPU Ov 100 y 200 y Time ms Scheduled sampling time A DT DT a Preset sampling time Sh v Actual sampling time 3 2 RS 232 Connector Specifications The RS 232 connector specifications are shown below 1 RS 232 connector specifications Pin N Signal Signal Signal direction ali abbreviation gnar name Web server module Modem L eooco Dae carnero ae e ee e somo Tansmivea aa gt _ enor Data Temina peasy _ e onosm oaa serey _ e losers eertse o om Ring nator e 2 RS 232 interface connector The Web server module uses the following RS 232 interface connector 9 pin D sub Female fixing type Use either of the following products as a connector shell for the connection cable
316. data backup restore target directory using the Compact Flash card Refer to Appendix 3 for the directory structure of the Web server module Stored File Backup Restore Target Directory Setting information ROM SETTINGS Logging Data ROM WWW LOGGING User HTML ROM WWW USER Event history ROM WWW EVENT The setting data file of the product with first 5 digits of serial No 05111 or earlier can be restored to the one with first 5 digits of serial No 05112 or later However the setting data file of the product with first 5 digits of serial No 05112 or later can not be restored to earlier products 6 107 6 107 FUNCTION eS MELSEC Q 3 Directory structure on personal computer The following shows the directory structure when the Compact Flash card storing the backup data is confirmed on the personal computer lt root gt 4 BACKUP Do not change the backup data files under BACKUP Using the changed backup data can cause the module to fail or malfunction Important 4 Setting of Compact Flash card Refer to Section 4 9 for the setting method of the Compact Flash card 6 108 6 108 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 6 10 2 Format function 1 About format function The directory required for use in the Web server module can be created by formatting the Compact Flash card a Formatting of Compact Flash card On the data management screen format the Compact Flash card in
317. ddress set in the System setting screen Notification IP address e Select Notify the HTTP port number set in the System setting screen E mail notification setting Item Set value e Select Notify an IP address at network connection IP address notification e Select E mail address TO No 1 as the destination of IP address notification 4 Account setting Refer to Section 4 6 5 Item Set value Enter the following setting for the accounting setting No 1 Delete the default account Account setting No 1 e User name administrator001 e Password example QU71WS96ADMIN e Confirm password example QU71WS96ADMIN 5 CONNECTING WEB SERVER MODULE TO NETWORK MELSEC Q After changing the setting make sure to click on the Save button The settings are updated when the Update button on the Setting update screen is clicked the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset x Note that the setting of the System setting is not updated even if the Update button is clicked 2 Network connection of Web server module a Since Automatic connection to network at start up is set in the automatic network connection setting at start up on the System setting screen the Web server module automatically makes network connection at start up b Using GX Developer confirm the following connection status of the Web server module to the network with input signals of the buffer me
318. default top page m Setting for tag i e assign devices for tag component E A Tag setting Set it when intending to use the tag function the logging function and the event function es Setting for logging L Logging setting Set it when intending to use the logging function Setting for transmission target of FTP Set it when intending to use the FTP client function This setting is not voanivod han intondina to nca the ETD corsa Fonction A FTP setting J cate COPYRIGHT C 2003 MITSU I ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED E Done Interet Menu items Reference Section a tem Sonih Makes the initial setting required for network connection Section 4 6 3 y 9 Be sure to perform this setting to use the Web server module os es Dial up setting Makes setting required for Internet connection Section 4 6 4 Access target CPU i f setting J Sets the connection path to the access target CPU Section 4 6 7 TAG fq Tag setting Makes setting for tag data collection Section 6 3 as Logging setting Sets the logging intervals file capacity etc of logging data Section 6 4 i FTP setting Makes the setting to log in to the FTP server Section 6 7 s If Mo E mail setting Sets the send server e mail address etc Section 6 6 Event setting Sets the event monitor conditions Section 6 5 Address notification Makes the setting to notify the external device of the Web server Section 6 9 setting
319. dem or router must be made before start up 1 Internet connection via ADSL modem is made in dial up setting Refer to Section 4 6 4 2 A global IP address is assigned to the Web server module by the Internet service provider With the address notification function the external device can be informed of the IP address that the Web server module has acquired Refer to Section 6 9 3 Connection via analog modem The Web server module can be connected to the Internet through analog modem using the RS 232 interface Web server module External device 1 Internet connection via analog modem is made in dial up setting Refer to Section 4 6 4 2 A global IP address is assigned to the Web server module by the Internet service provider With the address notification function the external device can be informed of the IP address that the Web server module has acquired Refer to Section 6 9 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 3 System Configuration for Initial Setting Maintenance and Inspection This section shows a system configuration in the case of initial setting system setting dial up setting maintenance and inspection of the Web server module 1 System configuration for initial setting maintenance and inspection by Web browser Twisted pair cable 3 crossing cable Ethernet or Web server module External device Twisted pair cable J straight cable Ethernet Exter
320. dentified Log in again with a user name that has write authority enabled and then execute again ERR 0903h OK Warning Applet Window 3 When Device write disable request YA has been set to Disable the device test is not available When the device test is attempted the following screen appears Writing to device is disabled Turn OFF the device write disable signal and re execute ERR 0907h OK Warning Applet Window 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 6 2 2 Tag data monitor Setting Purpose This monitoring function is used to monitor the tag data which have been collected by the Web server module with the tag function in tag unit Refer to Section 6 3 for the tag function By conducting a tag component test users with the tag component write authority can write tag data in the component unit Start Procedure Monitor screen Tag data monitor refer to 1 gt Tag component test Tag component test refer to 2 1 Tag data monitor Setting screen Fz Tag data monitor Home Monitor screen gt Tag data monitor Tag name 01 line 1 Stop monitor Tag component test Component name 01 pres production E 02 target day 03 temperature D4 pressure Setting Item 6 FUNCTIONS a MELSEC Q Tag name 1 Set the tag data to perform tag data monitor 2 Select the tag name set in the tag settin
321. drop a Intenet User QJ71W596 5 a Precautions for using the FTP server function It is required to end the FTP operation once and restart connection to FTP from the beginning if a wrong user name or password is entered to FTP due to the restrictions on the FTP client side application Even when the correct user name or password is entered to user of the FTP command FTP may not operate normally The maximum number of simultaneous connections to the FTP server is 10 However since several internal connections may be made simultaneously depending on the FTP client login may not be allowed if 10 connections are not reached apparently If many files are transferred at once by FTP a 426 Data connection error error may occur In that case transfer the files again in numbers When a file of the Web server module is overwritten via FTP the file will be deleted if an error occurs during write of the file Write the file again via FTP In the case of FTP access by the Internet Explorer the user authentication screen may not be displayed depending on the Internet Explorer s specifications In this case enter the Web server module address as follows ftp lt User name gt lt Password gt lt Web server module address or host name gt Example In the case of factory setting ftp QJ71WS96 MITSUBISHI 192 168 3 3 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 6 7 2 FTP client function 1 About FTP client function
322. ds at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 6 Product application 1 In using
323. ds e mai 00 O e mail Section 8 2 8 2 ze ARGoeE PUT a file to the FTP server FTPGET Transfers GET a file from the FTP server Issues a tag collection command riggers a i collection Section 8 5 Loe ssus alegan command Tigges alogang Seton Writes the device data of the PLC CPU to the user data file on the WFWRITE TM Section 8 8 Compact Flash card Reads the user data file on the Compact Flash card to the device data WFREAD Section 8 9 of the PLC CPU Section 8 10 When changing the data control data request data etc specified in a dedicated instruction make sure that execution of the dedicated instruction has been completed 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q 8 2 WMSEND Instruction E mail is sent with this instruction Applicable device j MELSECNET H Setting Internal device Special Index File MELSECNET I 0 i Constant data System User module register Others register Direct Ji 3 RATA ca e e A egies ee PS a A ae a a a lt a ee PS fee a Le Instruction Execution code condition Command WMSEND Z WMSEND Un Command WMSEND f ZP WMSEND Setting data Setting data Setting side 1 Head I O signal of the module Un 00 to FE The first 2 digits when the I O signal is represented in User BIN16bit 3 digits Head number of the device that stores the control data User oe Device sa He number of the device that stores the e mail data subject
324. e Un 00 to FE The first 2 digits when the I O signal is represented in User BIN16bit 3 digits S Head number of the device that stores the control data User ar name D1 Head number of the device that stores the data User O Head number of the bit device that will be turned on for one scan when the instruction is normally completed D2 A ta System Bit D 1 also turns on when the instruction is abnormally completed The local devices and the file registers for individual programs do not work as the devices for the setting data 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q Control data i Setting Setting side Device Item Setting data range 1 Specify the execution type st es P 0000 0 Execution type 0000 Binary read 0100 User H 0100H CSV format conversion reads f The status of the instruction completion is stored Completion i Te 0 Normal completion System Other than 0 Abnormal completion Error code 2 Specify the number of data to be read Word unit Number of data S a Ae eee When specifying the byte unit in S1 7 also set the number of datain 1 to 480 User word units by converting it into word units Read result With respect to the data specified in S2 2 the number of actually read Number of data enters here System data e The unit depends on the word byte specification FFFFFFFFH Read continuously from the previous position When binary read is specified in S 0 Always
325. e In the case of Microsoft Corporation s Outlook Express 5 5 QJ71WS96 URL Information Iof x File Edit View Tools Message Help amp QW x a y Reply Reply All Forward Print Delete Previous Next Addresses From QJ71WS96 Date Tuesday November 12 2002 10 27 AM To oe ee el a Subject QJ71W596 URL Information b When the IP address is attached to the e mail of the WMSEND instruction 1 When e mail is sent by the WMSEND instruction it is sent with URL data attached at the end of the main text 2 E mail is received by the personal computer Example In the case of Microsoft Corporation s Outlook Express 5 5 TEST File Edit View Tools Message Help amp QW wf BS x a F ies Reply Reply All Forward Print Delete Previous Next Addresses From QJ71WS96 Date Thursday November 14 2002 1 28 PM To e SP ee oe Subject TEST Attach E line1 CS 516 bytes TESTM AIL lt Main text set in sequence program http Qf S Web server module URL 6 103 6 103 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q c When the IP address is attached to the e mail of the event monitor function 1 When e mail is sent at event occurrence it is sent with URL data attached at the end of the main text 2 E mail is received by the personal computer The following provides an example when a time interval event Example In the case of Microsoft Corporation s Outlook Express 5 5 Time Event 2002 11 14 14 21 12 Iof x Fil
326. e Edit View Tools Message Help amp QW amp xX a F G Reply Reply All Forward Print Delete Previous Next Addresses From QJ71WS96 Date Thursday November 14 2002 2 22 PM To on ATi oe a m Subject Time Event 2002 11 14 14 21 12 Attach FS line1 CS 1 35 KB Time Interval monitoring Web server module URL http g0 lt Main text set on the Time Interval event setting within the Event setting 6 104 6 104 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 3 FTP notification setting Make FTP notification setting Setting Screen yl Address notification setting Home gt Administrative mem gt Address notification setting gt FTP notification setting IP address setting E mail notification setting FTP notification setting FTP notification setting Save Cancel IP address notification M Notify an IP address at network connection 01 Ps Vv 09 E 02 Wem al 5 L Saa omi fim Hilf a fh n Option setting Notification filename QJ71 WS96 HTM 1 to 8 characters Character string for link QJ71W596 within 64 characters Setting Item IP address notification Sets the target FTP server Option setting Sets the option related to FTP notification Saves the setting Save The settings are updated when the Update button on the Setting update screen is clicked the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset Discards the changed setting and returns to the previo
327. e HTTP port number Use the default HTTP port p Select this item when using the HTTP port number 80 number 80 Use the following HTTP ar a Select this item when using the specified HTTP port number port number 1 When Use the following HTTP port number has been selected set the HTTP port number in decimal number e 1024 to 65535 HTTP port number 2 Setthe HTTP port number after consulting the network administrator person in charge of network planning IP address management etc b Register the above port No to the router s NAT When this setting is valid the packet sent to the HTTP port number 1 of the router s WAN side Internet side is transferred to the HTTP port number gt 1 of the Web server module Refer to 2 in this section for NAT x1 Port number set in the Web server setting Refer to the above a 5 FTP server setting Set the FTP port number of the Web server module a Select the FTP port number used for the Web server module It is recommended to use the default value 21 Use the default FTP port number 21 Use the following FTP ae DA Select this item when using the specified FTP port number port number Select this item when using the FTP port number 21 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 1 When Use the following FTP port number is selected set the FTP port number in decimal e 1024 to 65535 FTP port number 2 Consult the netwo
328. e displayed normally even after communication is restored When using the Web server module in a local area make setting in Local Area Network LAN Settings of the Web browser so that the proxy server is not used for the local address Refer to Section 4 5 3 Values and states displayed on monitor and user screens may have been delayed Also when more than one Web browser has been activated the display timing varies among them Select any other than Never for Check for newer versions of stored pages in the temporary Internet files settings of the Web browser If Never is set the old screen the one saved in the temporary Internet files is displayed unchanged when the file is read from the Edit screen etc Refer to Section 4 5 3 The old screen the one saved in the temporary Internet files may be displayed unchanged if read is performed on the monitor screen and user screen etc In that case delete the temporary Internet files cache of the Web browser and read it again Refer to Section 4 5 3 In the security level setting of the Web browser set the security level of the Internet and Intranet zones to Default Level Refer to Section 4 5 3 In the advanced settings of the Web browser set to Restore Defaults Refer to Section 4 5 3 When displaying the TOP page of the standard screen using an operating system and a Web browser of English version do not click on the Japanese button provided for lin
329. e error code can also be confirmed in the self diagnostics monitor of the standard screen Refer to Section 6 2 6 3 Identifying the erroneous part Monitor the I O signals X11 to X19 X1C to identify the erroneous part and confirm the error code at the buffer memory address corresponding to the I O signal Input Buffer memory Reference Erroneous part i Signal Error code storage location Buffer memory address Section x11 Tag collection error Tag status area 1000 to 1075 Section 3 8 10 Logging error Logging status area 2000 to 2267 Section 3 8 11 CPU event monitor CPU event monitor status area 1 1 3300 to 3375 Section 3 8 12 error x14 Tag event monitor error Tag event monitor status area 1 2 10000 to 10447 Section 3 8 14 Time event monitor Time Interval monitor status area 3200 to 3217 Section 3 8 16 error Access target CPU Access target CPU1 setting status area 4000 to 4071 Section 3 8 17 error E mail transmission aoa E mail transmission status area 5000 to 5984 Section 3 8 18 error mae FTP client status PUT area 6002 to 6553 Section 3 8 20 X18 FTP transmission error FTP client status GET area 8002 to 8553 Section 3 8 21 x19 Connection error Section 3 8 2 xic 150 to 247 Section 3 8 6 1 The statuses of CPU event setting No 1 to 16 are also stored into the CPU event status area 2 buffer memory 3000 to 3018 Refer to Section 3 8 13 x2 The statuses of tag event setting No 1 to 16 are
330. e is Blank selected at CAPACITY When SIZE is selected at 1 to 512 8 unit k byte CAPACITY 18 SIZE Size When other than the above is Blank selected at CAPACITY App 39 App 39 e Hour Minute Second format Hour 00 to 23 PER Minute 00 to 59 PER When TIME is selected at PER can be specified for CAPACITY Minute only when PER is ye specified for Hour Second 00 to 59 Example 9 00 00 17 00 00 PER PER 00 Blank selected at CAPACITY Must be set x Need not be set Invalid APPENDIX MELSEC Q Settin Af tem ston sete requirement ES Saved files YES ADDNAME names Add the Saved files ADDDATE names Add the date Saved files ADDTIME names Add the time NUMBER Number of saved files 1 to 1000 OVERWRITE number of go gt oye spe EXCEED saved files exceeds the Stop STOP above set value D NO E MAIL1 E mail address1 x9 Send to the specified e mail 1to16 address o not send Do not send NO E mail address2 E MAIL2 x9 Send to the specified e mail 1to 16 address E mail address3 E MAILS mail address x9 Send to the specified e mail 1to 16 address Do not transfer NO FTP1 FTP serveri 9 Transfer to the specified address 1 to 16 O Must be set x Need not be set Invalid App 40 App 40 APPENDIX MELSEC Q x1 Specify the tag setting No set to the label of TAG CSV An error will occur if the specified tag setting No does not exist in TAG CSV x2
331. e is missing or destroyed The logging setting file is missing or destroyed The event setting file is missing or destroyed MELSEC Q From the previous page Error code 0600h Tag non setting error Component non 0601h i setting error Display Display Continued on the next page e Specify the tag name set in the tag setting or make the tag setting refer to Section 6 3 3 e Specify the component name set in the component setting or make the component setting refer to Section 6 3 3 e Specify the logging preset in the logging setting refer to Section 6 4 4 e Execute again after a while e Select Execute in Sampling of the tag setting Refer to Section 6 3 3 e After initializing the module refer to Section 4 13 make the tag setting refer to Section 6 3 3 again e After initializing the module refer to Section 4 13 make the logging setting refer to Section 6 4 4 again e After initializing the module refer to Section 4 12 make the event setting refer to Section 6 5 3 again 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC Q From the previous page Error code e After initializing the module refer Access target CPU The access target CPU setting file to Section 4 13 make the setting file error is missing or destroyed access target CPU setting refer to Section 4 6 7 again error device in the component setting Refer to Section 6 3 3 The device name specified in the e Check
332. e logging execution timing select any of the following 1 1 Same as the tag sampling interval e Logging is executed at the tag sampling interval e When the tag whose data are collected at high speed is selected the timing is fixed to this timing 2 Interval specification Logging is executed once when the Web server module is started or the setting is updated and thereafter is executed at the specified interval 1 to 86400s 3 Time specification e Logging is executed at the specified time Hour 0 to 23 Per Minute 0 to 59 Per Per minute can be specified only when Per hour is specified Second 0 to 59 e Logging is not executed when the Web server module is started x1 Regardless of this setting logging is performed when the dedicated instruction LOG is executed 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 1 Depending on the setting of the tag sampling interval and logging timing the data accumulated for up to the time length of the tag sampling interval are logged Example When the tag sampling interval is 10 seconds and the logging interval is 1 second the tag data of up to 10 seconds earlier is logged By selecting Sampling Update before logging in the tag setting tag data can be collected in synchronization with the logging timing By selecting Same as the tag sampling interval in the timing setting logging can be performed at the tag sampling interval e Condition for Start 1 As the condition for starting lo
333. e method of transferring a file by a sequence program Refer to Section 8 3 for details of the FTPPUT instruction Create control data in D20 and later Transferred Instruction ZP FTPPUT UO ae Processing after transfer completion Processing after transfer failure 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 Instruction execution timing Network connection processing File transfer Network connection status X4 FTPPUT instruction FTPPUT instruction Completion Device When abnormally completed Q FTPPUT instruction Completion Device 1 Completion Failure a The Web server module is connected to the network When the module is not connected to the network it is automatically connected during execution of the FTPPUT instruction and disconnected after completion of the instruction b The FTPPUT instruction is executed The file specified by the FTPPUT instruction is sent to the FTP server c When file transfer to the FTP server is completed the FTPPUT instruction completion device turns on When the completion device 1 turns on failed the error code is stored into completion status S1 1 Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code 3 Sample program The following is a program in which the Web server module mounted in the position of I O number X Y00 to X Y1F transfers PUT logging data to the FTP server when M21 is turned ON Logging dat
334. e setting range REPEAT 0 Not repeat PLAYMODE 0 Stop 2 Playing the audio file repeatedly while the component value is within the setting range REPEAT 1 Repeat PLAYMODE 0 Stop 3 Playing the audio file wnen the component value falls within the setting range and completing the playing to the end even if the value gets out of the range REPEAT 0 Not repeat PLAYMODE 1 Continue 4 Playing the audio file repeatedly and continuously when the component value falls within the setting range REPEAT 1 Repeat PLAYMODE 1 Continue 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 Sample screen for audio parts The following provides an example of creating the sample screen that displays the audio parts The sample screen SMPAUDEN HTM is stored in the USER directory of the Web server module a Tag setting refer to Section 6 3 3 1 Set the component setting No 1 of the tag setting No 1 EA Tag setting Home gt Administrative mem gt Tag setting gt Component setting Add Edit Delete Back EN system 1 E em No Component mine CPU marme Daye Devs Dip fm pein opr C 1 deviceA 01 Control CPU Single word DO Decirnal O decimal places None 2 Click on the Update button on the Setting update screen to update the setting b Creation of HTML file File name SMPAUDEN HTM The HTML source is indicated below lt DOCTYPE html PUBLIC W3C DTD HTML 4 01 Transitional EN gt lt html gt lt head g
335. e test w ojojo jojojo jejo jrejejojr Device DO D1 jojojojojojojojojojojs jojojojojojojojejejejm ojojo jojojo jeje ejojojoja ojojo jojojo jojo jojojoj o ojojojojojojojojojojo Setting Item Selects the access target CPU Specifies the device type and actual device number Data type Selects the data type 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q a CPUname 1 Set the access target CPU 2 Select the CPU name set in the access target CPU setting Refer to Section 4 6 7 for the access target CPU setting 3 The CPU name drop down list displays the setting No and CPU names of the access target CPU setting Example 01 Control CPU 4 By default the host CPU of the Web server module is set as the access target CPU setting No 1 b Device 1 Specify the device type and actual device number of the device 2 Device specification by qualification indexing digit specification bit specification for word device is not available c Data type Select the data type of the word device 16 bit integer Displayed as a 16 bit integer 32 bit integer Displayed as a 32 bit double word integer Real number Displayed in real number ASCII character Displayed in ASCII characters d Display form Select the display form when the data type is a 16 bit integer or 32 bit integer DEC Displayed in decimal HEX Displayed in hexadecimal e Mo
336. e the e mail transmission is completed Examine and change the settings of the timing file capacity and number of saved files so that sufficient time is allowed before the file is deleted 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 6 6 6 E mail transmission by event monitor function Performing CPU monitor tag monitor and time interval monitor the Web server module sends an e mail to the destination e mail address when an event occurs Refer to Section 6 5 for details of the event monitor function 1 E mail transmission by CPU event a CPU event setting Refer to Section 6 5 3 1 Inthe CPU event setting set Send an e mail when an event occurs and set the E mail main text Attached file and Send to Event setting gt CPU event setting gt Edit screen CPU event setting No 01 E CPU name 01 Control CPU m Interval 5 seconds 1 to 36400 Condition M Normal STOP I Normal RUN I Warning STOP I Warning RUN I System error I PAUSE Mail setting for event occurrence M Send an e mail when an event occurs M Disconnect from the network after sending mail E mail main text control CPU INormal STOP Attached file ONone Tag data 01 line ha Logging data 01 line 1 z Send to E mail address To E mail address To 01 meae re E F Vv 09 E 02 es yi n og pe E 10 03 0 mea i a 04 r 05 E 06 E 07 E 08 E 2 When a CPU event occurs an e mail is sent to the destination e
337. e to display the tag data LLLLLLLLL TE S yO E O Device Value Component name mm ai D100 100 Pressure Tag setting Tag data monitor D200 20 3 Temperature m Tag name Water level 01 Process A Humidity Component name CPU name Component name Value Pressure 100 Temperature CPU1 D200 Temperature 20 3 Waterlevel_ 9 alata Humidity CPU1 D400 Humidity 70 Quantity of production Quantity of production 1280 Component name 1280 Quantity of production 1 Sets a tag and its components in Web browser 3 Display of tag data logging logging result Logging function Tag data can be stored as a CSV file in time series at the user specified execution timing by setting timing start stop condition The stored file can be displayed in a Web browser or downloaded by FTP operation etc Web server module External device Client eed 2 According to the logging setting Web server module logs tag data 3 Specifies a logging name to display the logging data N ETN gt Date Pressure Temperature Waer iva oom osoo 90 20a o _ oazo osso a7 205 7 Foaorior osoxoo ao 204 8 S ozor oso 100 204 10 13 02 07 01 09 20 00 Logging data can be viewed as a list or a graph 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 4 Data
338. ean 2 According to the logging setting 3 Specifies a logging Client Web server module logs name to display the tag data logging data hl ian oa ar jaa gt Logging setting Logging monitor Tag name Logging interval seconds Loaging name Display form Process A List Process A menal specication 00 seconds Process B mera speciation 60 secors Date Pressure Temperature Water evel Process Time spectteaton 50000 ffoaio7ior o9 0000 s0 208 9 _ 020701090500 97 25s 7 ozo7or onoo 101 204 e _ 02 7101 orso 100 24 10 13 02 07 01 09 20 00 103 20 2 1 Makes logging setting in Web browser Logging data can be viewed as a list or a graph FUNCTION saeco MELSEC Q 2 Logging data before and after event occurrence can be stored By setting the occurrence of an event as the start stop condition of logging logging data before and after event occurrence can be stored This enables only necessary data to be stored without the logging data before and after event occurrence being buried in the file 2003 11 01 13 54 00 2003 11 01 13 54 14 2003 11 01 13 54 24 2003 11 01 13 54 34 2003 11 01 13 54 44 Web server ag 2003 11 01 13 54 54 2003 11 01 13 55 04 2003 11 01 13 55 14 2003 11 01 13 55 24 2003 11 01 13 55 34 2003 11 01 13 55 44 2003 11 01
339. eb server module nn ee GX Developer Q00J Q00 Q01CPU Single CPU system Version 7 or later Multiple CPU system Version 8 or later Q02 Q02H Q06H Q12H Single CPU system Q25HCPU Multiple CPU system Q12PH Q25PHCPU single CEU systet Version 7 10L or later Multiple CPU system 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 2 Network Connections This section explains the connection methods of the Web server module to the network 1 LAN connection The Web server module can be connected to a LAN using the 10BASE 2 T 100BASE TX interface Web server module k Twisted pair cable i External device 2 Connection via ADSL modem The Web server module can be connected to the Internet through ADSL modem using 10BASE T 100BASE TX interface a When using bridge type ADSL modem Web server module External device General public line External device c When using bridge type ADSL modem broadband router 1 2 Web server module 3 Twisted pair cable PPPoE ADSL modem Broadband router External device General public line 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q x1 It is recommended to use a UPnP compatible product When the product is incompatible with UPnP contract on a static IP address with an Internet service provider and the NAT setting on the router are required x2 Independently of whether the product is compatible or incompatible with UPnP the initial setting of the mo
340. eb server module to the network cannot be made or if the network setting is to be changed it is required to make one to one connection and perform setting with the Web browser The setting of the Web server module can be changed via the network however it is recommended to set it back to one to one connection 5 3 1 Procedure for returning to one to one connection The following is the operating procedure for returning to one to one connection Make the default operation setting in the switch setting 1 Switch setting of GX Developer of GX Developer y Connect the Web server module to the personal For PC s network setting for one to one connection computer with a crossing cable refer to Section 4 5 x On the following screens from the Administrative menu System setting Refer to Section 4 6 3 make network setting of the Web server module Dial up setting Refer to Section 4 6 4 System setting Dial up setting Reset the default operation setting in the switch 2 Reset of switch setting of GX Developer setting of GX Developer y Power the PLC OFF and connect the Web server module according to the network setting Completed 1 Switch setting of GX Developer Make the default operation setting in the switch setting of GX Developer Refer to Section 4 7 for details on the switch setting of GX Developer GX Developer a Write 0003H to Switch 2 in
341. ec Internet Explorer 5 5 6 0 of Microsoft Corporation Outlook Express 5 5 6 0 POP before SMTP compatible Provided FTP server Number o simultaneously connectable nodes FTP client Client function Provided PUT GET User authentication Account number Maximum 16 Securit User ID 1 to 20 characters password 8 to 14 characters Maximum 500 Registration number Maximum 32 maximum 64 components for each tag No of logging Maximum 64 No of lines number of records Maximum 10000 lines e When Sampling Execute at high speed is selected in tag setting control CPU only 100 to 60000ms total number of device points Maximum 96 e When Sampling Execute is selected in tag setting 1 to 32767ms number of components Maximum 4096 Sampling interval 1 There are some restrictions on the use of audio parts in Microsoft VM Refer to Section 7 2 6 4 1 Number of writes for Standard ROM Flash ROM Data can be written to the same area of a standard ROM up to 100 000 times and the life of a standard ROM drive is limited as shown below a Standard ROM drive life Life of standard ROM drive days 737000 write size per day MB 3 2 3 2 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Example When executing 4 logging settings in which 64 single word data type components are to be collected at intervals of 10 seconds LS 20 18 1 64 1 1237 bytes Write size per day 1237 lt 86400 10 lt 4 40 7MB Life of
342. ecaeseeesaeeaesaeseseeeeateas App 35 Appendix 6 9 FTP CSV FTP Setting ccccecceseseeeeceeeeseeeeceeceeeeaecaecaeseeeeaesaesaeseeeaesaseeseaesaesaesenseaeeaes App 42 Appendix 6 10 EMAIL CSV E mail Setting cccecceceeseeeeeeeeeeeesecaeceeceeeeaeeaecaeseecaesaesaesensaesaeseeeeaeeaes App 43 Appendix 6 11 EVENT CSV Event setting Common Setting cc cescceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeaeeaes App 45 Appendix 6 12 CPUEVT CSV Event setting CPU event Setting cccceceeceeceeeceeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeaes App 46 Appendix 6 13 TAGEVT CSV Event setting Tag event Setting cccecceeeceeeseeceeeeeeeeseeteeeeeeaes App 49 Appendix 6 14 TIMEEVT CSV Event setting Time Interval event Setting cecceseteeeeeeeeee App 52 Appendix 6 15 ADDRESS CSV Address notification Setting cccecceseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeseeeeeeeaeeaes App 55 Appendix 6 16 ACCOUNT CSV Account Setting cscceccececeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeaesaeseeesaesaesaeseeesaneseeeeaeeaes App 59 Appendix 6 17 IPFILTER CSV IP filter setting cecceceeceeeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeaeeaecaeseeeeaesaesaeseeetaeeaneeeeateaes App 61 A 18 A 18 Appendix 7 Sizes of Data Written to Standard ROM and Compact Flash Card ou App 63 Appendix 7 1 Size of data written to standard ROM drive ce eeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseesaetaseesereeeaneeees App 63 Appendix 7 2 Size of data written to Compact Flash Card c scessssssssecsesssesssessse
343. ecify the block number for n x6 Specify the network No for n x7 Specify the I O number of the intelligent function module special function module for n x8 Not accessible when the QOOJCPU is used 9 The M L and S devices are in the same area independently of the device setting in the parameters 10 ERO R cannot be specified App 5 App 5 APPENDIX MELSEC O Appendix 3 Directory Structure Data such as logging data or event historical data are stored as files in the standard ROM or Compact Flash card of the Web server module Each file is managed in directory unit and the access authority is required for the user to access the directory file via Web or FTP For access via Web users do not have to be conscious of the directory file 1 Directory structure The following shows the directory structure of the Web server module LOGGING EVENT EL USER CSV a SETCMD 4 VV L gt eemnes H SETCMDEN l MONCMD a MONCMDE h H N SYSTEM B PARTS IMAGE ICON Ka LocenG aa a USER CSV BACKUP B App 6 App 6 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 2 Access authority by directory The following table indicates the access authority by directory With Administrator Without Administrator Description Authority Authority a7 FTP roue BORE EIGIEE Arow Sardara roM ehe k Directory Name 1 L 1 1
344. ection 3 1 2 3 for how to download Java VM Start of each monitor screen may take a little while When displaying a monitor screen on the Web browser do not switch the monitor screen to another until it is displayed completely Failure to observe this instruction may cause an error error code BO1h and the following screen appears To display the monitor screen select the monitor screen from the monitor screen menu again Device monitor No communication part is provided or a display part is described before a communication part Describe a communication part in ahead of a display part For monitor screen select a desired monitor again from the menu ERR OB01h OK Warming Applet Window If communication is interrupted due to some reason while monitoring the system from a monitor screen or if monitoring is executed before connecting the Web server module to the network the monitor screen may not be correctly displayed on the Web browser even after restoration or restart of communications To display the monitor screen select the relevant screen from the monitor screen menu again or restart the Web browser to execute the monitoring Temporary Internet files settings delete 1 Select any other than Never for Check for newer versions of stored pages in temporary Internet files settings of the Web browser If Never is set the old screen the one saved in the temporary Internet files is displayed unchanged when
345. ection status X4 is on 3 IP address and subnet mask storage areas in the network connection status area e IP address buffer memory 55 to 56 e Subnet mask buffer memory 57 to 58 5 CONNECTING WEB SERVER MODULE TO NETWORK MELSEC Q c When connection to the network fails connection error X19 turns on and an error code is stored into the connection error code area buffer memory 30 Take corrective measures according to the troubleshooting In the network connection status area buffer memory 28 to 69 the current network connection status of the Web server module can be confirmed 3 Access to Web server module a Start a Web browser on the personal computer and enter the Web server module address set in the System setting IP address 192 168 10 3 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 b When the user authentication screen is displayed at the time of access to the Web server module enter the account Setting in 1 2 Username administrator001 Password example QU71WS96ADMIN c The standard screen is displayed in the Web browser 5 CONNECTING WEB SERVER MODULE TO NETWORK MELSEC Q 5 1 2 Access procedure when obtaining IP address from DHCP server The following shows the procedure for access from the external device to the PLC CPU when an IP address for the Web server module is obtained from the DHCP server System configuration for LAN connection Web server module
346. eeceeeeseceecaeeeeeeaecaeceeseaeeaesaesaeseaeeaesaeseeseaeeeseeseaeeates 6 1 22 gt Mont r FUNCION rara A AAAA cage esc udne cate cage 295 AAE a AARI case duteaags 29 case E EA AR celeacaftesgs dt A AR S 6 2 6 2 1 Device MOMO sosen a e teenie 6 2 6 2 2 Tag data MOMOL 2 4 sinc ee inde ten eine eee tae ea edger de terete 6 6 6 2 3 Logging Montoiro nanaii el eet dade ated ete dead chorea dete 6 10 6 2 4 Event IMISTOry MONON eranen pect noen dee EEEE NRE bas CEET ANSE ten peat tied is AEE intinent EET EEEE 6 13 6 2 5 PLC diagnostics Monitor cccccceccececeeseceeceeeeeeeeeceeceeeeaeeaecaeceeeaesaesaeseeeeaesaeseeseeesaesaeseeseesesneseteaees 6 18 6 2 6 Seli diagnostics monitor twas tia vi eae ea eta a ea 6 20 6 2 7 Precautions for USING monitor FUNCTION 0 cece eeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeesaeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeteeeseeeteeeseaeteatenetaaes 6 22 6 3 Tag Function c8 aca ai ee A a i a 6 26 Ga T Tag TUNnChON i a4 Ache ei Ak ia ti i ee Re ee a ea 6 26 6 3 2 Setting procedure for tag function cececcecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeaecaecaeeeeeeaesaeseeseaesaesaeseeteaeeeseeseaeeates 6 27 Gaa TAg SONOS a a vee chal needa Heawcs EEE E TE E A S 6 28 6 4 LOGGING F UDe iON seans E aia oan aanabiaiescs 6 35 6 4 1 Logging Unco ws cscs heeds eee te a ee do ed ded doc eed eee eet 6 35 6742 LOQGINGUIIC ETE E E wives Se eee ee ieee ea ied T es eee 6 37 6 4 3 Setting procedure for logging FUNCTION cceeeecceeeeeeeeeeececeeeeaeeeeceeseeeaes
347. eeeseceeeeeeecaeeseseaecaeeaeesaeeaecaessessaeeaesaeesaeeaesaesaeseaseaesaeeeeeeateaes 4 47 4 8 1 GH1 Self loopDack test cacasscaf kecaed aescades deedeedeanieadti epcacdh anata shecutiacdishsaasi ste ed ASEA Sadka destained dhaatseastes 4 47 4 8 2 CH2 self loopback teSt cceccesesseceeceeeeeeeseceeeeeseaeeaeceeesaeeaecaesaeseaeeaecaessaseaecaesaeseaseaesaeeeesaeeaeeeeeeateaes 4 48 483 Hardware testw 05 chitin eis een a ei eel eel ieee eres 4 49 4 9 Setting Removal of Compact Flash Card and Precautions for Use sc sssesssessssessseecssesssessseesseeeaee 4 50 4 9 1 Precautions for using Compact Flash card c sssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssessesssssssssssssesssesssssssssesesseesee 4 50 4 9 2 Setting Removal of Compact Flash Card ssscssssesssssssssssssscsssssssssessseessseessssessesesseesseesseenseeen 4 51 4 10 Mounting and Replacement of Battery eee eeceeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaseatenatenas 4 55 4101 Battery SPOCiICAU ONS icc i eeves Gesceett ay tneed dvs cvest ETE ive vs EET EOE lees EET EENET AERE EA ETET AEAT interest deers 4 55 419 2 MOUNTING Of DAS bac bzes bess cticts pee des a ide ducting duet a aeted bedesi denen decades 4 55 4 10 3 Battery replaceme nt 2 00 440 aie Wi ihe an ee eta ei 4 56 4 11 Operation without Battery Being Mounted eceeceeeeeseeeeceeeeeeeeecaeceeeeaeeaesaeseeeeaesaesaeseeetaeeaeeneaeeaes 4 59 A 15 A 15 4 12 Removing Battery for St
348. een appears Example When the device test is attempted Device monitor No write authority is identified Log in again with a user name that has write authority enabled and then execute again ERR 0903h OK Warming Applet Window c When Device write disable request YA has been set to Disable the device test tag component test is not available When the device test tag component test is attempted the following screen appears Example When the device test is attempted Writing to device is disabled Turn OFF the device write disable signal and re execute ERR 0907h OK Warning Applet Window d When Data write of the tag setting has been set to Disable the tag component test is not available Refer to Section 6 3 3 for the tag setting When the tag component test is attempted the following screen appears Tag data monitor Disable is set in Data Write in T ag setting Enter Enable to Data Write in Tag setting and re execute ERR 0909h Warning Applet Window FUNCTION sd eS MELSEC Q 6 3 Tag Function 6 3 1 Tag function The tag function is designed to store a set device data of individual PLC CPUs on the network as a tag and collect those device data in tag unit 1 Tag a A tag is a data table contains a set of data components required to access the device data of the PLC CPUs on the network b For component set the communication path data type d
349. een completed or the Web server module has been ready X0 is on and make access from the personal computer to the Web server module 1 x1 When access is made from the personal computer to the Web server module during preparation of the Web server module the Page cannot be displayed message is returned to the Web browser Therefore after the Web server module has been ready make access from the Web browser again b Carefully set the PLC series of the access target CPU setting A wrong PLC series has been set an error occurs in the PLC CPU or module on the route to the access target CPU and a response time out error error code 0002h is displayed on the Web server module 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 7 Intelligent Function Module Switch Setting Setting Purpose Set the mode default operation battery error detection logging monitor and response monitoring time for Web server module on the Intelligent function module switch setting screen Start Procedure GX Developer gt lt Project gt Window gt Parameter gt PLC parameter gt lt I O assignment gt tab Switch setting Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module Refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual for the screen display method Setting screen Switch setting for 1 0 and intelligent function module Input format HEX be on rack QU7TWS96 poo 0003 sae 1 Setting item
350. een that displays the data block parts The sample screen SMPBLKEN HTM is stored in the USER directory of the Web server module a Tag setting refer to Section 6 3 3 1 Set Data write in the tag setting No 1 to Enable 2 Set the component setting No 1 to 5 of the tag setting No 1 a Tag setting Home gt Administrative mem gt Tag setting gt Component se Add Edit Delete Back m a Si ca oa c device A 01 Control CPU Single word Decimal 0 decimal places None C 2 deviceB 01 Control CPU Single word D1 Decimal 0 decimal places None C 3 deviceC 01 Control CPU Single word D2 Decimal 0 decimal places None C 4 device D 01 Control CPU Single word D3 Decimal 0 decimal places None C 5 device E 01 Control CPU Single word D4 Decimal 0 decimal places None 3 Click on the Update button on the Setting update screen to update the setting b Creation of HTML file File name SMPBLKEN HTM The HTML source is indicated below lt DOCTYPE html PUBLIC W3C DTD HTML 4 01 Transitional EN gt lt html gt lt head gt lt meta http equiv Content Type content text html charset iso 8859 1 gt lt meta http equiv Pragma content no cache gt lt title gt Sample screen for data block part lt title gt lt head gt lt body gt lt h1 gt Sample screen for data block part lt h1 gt lt Communication part gt lt applet code WSCom class codebase PARTS width 0 height 0 gt
351. egistered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Sun Sun Microsystems Java J2ME and J2SE are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the United States and other countries Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporation Pentium and Celeron are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Co Ltd in the United States CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation Other company names and product names used in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of respective owners afa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC HEADQUARTERS EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V German Branch Gothaer Stra e 8 D 40880 Ratingen Phone 49 0 2102 486 0 Fax 49 0 2102 486 1120 e mail megfamail meg mee com EUROPE MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FRANCE EUROPE B V French Branch 25 Boulevard des Bouvets F 92741 Nanterre Cedex Phone 33 1 55 68 55 68 Fax 33 1 55 68 56 85 e mail factory automation framee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC IRELAND EUROPE B V Irish Branch Westgate Business Park Ballymount IRL Dublin 24 Phone 353 0 1 419 88 00 Fax 353 0 1 419 88 90 e mail sales info meir mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ITALY EUROPE B V Italian Branch
352. enabled or not while the Web server module is operating without battery Refer to Section 4 11 0 Detects battery error 1 Not detect battery error c Logging monitor setting bit 4 Whether the latest file update time is displayed or not in the file specification field of the logging monitor is set in this setting Refer to Section 6 2 3 0 Not display the latest file update time 1 Displays the latest file update time 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 1 Regardless of the logging monitor setting the logging file time information can be obtained from the file name Refer to Section 6 4 4 2 h 2 When the logging monitor setting is 1 longer time will be required to display the logging monitor if there are many logging files saved 3 Response monitoring time setting switch 3 lower byte This is the setting for timeout time second from when a module sends a request to the CPU of the accessed device until the CPU responds to it Response timeout error will occur if the CPU of the accessed device does not respond to the request after the set time has passed Setting range 15 to 255 second default value 15 seconds Response monitoring time will be automatically default value 15 seconds if it is not set or set to any of 0 to 14 b15 to b8 b7 to bO Upper byte x lower byte Switch 3 v _A xX A Specify 0 Response monitoring time setting 15 to 255 seconds
353. ending SD RD Data not transmitted 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 4 4 Cable Connection MELSEC Q This section explains how to connect cables to the Web server module To realize a reliable system and fully utilize the Web server module functions wiring resistant to external noise is required 1 2 Ground the RS 232 Cable shield at only one point When connecting to an external device with an RS 232 cable use a connector shell specified in Section 3 2 for the Web server module side Sufficient safety precautions must be taken when installing the 100BASE TX and 10BASE T networks Consult a specialist when connecting cable terminals or installing trunk line cables etc Use a 10BASE T 100BASE TX connection cable compliant to the standards shown in Section 2 4 The bending radius near the connectors should be four times larger or more than the cable s outside diameter Connect the external device according to its specifications Do not short the FG signal and SG signal of the RS 232 connection cable When the FG signal and SG signal are connected inside the external device do not connect the FG signal to the Web server module 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 4 1 10BASE T 100BASE TX connection This section provides connection examples for use of the 1OBASE T 100BASE TX interface of the Web server module 1 In the case of LAN connection HUB ESNE D000 m td
354. ent of the I O signals is shown assumed that the Web server module is mounted on Slot 0 of the main base unit If mounted on other than Slot 0 use the device numbers corresponding to the slot Device X indicates an input signal from the Web server module to the PLC CPU and device Y indicates an output signal from the PLC CPU to the Web server module Signal Direction Web server module gt PLC CPU Signal Direction PLC CPU Web server module Device Device Signal name Signal name No No Module READY ON Module prepared OFF Watch dog timer error occurrence Use prohibited Compact Flash card setting status ON Set OFF Not set File access status File access stop request ON Stopped OFF Operating ON Stop requested PR File access stop cancel request X3 Use prohibited ON Stop request cancelled Network connection status ON Connected OFF Not connected Network connection processing Network connection request Y5 ON Processing OFF ON Connection requested Y4 Use prohibited Network connection completion E ye lUse prohibited ON Connection completed OFF Network disconnection processing ON Processing OFF Network disconnection request ON Disconnection requested Network disconnection completion ON Disconnection completed OFF so Device write disable request Use prohibited YA f ON Disable OFF Enable yi Use prohibited CPU event status ON Event occurrence OFF Not occurred Use prohibited Tag
355. equirement Time specification TIME PR rime interyar me speciicaion a Interval specification INTERVAL e Hour Minute Second format Hour 00 to 23 PER Minute 00 to 59 PER PER can be When TIME is selected at specified for Minute MODE only when PER is TIME Time specified for Hour Second 00 to 59 Example 9 00 00 17 00 00 PER PER 00 When INTERVAL is selected at jag x MODE Must be set x Need not be set Invalid App 53 App 53 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Lo Setting Item Description Set value requirement When INTERVAL is selected at N 1 to 86400 unit seconds MODE INTERVAL Interval When TIME is selected at Blank MODE Sore nena SS EMAIL Sean suse retical eee DISCONNECT Denewwork seeded ater sending EMAL TTEN ODA mail When NO is selected at EMAIL E mail main text When YES is selected at EMAIL 0 to 256 characters BODY 1 When NO is selected at EMAIL When YES is NONE selectedat Tagdata TAG E APPEND Attached file g EMAIL Logging Data LOGGING When NO is selected at EMAIL When TAG is selected at 1 to 64 APPEND APPTAG Tag setting No When other than the above is Blank selected at APPEND When LOGGING is selected at gba Logging setting APPEND EE APPLOGGING UT RE No When other than the above is Blank selected at APPEND to Destination 1 to selected at When NO is selected at EMAIL e ea Must be set x Need not be set Invali
356. er requ Please try the following R gt Please type your user name ane d password Click the F Refresh button Y If you have visited this pag z TEENE view what has been stored Rea QU71wS36 and then click Work Offlin For information about offlin UserName Q7IWS96 Explorer click the Help me and Index eset Joop Save this password in your password list Internet Explorer C aK Cancel Z I Opening page hip 190 168 33 Inemet If access to the Web server module fails first issue the PING command from the personal computer to the Web server module to check the existence of the Web server module Refer to Section 6 11 3 for how to issue the PING command 5 Accessing the host CPU of the Web server module a b c Display the Device monitor screen Within the Monitor screen Monitor screen gt Device monitor Access the host CPU of the Web server module and confirm that the following input signals X are on Module READY X0 Network connection status X4 fal Device monitor Home gt Monitor screen gt Device monitor CPU name Data type Display form 01 Control CPU El G 16bitinteger C DEC Starmania Devica C 32bitinteger HEX Stop monitor C Real number ASCII character Device test Device FEDC BA984765443210 Value xo oo000 0000 0001 0001 oo x10 o0o00 0000 0000 0000 cooo x20 ooo00 0000 0000 0000 0000 x30 o0o00 0000 0000 0000 0
357. er module 1 3 Format the PLC memory Format PLC memory x Connection target information Connection interface use lt gt Pec module Target PLC Stationno Host PLC type Q25PH Target memory Program memory Device memory Yj Format Type C Do not create a user setting system area the necessary system area only Create a user setting system area x PRA AN Kates 1 The area size of 1K step is required ite ti tation P e u ee 015K steps per Web server module separately Online change area of multiple blocks Online change area of FB definition ST 0 vj Ksteps mn vee used for GX Developer ana or k 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 6 4 Logging Function 6 4 1 Logging function The logging function stores tag data as a CSV format logging file into standard ROM or Compact Flash card in time series at the user specified execution timing by setting timing start stop condition TIME product A product B product C product D 11 14 2002 16 18 51 100 695 278 139 Tag data will be logged TIME product A product B product C product D 11 14 2002 16 18 51 100 695 278 139 11 14 2002 16 19 51 100 700 280 140 1 Logging file can be monitored downloaded The logging file can be monitored on the logging monitor screen Also the logging file can be sent to the external device by downloading it from the logging monitor screen or using E mail delivery file transfer Web server module External device p
358. er to make the network setting valid 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 3 Web browser setting a Local area network LAN setting In Local Area Network LAN Settings of the Web browser make setting so that the proxy server is not used at the local address Example In the case of Microsoft Windows 98 operating system or Microsoft Corporation s Internet Explorer 5 5 Tools gt Internet Options gt lt Connections gt tab gt LAN Settings gt Local Area Network LAN Settings Screen Local Area Network LAN Settings 2 x Automatic configuration Automatic configuration may override manual settings To ensure the use of manual settings disable automatic configuration M Automatically detect settings Use automatic configuration script omes b Temporary Internet files settings delete 1 Select any other than Never for Check for newer versions of stored pages in the temporary Internet files settings of the Web browser If Never it set the old screen the one saved in the temporary Internet files is displayed unchanged when the file is read from the Edit screen etc Example In the case of Microsoft Windows 98 operating system or Microsoft Corporation s Internet Explorer 5 5 Tools gt Internet Options gt lt General gt tab gt Temporary Internet Files Settings gt Settings Screen Settings 2 Check for newer
359. ernal device Special Index File MELSECNET I 0 i Constant data System User module register Others register Direct Ji 3 Haar foe A e SS ea E Eo Ne a Instruction Execution code condition Command LOGDEL Z LOGDEL Command LOGDEL f ZP LOGDEL Setting data Setting data Setting side 1 Data type Head I O signal of the module Un 00 to FE The first 2 digits when the I O signal is represented in User BIN16bit 3 digits Device Head number of the device that stores the control data User System Head number of the bit device that will be turned on for one scan when the instruction is normally completed ue System Bit D 1 also turns on when the instruction is abnormally completed The local devices and the file registers for individual programs do not work as the devices for the setting data 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q Control data Setting Setting side Device Item Setting data range Set the execution type b8 0 Deletes one saved file of logging data according to the setting S 0 Execution type made in S 3 to S 4 1 Deletes all saved files of logging data according to the setting made in S 3 to S 4 The status of the instruction completion is stored Completion i iai 0 Normal completion System canal Other than 0 Abnormal completion Error code gt 2 Set the logging data to be deleted with the correspondi
360. error history Start monitor Stop monitor 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 1 LED status e The LED status RUN LED ERR LED of the Web server module is displayed Refer to Section 4 3 1 for the LED indications 2 Error status e The status of the current error area address 140 to 145 of the buffer memory is displayed Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code 3 Clear error status button e Turns off the ERR LED X10 to X19 and X1C e Clears the current error area address 140 to 145 of the buffer memory e Clears Present Error displayed in the system monitor of GX Developer Refer to Section 9 2 2 e A module stop error ERR LED flicker cannot be cleared 4 Error history e The status of the error log area address 150 to 247 of the buffer memory is displayed Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code 5 Clear error history button e Clears the error log area address 150 to 247 of the buffer memory e Clears Error Display displayed in the system monitor of GX Developer Refer to Section 9 2 2 e A module stop error ERR LED flicker cannot be cleared 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 6 2 7 Precautions for using monitor function This section explains the precautions for using the monitor function 1 Precautions for displaying the monitor screen a Since the monitor screens use the Java applet Java VM is required for the Web browser to execute the applet Refer to S
361. erval event setting Refer to Section 6 5 3 e Check the CPU event setting Refer to Section 6 5 3 e Check the tag event setting Refer to Section 6 5 3 e Check the time interval event setting Refer to Section 6 5 3 e Display the monitor screen again after selecting the monitor screen to be executed from the monitor screen menu again e Initialize the module refer to Section 4 13 and then make the tag setting refer to Section 6 3 3 again 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC Q From the previous page Error code 064Ah 064Bh 064Ch 064Dh 064Fh 0650h 0651h Duplicate high speed logging specification error Excessive number of device points for high speed sampling tag High speed sampling tag component registration error High speed sampling tag specification error High speed logging specification error No specified event error High speed sampling tag CPU specification error High speed logging storage setting error There are more than one logging setting in which high speed sampling tag is specified The logging setting file is corrupted Total device points of the high speed sampling tag exceeds 96 points Failed to register the component device of the high speed sampling tag to the control CPU The high speed sampling tag was specified in the TAG instruction The high speed sampling logging was specified in the LOG instruction The event specified in t
362. erver e Check the cable e Check the DHCP server setting Continue Continue e System error 1 Continue Continue e Check the power supply of the modem and cable status e Check the dial up setting whether the communication Continue speed matches the modem specifications Refer to Section 4 6 4 e Check whether the additional command set in AT command additional setting of the dial up setting is applicable to the modem to be used Refer to Section 4 6 4 Continue n n n e e O O T ge Continued on the next page 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC Q From the previous page Error code e Replace the modem with the one that is compatible with the flow control command Flow control command The modem is not compatible with Refer to Section 4 6 4 6 y 0312h Continue error the flow control command e Set the flow control command in AT command additional setting of the dial up setting Refer to Section 4 6 4 e Replace the modem with the one that is compatible with the dial pause command Dial pause command The modem is not compatible with Refer to Section 4 6 4 6 0313h i i Continue error the dial pause command e Set the dial pause command in AT command additional setting of the dial up setting Refer to Section 4 6 4 e Check the power supply of the modem cable and line status Failed to establish dial up e Check the dial up setting s 0314h Dial up error i
363. erver status start up status lease period of the IP address whether the assigned IP address obtained from the DHCP server i is reserved Check the cable and external device status f Check whether the transmission Network diagnosis Failed to run network diagnostics Baas 031Ah ot destination is correct or notin the Continue error ping transmission cee Network diagnosis setting of the system setting Refer to Section 4 6 3 Check the dial up setting Refer to Section 4 6 4 Check the power supply of the modem cable and line status ae ate i e f ADSL disconnection has not PPPoE Failed in authentication at the time 0320h ws correctly processed due to the Continue negotiation error of ADSL connection unexpected cause such as power off or cable disconnection make sure to increase the connection time interval by 5 minutes or more 0321h 0322h System error e System error K 1 Sto 0323h 4 y a 0330h e Check whether the UPnP router is powered on T e Check the cable connected to up nafi Timeout occurred in the UPnP communication Ve f to the UPnP router 0340h communication with the UPnP j Continue timeout e Confirm that the router supports router UPnP e Power on the Web server module when the UPnP router is ready Continued on the next page 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC Q From the previous page Error code UPnP router detection fault UPnP faulty res
364. es the user number for login 2 The user number is the number set in the account setting 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q b Source IP address This area stores the IP address of the access source for login c Login type This area stores whether Web or FTP has been used for login 1 Web login 2 FTP login d Date and Time This area stores the date and time of the login in BCD code b15 to b8 b7 to bO Address 253 to 260 Loginhistory1 0 User number 261 to 268 Login history 2 x Source IP address 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 Login type 373 to 380 Login history 16 Month 014 to 12h Year 00 to 99n last 2 digits Hour 00 to 23x Day 014 to 311 Dai i ate 3 Second 00H to 59x Minute 00x to 59x and time 7 Year 00H to 99n first 2 digits Day of the week 0x to 6x 3 8 8 IP filter area Address 382 to 383 The number of times when the IP packet is blocked by the IP filter can be confirmed 1 Number of times when IP packet is blocked Address 382 to 383 This area stores the cumulative number of times when the IP packet is blocked by the Web server module according to the IP filter setting 3 8 9 Collection monitor cycle area Address 800 to 803 The collection monitor cycle in which the Web server module is operating actually can be confirmed 1 Current cycle Address 800 to 801 This area stores the current time interval of tag collection by the Web server module Unit
365. esponding time interval event setting No area Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code 3 8 17 Access target CPU setting status area Address 4000 to 4071 The setting status of the access target CPU setting can be confirmed Refer to Section 4 6 7 for the access target CPU setting 1 Access target CPU setting data Address 4000 to 4003 a This area stores information on whether the access target CPU setting has been made or not b The bit corresponding to the preset access target CPU setting No turns on 0 Not set 1 Set b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO Address 4000 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4001 4002 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 4003 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 2 Access target CPU error data Address 4004 to 4007 a This area stores the access target CPU error data b The bit corresponding to the an access target CPU setting No of an access target CPU error turns on 0 No access target CPU error occurred 1 Access target CPU error occurred b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b0 Address 4004 1 4005 4006 4007 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q c The following is observed when an access target CPU error occurs Example When an error occurs in the access target CPU of the access target CP
366. et 1 Gateway The Ping packet is sent to the gateway When the dial up connection is established it is sent to the server of the Internet service provider 2 Following external device The Ping packet is sent to the specified external device As the external device name set an IP address or host name Refer to Appendix 4 2 for the characters available for the external device name 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 8 Automatic network connection setting at start up Set whether automatic network connection will be made or not at a start No connection to network Network connection disconnection processing is required when at start up continuous connection is not available Refer to Section 5 4 Automatic connection to The Web server module automatically connects to the network at a network at start up start After changing the settings make sure to click on the Save button The settings in System setting are updated when the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset 1 The following table indicates the default IP address of the Web server module 81 2 IP address 192 168 3 3 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 x1 When making initial setting set the IP addresses of the Web server module and personal computer to the same network address x2 Prior to shipment the Web server module is set as indicated below including the above default IP address e Connecting through LAN or the
367. et in the tag setting or logging setting 1 to 64 User 1 to 64 Setting No of tag data or logging data to be attached Set the logging data to be attached to the e mail Logging history 0 The current latest file is attached User 1 to FFFFFFFFu The specified saved file is attached FFFFFFFFH Example When attaching 00000010 CSV set 00000010H Se Le es Set the data length for subject main text of the e mail stored in S2 eat 0 to S2 n Subject 1 to 373 main text 1 to 960 1 to 1333 User g 1 to 1333 Data length of e mail Word Specify the data length of the subject of the e mail stored in S2 0 to S1 9 Subject length S2 n 1 to 373 User 1 to 373 Data length of subject Word S1 10 10 System area_ area Whether the clock data of S1 12 to S1 15 is enabled or disabled S1 11 Clock set flag _ is stored 0 1 System 0 Disable 1 Enable S Cm i sjo T 2 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q Setting Setting side Device Item Setting data range x1 12 Upper 8 bit Month 014 to 12x Lower 8 bit Year 00x to 99x Last 2 ea of the year S1 ao U 8 bit H Upper 8 bit Hour 00x to 23 Lower 8 bit Day Otuto 31s to 23x L 8 bit Day 014 to 314 er 8 bit Hour o ower 8 bit Da o Set only when e a eae es al ae H System S1 14 Upper 8 bit Second 00 to 59x Lower 8 bit Minute 00 to 59 8 bit Second 00x to 59x Lower 8 bit
368. evice etc required to access the device data of individual PLC CPUs c The Web server module collects device data in tag unit at an interval defined in the tag d The tag data collected by the Web server module can be monitored from the Web browser by specifying the tag name 2 Collects device data Web server module External device in tag unit according 3 Specifies a tag Client to the tag setting name to display the tag data TD gt conn D z Component name Pressure Tag setting Tag data monitor Temperature Tag name Tag name Water level 01 Process A 01 Process A Temperature ree Water level Quant ot produton CP Pre Quantity of production Device Value _ Component name 1 Sets a tag and its components D10 1280 Quantity of production in Web browser 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 Tag setting a Seta tag in the tag setting of the Administrative menu Refer to Section 6 3 3 b Up to 64 tags can be registered c Upto 64 components can be registered for each tag d Set the communication path to access the PLC CPU in the access target CPU setting Refer to Section 4 6 7 for the access target CPU setting When setting the component specify the communication path CPU name set in the access target CPU setting Sets a tag on the Tag setting Tag setting No 1 Tag setting No Jor z Tag name p
369. f Web Server Module Functions ccccccscccscceseceseceneeeseeesesaeecaeecaeeseeeeaeeeas App 11 Appendix 5 1 Functions added to changed from Old Version eceeceeseeseeeeeeeeeeneeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeenas App 11 Appendix 5 2 Precautions for replacing the old version with the new version c ccceeeeeeeeees App 14 Appendix 6 Setting Information File Formats ccccccceceeseeeeceeceeeeseeeeceeseeeeaesaeceeseeeeesaeseeeeaeeaesaeeeaeeaneaes App 16 Appendix 6 1 Setting information file list and Storage ArCa ececeeeseeeseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeaeeeeeeneaes App 16 Appendix 6 2 Setting information file formats and editing preCaUtionsS cccecceeeeeeeeseteeeetereeeeeaes App 17 Appendix 6 3 SYSTEM CSV System Setting cecceceeseeeeceeceeeeseeeeceeeeeeeaesaecaeseeesaesaesaeseeesaeeaeeensaeeaes App 20 Appendix 6 4 DIALUP CSV Dial Up Setting ccccccececseseeceeceeeeeeceeceeeeeeeaeeaecaesaesaesaeseeeeaesaesaeseeeeaneaes App 24 Appendix 6 5 CPU CSV Access target CPU Setting ceccecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaesaesaeeeeeeaesaeeaeseeeeateaes App 27 Appendix 6 6 TAG CSV Tag Setting ccccecceseseceeceseeseeseceeceeeeaesaecaeceeeeaecaesaeseeeaesaesaeseaeeassaeeeseaeeaes App 31 Appendix 6 7 COMPONENT CSV Tag setting Component Setting ce ceecceceeeeteeeeeeeeeeeteeaes App 33 Appendix 6 8 LOGGING CSV Logging Setting ceecceceesesseceeceeeeseeeeeeeceeeeaeea
370. f the CPU event setting No 16 e CPU event monitor error X13 turns on e CPU event monitor error data area address 3308 bit 15 of the buffer memory turns on e The error code is stored into the CPU event monitor 16 error code area address 3329 of the buffer memory 4 CPU event monitor 1 to 64 error code Address 3312 to 3375 The error code that indicates the error status is stored into the corresponding CPU event setting No area Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code 3 8 13 CPU event monitor status area 2 Address 3000 to 3018 The status related to the CPU event monitor function can be confirmed Refer to Section 6 5 for the CPU event monitor function When using the product whose first 5 digits of serial No are 05112 or later use the CPU event monitor status area 1 address 3300 to 3375 Refer to Section 3 8 12 When this area has been used previously it can be used as is 1 CPU event setting data Address 3000 a This area stores information on whether CPU event setting in the event setting has been made or not b The bit corresponding to the preset CPU event setting No turns on 0 Not set 1 Set b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bd b4 b3 b2 bi bO Address 3000 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 CPU event occurrence data Address 3001 a This area stores the CPU event occurrence results b The bit corresponding to the CPU event setting No of a CPU event
371. f the dedicated instruction e System The execution result of the dedicated instruction is stored by the PLC CPU x2 Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code Function 1 The user data file of the Compact Flash card are read to the device data of the PLC CPU in binary or CSV format 2 Executing the same instruction during execution of the instruction is not allowed The second instruction will not be processed In this case even if an error is detected the completion device D2 0 and completion status indication flag D2 1 do not turn on 3 Anerror may occur if the same file is concurrently accessed by WFREAD and any other instruction WMSEND FTPPUT FTPGET WFWRITE WFDEL Before executing instructions provide interlocks between the dedicated instructions that will access the same file 4 This instruction is not available for interrupt programs 5 As the user data file a file in the CF USER directory of the Compact Flash card can be specified 6 The execution and normal abnormal completion statuses of the WFREAD instruction can be confirmed using the completion device D 0 and completion status indication flag D 1 a Completion device D 0 This device turns on in the END processing of the scan for which the WFREAD instruction is completed and turns off in the next END processing b Completion status indication flag D 1 This device turns on off according to the completio
372. fall short circuits or malfunctions e Do not hold the communication cable by hand when pulling it out from the module Be sure to hold the connector by hand when removing the cable with a connector from the module Failure to do so may cause malfunctions or damage to the module or cable e Be careful not to let foreign matter such as dust or wire chips get inside the module This may cause a fire failure or malfunctions e A protection label is attached to cover the upper part of a module to prevent the entry of foreign matter Do not remove the label during wiring However be sure to remove it for heat dissipation during system operation Startup Maintenance Instructions lt gt DANGER e Do not touch the terminals while the power is on Doing so may cause malfunctions e Before cleaning up and retightening terminal screws and module mounting screws be sure to shut off all phases of external power supply used by the system Failure to do so can cause the failure or malfunctions of module Loose tightening may cause a fall short circuits or malfunctions of the module Overtightening may damage the screws and module and cause a fall short circuits or malfunctions of the module Startup Maintenance Instructions A CAUTION e Never disassemble or modify the module This may cause failure malfunctions injuries or a fire e Before mounting dismounting the module be sure to shut off all phases of external power s
373. fer delay may occur since the Web server module acquires the clock data from CPU No 1 at the following timings e When the PLC is powered off and then on or CPU module is reset e Once per minute Precautions for securi 1 Security of the Web server module The Web server module supports the basic authentication account setting by the user name and password and the IP filter function however it does not prevent all of illegal access from the outside Preventive measures must be taken by users against illegal access to ensure the PLC system safety Refer to Section 4 6 5 3 2 Remote password function of QCPU The remote password function of the QCPU is not used for the Web server module When restricting access to the QCPU use the user authentication function of the Web server module Precautions for tag function 1 Tag setting and component setting Refer to Section 6 3 3 a When a component setting is deleted the settings of the components after the deleted setting No are shifted up When the component has been set in the user part of the user screen creation function reexamine the parameters since the setting No is changed Refer to Chapter 7 for user part details b If a component has a wrong device number in the component setting the other component that will obtain the device of the same access target CPU will result in an error Check the device number set in the component setting c If the data type is set as
374. ff all phases of external power supply used by the system Failure to do so may damage the module e Tighten the screws within the specified torque range Loose tightening may cause a fall short circuits or malfunctions Overtightening may damage the screws and or the module resulting in a fall of the module short circuits or malfunctions e Do not directly touch the conductive part or electronic components of the module This may cause malfunctions or a failure of the module Installation Precautions A CAUTION e For connector wiring correctly press pressure weld or solder the connecting part by using the tool specified by the manufacturer Poor connection may cause short circuits fires or malfunctions e Be sure to set the Compact Flash card by pressing it into the Compact Flash card slot Confirm it is completely set Poor contact may lead to malfunctions Wiring Instructions A CAUTION e Be sure to fix communication cables and power cables to the module by ducts or clamps Failure to do so may cause damage of the module or the cables due to accidental pull or unintentional shifting of the cable or malfunctions due to poor contact of the cables e Connect the connectors to the module securely e Tighten the terminal screws within the specified torque range Loose tightening may result in a fall short circuits or malfunctions Overtightening may cause damage to the screws and or the module resulting in a
375. ff and then on or resetting the CPU module updates the settings made on the setting screen on the Web server module 1 The system settings dial up settings and IP filter settings are not updated by clicking on the Update button Powering the PLC off and then on or resetting CPU module makes the settings valid Web server module requires preparatory time to communicate with the access target CPU when the Update button on the Setting update screen is clicked Therefore it may take several minutes before the communication will be available if many access target CPUs are set In the message box confirm that setting update has been completed Web server module requires preparatory time to communicate with the access target CPU when the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset Therefore it may take several minutes before the communication will be available if many access target CPUs are set The Web server module completion can be confirmed by making sure that Module READY X0 is on When access is made from the personal computer to the Web server module during preparation of the Web server module the Page cannot be displayed message is returned to the Web browser Therefore after the Web server module has been prepared make access from the Web browser again 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 6 3 System setting Setting Purpose Makes the initial setting required for the Web server module to
376. file Used as a file for reading writing the device CF USER User system data of the PLC CPU ROM WW USER HTML JPEG GIF file created by the user User HTML file or User Used as a Web screen CF USER CSV file that saves the setting data various gdata ROM WWW USER CSV l settings of control menu Setting data file or System 3 Created when CSV export is executed CF USER CSV Refer to Section 6 10 3 1 Refer to Appendix 3 for the directory configuration x2 System Created by the Web server module User File can be created or modified by the user 3 The setting data file created by CSV export can be edited by the user 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION This chapter explains the set up and preparatory procedure to operate the Web server module in a system PONT _ 1 Prior to use make sure to read the safety precautions in the beginning of this manual 2 The mounting and installation environment of the Web server module are the same as those of the CPU module For details refer to the user s manual of the PLC CPU module 4 1 Handling Precautions 4 This section explains the precautions for handling the Web server module 1 Do not drop or apply severe shock to the module case since it is made of resin 2 Tighten the module fixing screws within the specified torque range as follows Screw position Tightening
377. for disconnect part The following provides an example of creating the sample screen that displays the disconnect parts The sample screen Smpdscen htm is stored in the USER directory of the Web server module a Creation of HTML file File name Smpdscen htm The HTML source is indicated as follows 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q lt DOCTYPE html PUBLIC W3C DTD HTML 4 01 Transitional EN gt lt html gt lt head gt lt meta http equiv Content Type content text html charset iso 8859 1 gt lt meta http equiv Pragma content no cache gt lt title gt Sample screen for disconnect part lt title gt lt head gt lt body gt lt h1 gt Sample screen for disconnect part lt h1 gt lt form method post action WSDscntC cgi gt lt input type submit value Disconnect gt lt input type hidden name CONFIRM value 1 gt lt input type hidden name LANGUAGE value 1 gt lt input type hidden name REFERER value user smpdscen htm gt lt form gt lt body gt lt html gt b Storage of HTML file Transfer the HTML file to the Web server module by performing FTP operation File storage destination ROM WWW USER Smpdscen htm c Sample screen display Display the sample screen Example When accessing the Web server module by one to one connection Sample screen address http 192 168 3 3 USER Smpdscen htm Execution screen
378. for setting update ran out The device name specified in the device monitor or device test is faulty or that of an unusable device At start up or setting update the following was detected e Operation involving file writing was attempted during file access stop At other than start up or setting update the following was detected in the logging function event monitor function or dedicated instruction e Operation involving file writing was attempted during file access stop At other than start up or setting update the following was detected in the dedicated instruction e Operation involving file writing was attempted during file access stop At start up or setting update the following was detected e Accessing the CF card was attempted with no CF card set At other than start up or setting update the following was detected in the logging function or dedicated instruction e Accessing the CF card was attempted with no CF card set At other than start up or setting update the following was detected in the dedicated instruction or user display parts e Accessing the CF card was attempted with no CF card set e Update the setting again e Reduce the load for tag logging event monitor function and reset the CPU module e Refer to the accessible device list and enter the device name Refer to Appendix 2 Display Display Display Display Continued on the next page e Turn on File ac
379. fter battery error occurrence may cause erasure of logging data corruption of data in the standard ROM drive Compact Flash card during access or a file system fault 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 3 Web server module battery replacement When the Web server module battery has been exhausted replace the battery with a new one according to the procedure shown below The PLC must be powered on for 10 minutes or more before removing the battery Even if the battery is removed the memories are backed up by the capacitor for a while However if the replacement time exceeds the limit specified in the table below data stored in the memories may be erased To prevent this replace the battery quickly Backup time by capacitor Backup time by capacitor min Battery replacement Power off the PLC Remove the web server module from the base unit Open the cover of the web server E la module H Remove the old battery from its holder d q Insert a new battery into the holder LY correctly Connect the lead to the connector Close the cover of the web server module Mount the web server module onto the base unit Battery Power on the PLC Monitor buffer memory address 7 to check the ON OFF status The web server module battery is Completed faulty OFF 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION
380. function can be confirmed Refer to Section 6 5 for the tag event monitor function 1 Tag event setting data Address 10000 to 10015 a b Address 10000 10001 10002 10003 10004 10005 10006 10007 10008 10009 10010 10011 10012 10013 10014 10015 This area stores information on whether Tag event setting in the event setting has been made or not The bit corresponding to the preset tag event setting No turns on 0 Not set 1 Set b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 76 5 413 2 1 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 48 64 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 80 79 77 76 75 74 73 224 2 221 218 217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 209 240 239 238 237 236 235 234 233 230 229 228 227 226 225 93 92 91 90 89 86 85 84 83 82 81 1 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 157 154 153 152 151 150 149 148 147 146 145 173 170 169 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 1 189 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 179 178 177 256 255 254 253 252 251 250 249 248 247 246 245 244 243 242 241 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Tag event occurrence data Address 10064 to 10079 a This area stores the tag event occurrence results b The bit corresponding to the tag event setting No
381. function can be confirmed Refer to Section 6 5 for the time event monitor function 1 Time event setting data Address 3200 a This area stores information on whether Time Interval event setting in the event setting has been made or not b The bit corresponding to the preset time interval event setting No turns on 0 Not set 1 Set b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bd b4 b3 b2 bi bO Address 3200 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 21 2 Time event monitor error data Address 3201 a This area stores the time event monitor error data b The bit corresponding to the time interval event setting No of a time event monitor error turns on 0 No time event monitor error occurred 1 Time event monitor error occurred b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bd b4 b3 b2 bi bO Address 3201 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 21 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q c The following is observed when a time event monitor error occurs Example When an error occurs in time event monitor of the time interval event setting No 16 e Time event monitor error X15 turns on e Time event monitor error data area address 3201 bit 15 of the buffer memory turns on e The error code is stored into the time event monitor 16 error code area address 3217 of the buffer memory 3 Time event monitor 1 to 16 error code Address 3202 to 3217 The error code that indicates the error status is stored into the corr
382. g Refer to Section 6 3 3 for the tag setting 3 The Tag name drop down list displays the setting No and tag names of the tag setting Monitor form The monitor form is indicated below Component name Value 01 pres production 550 o3 temperature 04 pressure Components set in the tag are displayed The values stored for the components are displayed e The values stored for the components are displayed in the display form set in Component setting of the tag setting e ERR h is displayed when an error has occurred in the collection of the component indicates the error code e NO DATA is displayed when no component has been collected 2 Tag component test Executing the tag component test changes the current value of the tag data Only a user with the tag component write authority is allowed to conduct this test Refer to Section 4 6 5 for the user authority Setting screen Tag component test Tag name 01 line 1 Set Component name 02 target day Cancel Data type Single word Setting value fi 500 Waring Applet Window Setting Item Setting value Sets the setting value Executes the tag component test Cancels the setting and returns to the Tag data monitor screen 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Tag name The tag name to perform the tag component test is displayed Component name 1 Select the component name set in Component se
383. g gt Edit screen Save Back Load Account setting No fo z User name administrator001 1 to 20 characters Password E 8 to 14 characters Confirm password jaa Access authority M Device write M Tag component write M Administrator Initial screen TOP page index htm User specified screen 1 to 64 characters Setting item Description Sets the user name 1 to 20 characters Sets the password 8 to 14 characters Enters the password again Access authority Selects device write tag component write administrator authority Initial screen Sets the initial screen address for access to the Web server module Saves the settings The settings are updated when the Update button on the Setting update screen is clicked the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset Back Cancel Discards the changed setting and return to the Account setting screen Select account setting Loads the parameters of the No selected in account setting No and displays them on the Edit No and click on screen a Username 1 Set the user name 1 to 20 characters There is case sensitivity 2 Refer to Appendix 4 2 for the characters applicable to the user name b Password 1 Set the password 8 to 14 characters There is case sensitivity 2 Refer to Appendix 4 2 for the characters applicable to the password c Confirm password Enter the password again d Access authority
384. g page Address ners i Reference i Application Name Initial value Decimal section 8002 Number of times when the FTPGET instruction was normally completed 8003 Number of times when the FTPGET instruction was abnormally completed 8004 Number of normally completed FTP transfers GET 8005 Number of abnormally completed FTP transfers GET Number of writes for error log Error log write pointer Error code Transfer source ransferred file name 8032 to 8043 8044 to 8055 m m 3 3 O O g g fo KQ Q N _ Ula v fed Same as Error log 1 Same as Error log 1 8080 to 8091 FTP client status Error log 7 Section 8092 to 8103 GET 1 3 8 21 ransfer log write count ol ransfer log write pointer Iz Transfersource Oooo o 8203 to 8208 Transferred file name 8176 to 8187 mim mmmmmmmm mmm 33 3 3333 3 3 333 oljlojojojolojojoljo oj jlojojo 2 Q2 2 Q 2 Q2 Q 2 2 QJ Q jQ o ojlololololojlololo o lololjo IO KOKLA EO KOKA KAKKA a Q KQ IQ KRA lolo olal ajlu IAA o aya 8209 to 8212 Data an Transfer log 2 to The composition of each area is the same as that of the transfer log 1 8213 to 8553 32 Refer to 8 for assignment of each area 8554 to 9998 Use prohibited Systemarea o Sooo i Module initialization request 0 No request Module 1 During module initialization mode Section 9999 initialization The system is set up when the C
385. gest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standar
386. gger occurred processing Network connection O processing X5 When normally completed Network connection status X4 When failed Connection error X19 ____ 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Device Signal Name Description Turns on at completion of connection made by Network connection request Y5 Does not turn on by any connection trigger other than Network connection request Y5 indicated in 2 of X4 2 Turns off when Network connection request Y5 turns off 1 Network connection request Y5 Network connection processing X5 Network connection completion X6 When normally completed Network connection status X4 When failed Connection error X19 x1 When Network connection request Y5 is turned on while Network connection status X4 is on Network connection processing X5 turns off and Network connection completion X6 turns on immediately 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Device e N Signal Name Description O 1 Is on while the Web server module is processing for disconnection from the network Turns on in response to any of the disconnection triggers shown in 3 of X4 2 Upon completion of the network disconnection processing Network connection status X4 turns off Network Disconnection trigger occurred disconnection processing Network disconnection processing X7 Network connection status X4 1 Turns
387. gging select any of the following 1 Start at start up e Logging starts when the Update button on the Setting update screen is clicked or when the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset e Select this item for continuous logging 2 Donot start e Logging is not started e Select this item when performing logging using the dedicated instruction LOG or when making setting only and not executing logging 3 Start at the specified time after event occurrence Logging is started when the specified time second has elapsed after the specified event occurred Start at the specified time after event occurrence CPU event setting Jo 91 ZA after 2 econds 0 t Tag event setti Jo H aferf seconds 0 t Time Interval event setting z ter 0 econds 0 t 1 2 3 1 Select any of the event types 2 Select the event setting number 3 Set the logging start time Specify 0 when starting logging at event occurrence When above 3 is set as the condition for start and the event set to the condition for start occurs twice before the specified time passes the first event is valid as the condition for start Example When the condition for start is set to 10 seconds after event occurrence Event Occurrence Occurrence i 10 seconds Logging l 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC O 4 Start at the specified time Logging is started at the specified time Hour 0 to 23 Per Minute 0 to 59
388. gization z time ratio 1 Guaranteed value Value in actual use Guaranteed time after battery error MIN 2 TYP 3 occurrence 4 26 000hr 43 800hr 1 500hr 3 04 years 5 years 62 days 30 37 142hr 43 800hr 1 500hr i 4 34 years 5 years 62 days 5 years 5 years 62 days 5 years 5 years 62 days 43 800hr 43 800hr 1 500hr 5 years 5 years 62 days x1 The energization time ratio denotes the ratio of power on time in a day 24 hours When power is on for 12 hours and off for 12 hours the energization time ratio is 50 x2 The guaranteed value assumes that the storage ambient temperature is 25 to 75 C operating ambient temperature is 0 to 55 C 3 The value in actual use assumes that the storage ambient temperature is 40 C operating ambient temperature is 25 C 4 In either of the following states the guaranteed time after power off is 3 minutes e The battery connector is disconnected e The battery lead wire is broken 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q b The battery Q6BAT life is 5 years when it is used without connecting to the Web server module c Though the data is retained within the specified time after Battery status area buffer memory 7 has turned on replace the battery as soon as possible However it is recommended to replace the battery periodically according to the usage status even when the battery error has not yet occurred Important Failure to replace the battery a
389. gs i sibility O Always expand ALT text for images O Move system caret with focus selection changes Browsing Always send URLs as UTF 8 requires restart Automatically check for Internet Explorer updates Close unused folders in History and Favorites requires restart Disable script debugging O Display a notification about every script error Enable folder view for FTP sites Enable Install On Demand Enable offline items to be synchronized on a schedule Enable page transitions Notify when downloads complete Reuse windows for launching shortcuts Show friendly HTTP error messages z Restore Defaults j Cancel 4 Accessing the Web server module from the personal computer a Start the Web browser from the personal computer and enter the address of the Web server module as indicated below http 192 168 3 3 b As the user authentication screen Enter Network password screen appears when accessing the Web server module enter the following Username QU71WS96 All in uppercase Password MITSUBISHI All in uppercase 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q c The standard screen appears on the Web browser Example In the case of Microsoft Corporation s Internet Explorer 5 5 EJ ox B BD amp Stop Rehesh Home Search Favorites Meda Hitoy Mal Pint Discuss Address hitp 7 192 168 3 37 J Go Links gt la Action canceled Internet Explor
390. gs of Internet Explorer The personal computer has any problem Check if another Web site is displayed correctly or not The display setting of the personal computer is not proper The Compact Flash card formatted on Windows XP 2000 has been set in the Web server module The account with administrator authority user name password is not correct The access target CPU setting is not correct e Check the module status and network connection status of the Web server module Refer to 1 2 in this section e Restart the Web browser e Check the version of Java VM Refer to Section 3 1 e Replace the personal computer e Update the Web browser e Install the OS again e Change the Hardware accelerator setting of the display setting Adjust the Hardware accelerator setting in detailed settings on the lt lt Settings gt gt tab of Display Properties on Microsoft Windows e Recover the Compact Flash card according to its manual e Use the correct account with administrator authority Refer to Section 4 6 5 e Check the access target CPU setting Refer to Section 4 6 7 e Check the access target CPU setting Th P e access target CPU setting is not correct Refer to Section 4 6 7 Tag setting is not correct Correct connection has not been established Microsoft InterDev 6 0 Visual Studio 6 0 has been installed If Debug is displayed select No Check the statuses of the c
391. h 4 Switch 5 assignment setting screen to display the screen aia e om 5 eer shown on the left and set Switches 3 2 2 2 fata Setting can be made easily by entering data in ee hexadecimal number Enter data after changing raza the input form into the hexadecimal number i ite 12 11 11 13 12 12 14 13 13 15 1414 ad Ee 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 8 Self diagnostics Function This section explains the self diagnostics function designed to check the communication function and hardware of the Web server module 4 8 1 CH1 self loopback test Conduct a self loopback test to check hardware including the communication function of the CH1 10BASE T 100BASE TX interface of the Web server module 1 Operation mode setting for Web server module a In Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module of GX Developer set the mode to CH1 Self loopback test Switch 1 00021 b Write the PLC parameters to the PLC CPU 2 Execution of CH1 self loopback test a When a cable has been connected to the CH1 disconnect it b Set the PLC CPU to a STOP status c Reset the PLC CPU d After the PLC CPU is reset the following CH1 self loopback test is executed automatically This test checks whether data can be communicated in the Web server module During the test the ERR LED flickers Q 3 Confirmation of CH1 self loopback test result a Check the CH1 self loopback test
392. h area Tag collection 2 to 64 error codes S Logging setting data Logging execute data Logging error data Error code 0 Normal Other than 0 Error code Number of saved files Number of the latest saved file ystem area Logging 2 to 64 data System area Refer to 3 for assignment of each area Login history 2 Same as Login history 1 Login history 3 Login history 4 Login history 5 Login history gi y Login history 6 Section 3 8 7 Fee BE 3 8 8 ee ae o Section 3 8 9 collection 1 Section 3 8 10 3 8 11 The composition of each area is the same as that of the logging 1 data Continued on the next page 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q From the preceding page Address ao i Reference Application Name Initial value Decimal section 3000 3001 3002 3003 3004 3005 3006 3007 3008 3009 3010 3011 3012 3013 3014 3015 3016 3017 3018 3019 to 3099 Use prohibited ystem area 3100 Tag event setting data 3101 3102 3103 3104 3105 3106 3107 3108 3109 3110 3111 3112 3113 3114 3115 3116 3117 3118 3119 Use prohibited ystem area O U Cc oO lt oO 5 n gt od KQ Qa v w OJO v ES o o lt lt S Sa em a 318 Q j J3 g o IR Q o 2 3 3 e a S ona i D w Section 3 8 13 CPU event monitor status 2 Tag event occurrence data Tag event monitor error data Tag event monitor 1 error code Tag event monitor 2 err
393. h the power OFF and then ON or reset the CPU module 3 8 6 Error log area Address 150 to 247 The history of errors that occurred in the Web server module can be confirmed 1 Number of times of error occurrence Address 150 a This area stores the cumulative number of times stored in the error log area b An error code is stored when Other error X1C turns on 2 Error log write pointer Address 151 a This area stores the error log No with which the latest error has been stored 0 No error No error stored 1 or more Error log No of the latest error stored x The pointer value of 16 indicates that the latest error has been stored into the error log 16 area b If 17 or more errors occur the error is stored into the error log areas starting from the error log 1 area again 3 Error log 1 to 16 Address 152 to 247 This area stores the history of errors that occurred in the Web server module The error log area is composed of 16 portions of the same data arrangement a Error code This area stores the error code that indicates the error status Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q b Time This area stores the error occurrence time in BCD code b15 to b8 b7 to bO Address 152 to 157 0 Error code 158 to 163 Erorlog2 h System area Use prohibited 5 Year 00x to 99n first 2 digits Day of the week 0x to 6x 1 The information of the
394. has not PASS been set in Filter settin ACCESS Access setting 9 Block the IP packet that has not BLOCK been set in Filter setting IPADDRESS1 to IP address decimal IP address IPADDRESS32 o e E HEM MASkK1 to MASK32_ Filter setting No Mask bit Mask bitlengh Bae to 32 or Blank FILTER to Blok BLOCK or Blank FILTER32 PASS or Blank Must be set x Need not be set Invalid x1 IPADDRESSn MASKn and FILTERn n 1 to 32 in the IP filter setting can all be blanked However if any one of the three has been set the other two must also be set They cannot be blanked App 62 App 62 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 7 Sizes of Data Written to Standard ROM and Compact Flash Card This section explains how to calculate the sizes of data written to the standard ROM and Compact Flash card Appendix 7 1 Size of data written to standard ROM drive The size of the data written to the standard ROM drive per day can be calculated as shown below fe ee Formula Size of data written to standard ROM LS1 X LN1 LSn X LNn drive per day 1 CPES x CPEN TGES x TGEN TMES x TMEN FSS x FSN x1 Only the loggings which storage location is set to the standard ROM are counted LSn Size of logging No n data written to the logging file at one time Refer to Appendix 7 3 LNn No of writes of logging No n per day Refer to Appendix 7 3 CPES Size of data written to the event hist
395. he CF card CF card failure e Check the item of the file displayed in Status on the data management screen and Display execute CSV import again Refer to Section 6 10 4 Appendix 6 e Check the label of the file displayed in Status on the data management screen and l i Display execute CSV import again Refer to Section 6 10 4 Appendix 6 e Check the contents of TAGEVT CSV and execute CSV import again Refer to Section 6 10 4 Appendix 6 6 e Check whether the CF card has been set securely Refer to Section 4 9 e Replace the CF card e Check whether the CF card has been set securely Refer to Section 4 9 e Replace the CF card Display Continue Continue e System error 1 e Check whether the CF card is set securely Refer to Section 4 9 e Check the CF card for a fault Perform disk check and Display formatting on the personal computer e Check whether the CF card is faulty Execute Check disk or Display format on the personal computer etc e Raplace the CF card Continue Continued on the next page 9 21 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC Q From the previous page Error ee d Error name Error definition Corrective action Error type code 04A0h to Backup error 04AFh Restore error 04BFh Restore file structure error Data management operating Battery error APS mismatch 0500h 0501h 0502h An error occurred during execution of
396. he access target CPU setting Refer to Section 4 6 7 Response time out No response from the external N i e Check the communication cable Continue error station status and access target CPU status 0041h 0042h System error e System error 1 Continue 0043h 0044h An unsupported processing code Check the CPU in the access 0045h Processing code error i PP p g Continue was issued path Check the station No setting in Station No The specified station No is E haere the access target CPU setting Continue specification error incorrect Refer to Section 4 6 7 Check the CPU in the access path 0048h 0049h 004Dh 004Eh 0050h 0051h The Ethernet module is set so that e Check the Ethernet module z 0055h Channel number error ee f Continue its write is disabled at RUN time setting of the target CPU 0064h e System error 1 Continue e Set routing parameters to the Routing parameter 0065h Snor No routing parameters are set MELSECNET H and Continue MELSECNET 10 module Check the CPU in the access Check the CPU in the access path Check the CPU in the access path e Check the device type entered in System error e System error 1 Continue The specified device type is f Device type error device monitor or component Continue invalid setting o i e Check the device No entered in The specified device number is i i Device number error device monitor o
397. he level display parts The sample screen SMPLVLEN HTM is stored in the USER directory of the Web server module a Tag setting refer to Section 6 3 3 1 Set the component setting No 1 of the tag setting No 1 Home gt Administrative mem gt Tag setting gt Component setting Add Edit Delete Back Tez nane MESSE item No Component mie CPU me _ Dete type Dev Dip trm peio Ope C 1 device A 01 Control CPU Single word DO Decimal 0 decimal places None 2 Click on the Update button on the Setting update screen to update the setting 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q Creation of HTML file File name SMPLVLEN HTM The HTML source is indicated below b lt DOCTYPE html PUBLIC W3G DTD HTML 4 01 Transitional EN gt lt html gt lt head gt lt meta http equiv Content Type content text html charset iso 8859 1 gt lt meta http equiv Pragma content no cache gt lt title gt Sample screen for level display part lt ttle gt lt head gt lt body gt lt h1 gt Sample screen for level display part lt h1 gt lt Communication part gt lt applet code WSCom class codebase PARTS width 0 height 0 gt lt param name INTERVAL value 1 gt lt applet gt lt Level display part gt lt applet code WSLevel class codebase PARTS width 100 height 200 gt lt param name TAGNO lt param name ELMNO lt param name DIRECTION lt
398. he logging setting does not exist or the event monitor setting was deleted The CPU of other than the access target CPU setting No 1 was specified for the component of the high speed sampling tag or the tag setting file is corrupted Standard ROM was selected in Save in of the high speed logging Failed to change rename a logging file into the saved file Check the logging setting Refer to Section 6 4 4 Initialize the module refer to Section 4 13 and then make the tag setting refer to Section 6 3 3 again Display Display Continued on the next page Check the component setting of the high speed sampling tag refer to Section 6 3 3 and make setting so that the total device points do not exceed 96 points Create or increase a user setting system area by GX Developer Refer to Section 6 3 3 REMARKS Check the control data of the TAG instruction Refer to Section 8 5 Check the control data of the LOG instruction Refer to Section 8 6 Specify an existing event Initialize the module refer to Section 4 13 and then make the tag setting refer to Section 6 3 3 again Select the CF card System error 1 By FTP operation refer to Section 6 7 delete unnecessary files to secure a free space in the standard ROM or CF card Check the CF card Refer to Section 9 1 9 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC Q From the previous page Error code Stop Stop Continue Continue Sy
399. hin a total of 96 points 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q e Display form 1 Set the display form of the real number Decimal Exponential 2 Set the number of decimal places 0 to 6 3 Enabled when the data type is either of the following e Real number type e Single word Double word After operation a numeric value below decimal point may be produced f Operator Set a mathematical operation to be performed for the collected data or no mathematical operation to be performed None g Operand Set the numeric value to be mathematically operated for the collected data 38768 to 32767 When collecting multiple device data of the same PLC CPU registering them as the components of the same tag will make the collecting operation more efficient than registering them to different tags After changing the settings make sure to click on the Save button The settings are updated when the Update button on the Setting update screen is clicked the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset 1 How to create user setting system area The following provides how to create a user setting system area in the program memory of the control CPU Start Procedure GX Developer Online Format PLC memory Operation Procedure 1 Select Create a user setting system area as the Format Type on the Format PLC memory screen 2 Secure 1K step of High speed monitor area from other station for each Web serv
400. ically added every time logging is performed Old data is erased 1 Specifications Filename ___ _ WSHstdat class Number of components Up to 10 components Column number ELMNO1 Displayed items LOGNO TANC ELMNO3 gt XNO ELMNO4 ELMNO5 data1 data2 data3 data4 data5 1 Component name 200271171421 10 20 ft display cell 2002 11 14 21 10 30 Scroll bar 2002 11 14 21 10 40 2002 11 14 21 10 50 2002 11 14 21 11 00 2002 11 14 21 11 10 2002 11 14 21 11 20 2002 11 14 21 11 30 AAAS anaana a re a e APLCOLOR Display form 3 Logging time r 2 Component value display cell ITEMWIDTH display cell 1 Component name display cell 2 Component value display cell ELMCOLOR NUMCOLOR IALIGNMENT NALIGNMENT Datat 1 ELMBKCOLOR 760 lt NMBKCOLOR 3 Logging time display cell TIMECOLOR 2002 07 05 13 52 06 lt TMBKCOLOR 7 32 7 32 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Parameter Setting Range Initial Value Sets the logging data for historical data display using the loggin LOGNO aa Play using ne 99 41064 Mustbe set setting No Refer to Section 6 4 4 XNO 1 Sets the number of item components columns 1 to 10 Must be set Sets the component for historical data display using the ELMNO1 to ELMNO10 1 to 64 Must be set component setting No Refer to Section 6 3 3 NUMCOLOR Sets the display color of the component value disp
401. ified Second 0 to 59 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q g File capacity As the file capacity select any of the following 1 Specification for number of lines 1 to 10000 lines for high speed logging 100 to 10000 lines 2 Size specification 1 to 512k bytes for high speed logging 10 to 512k bytes 3 Time specification Hour 0 to 23 Per Minute 0 to 59 Per Per minute can be specified only when Per hour is specified Second 0 to 59 h Saved files names As the data to be added to the saved file name select any of the following Multiple selection allowed The data are added to the saved file name in order of 1 to 3 1 Name File name set at File name 2 Date Year month day 3 Time Hour minute second LOGNAME_20030712_201230_00000001 CSV A A Serial number 8 digit hexadecimal Serial number is always added Time Second Time Minute Time Hour Date Day Date Month Date Year Name File name set at File name i Number of saved files Set the number of saved files 1 to 1000 POINT When browsing the logging file by logging monitor or FTP reduce the number of saved files If the number of saved files is large it will take several minutes to obtain a file list by logging monitor or FTP For logging monitor the number of saved files must be reduced only when the last update time of the file is displayed in the file specifying field Refer to Section 4 7 j
402. ile 10 21 03 4 14 PM COMPONENT CSV 246KB Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values File 10 21 03 4 46 PM Xl CPULCSV 132bytes Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values File 10 21 03 4 14 PM 3 CPUEVT CSV 222 bytes Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values File 10 21 03 4 14 PM 8 DIALUP CSV 164 bytes Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values File 10 21 03 4 14 PM 3 EMAIL CSY 175bytes Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values File 10 21 03 4 14 PM AQJEVENT CSV 31 bytes Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values File 10 21 03 4 14 PM SS FTP csv 45 bytes Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values File 10 21 03 4 14 PM 3 IPFILTER CSV 1 04KB Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values File 10 21 03 4 14 PM X LoGGING cSv 213bytes Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values File 10 21 03 4 14 PM 3 SYSTEM CSV 276 bytes Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values File 10 21 03 4 14 PM X Tac csv Gbytes Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values File 10 21 03 4 46 PM 3 TAGEVT CSY 220 bytes Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values File 10 21 03 4 14 PM SR TIMEEVT CSV 191 bytes Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values File 10 21 03 4 14 PM User QU71WS96 Intemet l To next page 6 MELSEC Q Open COMPONENT CSV on the spreadsheet software Display example of Microsoft EXCEL 2000 is shown on the left Copy the row of COMPONENT1 1 to create COMPONENT1 2 to COMPONENT1 50 Change COMPNAME and DEVICE on each row Save new COMPONENT CSV over old COMPONENT CSV in CSV forma
403. ile is determined by any of the following RO Number of lines Size Time What file becomes full means Indicates that the currently logging file has reached the specified file capacity and no more data can be written to that file 1 x1 Regardless of the file capacity setting a file becomes full when e The number of lines reaches 10000 e The file size reaches 512k bytes or e Any tag setting number of components component name change is made to the file that is executing logging 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q c Processing performed when file becomes full 1 Creating new file and saving current file When the currently logging file becomes full a new file is created The file that has become full is renamed and saved Creation of saved file Saved files names Saved files names are consecutively numbered with 8 digits hexadecimal By setting the Saved files names in the logging setting the name date and time can be added to the saved file name Example LOGNAME_20030702_201230_00000001 CSV 7 o Name Date Time Serial number 8 digit hexadecimal Serial number is always added When storing saved file into external device By setting External storage setting in the logging setting the saved file can be sent by E mail or transfered when it is stored New file is created LOGNAME CSV 00000001 CSV File that has become full is renamed and saved Saved file Save
404. ime of access from a peripheral device intelligent function module to the PLC CPU Precautions for user screen creating function 1 User parts a Be sure to set the must be set parameters of the user parts Failure to do so will result in an error b The file names and parameters of the user parts are not case sensitive c When the contents of a user screen have been changed delete the temporary Internet files cache and then read the user screen on the Web browser Refer to Section 6 2 7 1 for how to delete the temporary Internet files d The device value corresponding to the tag component specified in the user parts parameter must be retained for a time longer than the tag collection interval and communication time in the sequence program Especially be careful when accessing the user screen via the Internet When the retention time of the device value is too short value change may not be displayed in user parts accurately Sample screens Sample screens for the user parts are available in the ROM WWW USER directory of the Web server module Delete all sample screen files before starting actual operation To prevent write to the devices using the sample screens The sample screens can be restored by initializing the module Refer to Section 4 13 Precautions for other functions 1 Account setting Refer to Section 4 6 5 After completion of initial setting make sure to register at least one account w
405. in a special folder temporary Internet files c Security level setting In the security level setting of the Web browser set the security level of the Internet and Intranet zones to Default Level Example In the case of Microsoft Windows 98 operating system or Microsoft Corporation s Internet Explorer 5 5 Tools Internet Options gt lt Security gt tab 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q Internet Options 21x General Security Content Connections Programs Advanced Select a Web content zone to specify its security settings 0O Internet Local intranet Trusted sites Restricted sites Internet This zone contains all Web sites you haven t placed in other zones Security level for this zone Move the slider to set the security level for this zone Medium low Same as Medium without prompts Most content will be run without prompts Unsigned ActiveX controls will not be downloaded ale Appropriate for sites on your local network intranet Custom Level Default Level Cancel Apply d Detailed setting In the advanced settings of the Web browser set to Restore Defaults Example In the case of Microsoft Windows 98 operating system or Microsoft Corporation s Internet Explorer 5 5 Tools gt Internet Options gt lt Advanced gt tab Internet Options 12 x General Security Content Connections Programs Advanced Settin
406. ings are updated when the Update button on the Setting update screen is clicked the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset i Back Cancel Discards the changed setting and returns to the CPU event setting screen Select CPU event setting Loads the parameters of the No selected in CPU event setting No and displays them on the No and click on Load Edit screen 6 FUNCTIONS a MELSEC Q CPU name 1 Set the CPU name to be monitored 2 Select the CPU name set in the access target CPU setting Refer to Section 4 6 7 for the access target CPU setting 3 The CPU name drop down list displays the setting No and CPU names of the access target CPU setting Example 01 Control CPU 4 By default the host CPU of the Web server module is set as the access target CPU setting No 1 Interval 1 Set the CPU event monitor interval 1 to 86400 seconds 2 ACPU event occurs once when the Web server module starts or the setting is updated and thereafter at the specified interval Condition 1 Set conditions for monitoring of the CPU event More than one conditions can be specified for one PLC CPU When more than one conditions have been specified an event occurs if any of them is satisfied Normal STOP The PLC CPU is stopped with no error Normal RUN The PLC CPU is running with no error PAUSE The PLC CPU is pausing Warning STOP 1 The PLC CPU is stopped
407. inistrator001 Password After you login you can return to this FTP server easily by adding it to your Favorites List T Login Anonymously M Save Password 3 Log in to the Web server module 3 ftp QJ71WS96 192 168 3 3 Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Go Favorites Help Ea E w y x E Back Up ut Copp Paste Undo Delete Properties Views Address ttp QJ71wS96 192 168 3 3 v Go Links 2 Server 192 168 3 3 CF ROM User Name QU71WS96 Use Copy To Folder on the File menu to download files and folders to your computer to learn about browsing FTP sites 6 FUNCTIONS b MELSEC Q After login to the Web server module write the user HTML file on the personal computer to the USER directory of the Web server module so that normal file operation using Explorer is available 2 userscreen _ 0 S ioj x File Edit View Go Favorites Help Ka Ea gt gt ry Pe fa aala xX Up Cut Up Cut Copy Paste Undo Delete Address C userscreen bd Address a ftp QU71WS 96 1 92 168 3 3 ROM AW ww USER x Go Links ew we 6 6 6 6 GREEN JPG RED JPG SMPBLK HTM SMPBLKEN SMPCMT SMPCMTE SMPHSDE 6 6 SMPHSGE SMPHSTD SMPHSTG SMPLEVEL SMPLVLEN SMPPIC HTM SMPPICEN a ales my a R ser 1 object s selected f File can be transferred by drag and
408. inue e System error 1 e Change the T C set values Continue Continue during RAM operation e System error 1 e Check the access target CPU setting Refer to Section 4 6 7 e System error 1 e Check the station No or network number of the access target CPU Continue setting Refer to Section 4 6 7 FEFIn Systemeror System error 1 The memory cassette has not been set to the accessed CPU module or an improper memory cassette has been set Memory cassette error The specified block No of the extension file register overlaps the write protect area of the memory cassette FFF3h Write protect error ee ean System error FFFAh The specified block No of the extension file register is Invalid The device is outside the device range e Confirm the memory cassette of the access target CPU Continued on the next page e Check the block No device type of the extension file register e Check the write protect DIP switch of the memory cassette in the access target CPU e Check the block No device type of the extension file register e System error 1 e Check the device number input in the device monitor or component setting 9 43 TROUBLE SHOOTIN 9 OU SHOOTING MELSEC Q From the previous page Error code e Check the setting of the network module on the access route FFFCh CPU error An Invalid station was specified e Check the setting
409. ion 6 3 3 Sets the component for comment display using the component ELMNO p f pe 2 p 1 to 64 Must be set setting No Refer to Section 6 3 3 FONTSIZE Specifies the character size 8 to 72 Sets the default comment Displayed when the component value is outside the settin commen isplayed when DEFCMT pay p 2 String not set Not range displayed Refer to Appendix 4 5 for the applicable characters DEFCOLOR Sets the display color of the default comment BKCOLOR Sets the background color RANGENO 1 Sets the quantity in the setting range Must be set LOW1 Sets the minimum limit of the setting range 1 2147483648 Must be set to HIGH1 Sets the maximum limit of the setting range 1 2147483647 Must be set Sets the comment in the setting range 1 Displayed when the component value is in the setting range 1 String Must be set Refer to Appendix 4 5 for the applicable characters etting LOW2 HIGH2 Sets the setting range 2 The setting is the same as the setting range 1 range 2 CMT2 COLOR2 Setti Setting LOW3 HIGHS f Bede E Sets the setting range 3 The setting is the same as the setting range 1 range 3 CMT3 COLOR3 Senin aan Sets the setting range 4 The setting is the same as the setting range 1 ets range 4 CMT4 COLOR4 moore ares Setting LOW5 HIGHS Sets the setting range 5 The setting is the same as the setting range 1 range 5 CMT5 COLORS granges g grange 1 x1 Be sure
410. ion Alarm notification by e mail E mail function a E mail transmission by PLC CPU With the dedicated instruction WMSEND a tag data logging data user data file can be sent as an attached file of e mail 1 Makes required setting for e mail in control data of dedicated instruction PLC CPU Web server module zP WMSEND EME Subject EB gt Subject HE ASCII data ASCII data m BE Maintext EE Main text EEE gt ASCII ASCII data ASCII data E aloa ina HM Tag Logging No Bp EEEE Attached fie M Mail server User data file name Binary CSV data See 2 Sends an e mail by dedicated instruction WMSEND b E mail transmission by event monitor function Event setting enables transmission of an event data tag data or logging data by e mail when an event occurs 1 Performs monitoring according to event PLC CPU setting Web server module TT Subject ASCII data Event conditions satisfied Time Hal Main text E interval monitor XC2002 07 01 09 00 00 ASCII data EEE Attached fie E Tag monitor Ss oOo Ooooodfoooo 4 TATI Mail server l CSV data 2 According to the tag setting collects device data in tag unit 3 When event conditions are satisfied an e mail will be sent 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 8 Read Write of file by FTP FTP functio
411. ion mngmt z product1 CS Open file a Date product A Hi product B Hi product C a product D E b 2003 10 08 20 04 02 0 0 S 2003 10 08 20 05 02 10 5 2 1 2003 10 08 20 06 02 20 10 4 2 2003 10 08 20 07 02 30 15 6 3 2003 10 08 20 08 02 40 20 8 4 2003 10 08 20 09 02 50 25 10 5 2003 10 08 20 10 02 60 30 12 6 2003 10 08 20 11 02 70 35 14 7 2003 10 08 20 12 02 80 40 16 8 gt c 2003 10 08 20 13 02 90 45 18 9 2003 10 08 20 14 02 100 50 20 10 2003 10 08 20 15 02 110 55 22 11 2003 10 08 20 16 02 120 60 24 12 2003 10 08 20 17 02 130 65 26 13 2003 10 08 20 18 02 140 70 28 14 2003 10 08 20 19 02 150 75 30 15 E a Data The logging dates and times are displayed Example 2002 08 08 08 58 17 b Select the component to perform the logging monitor Up to four components can be selected c The values stored in the components are displayed 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC O 5 Graph Logging data are displayed in graph form Display form Graph z Load Logging name Specified file 2 production mngmt z product CSV z Open file a Component 1 p 200 N product A z a Component 2 product B X Component 3 product C 5 Component 4 product D z we b Scale maximum A i gt c 200 i e LA Scale minimum Pa 0 No of horizontal grid lines 3 gt Points 20 Ae 0 Refresh graph 2003 10 08 20 04 02 2003 10 08 20 23 02 a Specify the component
412. ion status of the FTPGET instruction Normally completed Remains off Abnormally completed Turns on in the END processing of the scan where the FTPGET instruction is completed and turns off in the next END processing Operation at execution of FTPGET instruction When the FTPGET instruction is completed the completion device bit device set in D 0 turns on in the END processing of the completed scan and turns off in the next END processing When an error occurs the completion device set in D 1 turns on and an error code is stored into the cages status word oo set in S K Sequence program Scan ii Scan procaseing Scan Scan B Rint et Sle ee aaa oo FTPGET instruction j Instruction execution Completion device TE EA A leo See Se Ste Sah EN E T CAA gdb Mii tas a A sn Sy Completiondevice 1 When abnormally completed 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q Error When the dedicated instruction is abnormally completed the abnormal completion signal D 1 turns on and a corresponding error code is stored into the completion status S 1 Check the error status according to the error code and take corrective action Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code Program example Program with which the Web server module mounted in the position of I O numbers X Y00 to X Y1F transfers GET a user data file DATA CSV from the FTP server when M25 is turned on CSV file t
413. is clicked the Web server module is disconnected from the network Refer to Section 5 4 for network connecting disconnecting processing for non continuous connection 1 Specifications Description lt FORM METHOD POST ACTION WSDscntC cgi gt lt INPUT TYPE xxxxx NAME CONFIRM VALUE yyyy gt lt INPUT TYPE xxxxx NAME REFERER VALUE yyyy gt lt INPUT TYPE xxxxx NAME LANGUAGE VALUE yyyy gt lt INPUT TYPE submit VALUE characters on button gt lt FORM gt e Specify the TYPE attributes at xxxxx An example of specifying them is given below Specify the The text box is displayed parameter name Bases ee The value entered into the text box Refer to 2 P becomes a parameter value Specify the Specify the hidden parameter name parameter value at Nothing is displayed Refer to 2 Need not be Speci the button 2 Parameter Description Setting Range _ Initial Value Sets whether the confirmation screen will be displayed or not f 1 Displayed 0 Not displayed 1 Displayed Specifies the file name of the execution screen with the Return to the absolute path execution When standard ROM is used USER file name i screen When Compact Flash card is used CF USER file name Refer to 3 Clicking the Cancel button returns to the execution screen c Selects the language of the confirmation and result screens LANGUAGE f 0 1 1 English 0 Japanese 1 English 3 Sample screen
414. istrative menu set as follows For other than the following settings the default values will be used Administrative menu System setting Refer to 1 Dial up setting Refer to 2 gt E mail setting Refer to 3 gt Address notification setting Refer to 4 gt Account setting Refer to 5 1 System setting Refer to Section 4 6 3 Item Set value Network type setting Select Dial up to the network modem ADSL IP address setting Select Obtain an IP address automatically DNS server setting Select Obtain a DNS server address automatically Automatic network connection setting at start up Select Automatic connection to network at start up 2 Dial up setting Refer to Section 4 6 4 Item Set value Connection method Select ADSL Enter the account obtained from the Internet service provider e User name example mitsubishi ne jp e Password example MITSUBISHI Connection account e Confirm password example MITSUBISHI 5 CONNECTING WEB SERVER MODULE TO NETWORK MELSEC Q 3 E mail setting Refer to Section 6 6 3 Item Set value Enter the e mail setting of the Web server module e SMTP server name example mailserver ne jp e E mail address From example mailaddress ne jp Send e mail account setting e User name example mitsubishi ne jp e Password example MITSUBISHI e Confirm password
415. ith administrator authority and then connect to the network 2 IP filter setting Refer to Section 4 6 6 a When using a mail server FTP server DHCP server DNS server and or router do not block the IP packets of these devices To do so will disable communication with the above devices b When a proxy server exists on the LAN block the IP address of the proxy server lf the IP packet from the proxy server is passed access to the Web server module is available from a personal computer that can access the proxy server regardless of the other setting c When accessing the Web server module from a personal computer on the LAN do not use the proxy server A 8 3 Access target CPU setting Refer to Section 4 6 7 a Web server module requires preparatory time to communicate with the access target CPU when the Update button on the Setting update screen is clicked the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset Therefore it may take several minutes before the communication will be available if many access target CPUs are set Confirm that the setting update has been completed or the Web server module has been ready X0 is on and make access from the personal computer to the Web server module b Carefully set the PLC series of the access target CPU setting A wrong PLC series setting will generate an error in the PLC CPU or module on the route to the access target CPU and a response time out e
416. itor Product Inf List Product Information List Qo2HCPU 0 0 Intelli Q QU71W596 32pt 0000 eos B 0 1 None 0 2 None 0 3 None 0 4 None 0 5 None 0 6 Es None a A 0 7 None al CSV file creating Close 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter provides information on the performance specifications transmission specifications etc of the Web server module For the general specifications of the Web server module refer to the user s manual of the CPU module 3 1 Performance Specifications This section shows the performance specifications of the Web server module 1 Transmission and Interface specifications Specifications 10BASE T 1 00BASE TX Interface 1 10BASE T 100BASE TX Base band Supported function Auto negotiation function automatically recognizes 10BASE T 10BASE TX Compliance with RS 232 D sub 9 pin Full duplex communication Start stop synchronization method 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps Maximum 15m 1 Data format Stop bit 1 None Flow control RS CS control is available 7 0 127 IP HRV SV outside diameter 8 5mm or longer Oki Electric Cable Company Limited Specify the number of pairs in L External wiring applicable connector 9 pin D sub Male fixing type Compact Flash card _ SSoe eee Saas Supply power voltage 3 3V 5 1 Recommended cable T
417. k communication route Access target CPU PLC series Network communication QCPU A mode QCPU Q mode QnACPU 3 ocuink o oea oea C So Accessible Inaccessible App 2 App 2 APPENDIX MELSEC Q b Different network Web server module Networks 2 to 7 C24 multidrop CC Link Relay station Access target CPU Networks 8 i i i pit gt i Network communication route Different i inetwork i i communication e Network indicates NET 10 H or Ethernet route e Relay station is the QCPU Access target CPU PLC series Network communication Different network route communication route QCPU Q mode QnACPU QCPU A mode ACPU i 3 NET 10 H Ethernet Accessible x Inaccessible Web server module Networks 2 to 7 eee Networks 1 Networks Relay station 8 Relay station Access target CPU C24 multidrop j CC Link me Network Different network communication route communication route thet ste Fos ol e Network indicates NET 10 H or Ethernet e Relay station is the QCPU Access target CPU PLC series Network communication Different network route communication route QCPU Q mode QnACPU eae T NET 10 H re ee ee ee CC Link C24 Ethernet O 1 Accessible x Inaccessible 1 As the network number and station No set the parameter values set in the access target
418. k to the Japanese version Doing so may display an incorrect screen When displaying the standard screen of English version using an operating system and a Web browser of Japanese version words and phrases used by the operating system e g the Cancel button to a confirmation message are displayed in Japanese A 10 2 Display of administrative menu screen a On individual administrative menu screens make sure to click on the Save button after changing the settings Switching to another screen or ending the Web browser before clicking on the Save button deletes the new settings b Before complete screen is displayed do not operate the buttons etc Device test and tag component test a The device test or tag component test may affect the control of the PLC CPU Ensure safety before execution b An error may be produced between the value set in the tag component setting and the actually written component value Refer to Section 6 2 2 2 c In the tag component test a rounding error may be produced when a real number is written to the target component Refer to Section 6 2 2 2 FTP server function Refer to Section 6 7 1 a It is required to end the FTP operation once and restart connection to FTP from the beginning if a wrong user name or password is entered to FTP due to the restrictions on the FTP client side application Even when the correct user name or password is entered to user of the FTP co
419. l setting 1 Refer to Section 4 6 Refer to Section 4 6 3 Refer to Section 6 6 3 2 Procedure for sending e mail by PLC CPU 1 Collect the tag data or logging data to be attached to e mail and sent Create a sequence program WMSEND instruction Completed For tag function refer to Section 6 3 For logging function refer to Section 6 4 Refer to Section 8 2 3 Procedure for sending e mail by event monitor function 1 Collect the tag data or logging data to be attached to e mail and sent Make the setting on the Event setting so that an e mail will be sent upon event occurrence Completed For tag function refer to Section 6 3 For logging function refer to Section 6 4 For event function refer to Section 6 5 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC O 4 Procedure for sending e mail by logging function 1 Make the setting on the Logging setting so that an For logging function refer to e mail will be sent when a file is saved Section 6 4 Completed 5 Procedure for sending e mail by diagnostics function 1 Execute e mail sending test on the System setting For details of e mail sending test refer to Section 6 11 2 Completed 6 FUNCTIONS 6 6 3 E mail setting MELSEC Q Setting Purpose In the e mail setting setting required for e mail transmission is set
420. lay cell String Black Sets the background color undrawn area of the Java applet Sets the width of the component name component value display ITEMWIDTH 1 to 300 cell Sets the alignment of the component value display cell 1 Right NALIGNMENT 0to2 0 Left_1 Right 2 Centered alignment Sets the alignment of the component name display cell ALIGNMENT 0to2 Centered 0 Left 1 Right 2 Centered 1 Be sure to set ELMNOs as many as the quantity specified at XNO Failure to do so will result in an error Refer to Section 7 5 3 Sample screen for historical data display part The following provides an example of creating the sample screen that displays the historical data display parts The sample screen SMPHSDEN HTM is stored in the USER directory of the Web server module a Tag setting refer to Section 6 3 3 logging setting refer to Section 6 4 4 1 Set the component setting No 1 to 5 of the tag setting No 1 a Tag setting Home gt Administrative mer gt Tag setting gt Component setting Add Edit Delete Back Ter a ye Dw s device A 01 Control CPU Single word DO Decimal 0 decimal places None C 2 deviceB 01 Control CPU Single word D1 Decimal 0 decimal places None C 3 dewieC 01 Control CPU Single word D2 Decimal 0 decimal places None C 4 device D 01 Control CPU Single word D3 Decimal 0 decimal places None C 5 deviceE 01 Control CPU Single word D4 Decimal 0 decimal places None
421. le enter the account Setting in 1 4 User name administrator001 Password example QU71WS96ADMIN c The standard screen is displayed in the Web browser 5 CONNECTING WEB SERVER MODULE TO NETWORK MELSEC Q 5 2 Network Connection by Dial up Modem ADSL This section explains the case where the Web server module is connected to the dial up connected network using ADSL 5 2 1 Access procedure The following shows the procedure for access from the external device to the PLC CPU when an ADSL modem is used for connection System configuration for dial up connection A contract with an Internet service provider is required prior to Internet connection Personal computer Web server module IP address subnet mask Automatically obtained from DHCP server Personal computer IP address subnet mask Automatically obtained from DHCP server A contract with an Internet service provider is required 1 Contract with Internet service provider prior to Internet connection Mount the Web server module to slot 0 of the base unit and power the PLC ON Connect the Web server module to the personal For PC s network setting for one to one connection computer with a crossing cable refer to Section 4 5 On the following screens from the Administrative menu 2 Network setting of Web server module make network setting of the Web server module System setting E mail set
422. les N fth nee i 2254 2258 2262 2266 a ps z 2255 2259 2263 2267 le x4 The following shows the assignment of the CPU event monitor 1 to 64 error code area address 3312 to 3375 Name CPU Event Monitor 1 to 64 Error Code Area ESERSE S Se Ere Ee ae a a ee as _ SSeS ea eee a a ee eee ea ee Se ee ae ERNA a Te ee ee Ee ee S ed e Se eee 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q x5 The following shows the assignment of error code area for the access target CPU 1 to 64 address 4008 to 4071 Reine Access Target CPU 1 to 64 Error Code Area eae ae ee ee a ei er ee 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 See eee Bae ee ee ae aia ee 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 SaaS eae ae Se eS eae ee es 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 eee ie ae ae ae x6 The following shows the assignment of the transmission log 1 to 32 area address 5345 to 5984 Transmission Log 1 to 32 Area S see ea es Erg ee cme 5360 5380 5400 5420 5440 5460 5480 5500 5520 5540 5364 5384 5404 5424 5444 5464 5484 5504 5524 5544 SSS aaa aS wee aie ee oS ae 5560 5580 5600 5620 5640 5660 5680 5700 5720 5740 5564 5584 5604 5624 5644 5664 5684 5704 5724 5744 SS See SS Sn eel ee ee 5760 5780 5800 5820 5840 5860 5880 5900 5920 5940 5764 5784 5804 5824 5844 5864 5884 5904 5924 5944 SSS See see 5946 to 5966 to j 5960 5980 5961 to 5981 to Date 5964 5984 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 7 The following shows the
423. leted 1 When the processing is normally completed 3 is stored into the module initialization request area 2 When the processing has failed other than 3 is stored into the module initialization request area x Possible cause for processing failure in this operations is the system file corruption in the standard ROM drive or an unrestorable file system fault Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem POINT The module initialization request of the buffer memory is enabled only when Mode Setting of the switch setting is the module initialization mode 5 CONNECTING WEB SERVER MODULE TO NETWORK MELSEC Q 5 CONNECTING WEB SERVER MODULE TO NETWORK This chapter explains procedures for connecting the Web server module to the network by LAN dial up connection and procedures for connecting and disconnecting it to from the network for non continuous connection 5 1 Network Connection through LAN This section explains the case where the Web server module is connected to the LAN connected network 5 1 1 Access procedure when using static IP address The following shows how to access from the external device to the PLC CPU when a static IP address is assigned to the Web server module System configuration for LAN connection GX Developer Web server module 192 168 10 3 5 255 255 255 0 Ethernet O IP address Subnet ma
424. leted as the oldest file before the file transfer is completed Examine and change the settings of the timing file capacity and number of saved files so that sufficient time is allowed before the file is deleted 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 6 8 Access Log Function Setting Purpose Access log is a function to record access from the external device to the Web server module It allows users to check the access frequency from the external device and check for the illegal access Start Procedure Administrative menu gt Access log Setting Screen Home gt Administrative mem gt Clear a a ooo 2002 1 1405 20 35 42 QI71WS96 HTTP login 192 168 3 1 2 2002 11 06 14 20 50 QJ71WS96 HTTP login 192 168 3 1 3 2002 11 06 14 53 17 QJ71WS96 FTP login 192 163 3 1 4 2002 11 06 14 53 19 QI71WS96 FTP login 192 163 3 1 5 2002 11 06 14 53 24 QI71WS96 FTP login failure 192 163 3 1 6 2002 1106 14 53 23 QI71WS96 FTP login failure 192 168 3 1 7 2002 11 06 14 53 55 QI71WS96 HTTP login 192 163 3 1 8 2002 1106 14 54 18 QJ7IWS96 HTTP login 192 168 3 1 9 2002 11 06 14 54 21 QI71WS96 HTTP login 192 163 3 1 10 2002 11 06 16 28 15 QJ71WS96 HTTP login 192 168 3 1 11 2002 11 06 18 45 57 QI71WS96 HTTP login 192 163 3 1 12 2002 11 07 10 09 09 QJ71WS96 HTTP login 192 168 3 1 13 2002 11 07 10 09 38 QJ71WS96 Event setting 192 168 3 1 14 2002 11 07 10 09 53 QJ71WS96 Event setting 192 168 3 1 15 2002 11 07 10 10 08 QJ71WS96 Setting update 192 163 3 1 16 200
425. letion device set in D 1 turns on and an error code is stored into the saa status word aig set in S1 H Sequence program Scan Maes ty Scan Pissing E San Scan oee Np are pees ee U a U U S WFWRITE instruction p Instruction execution Completion device EE SAO E EEE Completion device 1 A E EAR a F ree r N ah A E E a AA MA re Lees tit A Teta Write to file An error will occur if the Compact Flash card runs out of a free area during data write to the file The data already written to the file before error occurrence remain in the Compact Flash card When data are written in binary and the specified file position of data write is beyond the existing file position the write is completed normally with no data written 0 is stored into the write result S1 3 When the dedicated instruction is abnormally completed the abnormal completion signal D 1 turns on and a corresponding error code is stored into the completion status S1 1 Check the error status according to the error code and take corrective action Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q Program example 1 Program with which the Web server module mounted in the position of I O numbers X Y00 to X Y1F adds 2 word binary data 0100H and 0302n to ABCD BIN in the CF USER directory when M26 is turned on M26 XO m MOVP HO D120 Execution type WOP K D122 Number of da
426. lue BKCOLOR Sets the background color O the background color Selects the display language LANGUAGE T ERE 1 English 0 Japanese 1 English 3 Sample screen for PLC diagnostics monitor part The sample screen Smpdimen htm is stored in the USER directory of the Web server module 4 Precautions for using the PLC diagnostics monitor parts Be sure to specify the applet size with the following values Refer to Section 7 2 1 for how to describe the applet size Width Height Japanese LANGUAGE 0 English LANGUAGE 1 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 2 15 Self diagnostics monitor parts A monitor screen having the same display form as in the self diagnostics monitor of the standard screen is displayed Refer to Section 6 2 6 for the self diagnostics monitor 1 Specifications UniMon class Display form Same as in the self diagnostics monitor of the standard screen 2 Parameter mm Value BKCOLOR Sets the background color O the background color Selects the display language LANGUAGE T ERE 1 English 0 Japanese 1 English 3 Sample screen for self diagnostics monitor part The sample screen Smpunmen htm is stored in the USER directory of the Web server module 4 Precautions for using the self diagnostics monitor parts Be sure to specify the applet size with the following values Refer to Section 7 2 1 for how to describe the applet size Width Height Japanese LANGUAGE
427. lue 1 Component value 2 Component value 3 CR LF Example Product A Product B Product C CR LF 100 350 50 CR LF c E mail is received by the personal computer Example In the case of Microsoft Corporation s Outlook Express 5 5 Control CPU Status STOP 2002 11 12 10 26 15 Iof x File Edit View Tools Message Help amp Wm amp xX a F E3 Reply Reply All Forward Print Delete Previous Next Addresses From QJ71WS96 Date Tuesday November 12 2002 10 27 AM To noH hee s u Subject Control CPU Status STOP 2002 11 12 10 26 15 Attach linel CSV 1 21 KB Control CPU lt Main text set on the CPU monitor setting within the Event setting Normal STOP 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC O 2 E mail transmission by tag event a Tag event setting Refer to Section 6 5 3 1 Inthe Tag event setting set Send an e mail when an event occurs and set the E mail main text Attached file and Send to Home gt Administrative mer Common s CPU e ag etting Time ntervs Tag eveni gedit Sawi Back Load Tag event setting No oor Tag name 02 production mngmt z Component name 01 producta Single word Decimal 0 decimal places Condition F Trigger value bo MM7 Restoration value booo Mail setting for event occurrence M Send an e mail when an event occurs M Disconnect from the network after sending mail E mail main text Production manegement Attached file None
428. m a b Communication speed 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Set the communication speed bps according to the modem specifications Calling timeout 90 to 180s Set the time from when the Web server module side modem has gone off hook line connected until a carrier from the external device side modem is detected When it is not detected the modem goes on hook line disconnected Dial pause time 1 to 30s Set the waiting time during a dial pause AT command additional setting 1 Setthe AT commands to be added For the AT commands refer to the manual of the used modem 2 The default AT commands for initializing the Web server module side modem are as follows e Common initialization command ATZO0E1Q0V1 amp C1 amp D2 amp S0S0 0 ZO Software reset ET With echo back Oth result code e Dial pause time Command Common S8 n n seconds e Dial up command ATDT Tone ATDP Pulse e Flow control Command AT amp K3 or AT amp Q3 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q e CALL function 1 Set whether the CALL function will be enabled or not Disable Enable 2 When using the CALL function make a call from the telephone to the Web server module side modem This allows the Web server module to connect to the network web server module modem P Makes phone call to the Web server module A 00000000000 lt A00000000000000000000 Telephone 2 Connects to
429. m password Enter the password again to confirm the password A contract with an Internet service provider is required prior to Internet connection Contact the Internet service provider for the available services and the contract POINT A contract with an Internet service provider is required prior to Internet connection 3 Access point a b Set the access point Phone number for the Internet service provider Refer to Appendix 4 4 for the characters applicable to the Phone number Up to three access points of the same Internet service provider can be registered x When setting more than one access point select Change access point automatically in Retry Dial method Set the dialling method e Tone e Pulse 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 5 MELSEC Q Retry Set the items related to network connection retries a b Number of retries 0 to 255 times Set the number of connection request retries when connection to the network fails Change access point automatically Make this setting when registering more than one access point 1 The module connections to the access point in due order starting from the Phone number 1 2 Inthe case of network connection failure the Web server module connects to the current access point by the number of retries and to the next access point Modem attribute Set the specifications of communication between the Web server module and mode
430. mail address b Receiving e mail by personal computer 1 The e mail sent by the Web server module is received by the personal computer 2 The e mail format used by the Web server module is as follows E mail address From E mail address of the Web server module Subject 1 CPU name Status Status Date Main text set in E mail main text of the CPU event setting 0 to Main text 128 words Attached f ttached file data Tag data logging data Attached file capacity Maximum 512k bytes leham Tag data TAGL CSV LI indicates the tag setting No Logging Data File name set in the Logging setting CSV i 782 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q x1 Subject is as follows Example Control CPU Status STOP 2002 07 24 16 46 23 t_ cpu name t _ status t__ Date e CPU name The CPU name preset in the Access target CPU setting is displayed e Status The following table shows the send messages corresponding to the CPU module status CPU Module Status Normal operation RUN Running Warning has occurred RUN Warning or RUN Slight Abnormal STOP Stopping Warning has occurred STOP Warning or STOP Slight Abnormal System error has occurred STOP Serious Fatal Error or STOP Abnormal Pausing PAUSE e Date The date of the event occurrence is displayed 2 The CSV format file of the tag data is as follows Component name 1 Component name 2 Component name 3 CR LF Component va
431. mail address No 0812h non setting error E mail transmission error No attached file error SMTP server login error E mail header send error The e mail address No is outside the setting range An e mail sending request was issued to the e mail address No that has not been set in the e mail setting An error occurred during e mail transmission The specified attached file is missing Failed to connect to the mail server SMTP server Failed to send the e mail header e Check the e mail address No of the logging setting refer to Section 6 4 4 event setting Continue refer to Section 6 5 3 or WMSEND instruction refer to Section 8 2 e Check the e mail address No of the logging setting refer to Section 6 4 4 event setting refer to Section 6 5 3 or WMSEND instruction refer to Section 8 2 e Check the e mail setting Refer to Section 6 6 3 e Check the e mail setting Refer to Section 6 6 3 e Check the connection with the Continue mail server e Check the mail server status of Continue the send destination e Select POP before SMTP in the e mail setting Refer to Section 6 6 3 e Check the specification of the attached file in the WMSEND instruction Refer to Section 8 2 e Check that the attached file has not been deleted Continue e Check the logging setting Refer to Section 6 6 5 3 e Check the E mail setting Refer to Section 6 6 3 e Che
432. mask Example 255 255 255 0 3 Default gateway e Set the default gateway e One gateway can be registered for a Web server module c Set the IP address subnet mask and default gateway after consulting the network administrator person in charge of network planning IP address management etc 3 DNS server setting Set the IP address for the DNS server a Select the method of obtaining the IP address of the DNS server Obtain a DNS server Select this item when obtaining the IP address of the DNS server address automatically automatically Use the following DNS Select this item when using the specified DNS server IP address server address 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q b When Use the following DNS server address has been selected set the IP address of the DNS server in decimal number Up to two DNS servers can be registered for a web server module When obtaining the IP address from the domain name retrieve it from the DNS server of the DNS server address 1 c Make the DNS server setting after consulting the network administrator person who in charge of network planning IP address management etc The DNS server setting is required when the SMTP server or FTP server is set with the domain name 4 Web server setting Set the HTTP port number for the Web server module a Select the HTTP port number for the Web server module It is recommended to use the default value 80 of th
433. mays NO Mak NES NRUN Normal RUN ar Wamingetop Mak ES amin Must be set x Need not be set Invalid App 47 App 47 APPENDIX MELSEC Q i Setting Item Description Set value requirement Mak TES WRUN Warning RUN Mak ES EJ SERROR System error PAUSE PAUSE Send an e mail Mark m when an event Disconnect from When YES is DISCONNECT the network selected at em after sending EMAIL o not mark mail When NO is selected at EMAIL E mail main text When YES is selected at EMAIL 0 to 256 characters BODY x2 When NO is selected at EMAIL When YES is mE APPEND Attached file EMAIL Logging Data EE When NO is selected at EMAIL When TAG is selected at 1 to 64 APPEND EZ APPTAG Tag setting No When other than the above is Blank selected at APPEND When LOGGING is selected at be Logging setting APPEND EE APPLOGGING i SSRA When other than the above is Blank selected at APPEND Destination 1 to selected at When NO is selected at EMAIL Blank Must be set x Need not be set Invalid 1 Specify the access target CPU setting No set to the label of CPU CSV An error will occur if the specified access target CPU setting No does not exist in CPU CSV x2 Refer to Appendix 6 2 2 for the precautions for editing the e mail main text x3 Specify the e mail address To setting No set to the label of EMAIL CSV An error will occur if the specified e mail
434. mber of successful connection Section 3 8 2 EE Number of connection tries by automatic connection o Network Number of reconnection tries o l m o Seaton connection status Number of times of connection retry occurrence 3 8 2 area Number of automatic disconnection Number of line lost times 41 to a otal connection time Unit Minute AN connection time Unit Minute Modem connection time Unit Minute 47 to 48 Use prohibited ystem area Continued on the next page 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q From the preceding page Address Reference Application Name Initial value Decimal section Section 49 to 50 i ion ti it Mi a 511052 Useprohibited systemarea CT 53 to 54 Current connection time Unit Minute 55 to 56 IP address 57 to 58 Subnet mask 59 to 60 Default gateway 61 to 62 Network DNS server address 1 63 to 64 __ connection status DNS server address 2 0 Section 3 8 2 nD oa 7 7S gt 1 1 10 1 o o foe fer T E HTTP port number Connection method 0 LAN 1 Modem 3 ADSL Access point 1 to 3 Access point number being used Network FTP port number connection status Number of disconnections from user screen number of disconnections using area 1 line disconnection part IP address setting 0 Obtain an IP address automatically 1 Use the folowing IP address c System setting status area Web server setting 0 to 1023 Use the default HTT
435. ministrative menu Address notification setting gt lt lt E mail notification setting gt gt tab E mail notification setting 3 FTP notification setting refer to 3 Administrative menu Address notification setting gt lt lt FTP notification setting gt gt tab gt FTP notification setting 1 IP address setting Make IP address setting Setting Screen a Address notification setting Home gt Administrative mem gt Address notification setting gt IP address setting IP address setting E mail notification setting FTP notification setting IP address setting Save Cancel Notification IP address Notify the IP address set in the System setting screen Notify the global IP address obtained from the router Notify the following IP address IP addres l Notify the HTTP port number set in the System setting screen Notify the following HTTP port number HTTP port number 1024 to 65535 Setting Item Notification IP address Set the IP address and HTTP port of which the external device will be notified Saves the setting Savel The settings are updated when the Update button on the Setting update screen is clicked the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset Discards the changed setting and returns to the previous setting 6 100 6 100 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q a Set the notification IP address 1
436. mmand FTP may not operate normally b The maximum number of simultaneous connections to the FTP server is 10 However since several internal connections may be made simultaneously depending on the FTP client login may not be allowed even if the number of connections does not seem to reach 10 c If many files are transferred at once by FTP a 426 Data connection error error may occur In that case transfer the files again in numbers d When a file of the Web server module is overwritten via FTP the file will be deleted if an error occurs during write of the file Write the file again via FTP e In the case of FTP access by the Internet Explorer the user authentication screen may not be displayed depending on the Internet Explorer s specifications In this case enter the Web server module address as follows ftp lt User name gt lt Password gt lt Web server module address or host name gt Precautions for batter In any of the following cases erasure of data e g logging data being proccessed corruption of data in the standard ROM drive Compact Flash card during access or a file system fault may occur gt 1 When the battery is not replaced after battery error occurrence Refer to Section 4 10 3 2 When shut down operation is not performed before power off during operation without battery Refer to Section 4 11 3 When the battery is removed without shut down operation being performed Refer to Se
437. module s URL op _R h A h cites Med Histo 4 d D Address http 192 168 3 3 indexen htm v Go Links et 596 fasa MITSUBISHI Japanese Select a monitor and or setting screen Monitor and or setting screen Displays the monitor and or setting screen selected from the menu EJ Done Intenet Menu items ra Top page This screen is displayed first when the URL of the Web server module is specified Monitors device data tag data logging data event historical data PLC diagnostics and self diagnostics Allows initial setting various function setting setting test etc for use of the Web server module Only the user with administrator authority can use the menu 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION Screen name Screen name will be displayed Menu Select a monitor screen Click on the button to move to the monitor screen top page or the default top page MELSEC Q 1 Monitor screen AJ QJ71WS96 Microsoft Internet Explorer _ 5 File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ea 1 e JBP amp amp Hw Stop Refresh Home Search Favorites Media History Mail Print Edit Discuss x Go Links gt Location Shows the location of the currently displayed screen Caution I Start of each monitor screen may take a little while Ls Device monitor This screen is used for monitoring device
438. module s URL Bj Account setting Sets the account for making access to the Web server module Section 4 6 5 i Sets the IP address at which access to the Web server module is 7 IP filter setting i Section 4 6 6 enabled disabled Backs up restores and formats the Compact Flash card and 7 Data management Section 6 10 performs CSV export import Sinais Conducts connection tests such as e mail transmission file Section 6 11 ai ieee transfer and PING tests RISS Access log Displays the access log to the Web server module Section 6 8 Updates the setting made in the Administrative menu on the Web Si Setting update p gr Section 4 6 2 3 server module operation 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 6 2 Common operations for the standard screen This section explains the common operations for the standard screen Refer to the corresponding sections for the monitor and set screens 1 Standard screen displaying procedure a 1 2 x3 Start the Web browser from the personal computer and enter the Web server module s address Refer to Section 4 6 3 for the IP address setting 1 Address http 192 168 3 3 qo IP address or host name of the web server module As the user authentication screen Enter Network password screen appears when accessing the Web server module enter the account Refer to Section 4 6 5 for the account setting 2 i 1x Enter Network Passwor
439. monitor function Notify an IP dd t EJ Fconnecron 20099393 network connection App 57 MELSEC Q Notify the following IP address FOLLOWING When FOLLOWING is selected IP address decimal at IPTYPE When other than the above is Blank selected at IPTYPE Notify the HTTP port number set in SYSTEM the System setting screen o Notify the following HTTP port FOLLOWING number When SYSTEM is selected at Blank x PORTTYPE When FOLLOWING is selected 1024 to 65535 at PORTTYPE selected at When NO is selected at Blank ECONNECTION Must be set x Need not be set Invalid Notify the IP address set in the System setting screen obtained from the router App 57 APPENDIX MELSEC Q ipti Setting Label Description Set value E EAT d Target FTP selected at SERVER1 to SERVER16 i 16 2 When NO is selected at Blank FCONNECTION a E FILENAME Notification file name 1 to 8 characters A EA Link Character string for link within 64 characters Must be set x Need not be set Invalid 1 Specify the e mail address To setting No set to the label of EMAIL CSV An error will occur if the specified e mail address To setting No does not exist in EMAIL CSV x2 Specify the FTP server setting No set to the label of FTP CSV An error will occur if the specified FTP server setting No does not exist in FTP CSV App 58 App 58 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendi
440. mory and the PLC CPU 1 Module READY X0 is on 2 Network connection status X4 is on 3 IP address and subnet mask storage areas in the network connection status area e IP address buffer memory 55 to 56 e Subnet mask buffer memory 57 to 58 c When connection to the network fails connection error X19 turns on and an error code is stored into the connection error code area buffer memory 30 Take corrective measures according to the troubleshooting In the network connection status area buffer memory 28 to 69 the current network connection status of the Web server module can be confirmed 5 CONNECTING WEB SERVER MODULE TO NETWORK 3 MELSEC Q Receiving the account notification by the personal computer By the address notification setting the URL of the Web server module is sent by e mail to the destination e mail address Example In the case of Microsoft Corporation s Outlook Express 5 5 QJ71WS96 URL Information File Edit View Tools Message Help Reply Reply All Forward Print Delete Previous Next Addresses From QU71WS396 Date Tuesday November 12 2002 10 27 AM To oe ed a Subject QJ71W596 URL Information http Access to Web server module a Start a Web browser on the personal computer and enter the Web server module address obtained by the address notification function b When the user authentication screen is displayed at the time of access to the Web server modu
441. mple This section explains programs for connection disconnection using sequence programs a Program execution environment 1 Mount the Web server module on Slot 0 of the main base 2 Connect the Web server module and the personal computer with a crossing cable Web server module Crossing cable fi Personal computer IP address 192 168 3 3 IP address 192 168 3 1 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 3 Make the following network setting of the personal computer IP address 192 168 3 1 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 4 Make the following Web server module setting with the Web browser Use the default values for other than the following e System setting Refer to Section 4 6 3 Item Set value Network type setting Select Connecting through LAN or the router Select Use the following IP address IP address setting e IP address 192 168 3 3 e Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Automatic network connection setting at start up Select No connection to network at start up 5 After writing the sequence program using GX Developer power the PLC off and then on or reset the CPU module 5 CONNECTING WEB SERVER MODULE TO NETWORK MELSEC Q b Program example Network connection processing lt Connection reguest ON gt XO X4 Y5 Y7 M100 SET Y5 Module R Connecti Connecti Disconne Connecti Connecti EADY on statu on regue ction re on comma on regue s st guest nd st lt Clear
442. mple screen for historical graph display part Microsoft Internet Explorer SE File Edit View Favorites Tools Help e Q G B E Back Stop Refresh Home Search Favorites History Mail Print Edit Discuss Address hitp 192 168 3 3 user SMPHSGEN HTM x Go Link Sample screen for historical graph display part j j i j j 2002 11 25 09 41 28 Ay j Aid A ui A Kh iW yA device A 3698 w H mi Hil device B 5698 if ii i Li device C 7638 Wi Hi 7H ice 9698 Wy j jh Vay device 11698 Tit TV iil it Ji Lig ais j if fit Hi Fit Hi f Tj ji Lf Vu iy A ji Li WT ij I vl i ii y y 2002 11 25 09 39 49 2002 11 25 09 41 28 Points 100 z E Done Intemet 4 Precautions for using the historical graph display parts The vertical axis line intervals of the historical graph parts may not be constant depending on the display resolution and specified width of the historical graph display parts The vertical axis line intervals can be made constant by adjusting the width WIDTH value described in HTML of the Java applet that displays the historical graph display parts Refer to Section 7 2 1 for the HTML description method 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 2 8 Historical data display parts The logging data are displayed in the table form Up to 100 pieces of logging data can be displayed The latest logged data is displayed at the bottom end At the lowest end of the graph new data is automat
443. mponent test Tag component test Tag name jo data block Set Component name 01 data 1 Cancel Single word Setting value 100 Data type Wearing Applet Window The data direction for block display can be set in the parameter DIRECTION Vertical direction DIRECTION 0 aer roof onee f 1g anea soo aae f 500d Data direction Horizontal direction DIRECTION 1 a wees 20 500 150 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Parameter Setting Range Initial Value Sets the tag data for data block display using the tag setting No TAGNO an a ara 11064 Mustbe set Refer to Section 6 3 3 ELMNO1 to Sets the component for data block display using the component 1 to 64 Must be set ELMNOG64 1 setting No Refer to Section 6 3 3 DIRECTION Sets the eee aieeten of he block pag 0 1 0 Vertical 0 Vertical direction 1 Horizontal direction direction Sets the block size 1 Vertical direction DIRECTION 0 Sets the number of block lines If the set number of components is greater than the number of block lines line feed is performed by the number of block lines 2 Horizontal direction DIRECTION 1 Sets the number of block columns If the set number of components is greater than the number of block columns line feed is performed by the number of block columns String Sets the character color of the component value display cell NUMCOLOR BKCOLOR ets the background
444. n a FTP client function 1 FTPPUT instruction The tag data logging data user data file stored in the Web server module can be written to an external device FTP server PLC CPU Web server module External device FTP client FTP server on S Program tes Write Upload Hglze rrpput H TTT 2 7 E S TEE 2 FTPGET instruction The user data file stored in the external device FTP server can be read to the Web server module PLC CPU Web server module External device FTP client FTP server Progam Read Download ze rreceT H Ciera e TLL rag Q b FTP server function The files stored in the Web server module can be read written from the external device FTP server PLC CPU Web server module FTP server Eon Even history lt ee Q External device FTP client Read Download a TELL Logging Ee Write Upload n STL ed Pe 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 9 Read write of user data file by PLC CPU Dedicated instructions a WFREAD instruction The user data file on the compact flash card mounted on the Web server module can be read to the device data of the PLC CPU PLC CPU Web server module Program HHZP WFREAD H EESE C Example User data file reading Transfer the recipe data created with the personal computer to the Web server module
445. n Component name of the tag event setting does not exist The data type of the component specified in Component name of the tag event setting is a string type Invalid setting was made in Condition of the tag event setting or the event setting file is destroyed Invalid setting was made in Attached file of the tag event setting Invalid setting was made in Time Interval of the time interval event setting Invalid setting was made in Attached file of the time interval event setting Though the e mail setting was made in the CPU event setting the destination was not specified in the common setting Though the e mail setting was made in the tag event setting the destination was not specified in the common setting Though the e mail setting was made in the time interval event setting the destination was not specified in the common setting Setting update was performed after the monitor screen was displayed The tag setting file is corrupted MELSEC Q From the previous page Error 063Fh 0640h 0641h e Check the tag event setting Refer to Section 6 5 3 Continued on the next page e Check the tag event setting Refer to Section 6 5 3 e After initializing the module refer to Section 4 13 perform the event setting refer to Section e Check the tag event setting Refer to Section 6 5 3 e Check the time interval event setting Refer to Section 6 5 3 e Check the time int
446. n WMSEND in a sequence program Any subject any main text and an attached tag data logging data user data file can be sent 1 Makes required setting for e mail in control data of dedicated instruction Tag Logging No ey EEEE Attached file E User data file name Binary CSV data PLC CPU Web server module ZP WMSEND H WEE Subject B gt MHH Subject IE ASCII data ASCII data m BE Maintext EE Main text HEE m ASCII data ASCII data m E Mail server 2 Sends an e mail by dedicated instruction WMSEND 2 E mail transmission by event monitor function E mails are sent by the Web server module according to the event setting of the Web browser An e mail is sent when an event CPU event tag event time interval event occurs A fixed subject any main text and an attached tag data or logging data file can be sent 1 Performs monitoring according to event PLC CPU setting Web server module o CHD oo ill Event nal Subject if st BK S Se cle S _ o a TT Main text I gt interval monitor ASCII data lt oO m us EEE Attached file H iiallenier l CSV data 2 According to the tag 3 When event conditions setting collects device data in tag unit are satisfied an e mail will be sent 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 3 E mail transmission
447. n 6 2 confirm the setting Operation The Web server module stores in the standard ROM the setting information logging data user HTML etc set in the Administrative menu It is recommended to back up the standard ROM data setting information logging data user HTML etc into the Compact Flash card periodically Refer to Section 6 10 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 2 Accessing the other station CPU from the Web server module Web server module a personal computer Procedures before operation y Confirm that the Web server module can access the Refer to Section 4 2 1 host station CPU y Confirm that the access target network system Refer to the user s manual of the operates correctly network module Make one to one connection between the Web server Refer to Section 4 5 module and personal computer with a crossing cable to make the network setting l Set the connection path to the access target CPU on Access target CPU setting from the Administrative menu Refer to Section 4 6 7 Ensure the setting on the Web server module and then execute Access target CPU test from the Administrative menu to check the connection status Set various functions from the Administrative menu Refer to Chapter 6 Tag setting Logging setting Event setting Refer to Section 6 11 2
448. n The read start position is beyond e Check the argument of the read 070Dh ak Display fault the file capacity start position sl e Check whether the read start The read range is not within the Read range fault fi position number of read points Display ile fall within the file range Continued on the next page 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC Q From the previous page Error code e Check whether the access target An error occurred when access file was deleted by external FTP i File access error f Display was made to the file etc during execution of the instruction ozaon Systemeror fe Systemeror et Display e After initializing the module refer FTP server setting file The FTP setting file is missing or to Section 4 13 perform the error destroyed FTP setting refer to Section 6 7 3 again e Check the FTP transfer er destination No of the logging Incorrect FTP transfer The FTP transfer destination No ay i f setting refer to Section 6 4 4 or Continue destination No error is outside the setting range f dedicated instruction refer to Section 8 3 8 4 Stop e Check the FTP setting Refer to Section 6 7 3 e Check the FTP setting Refer to Section 6 7 3 e Check the connection status with the FTP server e Check the FTP server status of i the transfer destination An error occurred during FTP file eed e Check the transmission file FTP file tr
449. n a watch dog timer error occurs error 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Output signal details request 2 Refer to X2 for ON OFF timing EE cancel request Refer to X2 for ON OFF timing Network 1 Turns on when the Web server module is connected to the network connection 2 Refer to X6 for ON OFF timing request Network E 1 Turns on when the Web server module is disconnected from the network disconnection 2 Refer to X8 for ON OFF timing request user is enabled 1 Turning this on during module continue error occurrence ERR LED on turns off the ERR LED and X10 to X19 and X1C The ERR LED does not turn off if Y10 is turned on during module stop error Error clear request occurrence ERR LED flicker 2 Clears the current error area address 140 to 145 of the buffer memory Clears the latest error code displayed in the system monitor of GX Developer Refer to Section 9 2 2 1 When this turns on writing from the device test tag component test by a write authorized Device write user is disabled disable request 2 When this turns off writing from the device test tag component test by a write authorized 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 7 Buffer memory list The buffer memory addresses are listed below Address Reference Application Name Initial value Decimal section RUN LED status 0 Off 1 On ERR LED status 0 Off 1 On 2 Flicker Switch 1 status Mode setting 00001
450. n co guest molete lt Disconnect complt confirm ON gt SET M401 Disconne ction co molt co nf i rmed 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 6 FUNCTIONS This chapter explains the functions of the Web server module 6 1 Function List of Web Server Module The following is the function list of the Web server module ak Reference Function Description Section Section Device monitor Monitors device values 6 2 4 Section Tag data monitor Monitors tag data 6 2 2 toaa f Moni asad Section Monitor ogging monitor onitors logging data 6 2 3 Function Event history oe Section a Monitors event histories monitor 6 2 4 PLC diagnostics Section Monitors PLC CPU operation status monitor 6 2 5 Self diagnostics f f Section F Monitors Web server module operation status monitor 6 2 6 Stores a set of device data of individual PLC CPUs on a network as a tag and Tag function collects those device data in tag unit Section 6 3 Collected data can be displayed in the Web browser operation etc Monitors the PLC CPU status CPU monitor tag data tag monitor and time time interval monitor and stores the historical data of occurred events into CSV files Event monitor tunetion The stored files can be can be displayed in the Web browser or downloaded by section 6 9 Stores tag data as a CSV file in time series at the user specified execution eee f timing by setting timing start stop condition ee ree ogging func
451. n e mail address 2 Receiving e mail by personal computer a The e mail sent by the Web server module is received by the personal computer b The e mail format used by the Web server module is as follows E mail address From E mail address of the Web server module File Data Full File name CSV Date Subject F File name File name set in the Logging setting Main text Same as in the subject Attached file name Saved file name Example 00000009 CSV Attached file data Saved file Attached file capacity Maximum 512k bytes 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q c The e mail is received by the personal computer Example In the case of Microsoft Corporation s Outlook Express 5 5 File Data Full line1_CS 2002 11 14 13 59 24 Afe File Edit View Tools Message Help amp QW S amp S xX a F Reply Reply All Forward Print Delete Previous Next Addresses From QJ71 WS96 Date Thursday November 14 2002 1 59 PM To o iee oe I Subject File Data Fullfline1 CS 2002 11 14 13 59 24 Attach PS 00000001 CS 1 61 KB File Data Full ine1 CSV 2002 11 14 13 59 24 3 Precautions for sending e mail by logging function E mail transmission requires several to several tens of seconds depending on the network line and data size When When the number of saved files exceeds the above set value Overwrite has been set in the Logging setting an error occurs if the target file is deleted as the oldest file befor
452. n status of the WFREAD instruction Normally completed Remains off Abnormally completed Turns on in the END processing of the scan where the WFREAD instruction is completed and turns off in the next END processing Precaution 1 The data read at the CSV setting are decimal values When word is specified 32768 to 32767 0 to 65535 When byte is specified 128 to 127 0 to 255 Any value outside the above range including characters other than numeric characters is converted into 0 8 31 8 31 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION Operation at execution of WFREAD instruction Error Prog MELSEC Q When the WFREAD instruction is completed the completion device bit device set in D2 0 turns on in the END processing of the completed scan and turns off in the next END processing When an error occurs the completion device set in D2 1 turns on and an error code is stored into the completion status i device set in a 1 Sequence program Scan aes ti Scan Pesce Scan Scan arene SE eee nae a a Fe O S WEREAD instruction I Instruction execution Completion device pase ge Sas Completion device 1 Read from file i eat fate eet atte e E When the dedicated instruction is abnormally completed the abnormal completion signal D2 1 turns on and a corresponding error code is stored into the completion status S 1 Check the error status according to
453. n the Web server module becomes ready after the PLC is powered off and Module READY then on or the CPU module is reset 2 Turns off when a watch dog timer error occurs in the Web server module Eas setting status 2 Turns off when the ee Flash M card i is not set or File access a o is on 1 Is on during file access stop The following operations are eae during file access stop a Removing and setting the Compact Flash card Refer to Section 4 9 b Powering off during operation without battery Refer to Section 4 11 x During file access stop 1 Write of file to standard ROM is disabled 2 Read from or write to Compact Flash card is disabled 3 Tag collection logging and event monitor are stopped 2 Is off during file access operation File access status File access stop request Y2 File access stop cancel request Y3 Operating Stopped Operating File access status X2 CompactFlash card setting status X1 y Compact Flash card replacement PLC power OFF PECIFICATION aaa MELSEC Q Device Signal Name Description 1 Turns on when the Web server module is connected to the network 2 The Web server module is connected to the network Connection trigger when a The PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset when Automatic connection to network at start up is set in the System setting Refer to Section 4 6 3 b Network connection request Y5
454. n to the Continue stopped station link on the access route The specified intelligent special e Check the hardware of the Special module bus OOF ih Sirer function module is not ready for intelligent special function Continue processing module No response from the specified e Check the hardware of the Special module time Eee f RRE i 00F2h cui intelligent special function intelligent Special function Continue module module 0102h System Error e System Error 1 Stop 0110h e Check the switch setting A switch setting error was Refer to Section 4 7 detected in the hardware test e Perform the hardware test again x2 A ROM detected in th Perform the hardware test again 0181h ROM check sum error a ica j g Stop hardware test x2 0182h RAM test error A RAM error was detected in the e Perform the hardware test again Stop hardware test 72 0188h 0189h CH2 parity error i A An error occurred in the CH2 self e Check the wiring 018Ah CH2 framing error 7 loopback test e Hardware fault 3 018Bh CH2 time out error 018Ch CH2 data error 0190h CH1 time out error 0191h CH1 communication error An error occurred in the CH1 self e Hardware fault 3 0192h CH1 comparison error loopback test H1 in f 0198h oran in frame POA POA PEOR on 0202h seoan on 0300h Switch setting error Mozogn System error e System error 1 Continued on the next page 9
455. nal device 1 Set the same network address to the Web server module and external device 2 When changing the Web server module s IP address after initial setting change the system setting to the default by the switch setting of GX Developer and make initial setting again Refer to Section 4 7 for the switch setting of GX Developer 2 System configuration for switch setting sequence program creation and PLC diagnostics by GX Developer Web server module RS 232 cable or USB cable External device CPU module 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 4 Connection Device This section explains the devices compatible with the Web server module 1 Compact Flash card The Compact Flash card applicable to the Web server module is a TYPE storage card that meets the Compact Flash specifications One Compact Flash card can be set to the Web server module POINT The Compact Flash card has its own lifetime the limited number of writes For details check the specifications of each product 2 Analog modem The following table provides the specifications of the analog modem applicable to the Web server module Specifications Operable with the interface specifications of the CH2 RS 232 side on the Web server module side interface Web server module refer to Section 3 1 Data communication control command Compatible with AT command of Hayes DR Signal Control Can turn on only the DR DSR sig
456. nal independent 3 ADSL modem The following table provides the specifications of the ADSL modem applicable to the Web server module Specifications eee Operable with the interface specifications of the CH1 10BASE Web server module side interface i T 100BASE TX side of the Web server module refer to Section 3 1 Protocol PPPoE PPP over Ethernet or PPPoA PPP over ATM Connection form Bridge type or router type 1 x1 Use the router type ADSL modem that satisfies the following e The modem has the NAT address conversion function e The modem is compatible with Universal Plug and Play UPnP e When the modem is incompatible with UPnP it is necessary for the user to make a contract on a static IP address with an Internet service provider and make the NAT setting of the router 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 4 Broadband router The following table provides the specifications of the broadband router applicable to the Web server module Web Aviacsa Operable with the interface specifications of the CH1 10BASE eb server module side interface T 100BASE TX side of the Web server module refer to Section 3 1 Should have the NAT address conversion function x2 When the broadband router is incompatible with UPnP it is necessary for the user to make a contract on a static IP address with an Internet service provider and make the NAT setting of the router 5 Twisted pair cable Use the twisted
457. nation e Reset the default operation setting of the switch setting Refer to Section 4 7 e Check the e mail setting Refer to Section 6 3 3 e Check the connection with the mail server e Power on the PLC a few minutes after power off e After initializing the module refer to Section 4 13 perform the address notification setting refer to Section 6 9 2 again e After initializing the module refer to Section 4 13 perform the system setting refer to Section 4 6 3 again e After initializing the module refer to Section 4 13 perform the account setting refer to Section 4 6 5 again Continued on the next page TR BLE SH TIN Se MELSEC Q From the previous page Error code Stop System error e System error 1 play f An item that has not been set was e Check the setting and execute A 0902h Non set item error g i Display specified again The user who does not have write Log in with the account with write 0903h Write authority error f s9 Display authority attempted to write authority and execute again Outside setting range A value outside the setting range Check the setting and execute error was specified again No specified The component specified in the e Check the setting and execute component error data does not exist again Device specification An incorrect device that cannot e Check the setting and execute f 0906h i Display error be handled was specified again
458. ng Refer to Section 6 5 3 The access target CPU specified N specife GPU error in ne CPU event setting does not e Specify the existing access target Stop exist or the access target CPU CPU has been deleted setting error Interval of the CPU event setting Refer to Section 6 5 3 Invalid setting was made in e After initializing the module refer CPU event condition Condition of the CPU event to Section 4 13 perform the Stop setting error setting or the event setting file is event setting refer to Section destroyed 6 5 3 again i Invalid setting was made in CPU event monitor n ts e Check the CPU event setting Attached file of the CPU event Stop attached file error Refer to Section 6 5 3 setting The tag specified in Tag name of Tag event monitor tag i e Check the tag event setting the tag event setting does not Stop non setting error Refer to Section 6 5 3 exist Continued on the next page 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING Tag event monitor component non setting error Tag event monitor component type error Tag event condition setting error Tag event monitor attached file error Time Interval event monitor time setting error Time Interval event monitor attached file error CPU event e mail setting error Tag event e mail setting error Time Interval event e mail setting error Setting mismatch error Duplicate high speed tag specification error The component specified i
459. ng No set in the 2 Logging No logging setting 1 to 64 User 1 to 64 Setting No of logging data to be deleted Set the saved logging data file to be deleted r 0 The oldest file is deleted Ee file No P ae to User 1 to FFFFFFFFu The specified saved file is deleted FFFFFFFFH Example When deleting 00000010 CSV set 000000104 1 The setting side is as follows e User Data are set by the user before execution of the dedicated instruction e System The execution result of the dedicated instruction is stored by the PLC CPU x2 Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code Function 1 The saved file of the logging data is deleted 2 Executing the same instruction during execution of the instruction is not allowed The second instruction will not be processed In this case if an error is detected the completion device D 0 and completion status indication flag D 1 do not turn on 3 This instruction is not available for interrupt programs 4 The execution and normal abnormal completion statuses of the LOGDEL instruction can be confirmed using the completion device D 0 and completion status indication flag D 1 a Completion device D 0 This device turns on in the END processing of the scan for which the LOGDEL instruction is completed and turns off in the next END processing b Completion status indication flag D 1 This device turns on off according to the completion stat
460. ng on the Logging setting so that a file will be transferred when it is saved Completed For logging function refer to Section 6 4 e Procedure for transferring file by diagnostics function 1 Execute file transfer test on the System setting Completed For details of file transfer test refer to Section 6 11 2 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 6 7 3 FTP setting Setting Purpose In the FTP setting make setting to use the FTP client function When the FTP server function is used this setting is not required Start Procedure Administrative menu FTP setting refer to 1 gt Select FTP setting No and click on Edit refer to 2 1 FTP setting Make FTP setting Setting Screen 4 FTP setting Home gt Administrative mem gt FTP setting Edit Delete YT C 1 192168310 QIJITIWS96 1QJ71WS96 USERI Setting Item Selects the FTP setting No to be edited or deleted Displays the FTP server name of the file transfer destination Displays the account user name Directory path Displays the directory path of the FTP server Edits the selected FTP setting Deletes the selected FTP setting 2 Edit screen Set the FTP server name login user name login password and directory path Refer to Appendix 4 2 for the characters applicables to the FTP setting Setting Screen pp FTF setting Home gt Adminis
461. nitor form The monitor form is indicated below Example When the data registers DO and later are displayed as 16 bit integers in decimal Device FEDC BAG9GB4 765443210 Value 0100 0010 0100 0001 DO D1 0100 0100 0100 0011 D2 ol1l00 0110 0100 0101 D3 o01100dg10 OO11 0001 pa oori 0100 0011 0011 1036 DS oo0o00 0000 0000 0000 a esos eooo sooo ooo o oo00 0000 O000 0000 D9 oo000 0000 0000 0000 0 D10 1100 0000 0011 0010 16334 1 The devices are displayed 2 The bit ON OFF statuses are displayed 1 ON 0 OFF 3 The values stored in the word devices are displayed DEC HEX display 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 Device test Executing device test turns the bit device of the PLC CPU on off forcibly or changes the current value of the word device Only users with the device write authority are allowed to conduct this test Refer to Section 4 6 5 for the user authority Setting screen When Data type is 16 bit integer 32 bit integer When Data type is Bit Device test Device test CPU name 01 Control CPU Set CPU name 01 Control CPU Set Device DO Device MO Cancel Cancel Data type 16bit integer x Data type Bit x Input form DEC Input form zi Setting value 100 Setting value ON C OFF Waring Applet Window Wearing Applet Window Setting Item Selects the data type of the value to be set Setting value Sets the setting value Se
462. nitor of the tag event setting No 16 e Tag event monitor error X14 turns on e Tag event monitor error data area address 10128 bit 15 of the buffer memory turns on e The error code is stored into the tag event monitor 16 error code area address 10207 of the buffer memory 4 Tag event monitor 1 to 256 error code Address 10192 to 10447 The error code that indicates the error status is stored into the corresponding tag event setting No area Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code 3 8 15 Tag event monitor status area 2 Address 3100 to 3118 The status related to the tag event monitor function can be confirmed Refer to Section 6 5 for the tag event monitor function When using the product whose first 5 digits of serial No are 05112 or later use the tag event monitor status area 1 address 10000 to 10447 Refer to Section 3 8 14 When this area has been used previously it can be used as is 1 Tag event setting data Address 3100 a This area stores information on whether Tag event setting in the event setting has been made or not b The bit corresponding to the preset tag event setting No turns on 0 Not set 1 Set b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bd b4 b3 b2 bi bO Address 3100 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 21 2 Tag event occurrence data Address 3101 a This area stores the tag event occurrence results b The bit corresponding to the tag event setting No of
463. nnected X Cannot be disconnected 5 CONNECTING WEB SERVER MODULE TO NETWORK MELSEC Q 5 4 2 Network Connection Disconnection Processing Using Sequence Program The Web server module must be connected to the network for access from the external device With the Web server module connected to the network access from the external device by Web or FTP is available 1 Outline of connection disconnection processing using sequence program a Connection disconnection processing to from the network using a sequence program is required in the following cases 1 Controlling the timing of connection disconnection to from the network or connecting to the network in consideration of time is desired 2 No connection to network at start up is selected in the automatic network connection setting at start up on the System setting screen b When Network connection request Y5 is turned from OFF to ON the Web server module starts network connection processing Refer to Section 3 6 2 for Network connection request Y5 c When Network disconnection request Y7 is turned from OFF to ON the Web server module starts network disconnection processing Refer to Section 3 6 2 for Network disconnection request Y7 d For connection disconnection processing of the Web server module to from the network System setting and Dial up setting must have been completed 5 CONNECTING WEB SERVER MODULE TO NETWORK MELSEC Q 2 Program exa
464. not be set To do so will result in an error When QNACPU is selected at SERIES and DIFFERENT is selected at OTHER STATION CCLINK and C24 cannot be set To do so will result in an error When QCPUA or ACPU is selected at SERIES 1 When SINGLE is selected at OTHER STATION ETHERNET and C24 cannot be set To do so will result in an error 2 When DIFFERENT is selected at OTHER STATION CCLINK and C24 cannot be set To do so will result in an error When NET10 or ETHERNET is selected at NET1 NET10 and ETHERNET cannot be set To do so will result in an error When CCLINK or C24 is selected at NET1 CCLINK and C24 cannot be set To do so will result in an error When other than QCPU is selected at SERIES NET10 ETHERNET and C24 cannot be set To do so will result in an error App 30 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 6 6 TAG CSV Tag setting 1 File format Filename TaG CSV File contents Tag setting Refer to Section 6 3 3 E TEM maot tne A EXECUTE fio fo enee ee Tace fines Hensen o eejo mor oo es eee EXECUTE DISABLE 10 Item row Cannot be set by the user Label column Setting area Set by the user File format Tag setting ees Tag setting Home gt Administrative mem gt Tag setting gt Edit screen Tag setting Save Back Load Tag setting No fo z Tag name line 1 within 16 al 4 Sampling Not execute Execute Interval 10 seconds 1 to
465. nsult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Check whether the battery is connected Refer to Section 4 10 2 e Replace the battery Refer to Section 4 10 3 e Confirm the error definition and take corrective action according to the error code stored when any of the errors indicated in the left is detected Refer to Section 9 2 e Confirm the error definition and take corrective action according to the error code Refer to Section 9 2 e Depending the set number in the access target CPU setting it may take several minutes until XO turns ON Refer to Section 4 6 7 3 e If many files are stored in the Compact Flash card the time required for XO to turn ON will be lengthened Refer to Section 4 9 1 e Delete unnecessary files in the Compact Flash card e Cancel the file access stop status Refer to Section 4 9 e If many files are stored in the Compact Flash card the time required for X1 to turn ON will be lengthened Refer to Section 4 9 1 e Delete unnecessary files in the Compact Flash card 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC Q 2 Troubleshooting on network connection a Common LAN connection Check point Access to the Web server module cannot be made The Web screen is not displayed or a file cannot be transferred to the Web server module Symptom Connection to the Internet service provider cannot be m
466. nt Type content text html charset iso 8859 1 gt lt meta http equiv Pragma content no cache gt lt title gt Sample screen for CGI write part lt title gt lt head gt lt body gt lt h1 gt Sample screen for CGI write part lt h1 gt lt form method post action WSWriteC cgi gt 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q Tag No lt br gt lt input type text name TAGNO gt lt br gt Component No lt br gt lt input type text name ELMNO gt lt br gt Value lt br gt lt input type text name DATA gt lt br gt lt hr gt lt input type submit value Write gt lt input type hidden name CONFIRM value 1 gt lt input type hidden name RESULT value 0 gt lt input type hidden name LANGUAGE value 1 gt lt input type hidden name REFERER value user smpwtcen htm gt lt form gt lt body gt lt html gt c Storage of HTML file Transfer the HTML file to the Web server module by performing FTP operation File storage destination ROM WWW USER Smpwtcen htm d Sample screen display Display the sample screen Example When accessing the Web server module by one to one connection Sample screen address http 192 168 3 3 USER Smpwtcen htm Execution screen 44 Sample screen for CGI write part Microsoft Internet Explorer olx Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help e gt og o 0 Ale M 8 g Back Stop Refresh Home Search Favorites Media His
467. number of disconnections from the network in response to a line disconnection request from the user screen 3 8 3 System setting status area Address 70 to 86 The system setting status can be confirmed Refer to Section 4 6 3 for system setting 3 8 4 Dial up setting status area Address 90 to 134 The dial up setting status can be confirmed Refer to Section 4 6 4 for dial up setting 3 8 5 Current error area Address 140 to 145 The latest error code that is currently occurring can be confirmed 1 Error code Address 140 This area stores the error code that indicates the error status Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Time Address 142 to 145 Stores the error occurrence time in BCD code b15 to b8 b7 to bO Address 142 Month 014 to 124 Year 00 to 99n last 2 digits 143 Hour 00n to 23x Day 01H to 31H 144 Second 00 to 59x Minute 00x to 59x 145 Year 00x to 99u first 2 digits Day of the week On to 6x 1 The information of the current error area can be confirmed on the following diagnostic screen a Error data of self diagnostics monitor Refer to Section 6 2 6 b Present Error in system monitor of GX Developer Refer to Section 9 2 2 2 The current error area can be cleared in any of the following methods a Execute Error clear in self diagnostics monitor Refer to Section 6 2 6 b Turn on the error clear request Y10 c Switc
468. number of times when the Web server module transferred files can be confirmed The transfer log at normal completion can be confirmed in 4 in this section The error log at abnormal completion can be confirmed in 3 in this section a Number of normally completed FTP transfer PUT Address 6004 This area stores the cumulative number of times when the Web server module transferred PUT a file to the FTP server b Number of failed FTP transfer PUT Address 6005 This area stores the cumulative number of communication errors that were returned to the Web server module as a result of requesting the FTP server to transfer PUT a file 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 Error log storage area for abnormal completion The error log of failed file transfer can be confirmed a Number of writes for error log Address 6006 1 This area stores the cumulative number of errors stored in the error log area 2 The error code is stored when FTP transfer error X18 turns on b Error log write pointer Address 6007 1 This area stores the error log No of the latest error log 0 No error No error stored 1 or more Error log No of the latest error stored x The pointer value of 16 indicates that the latest error has been stored into the error log 16 area 2 If 17 or more errors occur excess errors are stored into the error log areas starting from the error log 1 area again c Error log 1 to 16 Address 6008 to 61
469. o o o o moi nia ys pa pays z 2 l2 2 2 2 2 a clo o I g 3 5 le l2 5 5 D D D 2 l2 Z lz Z e 5 gt S Ss z le o 10 p xX o l s aD 7 jo Q o 2 2 2 ja g S 3 6 j jo 3 s s 3 O z l2 l Jo Z Sa L ja lg 3 o D a mm o ZIZ 3 J 9 SHS g ja a gt lg g e 0 9 16 6 oS ja a o o 3 3 53 D lp fe 53 Q j gt S 3 v Q fe 3 oO Oo a Error log 1 f Subject Same as Error log 1 Error log 2 Error log 3 Same as Error log 1 Error log 4 Same as Error log 1 Error log 5 ame as Error log 1 Error log 6 ame as Error log 1 Error log 7 Same as Error log 1 Error log 8 ame as Error log 1 Error log 9 ame as Error log 1 Error log 10 Same as Error log 1 i gt E ee Error log 11 Same as Error log 1 Error log 12 Same as Error log 1 Error log 13 Error log 14 Error log 15 Error log 16 Transmission Subject The composition of each area is the same as that of the transmission log 1 Refer to 6 for assignment of each area i Transmission 2 to 32 Section 3 8 18 Section 3 8 18 5985105999 Use prohibited systemarea CE o d o Continued on the next page 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q From the preceding page Address ee i Reference j Application Initial value Decimal section Section 3 8 19 6000 FTP server Number of successful logins 6001 status Number of failed logins
470. o describe only one communication part before the applet parts a Specifications Description File name WSCom class Parameter Setting Item Description Initial Value Range Sets the communication data update interval in second unit INTERVAL However if the actual communication time is longer than the set 1 to 100 seconds communication is made at the shortest possible interval 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Applet Parts applet Indicates the start of the applet tag pre Sets the file name class for the Java applet Example code WSDatblk class Sets the file storage location directory path for the Java applet I lodha Since the Java applet is stored under the PARTS directory make sure to set as follows Refer to Appendix 3 for the directory structure codebase PARTS Sets the width of the Java applet in pixel unit height Sets the height of the Java applet in pixel unit 1 Indicates the parameter lines 2 Describes PARAM lines when setting more than one parameter 3 The parameters not described operate at the initial values D A Refer to Section 7 2 2 for the ee ooo of the applet parts value Sets the Sets the parameter value sss value 9 appt si Indicates the end of the applet tag 3 Display colors Set the parameter set display colors character color background color etc by color name or RGB value a Color name can be set in either uppercase or
471. o monitor the operating status error information of the PLC CPU Start Procedure Monitor screen PLC diagnostics monitor Setting screen Ea PLC diagnostics monitor Home gt Monitor screen gt PLC diagnostics monitor Sterh monitor Stop monitor CPU operation Switch information Operation status STOP STOP No Present error Date Time Error status 3103 LINK PARA ERROR 2002 11 28 20 38 59 Details No Error message Date Time Error history 1500 JAC DOWN 2002 11 25 09 43 37 I Details 1500 JAC DOWN 2002 11 25 18 26 33 Details 1500 JAC DOWN 2002 11 25 21 14 34 Details 1500 JAC DOWN 2002 11 28 15 16 18 Details 1500 JAC DOWN 2002 11 28 19 07 22 Details 1500 JAC DOWN 2002 11 28 19 15 36 Details 3103 LINK PARA ERROR 2002 11 28 20 38 59 ie Details Setting Item For the error definition corrective action of the error code refer to the User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection of the CPU module or Help of GX Developer 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 1 CPU name a Set the access target CPU b Select the CPU name set in the access target CPU setting Refer to Section 4 6 7 for the access target CPU setting c The CPU name drop down list displays the setting No and CPU names of the access target CPU setting Example 01 Control CPU d By default the host CPU of the Web server module i
472. o the standard ROM a Select the backup data to be restored Restore Execute Restoring data in CompactFlash card to a standard ROM M Setting information M Logging data M User HTML M Event history b Click on the Execute button to execute restore c On the Status section confirm the restore execution status Click on the Update button to confirm the current status When Restoring appears click on the Update button again to confirm that the executed operation has been completed Restore completed Restore is completed Perform the next processing Restore failed According to the error code confirm the error definition and take corrective action Refer to Section 9 3 Status Update Displaying current data management execution status 2002 1 1 13 18 33 31 2002 11 13 18 33 36 Restore completed 6 116 6 116 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 3 Execution of format Format the Compact Flash card a Select Formatting a Compact Flash card Format Meccan Formatting a CompactFlash card W Please check here to enable formatting of a CompactFlash card b Click on the Execute button to execute format c On the Status section confirm the format execution status Click on the Update button to confirm the current status When Formatting appears click on the Update button again to confirm that the executed operation has been completed Format completed Format is
473. off when Error clear request Y10 is turned on XD XE 10 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Device Signal Name Description 1 Turns on when a logging error occurs 2 When this turns on an error code is stored into the logging status area buffer memory Legging ehor 2000 to 2267 3 Turns off when Error clear request Y10 is turned on 1 Turns on when an error of CPU event monitor occurs 2 When this turns on an error code is stored into the CPU event monitor status area 1 CPU event buffer memory 3300 to 3375 monitor error The statuses of CPU monitor setting No 1 to 16 are also stored into the CPU event monitor status area 2 buffer memory 3000 to 3018 3 Turns off when Error clear request Y10 is turned on 1 Turns on when an error of tag event monitor occurs 2 When this turns on an error code is stored into the tag event monitor status area 1 Tag event monitor buffer memory 10000 to 10447 error The statuses of tag monitor setting No 1 to 16 are also stored into the tag event monitor status area 2 buffer memory 3100 to 3118 3 Turns off when Error clear request Y10 is turned on 1 Turns on when an error of time event monitor occurs Time event 2 When this turns on an error code is stored into the time interval event monitor status monitor error area buffer memory 3200 to 3217 3 Turns off when Error clear request Y10 is turned on 1 Turns on when a communication er
474. ollection Section 8 5 TAG Issues a logging command Triggers a logging LOGDEL Deletes the saved file of logging data Writes the device data of the PLC CPU to the user data file on the WFWRITE Section 8 8 Logging compact flash card Reads the user data file on the compact flash card to the device data of WFREAD Section 8 9 the PLC CPU WFDEL Deletes the user data file on the compact flash card Section 8 10 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 5 Web Browser Setting Item List The following is a list of the parameter setting items to be set on a Web browser woe Reference Item Description Section This screen is displayed first when the URL of the Web server module is A Top page specified Monitors device data tag data logging data event historical data PLC diagnostics and self diagnostics Monitors device values Monitors tag data PLC diagnostics Monitors PLC CPU operation status monitor Self diagnostics Monitors Web server module operation status monitor Allows initial setting various function setting setting test etc for use of amp Administrative menu the Web server module Only the user with administrator authority can use this menu Makes the initial setting required for network connection Section D System setting Be sure to perform this setting to use the Web server module 4 6 3 7 Section Se Dial up setting Makes setting required for Internet connection 46 4
475. olumn Cannot be set by the user L Setting area Set by the user Dial up setting io Dial up setting Home gt Administrative mem gt Dial up setting Save Cancel Connection method File format C Modem ADSL DoPa Japan only Connection account User name MITSUBISHI 1 to 128 characters Password eae 1 to 128 characters Confirm password Tone Pulse Number of 3 times joint automatically Modem attribute Call function Disable Enable Disconnect function Disable Enable 5 minutes 1 to 30 The line is disconnected when there is no access request within the specified time limit App 24 App 24 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 2 Label Setting Label Description Set value requirement MODEM tafcuerico ames ADSL Dopa Japan only DOPA 1 to 128 characters or E USERNAME User name 1 Blank 1 to 128 characters or PASSWORD Password 1 Blank io i S characters 0 to 9 P p NUMBER1 Phone number 1 selected at CMETHOD When ADSL is selected at Blank CMETHOD 1 to 20 Applicable When YES is selected at characters 0 to 9 P p CHANGEPOINT NUMBER2 Phone number 2 When NO is selected at CHANGEPOINT f 7 1 to 20 Applicable When YES is selected at characters 0 to 9 P p CHANGEPOINT NUMBER3 Phone number 3 When NO is selected at Blank CHANGEPOINT When MODEM is DMETHOD Dial method ee la metod ICMETAOD
476. ommunication route was added as a setting Access target CPU setting tem Section 4 6 7 e A change was made to make the default operation setting Bit 1 of Switch 2 valid for IP filter setting Section 4 7 e The logging monitor setting Bit 4 of Switch 2 was added Intelligent function module switch setting Continued on the next page App 11 App 11 APPENDIX MELSEC Q From the previous page Reference Added Changed Function Description Section e The following items were added 1 Open file button 2 The Points pull down menu was added to the graph display e Achange was made to automatically set the upper and lower scale Logging monitor values Section 6 2 3 e Achange was made not to display the last update time of the file in the file specifying field When it is desired to display the last update P 7 the file make logging monitor setting Refer to Section 4 7 2 Self diagnostics monitor e This monitor screen was added Section 6 2 6 e The Execute at high speed radio button was added to the f Tag setting Section 6 3 3 sampling setting e The following setting items were added 1 The Same as the tag sampling interval radio button was added to Timing Logging setting 2 Condition for Start and Condition for Stop Section 6 4 4 3 Saved file names e The following setting items were changed 1 Logging specification Time Interval was changed to Timing e The following setting items we
477. on Sample screen address http 192 168 3 3 USER SMPAUDEN HTM Sample screen for audio part Microsoft Internet Explorer 51 x THE MEE ATW BACANA YD AIH a eR gt OD Qer Gam Grr 3a awm A PELAW http 192 168 33 user smpaudenhtm x erm 1 ak Sample screen for audio part G PF Lok WSAudio started D 125 4 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 4 Precaution for using the audio parts a Applet size The icons are displayed in the entire applet area 1 When displaying the status icons Specify values larger than the following for the applet size width 20 height 20 Note that when the width is less than 200 a space for error code display may not be sufficient in the event of an error If this occurs increase the applet size 2 When not displaying the status icons Specify the following values for the applet size width 0 height 0 Note that the functions shown below are not available in this case e Instruction of play pause by mouse e Error code display in the event of an error Restrictions on use of Microsoft VM 1 AU files only can be specified as audio files If a WAV file is specified an audio file format error OBO8h occurs 2 The parameter REPEAT cannot be specified It operates as REPEAT 1 Repeat Even if setting has been made it will be ignored 3 Specifying the same audio file name in multiple audio parts is not allowed If this happen
478. on 6 10 4 4 for execution of CSV export Transfer TAG CSV and COMPONENT CSV on ROM WWW USER CSV to the personal computer via FTP Refer to Section 6 7 1 for FTP Open TAG CSV on the spreadsheet software Display example of Microsoft EXCEL 2000 is shown on the left Change COMPNUM of TAG1 from 1 to 50 Save new TAG CSV over old TAG CSV in CSV format Display example of Microsoft EXCEL 2000 is shown on the left 6 112 6 FUNCTIONS From previous page E Microsoft Excel COMPONENT CSV AmE File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help 18 x Osha 6RY ten amp Er A BL Kt Me 10 eB Ue O A 2 B26 A B ic D E F G H T F 1 ITEM COMPNAME CPUNO DATATYPE DEVICE FORMAT DECIMALPLACES OPERATOR OPERAND J 2 COMPONENTI 1 power 1 1 SINGLE D500 DEC 0 NONE 3 4 z Id 41 gt PIN COMPONENT Ia i Ready NUM Ei Microsoft Excel COMPONENT CSV jolx File gdt view Insert Format Tools Data Window Help 218 x D ARY RBIF BE fh BAL ao lo aA ABT gt A B c D E F G H 1 1_ ITEM COMPNAME CPUNO DATATYPE DEVICE FORMAT DECIMAL PLACES OPERATOR OPERAND 2 COMPONENTI 1 power 1 1 SINGLE D500 DEC 0 NONE 3 COMPONENTI 2 power 2 1 SINGLE D501 DEC 0 NONE 4 COMPONENTI 3 power 3 1 SINGLE D502 DEC 0 NONE 5 COMPONENT1 4 power 4 1 SINGLE D503 DEC 0 NONE 6 COMPONENTI 5 power 1 SINGLE D504 DEC 0 NONE 7_ COMPONENTI 6 power 6 1 SINGLE D505 DEC 0 NONE 8 COMPONENT1 7
479. on method Modem ADSL Connection method es G 3 Connection account Access point Dial method Retry Calling timeout Dial pause time Modem attribute AT command additonal seting O CALL function C ee Disconnect function ern eee Required Not required 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 6 5 Account setting Setting Purpose a Set the user authentication account that will be confirmed when accessing the Web server module When accessing the Web server module the following user authentication screen Enter Network password screen appears Enter Network Password gt Please type your user name and password Enter the account set in the Account setting Site 192 168 3 3 Realm QJ7TWS96 User Name administratorO01 Password peenes M Save this password in your password list Cancel b The following access authorities are available for the user account Multiple access authorities can be selected for one account 1 Device write authority 2 Tag component write authority 3 Administrator authority Depending on the given access authority access to the Web server module is enabled as indicated below Access authority Access Normal user Device write Tag component Administrator 7k 1 authority write authority authority Access to monitor screen standard screen Ce a oe ao ees eee Access to user screen Read of logging
480. on off according to the completion status of the WFDEL instruction Normally completed Remains off Abnormally completed Turns on in the END processing of the scan where the WFDEL instruction is completed and turns off in the next END processing Operation at execution of WFDEL instruction When the WFDEL instruction is completed the completion device bit device set in D 0 turns on in the END processing of the completed scan and turns off in the next END processing When an error occurs the completion device set in D 1 turns on and an error code is stored into the completion status word device set in S 1 S S END S END S END equence program can processing can processing can processing eS ee El E ee EO F eee WFDEL instruction i i Instruction execution Completion device E E E E EE ET Completion device 1 f 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q Error When the dedicated instruction is abnormally completed the abnormal completion signal D 1 turns on and a corresponding error code is stored into the completion status S 1 Check the error status according to the error code and take corrective action Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code Program example Program with which the Web server module mounted in the position of I O numbers X Y00 to X Y1F deletes the ABCD BIN file in the CF USER directory when M30 is turned on M30 X0 K _ MOVP H
481. on the Web server module side 3M Plug type 8209 6009 Shell type 3702 2209 M2 6 Tyco Electronics AMP K K Plug type 747904 2 Shell type 747515 or 174469 2 Connector fitting screw M2 6 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 3 Function List The following is the function list of the Web server module vas Reference Function Description Section Section Device monitor Monitors device values EAA i f Section Tag data monitor Monitors tag data 6 2 2 Section Logging monitor Monitors logging data 603 Function Event history reas Section Monitors event histories 6 2 4 PLC diagnostics Section i 9 Monitors PLC CPU operation status monitor 6 2 5 Self diagnostics Section Monitors Web server module operation status monitor 6 2 6 Stores a set of device data of individual PLC CPUs on a network as a tag and Tag function collects those device data in tag unit Section 6 3 Collected data can be displayed in the Web browser Stores tag data as a CSV file in time series at the user specified execution Laoang undin timing by soning timing startsiop condition Seis na The stored file can be displayed in the Web browser or downloaded by FTP operation etc Monitors the PLC CPU status CPU monitor tag data tag monitor and time time interval monitor and stores the historical data of occurred events into Event monitor function Q gt V MBs i r Section 6 5 The stored files can be can be displayed in
482. onal computer D 10 20 31 1 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 2 IP filter setting Pass the IP packet that has not been set in Filter setting Block the IP packet that has not been set in Filter setting Pio ras Mag No 1 110 20 30 100 1 Block Pass No 2 110 20 30 0 fea C Block Pass 5 Precautions for IP filter setting a When using a mail server FTP server DHCP server DNS server or router do not set the IP addresses of these devices to Block If it is blocked communication with the corresponding device is disabled b When a proxy server exists on the LAN block the IP address of the proxy server When the IP packet from the proxy server is passed access to the Web server module can be made from any personal computer accessible to the proxy server independently of the other settings c When making access from a personal computer on the LAN to the Web server module do not use a proxy server POINT 1 After changing the settings make sure to click on the Save button The settings in IP filter setting are updated when the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset 2 Depending on the IP filter settings access to the Web server module may not be made In such a case make default operation setting by the switch setting of GX Developer and make the setting again Refer to Section 4 7 for the switch setting of GX Developer 4 SET
483. onding to the erroneous part Refer to Section 9 2 About error code 2 Module continue error Displayed as Continue in the table a The ERR LED turns on b When a module continue error occurs the functions of the Web server module will be maintained Taking corrective action according to the error code will rectify the operation However since the ERR LED remains on turn it off by Error clear request Y10 c The error code is stored into the buffer memory area corresponding to the erroneous part Refer to Section 9 2 About error code 3 Browser display Dedicated instruction error Displayed as Display in the table a The ERR LED does not turn on flicker does not change b When a browser display dedicated instruction error occurs the functions of the Web server module will be maintained c When a browser display dedicated instruction error occurs no error code is stored into the buffer memory 1 When a browser display dedicated instruction error occurs due to the Web browser operation The error code is displayed on the Web browser Displayed on the applet display screen etc 2 When a browser display dedicated instruction error occurs due to the dedicated instruction The error code is stored into Completion status TR BLE SH TIN ROURA eee MELSEC Q Table Error Code List Error bde Error name Error definition Corrective action Error type 0001h System error eSystemenor 1 e Check t
484. onent x1 The specified values are discarded when the logging name is reselected or the logging monitor screen is redisplayed 6 12 6 12 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC O 6 2 4 Event history monitor Setting Purpose This monitoring function displays the history of the events occurred in the Web server module and saved with the event monitor function Refer to Section 6 5 for the event function Start Procedure Monitor screen Event history monitor CPU event gt 1 1 gt Select Tag event as Event type Event history monitor Tag monitor 1 gt Select Time Interval event as Event type Event history monitor Time Interval event Setting screen El Event history monitor Home Monitor screen Event history monitor Event type Mawn Load Date Event number Status Tag name Component name Condition Trigger value Component value E mail sending 2002 11 28 20 30 52 1 Occurrence 02 production mngmt 01 product 100 100 None 2002 11 28 20 31 34 1 Occurrence 02 production mngmt 01 product 100 100 None 2002711728 20 32 16 1 Occurence 02 production mngmt 01 product 100 100 None 2002 1128 20 32 16 2 Occurence 02 production mngmt 02 product B gt 50 150 None Setting Item Event type Selects the event type Loads event history data 1 Event type Select the event type
485. onnection devices such as a modem cables and the line Button or other operation was performed before the complete screen was displayed e Check the tag setting Refer to Section 6 3 3 e Select the displayed monitor screen again and monitor the system e Restart the Web browser and monitor the system e Re examine the cable connection e From Tools Options on Microsoft InterDevTM 6 0 open the Option dialog box select Debugger General and unmark the Attach to execution program of this machine setting in the Java items e When Microsoft InterDevTM 6 0 has already been uninstalled reinstall it and perform the above operation e Check the statuses of the connection devices such as a modem cables and the line e After deleting the temporary Internet files of Internet Explorer try to connect again e Start operation after the screen display is completed 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC Q 4 Troubleshooting on device test and tag component test Symptom Check point The account without device write authority e Access using the account with device write Device test cannot be was used to access authority Refer to Section 4 6 5 conducted Cen l Device write disable status is ON YA is on e Enable Device write turns off YA e Access using the account with tag The account without tag component write authority was used to access Tag component test y Section 4 6 5 cann
486. or can be made undetected Refer to Section 4 7 for the switch setting of GX Developer 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 12 Removing Battery for Storage When storing the Web server module with no battery mounted make sure to perform shut down operation then power off the PLC and remove the battery Failure to observe the following procedure may cause erasure of logging data during processing corruption of data in the standard ROM drive Compact Flash card during access or a file system fault Removing procedure a b oO YS Mount the PLC CPU and Web server module on the base unit and power on Stop a file access Turn File access stop request Y2 from OFF to ON Confirm that file access has stopped File access status X2 is ON Power off the PLC Remove the battery from the Web server module File access stop request Y2 Operating Stopped V File access status X2 Power off the PLC and remove the battery 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 13 Returning the Web Server Module to the Default Setting The Web server module stores and manages the setting information logging data user HTML event history etc as files in the standard ROM The operation described in this section initializes the files stored in the Web server module to return the Web server module to the default setting In the module initialization mode
487. or code Tag event monitor 3 error code Tag event monitor 4 error code Tag event monitor 5 error code Tag event monitor 6 error code Section 3 8 15 Tag event i Tag event monitor 7 error code monitor status 2 Tag event monitor 8 error code Tag event monitor 9 error code Tag event monitor 10 error code Tag event monitor 11 error code Tag event monitor 12 error code Tag event monitor 13 error code Tag event monitor 14 error code Tag event monitor 15 error code Tag event monitor 16 error code ep DID IAIN JOJO IN INO JNO JIOIOININ IAINIINIO VIVIVIVIVIVIVIVIVIVIvVIVIvIvIvDIV CICicIcIjCcyjClCicIClcyciwclciscislheiye 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 jo jo LISIS J lt le Je Je J lt S J lt S J lt S Js Je S 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 JO O j o 2 ee ee ee ee ee eee ee ee ee 3 2 a ee S a a S ee a 3 3 2 32 2 a 2 2 2 32 2 2 3 13 13 13 3 33 13 3 3 3a 3 3 a a 38 O JO O JO JO JO JO JO JO O JO JO JO JO jo jo D gt 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 13 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 O JO O JO JO O JO JO JO O JO JO O JO jo jo S S S S S S S S JS S J JS JS S JS S f J l J2 eo Jo IN om ao JA Jo pm Ja OTe oO IN Iz Ig le je je je je g je je je S S S 18 S IS IS Ie Ie Ie Ie Ie la Ie Ie IS oO 10 o Jo Jo Jo Jo IS IR IR IR PR YS Ys Is Is TIT TT IT IT TST TT 1O 10 10 10 IO tO LW IO LO O O 190 jo jo Ja ja jo JO JO JO JO JO O JO JO JO O J
488. orage csccecceceeseeeeceeceeeeeeeaecaeeeeeeaesaecaeseeeeaecaesaeseeesaesaeseeseaesaesaeseesaeseeeneeeaeeaes 4 60 4 13 Returning the Web Server Module to the Default Setting ceceecceceeseeseeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeaeeaes 4 61 5 1 Network Connection through LAN cceccescecececceeeeeeeceeseeeeaecaeceeeeaesaecaeseaeeaesaesaeseaesaesaeseseaesaesaeseeeeateaes 5 1 5 1 1 Access procedure when using static IP address 00 ee eeeeeeeeeeeeteee eee eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeseaeseeeteeeteeetaes 5 1 5 1 2 Access procedure when obtaining IP address from DHCP Servet c ccescsseeeeeeeteeteeeeeeeteeeaes 5 4 5 2 Network Connection by Dial up Modem ADSL cecesceeeeeceseeececeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeaesaeseeeeeeeaeeaeeeeeeees 5 8 0 2 1 ACCESS PlOCOdUI sii arti eh hin ane eal eek ei eae eee 5 8 5 3 Operation for Returning to One to one CONNECTION ee eeeeecee eee eeeeeeee eee saeeeeeeseetaetaeeeseeseesaetaseeseenees 5 13 5 3 1 Procedure for returning to one to one CONNECTION 0 00 eeceeeeeeeceeeeteeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeteeeteeseeeteeeteeeteneteees 5 13 5 4 Network connection disconnection procedures for non continUOUS Connection 5 15 5 4 1 Network connection and disconnection methods and their combinations ee eeeeeeeeeeeee tees 5 15 5 4 2 Network Connection Disconnection Processing Using Sequence Program 5 18 6 FUNCTIONS 6 1 to 6 127 6 1 Function List of Web Server Module c ccecceceeseeeec
489. ort function Reads the CSV file of the standard ROM or Compact Flash card to the Web server module as the setting data on the data management screen Hereafter the CSV file created with the CSV export function is referred to as setting data file Web server a Spreadsheet software Export SR ee ee OO sottingcatatie Falting p CSV h a S Import 2 Precautions for use of the CSV export CSV import function a When editing the setting data file make sure that the setting data file was exported by CSV export function The user should not create a new setting data file b When executing the CSV import of the setting data file do as in the procedure given in 3 c While CSV export import is being executed on Data management do not switch power from ON to OFF reset the CPU module or perform operation in the administrative menu Performing any of the above operations can cause the setting data file to be corrupted or erased d To avoid the possibility of illegal data acquirement from the setting data file that contains the password and other data delete the setting data file from the standard ROM or Compact Flash card after the setting is completed 6 110 6 110 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 3 Operation procedure for CSV export import function Refer to the setting example in 4 for an entire sequence On Data management export the setting data to the CSV file setting data file
490. ory file in the case where a CPU event occurs Refer to Appendix 7 4 CPEN No of CPU events occurred per day TGES Size of data written to the event history file in the case where a tag event occurs Refer to Appendix 7 4 TGEN No of tag events occurred per day TMES Size of data written to the event history file in the case where a time interval event occurs Refer to Appendix 7 4 TMEN No of time interval events occurred per day FSS Size of data written to the file by FTP server function Refer to Appendix 7 6 FSN No of writes to the file by FTP server function per day Appendix 7 2 Size of data written to Compact Flash card The size of the data written to the Compact Flash card per day can be calculated as shown below ee Formula Size of data written to Compact Flash LS1 1024 x LN1 LSn 1024 x LNn card per day 1 2 3 WES 1024 x WFN ECS 1024 x FCN ESS 1024 x FSN Only the loggings which storage location is set to the Compact Flash card are counted x2 Round up the underlined parts to multiples of 512 Example When LSn 600 LSn 1024 x3 When writing data to a file data of 1024 bytes are generally rewritten due to file system update LSn Size of logging No n data written to the logging file at one time Refer to Appendix 7 3 LNn No of writes of logging No n per day Refer to Appendix 7 3 WFS Size of data written to the file using the
491. ot be conducted Device write disable status is ON YA is on e Enable Device write turns off YA Data write in the tag setting has been setto e Set Data write in the tag setting to Disable Enable Refer to Section 6 3 3 component write authority Refer to 5 Troubleshooting on user HTML x Refer to 3 in this section as well Check point The URL is not correct e Check the URL Created user HTML is The created user HTML is not stored e Store the created user HTML via FTP not displayed The applet size in the applet part is not e Specify the correct applet size correct The volume is not correct e Adjust the volume e Use a personal computer that has audio The audio part does not playback hardware playback hardware play sounds Other sounds cannot be played on the e Use a personal computer that is capable of personal computer being used audio replay A WAV format audio file was specified when e Specify an AU format audio file using Microsoft VM e Use Sun Microsystems Inc Java VM Display sounds does not change even after the tag component value falls within the The device value corresponding to the tag e Keep the device value corresponding to a component cannot be retained for a time tag component for a time longer than the longer than the tag collection interval and tag collection interval and communication communication time time in the sequence program specified range 9 TROUBL
492. outer Connecting through LAN or router was not p in the system setting Refer to Section selected in the system setting 4 6 3 When Register the above port No to the router s NAT was selected in the system f e Use the router compatible with UPnP setting the router is not compatible with UPnP Register the above port No to the router s 3 p e Set the NAT of the router manually Refer NAT was not selected in the system F to the router manual setting The information user name password for e Set to the router the information for connection to the Internet service provider connection to the Internet service provider was not set to the router Refer to the router manual 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING Web screen is not displayed Sounds are not replayed Web screen is not displayed properly Administrative menu screen is not displayed Devices are not monitored Display data are improper Tags are not monitored Display data are improper Monitoring stops during monitor operation Run time error occurred MELSEC Q 3 Troubleshooting on monitor display Symptom Check point The Web server module is not connected to the network correctly Java VM of Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 5 6 0 is not the version specified in the manual Setting was made to use Socks in the e Make setting not to use Socks in the Proxy Settings of Internet Explorer Proxy Settin
493. overlapped the audio file with the smaller number is played For parameter PLAYMODE 0 Stop Audio file to be played Audio 1 FILE1 WAV FILE2 WAV fet eae ee ee ee ae eo Audio 2 Ne FILE2 WAV 1 1 gt Since setting range 1 has priority Audio 1 is played FILE1 WAV Setti 1 Ae FILE2 WAV LOW2 Setting range 2 1 When the value enters the Audio 1 setting range during play of Audio 2 the Audio 2 play is stopped and Audio 1 is played 2 When the value goes out of the Audio 1 setting range within the Audio 2 setting range replay Audio 2 from the beginning 2 Parameter Description Setting Range Initial Value Sets the tag data for playing audio files using the tag setting 11064 ustoe set 1 4 M moe No Refer to Section 6 3 3 me Ueber SR Sets the component for playing audio files using the Must be set 1 4 M ELMNO component setting No Refer to Section 6 3 3 ee uS sel RANGENO 1 Sets the quantity in the setting range Must be set LOW1 Sets the minimum limit of the setting range 1 2147483648 Must be set to HIGH1 Sets the maximum limit of the setting range 1 2147483647 Must be set Sets the audio file WAV AU of setting range 1 When the component value is within setting range 1 the String eee Must be set audio file is played WAV AU The audio file shall be prepared by the user Sets whether the play of the audio file is to be repeated or REPEAT1 3 4 not
494. param name LEVCOLOR lt param name UPPERCOLOR lt param name LOWERCOLOR lt param name BKCOLOR lt param name UPPER lt param name LOWER lt param name UPPEREMER lt param name LOWEREMER lt param name DSPEMER lt param name DSPDATA lt param name DATWIDTH lt param name DSPCOLOR lt param name DSPBKCOLOR lt param name APLCOLOR lt applet gt lt body gt lt html gt c Storage of HTML file value 1 gt value 1 gt value 0 gt value Blue gt value Red gt value Red gt value White gt value 32767 gt value 32768 gt value 20000 gt value 20000 gt value 1 gt value 1 gt value 100 gt value Black gt value White gt value Gray gt Transfer the HTML file to the Web server module by performing FTP operation File storage destination ROM WWW USER SMPLVLEN HTM 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q d Sample screen display Display the sample screen Example When accessing the Web server module by one to one connection Sample screen address http 1 92 168 3 3 USER SMPLVLEN HTM 4 Sample screen for level display part Microsoft Internet Explorer BEE File Edit View Favorites Tools Help eo a lt B 3 B Back Stop Refresh Home Search Favorites History Mail Print Edit Discuss Address ja http 4 192 168 3 3 user SMPLVLEN HTM fi Go Links z A Sample screen for level display part 7865 EJ Done D
495. placed delete the temporary Internet files cache and then make access to the Web server module Refer to Section 6 2 7 1 for how to delete the temporary Internet files App 15 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 6 Setting Information File Formats This section explains the setting information file formats used for the CSV export import function When editing a setting information file using a spreadsheet software etc change the setting items according to the corresponding setting information file format indicated in this section Refer to Section 6 10 3 for the CSV export import function Appendix 6 1 Setting information file list and storage area 1 Setting information file list The following table lists the CSV exported imported setting information files Dial up setting Icpu csv sess target CPU setting FTP setting E mail setting Event setting Common setting Event setting Tag event setting IADDRESS CSV_ Address notification setting Account setting IP filter setting a When CSV export is executed all the above setting information files are exported to the standard ROM or Compact Flash card b When CSV import is executed all the above setting information files are imported from the standard ROM or Compact Flash card Note that when CSV import is executed all the above setting information files must exist If any one is lacking an error will result 2 Setting information file storage a
496. pleted 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION Error MELSEC Q 2 The name of the file transferred by the FTPPUT instruction is as follows For tag data TAGU CSV U indicates tag setting No For logging data current file File name set in the logging setting For logging data saved file Saved file name 3 When sending the logging data or user data file do not delete the target file until its transmission is completed A transmission error will occur if the target data i e the data to be sent is deleted before completion of transmission When deleting execute it after the completed device D 0 has turned on When the dedicated instruction is abnormally completed the abnormal completion signal D 1 turns on and a corresponding error code is stored into the completion status S 1 Check the error status according to the error code and take corrective action Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code Program example Program with which the Web server module mounted in the position of I O numbers X Y00 to X Y1F transfers PUT logging data to the FTP server when M21 is turned on M21 x0 m MOVP H480 D20 WOVP KI D22 MOVP K3 D23 DMOVP HO D24 ZP FTPPUT uo D20 W2 M2 Wa a li a a E Logging data transfer clock data setting required Transfer destination No 1 Logging No 3 Logging history No latest 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q 8 4 FTPGET Instruction
497. ponse detected Failed to detect the UPnP router An error response was received from the UPnP router e Check whether the UPnP router is powered on e Check the cable connected to up to the UPnP router e Confirm that the router supports UPnP e Check whether the UPnP router is connected to WAN Internet Continue Continue e Power on the Web server module when the UPnP router is ready 034Fh systemerror System error 1 IP filter setting file fault The IP filter setting file does not exist or is corrupted e After initializing the module refer to Section 4 13 make IP filter setting refer to Section 4 6 6 again 036th Systemerror System error 1 0400h Standard ROM format error Data cannot be written to the standard ROM The standard ROM has no free space e Delete unnecessary files by FTP operation and re execute Continue Refer to Section 6 7 040th h ra oe error e System error 1 Stop o402h 0430h CF card absence error The CF card has not been set e Set the CF card and re execute Display e Delete unnecessary files on the 0431h 0432h 0433h 0435h CSV export error Import file error Label error Out of range error The CF card does not have sufficient free space or is corrupted There are not all CSV files necessary for import or there is a file that cannot be read The label that must be set does not exist The item value is o
498. r Duplicate high speed logging specification error 0A14h OAAOh OBOOh Parameter error Communication part error No setting error Type check error No file error File download error Incomplete parameter setting error Audio error Not occurs when using Microsoft VM The high speed sampling tag is already set The component of other than the access target CPU setting No 1 exists in the high speed sampling tag The high speed logging is already set The parameter setting of the user part is incorrect No communication part is provided or a applet part is described before a communication part Tag monitor was displayed with no tag setting or logging monitor was displayed with no logging setting The data type of the component specified in the user part is incorrect The logging file does not exist or the event history file does not exist An error occurred during downloading of the file The parameters that must be set in the user part have not been set There is no audio replay hardware or hardware does not respond e System error 1 e After deleting the already set high Displa speed sampling tag set it again pay e Check the component setting Displ Refer to Section 6 3 3 PE e After deleting the already set Displ high speed logging set it again SPAY e Check the parameter setting of Display the user part e Describe only one communication part in
499. r component Continue outside the range ii setting Continued on the next page 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC Q From the previous page Error code y The number of device points is e Check the CPU in the access A 0083h Device point error Continue abnormal path ak MOR EENI e Check the CPU in the access 0084h Write size error The write size is abnormal ath Continue path The link parameters are e Re set the link parameters for 0085h Link parameter error Continue destroyed PLC CPUs on the access route 0087h 0088h System error e System error 1 Continue 0089h A request disabled during RUN e Check the CPU in the access 00D2h RUN time disable error Continue time was issued path 00D4h System error System error 41 Receive data length The receive data length or byte e Check the cables connected on i 00D7h Continue error length is outside the range the access route The communication procedure is e Check the cables connected on 00D8h Protocol error Continue improper the access route e Check the CPU in the access 00D9h Address error The address is abnormal ath Continue D x e Check the CPU in the access OODBh Write error Data cannot be written th Continue path e Check the station No setting in The specified station No does not Station No error the access target CPU setting Continue exist Refer to Section 4 6 7 S e Check PLC
500. r connection to the Internet sign up with the Internet service provider is required in advance b The Web server module can be connected to an ADSL line via a UPnP compatible broadband router 1 By merely connecting the Web server module to an ADSL line it can be connected to the network without taking account of the NAT setting of the router 2 Inthe environment where a global IP address is dynamically assigned the Web server module can obtain the global IP address from the router and notify the client of the address Example Using ADSL modem router type UPnP compatible Using the router type ADSL modem a single ADSL line can be shared with the personal computer etc Using the security functions e g firewall and VPN of the router prevents illegal entrance from external networks NAS Web server module Internet Client ADSL Telephone line ADSL modem Exchange station ISP i Router type UPnP compatible Poe Sees ccc eee Stee Shee et Local IP address UPnP communication i global IP address obtaining NAT setting qs Global IP address 1 10 1 10 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 13 Seamless access beyond network hierarchies Using the Web server module as a gateway the statuses of the PLC CPUs connected hierarchically with Ethernet MELSECNET H and or CC Link can be monitored and those data can be collected 14 High capacity and backup memor
501. r interrupt programs As the user data file a file in the CF USER directory of the Compact Flash card can be specified The execution and normal abnormal completion statuses of the FTPPUT instruction can be confirmed using the completion device D 0 and completion status indication flag D 1 a Completion device D 0 This device turns on in the END processing of the scan for which the FTPPUT instruction is completed and turns off in the next END processing b Completion status indication flag D 1 This device turns on off according to the completion status of the FTPPUT instruction Normally completed Remains off Abnormally completed Turns on in the END processing of the scan where the FTPPUT instruction is completed and turns off in the next END processing Operation at execution of FTPPUT instruction 1 When the FTPPUT instruction is completed the completion device bit device set in D 0 turns on in the END processing of the completed scan and turns off in the next END processing When an error occurs the completion device set in D 1 turns on and an error code is stored into the ee status word Saige set in S Sequence program Scan eat Scan bossy Scan Scan eid ea A ae a awa a Ae ed FTPPUT instruction f Instruction execution Completion device Te E AE e rte oh A i a e ER ne EA Teli aa tas See eh ay Completiondevice 1 J 41 When abnormally com
502. r name screen Doves wt 1 administrator001 Set Set Set No specification j user002 Set Set Notset USERJtoppage tra j user003 Not set Set Notset USERJtoppage htm Setting item Description Selects the account eaa e eE No to be edited or deleted Username The user name is The user name is displayed The validity of the device write tag component write administrator authority of Access authority the account is displayed The initial screen address for access to the Web server module is displayed Initial screen 7k For Not specified the top page of the standard screen is displayed Edits the selected account Deletes the selected account Important 1 After completion of initial setting make sure to register at least one account with administrator authority and then connect to the network 2 Make sure to delete the default account to prevent illegal access 3 The remote password function of the QCPU is not used for the web server module POINT When access to the Web server module cannot be made e g the registered account has been forgotten make the default setting by the switch setting of GX Developer and make the account setting again Refer to Section 4 7 for the switch setting of GX Developer 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 2 Edit screen Register the account Setting screen te Account setting Home gt Administrative mem gt Account settin
503. r than start up or setting raiolo standard ROM or CF card upaate the fotowing was e Check the CF card Refer to Continue detected Section 9 1 9 e Failed to create a directory At start up or setting update the following was detected e When When the number of saved files exceeds the above set value Stop has been set in the logging setting logging was stopped since the set number of ea e Delete logging files by FTP operation refer to Section 6 7 or LOGDEL instruction refer to Section 8 7 Excessive number of saved files was reached saved logging files At other than start up or setting error update the following was detected e When When the number of saved files exceeds the above Continue set value Stop has been set in the logging setting logging was stopped since the set number of saved files was reached The queue for e mail or FTP e Reduce the frequency of e mail 0616h Send queue error eo ite Continue transmission has become full or FTP transmission eer e Remove causes of the module Processing is not available since a 0617h Module stop error stop error and reset the CPU Stop module stop error is on module Continued on the next page 9 25 9 25 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC Q From the previous page Error code Setting update time out error Device name error File access stopped error No CF card error Since the module load is too high the time
504. r to use the Web server module 2 Section 3 5 list the items of setting made from the Web browser After confirming the descriptions of the setting items set the parameters according to the detailed explanation sections d How to check whether the Web server module is faulty or not Section 4 8 describes the self diagnostic function of the Web server module e How to check the connection with the external device for a fault Section 6 11 describes how to conduct the PING test e mail transmission test file transfer test etc 3 Functions of the Web server module Chapter 6 describes the functions of the Web server module 4 How to create user original HTML screens Chapter 7 describes the Mitsubishi supplied parts that can be used on user created HTML screens 5 Error check and corrective action Chapter 9 provides the troubleshooting how to check the error code and error code list 6 Enhancement of the Web server module functions Appendix 5 describes the enhancement of the Web server module functions A 21 A 21 Generic Terms and Abbreviations Unless otherwise specified this manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations to explain the QJ71WS96 Web server module Generic Term Abbreviation Description Generic term for A1NCPU AOJ2HCPU A1SCPU A1SCPU S1 A1SHCPU A1SJCPU A1SJHCPU A2CCPU A2CJCPU A2NCPU A2NCPU S1 A2SCPU A2SCPU S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU S1 A1FXCPU A2ACPU A2ACPU S1 A2UCPU
505. ra ype Dev Dipy im open Op C 1 product amount 01 ControlCPU Single word DO Decimal decimal places None 2 Click on the Update button on the Setting update screen to update the setting 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q b Creation of HTML file File name Smprdsen htm The HTML source is indicated below lt DOCTYPE html PUBLIC W3C DTD HTML 4 01 Transitional EN gt lt html gt lt head gt lt meta http equiv Content Type content text html charset iso 8859 1 gt lt meta http equiv Pragma content no cache gt lt title gt Sample screen for SSI read part lt title gt lt head gt lt body gt lt h1 gt Sample screen for SSI read part lt h1 gt lt exec cgi WSReadS cgi TAGNO 1 ELMNO 1 MODE 0 gt is lt exec cgi WSReadS cgi TAGNO 1 ELMNO 1 MODE 1 gt now lt body gt lt html gt c Storage of HTML file Transfer the HTML file to the Web server module by performing FTP operation File storage destination ROM WWW USER Smprdsen htm d Sample screen display Display the sample screen Example When accessing the Web server module by one to one connection Sample screen address http 1 92 168 3 3 USER Smprdsen htm Z Sample screen for SSI read part Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help El a O N Ala MeS Ilp Sm E Back Stop Refresh Home Search Favorites Media Histo Mail Prit Edt
506. racters comment characters Component type that can Single word Double word Real number be specified An error occurs when String is specified Device setting value 3 Up to 5 graphics may be registered range quantity Displayed items TAGNO Font size FONTSIZE ELMNO _ No of setting ranges RANGENO Default comment Comment 1 Comment 2 Comment 3 Comment 4 Comment 5 DEFCMT CMT1 CMT2 CMT3 CMT4 CMT5 DEFCOLOR Gorter COLOR2 COLOR3 COLOR4 ao l Operating 000 gt Fault 1 Fault 2 Fault 3 Fault 4 Fault 5 Display form 7 1 BKCOLOR HIGH1 HIGH2 HIGH3 HIGH4 HIGH5 t i i bi aid Range 1 Range 2 Range 3 Range 4 Range 5 LOW1 4 LOW2 4 LOW3 4 LOW4 4 LOW5 4 When the component value falls within the setting range set comment is displayed When the component value is out of the setting range a comment is displayed x1 If the setting ranges overlap the graphic having the setting range of the lower number is displayed Displayed comments HIGH2 p 5 Comment 1 Fault 2 Fault 1 es ault RIGHI gee ears the ea lt Comment 2 m Because set Fault 2 cwte2 range 1 has m Fault 1 priority comment LOWI eat ete e aa J 1 is displayed Fault 2 LOQW2 Atesos J Set range 2 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Parameter Setting Range Initial Value Sets the tag data for comment display using the tag setting No TAGNO a Ss AE ONE ne 11064 Must be set Refer to Sect
507. ransfer M25 XO D70 clock data setting unnecessary D72 Transfer source No 1 D86 File name M10 M10 MII O ee 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q 8 5 TAG Instruction A tag collection command is issued with this command A tag collection is triggered Applicable device Settin Internal devi ave Special Index nternal device ecia 9 File MELSECNET I 0 Constant data System User module register Others register Direct Ji 3 Haar foe Shee ee ee ee Oh oe OO a Se Instruction Execution code condition Command TAG JTL Command TAG aes Setting data Setting data Setting side 1 Data type Head I O signal of the module Un 00 to FE The first 2 digits when the I O signal is represented in User BIN16bit 3 digits Device Head number of the device that stores the control data User System Head number of the bit device that will be turned on for one scan when the instruction is normally completed ue System Bit D 1 also turns on when the instruction is abnormally completed The local devices and the file registers for individual programs do not work as the devices for the setting data 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q Control data i Setting Setting side Device Item Setting data range 1 S 0 systemaea o TT The status of the instruction completion is stored Completion 0 Normal completion Other than 0 Abno
508. rd Authentication Protocol This authentic method is used for the PPP connection POP3 is an abbreviation for Post Office Protocol Ver 3 This protocol is designed to transfer e mail received by the mail server to the local computer This system performs user authentication with the POP server when e mail is sent PPP is an abbreviation for Point to Point Protocol This protocol is used for one to one computer connection SMTP is an abbreviation for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol This protocol is designed to transfer e mail SSI is an abbreviation for Server Side Include This technology replaces the part described in SSI format with the server side processing result when the server returns HTML to the client iw E Z gt a U gt U U O U o O oO n 4 U n Tag is a data table in which data components required to make access to the device data of the PLC CPUs on the network are set as one UPnP is an abbreviation for Universal Plug and Play This standard is stipulated to easily connect the personal computer peripheral device etc connected to the Internet Packing List The following table indicates the products that comprise the Web server module Model Name Product Name Quantity QJ71WS96 QJ71WS96 Web server module 1 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 1 OVERVIEW This manual provides the specifications preparatory procedures functions troubleshooting etc of the MELSEC Q Series QJ71WS9
509. re added 1 Send to was added to Mail setting for event occurrence 2 Disconnect from the network after sending mail was added to Mail setting for event occurrence e The following setting items were changed 1 The No of CPU event historical data was changed from 16 to 64 2 The No of tag event historical data was changed from 16 to 256 f Event setting 3 From the common setting E mail destination specification were Secon eos moved to the CPU event setting Tag event setting and Time Interval event setting The number of e mail destinations was changed from Within 3 common destinations to Within 16 destinations for each event setting screen 4 Achange was made to enter the Trigger value Restoration value of the tag event setting according to the data type e The Notify the global IP address obtained from the router radio button was added e Use the default HTTP port number 80 was changed to Notify the HTTP port number set in the System setting screen f at Mee f e Notify an IP address at dial up was changed to Notify an IP Sedin edot E mail notification setting address At network connection ection 6 9 2 2 e Option setting was added FTP notification setting e Notify an IP address at dial up was changed to Notify an IP Section 6 9 2 3 address at network connection Data management e CSV export CSV import was added Section 6 10 4 Continued on the next page Address notification setting
510. rea As the setting information file storage area select either the standard ROM or Compact Flash card when executing CSV export import When CSV export is executed the setting information files are exported to the selected storage area When CSV import is executed the setting information files are imported from the selected storage place Storage area selection Setting information file storage area When Standard ROM is selected ROM WWW USER CSV When Compact Flash card is selected CF USER CSV App 16 App 16 APPENDIX MELSEC O Appendix 6 2 Setting information file formats and editing precautions This section explains the setting information file formats and editing precautions The examples given in this section assume that setting information files are displayed on a spreadsheet program 1 Setting information file formats There are two different setting information file formats one consisting of a label column and setting area and the other consisting of a label column item row and setting area a Format consisting of label column and setting area Description NWTYPE IPTYPE IPADDRESS SUBNET GATEWAY File format EDEVICE STARTUP YES E Setting area Set by the user For the setting items of each file refer to Appendix 6 3 and later Label column Cannot be set by the user Cannot be edited SYSTEM CSV DIALUP CSV EMAIL CSV EVENT CSV ADDRESS CSV IPFILTER Applicable file
511. reset Back Cancel Discards the changed setting and returns to the tag event setting screen Select tag event setting Loads the parameters of the No selected in tag event setting No and displays them on the No and click on Load Edit screen 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q a Tag name 1 Set the tag name to be monitored 2 Select the tag name set in the tag setting Refer to Section 6 3 3 for the tag setting 3 The Tag name drop down list displays the setting No and tag names of the tag setting b Component name 1 Set the component name to be monitored Except the component of which data type is String 2 Select the component name set in Component setting of the tag setting Refer to Section 6 3 3 for the tag setting 3 The Component name drop down list displays the setting No and component names of the component setting x When the component is displayed in the exponential form a rounding error is produced in the range outside the number of digits set in the number of decimal places Note that setting components in exponential form in the tag event setting may cause incorrect event detection Example When Exponential and 4 are respectively set to Display form and Number of decimal places for a component When the device value is 123456 the component value will be 1 2346E 05 When the device value is 123464 the component value will be 1 2346E 05
512. result according to the ERR LED status ERR LED status CH1 self loopback test result Off Completed b When the test is completed set the mode to Online in Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module of GX Developer and reset the PLC CPU Switch 1 0000 c When the test has failed conduct the CH1 self loopback test again If an error occurs again a possible cause is the hardware fault of the Web server module Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 8 2 CH2 self loopback test Conduct a self loopback test to check a hardware including the communication function of the CH2 RS 232 interface of the Web server module 1 Operation mode setting for Web server module a In Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module of GX Developer set the mode CH2 Self loopback test Switch 1 0003H b Write the PLC parameters to the PLC CPU 2 Execution of CH2 self loopback test a Connect the cable to the CH2 as shown below b Set the PLC CPU to a STOP status Reset the PLC CPU After the PLC CPU is reset the following CH2 self loopback test is executed automatically This test repeats data communication and checks the consistency between the send data and receive data During the test the ERR LED flickers and the CH2 SD RD is on a a oO Se L
513. ring a file by a sequence program Refer to Section 8 4 for details of the FTPGET instruction Instruction Create control data in D70 and later Transferred ZP FTPGET U0 D70 M10 M10 M11 Processing after transfer completion M11 I __ Processing after transfer failure 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 Instruction execution timing Network connection processing File transfer a Network connection status X4 se FTPGET instruction FTPGET instruction completion Completion Failure device l i When abnormally FTPGET instruction completion r a completed device 1 a The Web server module is connected to the network When the module is not connected to the network it is automatically connected during execution of the FTPGET instruction and disconnected after completion of the instruction b The FTPGET instruction is executed The file specified by the FTPGET instruction is transferred from the FTP server c When file transfer from the FTP server is completed the FTPGET instruction completion device turns on When the completion device 1 turns on failed an error code is stored into the completion status S1 1 area of the control data Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code 3 Sample program The following is a program in which the Web server module mounted in the position of I O number X Y00 to X Y1F transfers GET the user data file DATA CSV
514. rk No start I O address and station No to be coexistence network aes fe accessed when specifying other station communication route Edits the selected access target CPU Deletes the selected access target CPU 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 2 Edit screen Register the access target CPU Setting screen 5 Access target CPU setting Home gt Administrative mem gt Access target CPU setting gt Edit screen Save Back Load Access target CPU No foz zl CPU name process A within 16 characters PLC series QCPU Q mode Multiple CPU specification No specification 7 Other station specification No specification Other Station Single network Other Station Different network Network communication route Network NET OG CC Link C Ethernet C24 Network No fi Network No on the communication route Start I O bi Start I O of source station Station No fi Destination station No Different network communication route etwork NET 10 H CC Link Ethernet C24 n the communication route Setting item Item Description PU name PLC series Multiple CPU specification Other station specification ets whether other station is specified or not Network communication Sets the network network No start I O address and station No to be accessed when other route coexistence network rey ce station is specified communication route Save
515. rk administrator person who plans the network and manages the IP address before setting the FTP port number b Register the above port No to the router s NAT When this setting is valid the packet sent to the FTP port number 1 of the router s WAN side Internet side is transferred to the FTP port number 1 of the Web server module Refer to 2 in this section for NAT x1 Port number set in the FTP server setting Refer to 5 a in this section 6 System name setting Set the system name used for the following Up to 32 characters e Title of the standard screen Title bar of the Web browser e Name of the e mail sender Refer to Appendix 4 5 for the characters available for the system name 7 Network diagnosis setting Set whether network diagnoses ping will be executed or not a Execute network diagnoses ping When this setting is valid a Ping packet 1 packet is sent periodically to diagnose the network When no response is given from the destination within 20 seconds a retry is made once If there is still no response after that an error is reported Network diagnoses are continuously executed during network connection while X4 is ON When this setting is valid set the sending interval and destination b Sending interval 10 to 3600s Set the sending interval of a Ping packet When setting take account of the load on the network c Destination Select the destination of the Ping pack
516. rk for non continuous connection h E mail main text 1 Enter the main text of e mail 0 to 256 characters 2 Refer to Appendix 4 5 for the characters applicable to the e mail main text i Attached file 1 Select the file attached to e mail None Tag data Logging Data 2 When attaching tag data select the tag data set in the tag setting Refer to Section 6 3 3 for the tag setting 3 When attaching logging data select the logging data set in the logging setting Refer to Section 6 4 4 for the logging setting j Send to 1 to 16 1 Select the destination of e mail 2 Select the e mail address set in the E mail address TO setting of the E mail setting Refer to Section 6 6 3 for the E mail setting 3 In the selection field for Send to the setting No and e mail address of the E mail address TO setting are displayed After changing the settings make sure to click on the Save button The settings are updated when the Update button on the Setting update screen is clicked the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 Time Interval event setting Make setting to monitor the time interval Up to 16 time interval event settings are available Time Interval event setting screen ent setting gt Time Interval event setting Time Interval event setting Edit Delete A o Ean O Arrio fte wi Time specification 17 00 00
517. rmal completion Error code 2 status Turn on the bit corresponding to the No of which tag data will be collected by the TAG instruction 0 Tag data are not collected 1 Tag data are collected by the TAG instruction Tag setting No S 2 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 S 3 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 J 19 18 17 S 4 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 S 5 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 1 The setting side is as follows e User Data are set by the user before execution of the dedicated instruction e System The execution result of the dedicated instruction is stored by the PLC CPU x2 Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code Function 1 The command is issued to the specified tag to collect data refresh 2 Regardless of the Sampling setting in the tag setting the tag data of the No set in S 2 to S 5 are collected However the tag set to Execute at high speed cannot be specified An error will occur if the high speed sampling tag is specified 3 Executing the same instruction during execution
518. rned on for one scan when the instruction is normally completed ue System Bit D 1 also turns on when the instruction is abnormally completed The local devices and the file registers for individual programs do not work as the devices for the setting data 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q Control data i Setting Setting side Device Item Setting data range 1 S 0 systemaea o TT The status of the instruction completion is stored Completion 0 Normal completion Other than 0 Abnormal completion Error code 2 status Turn on the bit corresponding to the No for which logging will be performed by the LOG instruction 0 Logging is not performed 1 Logging is performed by the LOG instruction Logging setting No S 2 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bd b4 b3 b2 bi bO 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Logging specification S 3 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 S 4 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b7 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 40 38 37 36 35 34 S 5 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b7 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 56 54 53 52 51 50 1 The setting side is as follows e User Data are set by the user before execution of the dedicated instruction e System The execution result of the dedicated
519. roduction mngmt within 16 characters Sampling C Not execute Execute Interval 10 seconds 1 to 32767 C Execute at high speed Interval x100 milliseconds 1 to 600 I Update before logging Data write Disable Enable Component setting No 1 Component setting No Ea Makes communication roar path setting on the ee atewo E Number of characters Fa to 32 Access target CPU Doo setting Display fom Decimal Number of decimal places D 0 to 6 within 16 characters Operator None E 6 3 2 Setting procedure for tag function The setting procedure for using the tag function is given below Completed Create a network environment for Web server module Refer to to access the Web server module from a personal Section 4 6 computer Make access target CPU setting on the Access target Refer to CPU setting Section 4 6 7 Set a tag on the Tag setting Refer to Section 6 3 3 Monitor the set tag on the Tag data monitor Refer to Section 6 2 2 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 6 3 3 Tag setting Setting Purpose 1 In the tag setting set a tag On the Edit screen Tag setting set the tag name tag collecting interval etc 2 In the component setting set components for each tag On the Edit screen Component setting set the access target CPU data type device etc Start Procedure
520. ror of the access target CPU occurs Access target 2 When this turns on an error code is stored into the access target CPU setting status CPU error area buffer memory 4000 to 4071 3 Turns off when Error clear request Y10 is turned on 1 Turns on when an e mail transmission error occurs E mail 2 When this turns on an error code is stored into the e mail transmission status area transmission error buffer memory 5000 to 5984 3 Turns off when Error clear request Y10 is turned on 1 Turns on when an FTP transfer error occurs 2 When this turns on an error code is stored into the following area of the buffer memory a Error related to FTP transfer PUT FTP client status PUT area buffer memory FTP transfer error 6002 to 6553 b Error related to FTP transfer GET FTP client status GET area buffer memory 8002 to 8553 3 Turns off when Error clear request Y10 is turned on 1 Turns on when network connection fails 2 When this turns on an error code is stored into the connection error code area buffer memory 30 3 Turns off when Error clear request Y10 is turned on Connection error 1 Turns on when an error not corresponding to X11 to X19 occurs 2 When this turns on the error code is stored into the error log area buffer memory 150 Other error to 247 3 Turns off when Error clear request Y10 is turned on Only when the module continue error occurs Watch dog timer f Turns on whe
521. rosoft Excel Comma Separated Values File 10 21703 4 14 PM X TIMEEVT CSV 191 bytes Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values File 10 21 03 4 14 PM User QJ71WS96 D Intenet Personal computer side CEN L a File Edt View Go Favorites Help Ea x D amp o x Up Cut Copp Paste Undo Delete Properties Address 1 C AWINDOWS Desktop temp E Name Size Type Modified X COMPONENT CSY 1KB Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values File 10 21 03 4 14 PM SG Tag csv 1KB Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values Fie 10 21 03 4 14 PM 1 abject s selected 124 bytes My Computer GS File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help Osea 46RyY s BA o B fe BLES Mb amp 100 Blo e Bl O A 2 as J A B Cc D F G H P 1 ITEM TAGNAME SAMPLING INTERVAL BEFORE LOGGING WRITE COMPNUM 5 2 TAG1 block A EXECUTE 10 NO ENABLE 1 3 4 z ld 4 gt ANTAG K iT Ready NUM BB Microsoft Excel Tag csv Jor File Edt View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help 18 x Osea 46hyY sBad o fe AES MH 10 Bl B Or A 2 G2 gt 50 A B C D E F G H tal 1 ITEM TAGNAME SAMPLING INTERVAL BEFORE LOGGING WRITE COMPNUM 2 TAG1 block A EXECUTE 10 NO ENABLE En 3 4 z ld lt i gt INTAG Ia i Ready NUM l To next page 6 112 1 3 MELSEC Q On Data management export the setting data file to the standard ROM Refer to Secti
522. router e Use the default HTTP port number 80 e Use the default FTP port number 21 e System name QU71WS96 e Do not execute network diagnoses ping e Automatic connection to network at start up 2 NAT is shown below Conversion table 202 200 10 3 80 202 200 10 3 80 The packet addressed to 202 200 10 3 80 is y sent after conversion of the address into 192 168 3 3 80 192 163 3 3 80 by the router 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 6 4 Dial up setting Setting Purpose Make the setting required for the Web server module to connect to the Internet Start Procedure Administrative menu gt Dial up setting Setting Screen fe Dial up setting Save Cancel Connection method C Modem ADSL C DoPa Japan only Home gt Administrative mem gt Dial up setting Connection account User name MITSUBISHI 1 to 128 characters Password as 1 to 128 characters Phone number 1 e Phone number 2 E Phone number 3 EE Communication speed E 600 zj Calling timeout 30 Seconds 90 to 180 Dial pause time B sec onds 1 to 30 AT command additional setting 0 to 64 characters Call function Disable Enable Disconnect function Disable Enable J5 minutes 1 to 30 The line is disconnected when there is no access request within the specified time limit Setting Item Connection method Sets the connecting method of the Web server module Connec
523. rresponding C24 Generic term for QU71C24N QU71C24N R2 QU71C24N R4 QU71C24 and QJ71C24 R2 Q series corresponding E71 Abbreviation for QU71E71 100 QU71E71 B5 or QU71E71 B2 UC24 Abbreviation for AJ71UC24 A1SJ71UC24 R2 A1SJ71UC24 R4 A1SJ71UC24 PRF A1SJ71C024 R2 A1SJ71024 R4 A1SJ71024 PRF A1SCPUC24 R2 A2CCPUC24 and A2CCPUC24 PRF Web browser Term for software used to locate and display Web pages Web server module Abbreviation for QU71WS96 Web server module Computer link module serial communication module Generic term for UC24 QC24 N and Q series corresponding C24 Described as a serial communication module when specifying QC24 N or Q series corresponding C24 Switch setting Abbreviation for intelligent function module switch setting Personal computer Abbreviation for IBM PC AT or compatible DOS V based personal computer Meanings and Definitions of Terms The following table indicates the meanings and definitions of the terms used in the manual of the Web server module ADSL is an abbreviation for Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line This service enables high speed data communication using the existing analog telephone line CGI is an abbreviation for Common Gateway Interface This technology starts the program on the server and displays the execution result of the program on the Web browser CHAP is an abbreviation for Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol This
524. rror Gucaavenee The PLC CPU is in a stop error status or cannot communicate with y the target PLC CPU e g network error 1 In the QCPU Q mode function version A QCPU A mode QnACPU and ACPU a warning STOP does not occur when the PLC CPU is stopped with a continue error A system error occurs f E mail sending The e mail transmission status due to event occurrence is displayed Noe sd E mail transmission has not set for the event that occurred Sendin E mail is being sent according to the setting for the event that g occurred Complete E mail was sent according to the setting for the event that occurred ERR h can Since an error occurred e mail transmission failed indicates the error code 3 Tag event The tag event history is monitored The contents of ROM WWW EVENT TAGWATCH CSV are displayed Event type Tag event x Load a c d e f 9 h i 4 t t 4 Date Event number Status Tag name Component name Condition Trigger value Component value E mail sending 2002 1128 20 30 52 1 Occurrence 02 production mngmt 01 product A 100 100 None 2002 11728 20 31 34 1 Occurence 02 production mngmt 01 product A 100 100 None 2002 11 28 20 32 16 1 Occurence 02 production mngmt 01 product 100 100 None 2002 1128 20 32 16 2 Occurrence 02 production mngmt 02 product B gt 50 150 None
525. rror error code 0002h is displayed on the Web server module Event setting Refer to Section 6 5 3 When the display form of the component is set to Exponential in the tag event setting a rounding error is produced in the range outside the number of digits set in the number of decimal places Hence when the exponential form component is set in the tag event setting an event may not be detected correctly Refer to Section 6 5 3 3 for the tag event setting Access log function Refer to Section 6 8 Though several login records may be registered for one login it is not an error and means that several logins have been executed internally Data management function Refer to Section 6 10 a Backup Do not alter the backup data Using the altered backup data can cause the module to fail or malfunction b Restore The setting information file of the product with first 5 digits of serial No 05111 or earlier can be restored to the product with first 5 digits of serial No 05112 or later However the setting information file of the product with first 5 digits of serial No 05112 or later cannot be restored to the product with first 5 digits of serial No 05111 or earlier CSV export import function Refer to Section 6 10 3 a When editing the setting information file be sure to use the CSV exported setting information file The user should not create a new setting information file b CSV import the setting information file
526. ry monitor Section 7 2 13 Displays a monitor screen in the same display form as in PLC diagnostics monitor p ay pay Section paie the PLC diagnostics monitor of the standard screen 79414 Refer to Section 6 2 5 for the PLC diagnostics monitor Displays a monitor screen in the same display form as in Self diagnostics monitor parts UniMon class the self diagnostics monitor of the standard screen Refer to Section 6 2 6 for the self diagnostics monitor Section 7 2 15 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 2 1 Method of Describing Applet Parts in HTML This section explains how to describe the applet parts Java applets in HTML Describe applet tags in the location within HTML where the applet parts to be displayed as shown below lt applet code WSCom class codebase PARTS width 0 height 0 gt lt param name INTERVAL value setting value gt 1 Communication Part lt applet gt 2 Applet Parts lt applet code file name codebase PARTS width width height height gt a 2 D 1 2 3 lt param name parameter name value setting value gt 6 7 8 lt param name parameter name value setting value gt lt applet gt 9 1 Communication part This part is designed to integrate the communications of the applet parts in the Web browser to make batch communication When using the applet parts make sure t
527. s a same file specification error OBO9h will occur 4 When the computer does not have any audio playback hardware or when the audio file is corrupted no error can be detected No error occurs Audio file encoding method Only the audio files encoded in the PCM format can be played This module does not support the compression technology such as ADPCM Audio file size Audio files of 1MB or less only can be played If an audio file which size exceeds 1MB is specified an audio file format error OBO8h will occur Number of audio files When using multiple audio parts up to 32 audio files can be specified 1 If more than 32 audio files have been specified an audio file format error OBO8h will occur 2 x1 When more than one Web browser has been activated the total number of all audio files is limited to the maximum of 32 x2 No error may occur when using Microsoft VM however it may not function properly 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 2 7 Historical graph display parts The logging data are displayed in a time series line graph Up to 100 pieces of logging data can be displayed The latest logged data is displayed at the right end At the rightmost end of the graph new data is automatically added every time logging is performed Old data is erased 1 Specifications gemme pussies ooo class Number of graph lines _ of graph lines lUptoSgraphiines ee to 5 graph lines Component
528. s an e mail when M20 is turned on M20 XO MOVP H1080 DO Main text included logging data attached clock data setting required MOVP KI D2 Destination No 1 MOVP K5 D3 Logging No 5 DMOVP HO D4 Logging history No latest MOVP K6 D8 Sending data length MOVP K2 Dg Subject length MOVP TEST D100 Subject details MOVP TESTMAIL D102 Main text details ZP WMSEND U0 DO D100 MO MO MP EE ee ee eee 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q 8 3 FTPPUT Instruction A file is transferred PUT from the Web server module to the FTP server with this instruction Applicable device Settin Internal d eee aa Special Index nternal device ecia g File MELSECNET 10 p j Constant data System User raa module register Others register Direct J i a Bt re eats KH s Sa PS Ao ES Cao ae a oa 0 Instruction Execution code condition Command FTPPUT Z FTPPUT Comm FTPPUT f ZP FTPPUT Setting data Setting data Setting side 1 Data type Head I O signal of the module Un 00 to FE The first 2 digits when the I O signal is represented in User BIN16bit 3 digits Device Oo Head number of the device that stores the control data User System ee name Head number of the bit device that will be turned on for one scan when the instruction is normally completed se System Bit D 1 also turns on when the instruction is abnormally completed The local
529. s follows Component name 1 Component name 2 Component name 3 CR LF Component value 1 Component value 2 Component value 3 CR LF Example Product A Product B Product C CR LF 100 350 50 CR LF c The e mail is received by the personal computer Example In the case of Microsoft Corporation s Outlook Express 5 5 Time Event 2002 11 12 10 26 15 OF x File Edit View Tools Message Help amp amp Wm g gS xX a F E3 Reply Reply All Forward Print Delete Previous Next Addresses From QJ71 WS96 Date Tuesday November 12 2002 10 27 AM To OW ae ee oe Subject Time Event 2002 11 12 10 26 15 Attach line1 CS 1 40 KB Time Interval monitoring Main text set on the Time interval event setting within the Event setting zi 6 FUNCTIONS 6 7 FTP Function MELSEC Q The FTP function is designed to transfer a file between the Web server module and external device The FTP function has the FTP server function and FTP client function 6 7 1 FTP server function 1 About FTP server function From the external device FTP client the file stored in the Web server module can be read and written PLC CPU Web server module FTP ro rA data oe Read Download TTT lt Write Upload e LLECELLECEELE 2 Account when FTP server access is made a When access is made from FTP to the Web server module the account set in the account se
530. s not included 3 Confirmation of hardware test result a Check the hardware test result according to the ERR LED status ERR LED status Hardware test result o Completed On Failed b When the test is completed set the mode to Online in Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module of GX Developer and reset the PLC CPU Switch 1 0000 c When the test has failed conduct the hardware test again If an error occurs again a possible cause is the hardware fault of the Web server module Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 9 Setting Removal of Compact Flash Card and Precautions for Use This section describes how to set or remove the Compact Flash card and precautions for use h 4 9 1 Precautions for using Compact Flash card This section explains precautions for use of the Compact Flash card 1 Precautions for removal or replacement of Compact Flash card a Be sure to stop file access before removing or replacing the Compact Flash card Refer to Section 4 9 2 b Failure to observe the procedures indicated in Section 4 9 2 may result in erasure of logging data during processing corruption of data in the Compact Flash card during access or a file system fault c If a Compact Flash card fault has occurred refer to Section 9 1
531. s of the access sources and the actions of the IP filter Up to 32 filter settings can be made a IP address Set the IP address of the IP filter target 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q b Mask bit length Set the valid bit length of the set IP address Setting range 1 to 32 c Action Set the action pass block to be taken when the received IP packet meets the filter setting condition Example When the IP address is set to 210 99 88 00 the action becomes valid in the following IP address range IP address Mask bit length IP address range where access is blocked 210 99 00 00 to 210 99 255 255 210 99 88 00 Block 2 210 99 88 00 to 210 99 88 255 3 IP filter operation a The IP filter is executed in ascending order of the filter setting numbers b When the received IP packet meets the filter setting condition the action pass block is executed for the received IP packet c When the received IP packet does not meet all filter setting conditions the action pass block set in the access setting is executed IP packet received Does IP packet meet the condition of filter setting No 1 Action Block YE S X Block Does IP packet meet the condition of filter setting No 2 Action Pass YES O Pass Does IP packet meet the condition of filter setting No 32 Action Block YE S X Block Is the condition of access setting Block
532. s set as the access target CPU setting No 1 2 Operation status The operation status and switch information of the PLC CPU are displayed 3 Error status The current error status and the time of error occurrence are displayed 4 Error history The history of up to 16 errors is displayed 5 Details The details error code No error message etc of the error are displayed Error information Details x No po Error message JUNKPARAERROR Date pozni Time fsm Common error information Drive Progam memey File name PARAM OPA Individual error information Nothing Close Warming Applet Window 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 6 2 6 Self diagnostics monitor Setting Purpose Self diagnostics monitor monitors the LED status and error status of the Web server module Start Procedure Monitor screen gt Self diagnostics monitor Setting Screen AI Self diagnostics monitor Home gt Monitor screen gt Self diagnostics monitor LED status RUN B ERROR W Stop monitor Error status Clear error status No Present error Date Time 0615 Excessive number of saved logging files error 2003 10 09 20 40 10 Error history Clear error history No Error message Date Time E mail sending not possible 2003 10 09 20 37 14 0615 Excessive number of saved logging files error 2003 10 09 20 39 34 Setting Item Clear error status Error history Clear
533. s the settings Savel The settings are updated when the Update button on the Setting update screen is clicked the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset Back Cancel Discards the changed setting and returns to the Access target CPU setting screen Select access target CPU Loads the parameters of the No selected in access target CPU setting No and displays setting No and click on them on the Edit screen a CPU name within 16 characters 1 Specify the CPU name of the access target CPU 2 When performing device monitor tag setting etc specify the CPU name set in this setting 3 Refer to Appendix 4 5 for the characters applicable to the CPU name b PLC series QCPU Q mode QCPU A mode QnACPU ACPU Set the PLC series of the access target CPU c Multiple CPU specification No choice mode CPU No 1 to 4 When the access target CPU is in a multiple CPU system set the CPU No When No choice mode has been set access is made to the control CPU 4 42 4 42 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q d Other station specification Set whether other station is specified or not 1 No specification Select this setting when making access to the host CPU 2 Other station Single network Select this setting when making access to the other station CPU via one type of network such as only MELSECNET 10 or only Ethernet or via a network consisting of multi layer system
534. saeseeseaeeaeeeseeeeateaes 3 5 3 FUNCTION LISt eron nn r a de eee end deine e a aa Weve eeeele 3 6 3 4 Dedicated Instruction Lists eraarstina eseina aenea AN aik aE TAa NE eNA A AA aa E ARM aA Na AA NAN UA NE ANARA AAA ENN 3 7 3 5 Web Browser Setting Item List 00 0 ccccccceseseeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeceeeeaesaecaeeaeeeaecaecaeesaseaesaesaeeeaesaeeaesaeeaesaeeneeeateaes 3 8 3 6 I O Signals for PEC CPU sesicsecicczscatececeseiaceracatececaactaerscetecaeantace racetacaecaagerasetaeneccganastastiaetecnscseaaastaser sense 3 9 BB VO SIGH AS MS tes peg chu ctcet aes cdg Se ech pec od she cnedd buen ade shh steed beenede sa chidh Qeaaaia hastied beneetd destichineeta da divietess 3 9 3 62 VO Signals detailS c2sc cirttn ela teal in ean eed oe 3 11 3 7 BUTEM memory lis Garia a sSieeasta AA Aea AE AAEE IARA ERE TA adel Mises de th seeds Marea resis 3 17 3 8 Buffer memory details seeen mairina iiri ir Ar Ae Arei aR rE i NE 3 31 3 8 1 Module status area Address 0 to 11 eeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeenaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaaeeatenas 3 31 3 8 2 Network connection status area Address 28 to 69 sessssesssesssssissrsrsrrsinsinstnsrnsinsrnnrnnrnsrnnnnnnn 3 31 3 8 3 System setting status area Address 70 to 86 ccecceceeseseeceseeeceeceeeeeeeaecaeceeeeaesaesaeseeeeaeeaeseeeataes 3 33 3 8 4 Dial up setting status area Address 90 to 134 ee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeteeeseeeseeeseeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeetets 3 33 3 8 5 Current error
535. seconds 0 to 32767 Tag event setting Ne a after 0 econds 0 to 32767 C Time Interval event setting No E after 0 seconds 0 to 32767 Stop at the specified time 00 E 00 RA 00 E chour minute second Saved file setting File capacity Specification for number of lines 1000 Lines 1 to 10000 For high speed logging 100 to 10000 Size specification 1 __ KB 1 to 512 For high sp to 512 C Time specification 0 E 00 A 00A caay Saved file name M Add the name specified at File name M Add the date M Add the time Number of saved files 100 1 to 1000 When the number of saved files exceeds the above set value Overwrite Delete the oldest file and keep on logging C Stop Stop logging External storage setting E mail delivery M Send a saved file to the following e mail address 2 Do notsend 7 3 Do notsend oO File transfer C Transfer a saved file to the following FTP server 1 Do nottranster Setting Item Sets the tag to be logged logging file name and the location where the logging file will be saved Sets the file capacity number of saved files and operation performed when the number of saved files exceeds the set value External storage setting Sets whether or not the saved file will be sent by E mail or transfered Saves the setting Logging setting Saved file setting The settings are updated when the Update button on the Setting
536. set in the component setting as shown below Datatype _ Data length Single word 1to 18 n Depends on the specified device value display form Double word 1 to 47 C a Sa aR a 1 to 32 Depends on the specified number of characters Example When anormal logging setting is made to collect 64 components whose data and operator specification type is Single word LSn 19 1 18 1 x 64 1 1237 bytes LSn Size of logging No n data written to the logging file at one time LNn No of writes of logging No n per day LTn Operating time seconds of logging No n per day In the case of constant operation LTn 86400 INTn Logging cycle seconds For the high speed logging the unit needs to be changed from milliseconds to seconds Example For the interval of 100 milliseconds INTn 0 1 seconds TAGL Character string length of tag data Appendix 7 4 Size of data written to event history file The size of data written to the event history file can be obtained from the following ee er rr CPES Data character string length 19 Event number 2 Status 11 CPU name 1 to 16 Operation status 12 E mail sending 8 Comma Line feed 7 TGES Data character string length 19 Event number 2 Status 11 Tag name 1 to 16 Size of data written to event history file Component name 1 to 16 Condition 2 Trigger value 1 to 47 Component value 1 to 47 E mail
537. setting No eee other than the above is Blank eee at APPEND When LOGGING is selected at ioei Logging setting APPEND APPLOGGING eure re When other than the above is Blank selected at APPEND EE Destination 1 to selected at When NO is selected at EMAIL _ Blank Must be set x Need not be set Invalid 1 Specify the tag setting No set to the label of TAG CSV An error will occur if the specified tag setting No does not exist in TAG CSV x2 Specify the component setting No set to the label of COMPONENT CSV An error will occur if the specified component setting No does not exist in COMPONENT CSV x3 An error will occur if the data type of the specified component setting No is String 4 Refer to Appendix 6 2 2 for the precautions for editing the e mail main text 5 Specify the e mail address To setting No set to the label of EMAIL CSV An error will occur if the specified e mail address To setting No does not exist in EMAIL CSV App 51 App 51 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 6 14 TIMEEVT CSV Event setting Time Interval event setting 1 File format Filename frimeevT csv File contents Event setting Time Interval event setting Refer to Section 6 5 3 INTERVAL EMAIL DISCONNECT TiMeevTi TIME 000000 ves es INTERVAL z0 ves o TIMEEVT14 INTERVAL 3600 YES TIMEEVT16 TIME PER 00 00 NO BODY APPEND It s time to start operation NONE Specified time el
538. sing Operation at execution of LOG instruction When the LOG instruction is completed the completion device bit device set in D 0 turns on in the END processing of the completed scan and turns off in the next END processing When an error occurs the completion device set in D 1 turns on and an error code is stored into the completion status word device set in S 1 s S RE ae as equence program can processing can processing Scan processing a OO LOG instruction Instruction execution i i Completion device p Completion device 1 PRE SE a A EAE an Can A Ee SE E A Mes wy 9 Sta grees eae eee Ee anc en ye oh Ph Error When the dedicated instruction is abnormally completed the abnormal completion signal D 1 turns on and a corresponding error code is stored into the completion status S 1 Check the error status according to the error code and take corrective action Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code Program example Program with which the Web server module mounted in the position of I O numbers X Y00 to X Y1F logs one record of the logging data set in S 2 to S 5 when M23 is turned on N23 xo Executes logging setting m MOVP H43 D52 No 1 2 7 ZP LOG U0 D50 M6 Me E E E 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q 8 7 LOGDEL Instruction The saved file of logging data is deleted with this instruction Applicable device j MELSECNET H Setting Int
539. sk Personal computer IP address 192 168 10 1 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Start y Mount the Web server module to slot 0 of the base unit and power the PLC ON y Connect the Web server module to the personal computer with a crossing cable On the following screens from the Administrative menu make network setting of the Web server module System setting Account setting Power the PLC OFF and connect the Web server module to LAN y Power the PLC ON The Web server module is automatically linked to the network at start up y Start a Web browser on the computer and access the Web server module y Monitor device data on the Device monitor screen Completed For PC s network setting for one to one connection refer to Section 4 5 1 Network setting of Web server module For LAN connection refer to Section 4 4 1 2 Network connection of Web server module 3 Access to Web server module For device monitor refer to Section 6 2 1 5 CONNECTING WEB SERVER MODULE TO NETWORK MELSEC Q 1 Network setting of Web server module a Make setting to connect the Web server module to the network b From the Administrative menu set as follows For other than the following settings the default values will be used Administrative menu System setting Refer to 1 gt Account setting Refer to 2 1 Sys
540. soft Corporation s Internet Explorer 5 5 Tools gt Internet Options lt Advanced gt tab General Security Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings O Always expand ALT text for images O Move system caret with focus selection changes Browsing Always send URLs as UTF 8 requires restart Automatically check for Internet Explorer updates Close unused folders in History and Favorites requires restart Disable script debugging Display a notification about every script error Enable folder view for FTP sites Enable Install On Demand Enable offline items to be synchronized on a schedule Enable page transitions Notify when downloads complete Reuse windows for launching shortcuts Show friendly HTTP error messages HES eOee oft Restore Defaults Cancel 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 Precautions for executing the device test tag component test a The device test tag component test may affect the control of the PLC CPU Ensure safety before execution Example When the device test is executed Device test 100 will be written to device DO Is it OK to proceed Caution Control of the PLC may change Ensure safety before execution Yes No Warming Applet Window b A user without device write tag component write authority is not allowed to conduct the device test tag component test When the device test tag component test is attempted the following scr
541. sseessessseessteeseenseen App 63 Appendix 7 3 Size of data written to logging file eeeseeceeeceeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeaecaeeeeeaesaeeeeesaeeaesaeseeesentaes App 64 Appendix 7 4 Size of data written to event history file ceccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeaeeeseeesaeeaeeaeeeeeeaeeaes App 64 Appendix 7 5 Size for file writing by dedicated instruction c ccecceceeceeseeeeceeceeeeeceeeeeeaeeaeseseeeeaeeaes App 65 Appendix 7 6 Size of data written to file by FTP server function 0 ecceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeteteneeaeeaes App 65 Appendix 8 Transportation Precautions ceeceeeceeseeneeeneeeneeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeesaeeeaeeeaeeaeesaeeeaeeeaeeseeeeaeenas App 66 Appendix 8 1 Target models of regulations ce eceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeesaeenaeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaaeeas App 66 Appendix 8 2 Transport Quidelines esrar eira an u EEA e ERER ENAREN EREKE EN EEA E ERER AES App 66 INDEX Index 1 to Index 3 Compliance with the EMC and Low Voltage Directives When incorporating the Mitsubishi PLC into other machinery or equipment and keeping compliance with the EMC and low voltage directives refer to Chapter 3 EMC Directives and Low Voltage Directives of the User s Manual Hardware included with the CPU module or base unit used The CE logo is printed on the rating plate of the PLC indicating compliance with the EMC and low voltage directives For information on compliance with the EMC and low voltage directi
542. ssion by PLC CPU This section explains the WMSEND instruction used to send e mail with a sequence program 1 2 3 4 HH ZP WMISEND Un S1 S2 D I Web server module Subject Main text _ 7 Mail server Destination No Tag Logging No File name eee 6 Attached file Tag logging data user data file BIN CSV Control data Transmission destination No tag logging No file name etc Set a destination e mail address preset in the e mail setting an attached tag logging data or user data file etc Head I O number of Web server module Transmission data Subject main text Character data set in the sequence program are used Since character data is not converted into the ASCII text format set them as ASCII characters in the sequence program Completed bit Main text of e mail Character data set in the sequence program are used Since character data is not converted into the ASCII text format set them as ASCII characters in the sequence program The following binary coded data is handled as control codes ODOAH Linefeed code CR LF 00H End of main text Attached file Tag data logging data user data file 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 1 E mail transmission by sequence program The following explains the method for sending e mail by a sequence program Refer to Section 8 2 for details of the WMSEND instruction
543. st has abnormally completed confirm the error definition and take corrective action according to the error code E mail sending test result 2002411129 14 30 49 E mail address T0 ei a Complete ERR 0000 when normally completed The test mail was sent At the target destination confirm that the test mail has been received Back E mail sending test result 2002 11 29 11 52 34 E mail address To sada me Failed ERR 0815H When abnormally The test mail could not be sent Check that the e mail completed setting and SMTP server operation are correct and then execute the e mail send test again Back 6 123 6 123 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 E mail is received by the personal computer The e mail form sent by the Web server module is as indicated below Subject Test Date Example Test 2002 07 22 10 09 15 Main text Same as in Subject Attached file Example In the case of Microsoft Corporation s Outlook Express 5 5 Test 2002 11 14 14 12 37 of x File Edit View Tools Message Help QW Be x a yy JES Reply Reply All Forward Print Delete Previous Next Addresses From QJ71WS96 Date Thursday November 14 2002 2 12 PM To ss amam om Subject Test 2002 11 14 14 12 37 Test 2002 11 14 14 12 37 6 124 6 124 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 3 File transfer test Conduct a file transfer test Setting Screen Home gt Administrative mem gt Setting test gt File tr
544. standard ROM erase execution times in the number of standard ROM erase area buffer memory 10 to 11 of the buffer memory When the standard ROM has been erased frequently take preventive measures e g stop logging or change storage place of the logging file to the Compact Flash card 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 6 5 Event Monitor Function 6 5 1 Event monitor function The event monitor function monitors the PLC CPU status CPU monitor tag data tag monitor and time time interval monitor and stores the historical data of occurred events into CSV files The stored files can be displayed in a Web browser or downloaded by FTP operation Also e mail can be sent as required when an event occurs 2 According to event setting Web server module performs monitoring External device Client 3 Displays event histrical data on the Event history monitor O Event setting Event history monitor n Event type Tag Component Condition Trigger ep yp name name value Tag event m Processal Pressure gt 120 Tag Component Toonaition Process A Waterievel gt 200 02 07 01 09 00 00 Occurrence Process A Water level gt 02 07 01 12 55 10 Occurrence Process A Pressure gt z ae 2 07 02 14 10 00 Occurrence Process AlTenpertre 1 Makes event setting using Web 02
545. stem error e System error 1 Sonne Display Stop Continue Continue The argument outside the range Out of range argument mien e Specify an argument in the 0700h was specified in the dedicated Display error correct range instruction The tag No logging No e mail address No or FTP transfer Invalid argument error destination No specified with the e Specify existing setting No Display argument in the dedicated n a O instruction does not exist The file specified in the dedicated No specified file error f e Specify the existing file Display instruction does not exist The queue for e mail or FTP has e Reduce the frequency of e mail 0704h Send queue full error haan Display become full or FTP transmission Incorrect file name The file name includes e Check the control data of the s 0705h Display error inapplicable characters dedicated instruction e Provide interlocks between the An attempt was made to access instructions that will access the the file being used by the other same file Display instruction e Change the access target file Simultaneous multiple access error name e Check whether the CF card has File open error Failed to create a file LS ERIRE Display e Check whether the USER folder of the CF card is write enabled The disk has run out of a free e Delete unnecessary files 070Ch Disk full Display area e Replace the CF card Read start positio
546. stored in the USER directory of the Web server module 4 Precautions for using the tag data monitor parts Be sure to specify the applet size with the following values Refer to Section 7 2 1 for how to describe the applet size Width Height Japanese LANGUAGE 0 6o 5o Engish LANGUAGE 1 coo so 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 2 12 Logging monitor parts A monitor screen having the same display form as in the logging monitor of the standard screen is displayed Refer to Section 6 2 3 for the logging monitor 1 Specifications LogMon class Display form Same as in the logging monitor of the standard screen 2 Parameter initial Value Decimal Sets the upper limit of the scale when a graph is displayed integer real number Automatic setting Decimal t Automatic Sets the lower limit of the scale when a graph is displayed integer real setting number Sets the number of display points on a graph Setting range 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000 10000 BKCOLOR Sets the background color Selects the display language LANGUAGE aps i g 1 English 0 Japanese 1 English 3 Sample screen for logging monitor part The sample screen Smplgmen htm is stored in the USER directory of the Web server module As indicated Automatic on the left setting 4 Precautions for using the logging monitor parts Be sure to specify the applet size with the following values
547. struction FTP client function Appendix 7 6 Size of data written to file by FTP server function The size of data written to the file by the FTP server function can be obtained from the following FSS Size of the file which transfer is specified on the FTP client side FSS Size of the file written by the FTP server function App 65 App 65 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 8 Transportation Precautions When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations Appendix 8 1 Target models of regulations The batteries for the Web server module are classified as follows Classification for Product name Model Product supply status transportation Non dangerous goods Appendix 8 2 Transport guidelines Comply with IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations IMDG code and the local transport regulations when transporting products after unpacking or repacking while Mitsubishi ships products with packages to comply with the transport regulations Please consult your carrier for further details App 66 App 66 INDEX Ind 1 Connection via analog modem 10BASE T 100BASE TX connection 4 90 Wawa aaas 2 2 2 5 4 10 4 23 4 28 4 31 CPU event Setting seses 6 54 A CSV export import function 6 110 About error coda aeara s 9 9 Access log function 5 itis erases ees 6 97 D Access target CPU setting cceeeee 4 41 Data block parts cecceceeeeeeeeeeee
548. t Display example of Microsoft EXCEL 2000 is shown on the left Transfer TAG CSV and COMPONENT CSV on the personal computer to ROM WWW USER CSV via FTP Refer to Section 6 7 1 for FTP 6 113 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q From previous page J CSV import Execute 10 On Data management import the setting data file Importing the setting information from CSV files from the standard ROM Standard ROM Refer to Section 6 10 4 5 for execution of CSV CompactFlash card t Import Status Update Displaying current data management execution status 2003 10 20 14 26 31 2003 10 20 14 26 32 Import completed Standard ROM E Ta ing Home gt Administrative mem gt Tag setting gt Component setting 11 On Tag setting confirm that the edited portions have been changed correctly Tag name in Component mene GPU maro Dae type Deis Dap fom Ope Op 1 None A o C 1 power 01 Control CPU Single word D500 Decimal 0 decimal places power 2 01 Control CPU Single word D501 Decimal 0 decimal places None power 3 01 Control CPU Single word D502 Decimal 0 decimal places None 01 Control CPU Single word D503 Decimal 0 decimal places None O1 ControlCPU Single word D504 Decimal 0 decimal places None 01 Control CPU Single word D505 Decimal 0 decimal places None 01 Control CPU Single word D506 Decimal 0 decimal places None 01 Control CPU Single word D507 Decimal 0 decimal places None
549. t lt meta http equiv Content Type content text html charset iso 8859 1 gt lt meta http equiv Pragma content no cache gt lt title gt Sample screen for audio part lt title gt lt head gt lt body gt lt hi gt Sample screen for audio part lt h1 gt lt Communication part gt lt applet code WSCom class codebase PARTS width 0 height 0 gt lt param name INTERVAL value 1 gt lt applet gt lt Audio part gt lt applet code WSAudio class codebase PARTS width 120 height 40 gt lt param name TAGNO value 1 gt lt param name ELMNO value 1 gt lt param name RANGENO value 1 gt lt param name LOW 1 value 32768 gt lt param name HIGH1 value 0 gt lt param name AUDIO1 value ALARM AU gt lt param name REPEAT1 value 1 gt lt param name PLAYMODE 1 value 0 gt lt param name STOPCOLOR value Black gt lt param name PLAYCOLOR value Red gt lt param name PAUSECOLOR value Black gt lt param name BKCOLOR value Gray gt lt param name LNCOLOR value Black gt lt applet gt lt body gt lt html gt c Storage of HTML file Transfer the HTML file to the Web server module by performing FTP operation File storage destination PROM WWW USER SMPAUDEN HTM 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION d MELSEC Q Sample screen display Display the sample screen Example When accessing the Web server module by one to one connecti
550. t button Access target CPU 01 Control CPU z 2 Click on the Test button to execute the access target CPU test 3 The access target CPU test result is displayed When the test has abnormally completed confirm the error definition and take corrective action according to the error code Access target CPU test result 2002 11 12 14 10 01 When QCPU Qi normally No specification lated Complete ERR 0000H compete Back Access target CPU test result 2002 11 12 14 15 47 CPU name CPU 1 siege QCPU Q mode CPU No No specification Fan ERR 48004 Back 6 122 6 122 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 E mail sending test Conduct an e mail sending test Setting Screen Home gt Administrative mem gt Setting test gt E mail sending test est PING test E mail sending test Send Select an e mail address and click on Send button E mail address To 01 Se Tee ed z Setting Item Item Description E mail address TO Sets the destination e mail address Conducts an e mail sending test Test execution Conduct an e mail sending test 1 Select the destination e mail address set in the e mail setting E mail sending test Send Select an e mail address and click on Send button E mail address To 01 oe as ad z 2 Click on the Send button to execute the e mail sending test 3 The e mail sending test result is displayed When the te
551. t Executes the device test a CPU name The CPU name on which the device test will be performed is displayed b Device 1 Specify the device type and actual device number 2 Device specification by qualification indexing digit specification bit specification for word device is not available c Data type Select the data type of the value to be set Bit Set in bit unit Enabled when bit device is used 16 bit integer Set as a 16 bit integer Enabled when word device is used 32 bit integer Set as a 32 bit double word integer Enabled when word device is used d Input form Select the input form when the data type is a 16 bit integer or 32 bit integer DEC Set in decimal HEX Set in hexadecimal 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q e Setting value 1 When setting the data type as a 16 bit integer or 32 bit integer set a new value in accordance with the DEC HEX input form 2 When setting the data type in bit set ON OFF POINT 1 The device test may affect the control of the PLC Ensure safety before execution Device test 100 will be written to device DO Is it OK to proceed Caution Control of the PLC may change Ensure safety before execution Yes No Warning Applet Window 2 A user without the device write authority is not allowed to conduct the device test When the device test is attempted the following screen appears Device monitor No write authority is i
552. t be made via Q Developer communication port UDP IP of Q series E71 series E71 on the target or relay station 11 Troubleshooting on file system Check point Web server module e A battery error has occurred j e When a battery error occurs replace the does not start up Refer to Section 4 10 battery Module READY X0 e During operation without battery the PLC e Restore the data in the following procedure does not turn on CPU was powered off with no shut down 4 Raturi the Webserver modulato the operation performed Logging data user Refer to Section 4 11 HTML etc are e The battery was disconnected with no shut destroyed down operation performed Refer to Section 4 12 default status Refer to Section 4 13 2 Restore backup data Refer to Section 6 10 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC Q 9 2 Error Codes This section explains the error code 9 2 1 About error code 1 Checking the ERR LED on the front of the Web server module Check the ERR LED on the front panel of the Web server module for an error On Module continue error has occurred Flicker Module stop error has occurred 2 Checking the error code in System monitor of GX Developer Refer to Section 9 2 2 When the ERR LED turns on or flickers check the error code in System monitor of GX Developer Confirm the error definition and take corrective action according to the error code Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code Th
553. t high speed Interval fi x100 mitliseconds 1 to 600 I Update before logging Data write Disable Enable Setting Item Sets the tag name within 16 characters Sets the collecting interval of the tag data Sets whether data can be written to the tag or not Saves the setting The settings are updated when the Update button on the Setting update screen is clicked the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset Back Cancel Discards the changed setting and returns to the Tag setting screen Select tag setting No Loads the parameters of the No selected in tag setting No and displays them on the Edit and click on Load screen a Tag name within 16 characters 1 Set the tag name 2 For tag data monitoring logging setting etc specify the tag name set in this setting 3 Refer to Appendix 4 5 for the characters applicable to the tag name b Sampling Select the tag collection method from among any of the following 1 to 3 and 4 1 Not execute 1 e Tag data are not collected e Select this item when executing tag collection with the dedicated instruction TAG or when making setting only and not executing tag collection 2 Execute Sampling interval 1 to 32767s 1 Tag data are collected once when the Web server module is started or the setting is updated and thereafter are collected at the specified interval 3 Execute at high speed S
554. t i T LB 1 Put your finger at the bottom of the LED cover and lift the LED cover open 2 When removing the Compact Flash card from the Web server module press the EJECT button to push the Compact Flash card out b Attach the Compact Flash card slot cover and close the LED cover 1 Attach the Compact Flash card slot cover When the Compact Flash card is not set attach the Compact Flash card slot cover 2 Lower the LED cover until it clicks 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 10 Mounting and Replacement of Battery This section explains the mounting and replacement of the battery 4 10 1 Battery specifications The following table provides the specifications of the battery for the Web server module _ o 3 0V Storage life Actual life of 5 years room temperature Total power failure time Refer to Section 4 10 3 For file protection 4 10 2 Mounting of battery At shipment the battery connector is not mounted to the battery of the Web server module Before using the Web server module connect the battery connector 1 Open the cover at the bottom of the Web server module 2 Confirm that the battery has been mounted correctly 3 Insert the connector attached to the battery to the connector pin on the case lt Battery connector Battery Important When operating the Web server module without the battery
555. t in S 1 END S END processing can processing END processing Scan Scan Sequence program When the dedicated instruction is abnormally completed the abnormal completion signal D 1 turns on and a corresponding error code is stored into the completion status S 1 Check the error status according to the error code and take corrective action Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code Program with which the Web server module mounted in the position of I O numbers X Y00 to X Y1F collects the data of the tags set in S 2 to S 5 when M22 is turned on Collects tag data of tag setting No 1 2 7 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q 8 6 LOG Instruction A logging command is issued with this command A logging is triggered Applicable device j MELSECNET H Setting Internal device Special Index File MELSECNET I 0 Constant data System User module register Others register Direct Ji 3 Haar Poe Shee ee A es cae A a mC ee E ne et eee Instruction Execution code condition Command LOG Command LOG f Setting data Setting data Setting side 1 Data type Head I O signal of the module Un 00 to FE The first 2 digits when the I O signal is represented in User BIN16bit 3 digits Device Head number of the device that stores the control data User System Head number of the bit device that will be tu
556. t in the parameter DIRECTION Display pattern Vertical display Horizontal display DIRECTION 0 DIRECTION 1 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Parameter Setting Range Initial Value Sets the tag data for level display using the setting No Refer to TAGNO ae eau AEA 1to64 Must be set Section 6 3 3 Sets the component for level display using the component setting f 1 to 64 Must be set No Refer to Section 6 3 3 DIRECTION Sets the alsplay direction of ine evel 0 1 0 Vertical 0 Vertical display 1 Horizontal displa displa LEVCOLOR Sets the filling color of the level display Sets the filling color in the case where the maximum alarm value is UPPERCOLOR 3 String exceeded Sets the filling color in the case where the minimum alarm value is LOWERCOLOR 3 String exceeded Sets the background color of the level display White Sets the maximum limit value 32767 Sets the minimum limit value E T 32768 ets the maximum alarm value 2147483647 32767 ets the minimum alarm value 32768 Sets whether the alarm line will be displayed or not 0 Not 0 Not displayed 1 Displayed f displayed Sets whether the current value display box will be displayed or not 0 Not 0 Not displayed 1 Displayed displayed APLCOLOR Sets the background color undrawn area of the Java applet 3 Sample screen for level display part The following provides an example of creating the sample screen that displays t
557. t monitor error turns on 0 No tag event monitor error occurred 1 Tag event monitor error occurred b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO Address 10128 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 2 1 10129 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 19 18 17 10130 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 10131 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 10132 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 10133 96 95 94 82 81 10134 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 10135 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 10136 144 143 142 141 140 139 138 137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130 129 10137 160 159 158 157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 149 148 147 146 145 10138 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 169 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 10139 192 191 190 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 179 178 177 10140 208 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 10141 224 223 222 221 220 219 218 217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 209 10142 240 239 238 237 236 235 234 233 232 231 230 229 226 225 10143 256 255 254 253 252 251 250 249 248 247 246 245 244 243 242 241 PECIFICATION eae MELSEC Q c The following is observed when a tag event monitor error occurs Example When an error occurs in tag event mo
558. t set Set Not set Send Logging data 01 process A c 3 Setting Item Displays the CPU event interval Displays the CPU event conditions E mail sending Displays Whether e mail will be sent or not upon event occurrence Attached file Displays the details of the attached file to e mail Edits the selected CPU event Deletes the selected CPU event 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Edit screen pp Event setting Home gt Administrative mem gt Event setting gt CPU event setting Edit screen Common setting CPU event setting Tag event setting Time nterval event setting CPU event settingledi Save Back Load CPU event setting No far gt CPU name for Control CPU x Interval 6 seconds 1 to 86400 Condition M Normal STOP I Normal RUN D Warning STOP D Warning RUN I PAUSE I System error Mail setting for event occurrence I Send an e mail when an event occurs M Disconnect from the network after sending mail E mail main text Attached fil None Tag data 01 line 1 Logging data 0 Send to E mail address To E mail address To 09 O ements eg E 02 AEE E m 10 E 03 briibp m p E 11 E 04 E 12 ki 05 E 13 E 06 E 14 07 E 15 E 08 E 16 Setting Item Mail setting for event l 3 Makes setting when sending e mail at event occurrence occurrence Saves the setting Save The sett
559. ta attached clock data setting required MOVP KI D2 Destination No 1 MOVP K5 D3 Logging No 5 DMOVP HO D4 Logging history No latest MOVP K6 D8 Sending data length MOVP K2 Dg Subject length MOVP TEST D100 Subject details MOVP TESTMAIL D102 Main text details ZP WMSEND U0 DO D100 MO MO Mi r 1 Normal processing i Mi geese Sosy Sees tess ae a Pe Abnormal processing i L 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC O 4 Receiving e mail by personal computer a The e mail sent by the Web server module is received by the personal computer b The e mail format used by the Web server module is as follows E mail address From E mail address of the Web server module Subject set in the control data of the dedicated instruction 1 to Subject 373 words Main text set in the control data of the dedicated instruction 0 to Main text 960 words Tag data TAGLJ CSV L indicates the tag setting No Attached file name Logging Data File name set in the Logging setting CSV User data file User data file name BIN CSV Attached file data gt 1 Tag data logging data user data file Attached file capacity Maximum 512k bytes x1 The CSV format file of the tag data is as follows Component name 1 Component name 2 Component name 3 CR LF Component value 1 Component value 2 Component value 3 CR LF Example Product A Product B Product C CR LF
560. ta to be written DMOVP HOFFFFFFFF D124 File position wove KO D126 Number of columns specification wovP KO D127 Word unit MOVP ABCD D128 File name MOVP H100 D140 Written data MOVP H302 D141 Written data ZP WFWRITE U0 D120 D140 M12 M12 M13 a aR E a n E a 1 Normal processing i M13 ia icici aes lt a cto alec ainin seats mgt 4 PW Abnormal processing i 2 Program with which the Web server module mounted in the position of I O numbers X Y00 to X Y1F creates 2 word data 0100H and 0302 as a 2 column CSV format file with a file name ABCD CSV in the CF USER directory when M27 is turned on H100 D150 Execution type o D152 Number of data to be written HO D154 File position Ko D156 Number of columns specification KO D157 Word unit ABCD D158 File name H100 D170 Written data H302 D171 Written data D170 M14 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q 8 9 WFREAD Instruction The user data file of the Compact Flash card is read to the device data of the PLC CPU Applicable device Settin Internal d eei Special Index nternal device ecial 9 File MELSECNE Tl 0 p i Constant data System User module register Others register Direct J 4 a Bt re Eek werd eS a a Instruction Execution code condition Command WFREAD _ Z WFREAD Command WFREAD c ZP WFREAD Setting data Setting data Setting side 1 Data type Head I O signal of the modul
561. teeteeeeeeeeees 7 6 Access target CPU test 6 122 Data management s es 6 115 Accessible devices and ranges App 2 Data management function eee 6 107 ACCOUNT setting cceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeseeeeeteeeenees 4 32 Dedicated instruction list ccseeeeees 3 7 8 1 Address notification function cccceeeeee 6 99 Device MONITON eeeeeseeeeeeeeessesreeeees 6 2 7 41 Address notification setting eee 6 100 Device test cain ies 6 4 ADS seek ac nt eee atthe ena hee a A 23 DHCP Aaah hnw a A 23 ADSL connection time s es 3 18 Diagnostics function 6 120 Applet 0f la re 7 3 Dial Up setting 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeeeeees 3 18 4 27 Applicable characters and ASCII code Directory structure App 6 table by setting items eee eeeeeeeeteeeee App 8 Disconnect parts 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeteeeneeteeeeeeaeeees 7 57 Applicable systems ecceeeeseeeeteeeneeenteees 2 1 Display of standard SCree Nn eeeeeeee 4 16 Audio Pants ech hiner eta es 7 21 DNS ites an e eae aiid alate A 23 DNS server setting 4 23 B Backup Restore function 6 107 E Battery life sdn A 4 56 E mail FUNCTION aina 6 65 Battery replacement eeeeeeeseeeeteeeteeees 4 56 E mail notification setting 6 102 Battery Specifications ce eeeeseseeeeeeneeees 4 55 E mail Sending test eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 123 Broadband router ccccssesssceeeeeeeessees 2 2 2 6 E
562. tem setting Refer to Section 4 6 3 Item Set value Network type setting Select Connecting through LAN or the router Select Use the following IP address IP address setting e IP address 192 168 10 3 e Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Automatic network connection setting at start up Select Automatic connection to network at start up 2 Account setting Refer to Section 4 6 5 Set value Enter the following setting for the accounting setting No 1 Delete the default account Account setting No 1 e User name administrator001 e Password example QU71WS96ADMIN e Confirm password example QU71WS96ADMIN After changing the setting make sure to click on the Save button The settings are updated when the Update button on the Setting update screen is clicked the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset x Note that the setting of the System setting is not updated even if the Update button is clicked 2 Network connection of Web server module a Since Automatic connection to network at start up is set in the automatic network connection setting at start up on the System setting screen the Web server module automatically makes network connection at start up b Using GX Developer confirm the following connection status of the Web server module to the network with input signals of the buffer memory and the PLC CPU 1 Module READY X0 is on 2 Network conn
563. that the processing being executed is completed in Status of the data Display management execute the next processing Refer to Section 6 10 4 e Replace the battery Refer to Section 4 10 3 e Check the connection staus of Continue the battery Refer to Section 4 10 Stop Stop e System error 1 Continue e Retry to send the data Continue Continued on the next page 9 22 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING Logging non settin o602h 29909 3 error Tag non sampling 0603h error 0604h Tag setting file error Logging setting file ososh 0999 Seng error 0606h Event setting file error At start up or setting update the following was detected e The tag name with no setting was specified in the logging setting or tag event setting e The tag name specified in the logging setting or tag event setting was deleted At other than a start or setting update the following was detected e The tag name with no setting was specified in the logging setting or tag event setting e The tag name specified in the logging setting or tag event setting was deleted The component name with no setting was specified in the tag event setting or the component name specified in the tag event setting was deleted The logging with no setting was specified for the Web browser or dedicated instruction Though tag data monitor or logging was performed the target tag was not sampled The tag setting fil
564. the H W Information screen of the diagnostics function Start up procedure GX Developer Diagnostics System monitor Module s detailed information H W information H W Information x Module Display format Module Name QU71 WS96 Product information 051120000000000 B HEX C DEC HAW LED Information HAW SW Information Value Display details The Web server module data stored in the following buffer memory areas are displayed No Display Corresponding Buffer Memor H W LED information RUN LED status left side ERR LED status Switch 1 status Mode setting Switch 2 status Default operation setting Battery error detection setting Logging monitor setting Switch 3 status Response monitoring time setting H W SW information 3 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING 9 3 Error Code List MELSEC Q The error code list is indicated on subsequent pages Error type The errors are divided into the following three types 1 Module stop error Displayed as Stop in the table a The ERR LED flickers b When a module stop error occurs the following functions of the Web server module will stop 1 Monitoring function Tag function Logging function Event monitor function 5 Dedicated instruction According to the error code take corrective action for the error and power the PLC off and then on or reset the CPU module AUN c The error code is stored into the buffer memory area corresp
565. the MS DOS media compatible file system form FAT form to create the directory required for use in the Web server module When the Compact Flash card is formatted the data stored in the Compact Flash card are all deleted 2 Directory structure of Compact Flash card With the format function the following directory is created in the Compact Flash card lt root gt LOGGING 4 USER CSV ERN Created at a 1 p L BACKUP 4 i backup PEDERE 3 Setting of Compact Flash card Refer to Section 4 9 for the setting method of the Compact Flash card 6 109 6 109 FUNCTION LSS MELSEC Q 6 10 3 CSV export import function The setting data various settings of the administrative menu of the Web server module can be stored into a CSV file and edited using spreadsheet software etc on the personal computer The edited CSV file can be read to the Web server module to change the setting data This function is convenient for editing a screen with many settings e g the component setting POINT The setting data of the Web server module can be set in the Web browser Refer to Section 4 6 When making setting from the Web browser it is not necessary to use this function 1 CSV export import function a CSV export function Stores the setting data of the Web server module into standard ROM or Compact Flash card as a CSV file on the data management screen b CSV imp
566. the component Graphic display parts WSPictur class pay p Sap p Section 7 2 4 reaches the set value Displays the specified comment when the component Comment display parts WSCmt class p ay p p Section 7 2 5 reaches the set value Plays the specified audio file when the component Audio parts WSAudio class 4 p p Section 7 2 6 reaches the set value Historical graph display parts WSHsigrp class _ Displays the logging data in a time series line graph Section 7 2 7 Historical data display parts WSHsidat class Displays the logging data in table form Section 7 2 8 Write button parts WSWribin class__ Writes the specified value to the specified tag component Section 7 2 9 Displays a monitor screen in the same display form as in Device monitor parts DevMon class the device monitor of the standard screen Refer to Section 6 2 1 for the device monitor Section 7 2 10 Displays a monitor screen in the same display form as in Tag data monitor parts the tag data monitor of the standard screen Refer to Section 6 2 2 for the tag data monitor Section 7 2 11 Displays a monitor screen in the same display form as in Logging monitor parts the logging monitor of the standard screen Refer to Section 6 2 3 for the logging monitor Section 7 2 12 Displays a monitor screen in the same display form as in Event history monitor parts EveMon class the event history monitor of the standard screen Refer to Section 6 2 4 for the event histo
567. the error code and take corrective action Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code ram example 1 Program with which the Web server module mounted in the position of I O numbers X Y00 to X Y1F reads 2 words as binary data from the beginning of the ABCD BIN file in the CF USER directory when M28 is turned on HO D180 K2 D182 HO D184 KO D186 KO D187 ABCD D188 D200 M16 M16 MZ ie ena breee i Normal processing MIR eRe reece oe eeen H i l Abnormal processing Execution type Number of data to be read File position Number of columns specification Word unit File name 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q 2 Program with which the Web server module mounted in the position of I O numbers X Y00 to X Y1F reads the ABCD CSV file in the CF USER directory as a 2 column CSV format file when M29 is turned on H100 Ko HO K2 KO D240 M9 ee nee nee ee eee ee eee e eee Normal processing M19 peste tint itemen initi kil Abnormal processing ABCD D220 D222 D224 D226 D227 D228 Execution type Number of data to be read File position Number of columns specification Word unit File name 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q 8 10 WFDEL Instruction The user data file of the Compact Flash card is deleted with this instruction Applicable device j MELSECNET H Setting Internal device Special Index File MELSECNET I
568. the file is read from the Edit screen etc Example In the case of Microsoft Windows 98 operating system or Microsoft Corporation s Internet Explorer 5 5 Tools gt Internet Options gt lt General gt tab gt emporary Internet Files Settings gt Settings Screen 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Settings 2 Check for newer versions of stored pages Every visit to the page C Every ti Gi C Never u start Internet Explorer Temporary Internet files folder Current location C SWINDOWS Temporary Internet Files Amount of disk space to use m 62 MB Move Folder View Files View Objects 2 The old screen the one saved in the temporary Internet files may be displayed unchanged if the file is read from the User HTML Edit screen etc In that case delete the temporary Internet files cache of the Web browser and read the file again Example In the case of Microsoft Windows 98 operating system or Microsoft Corporation s Internet Explorer 5 5 Tools gt Internet Options gt lt General gt tab gt Temporary Internet Files Delete Files gt Delete Files Screen Delete Files Delete all files in the Temporary Internet Files folder You can also delete all your offline content stored locally Example When using Java VM of Sun Microsystems Inc for lt applet gt Control Panel gt Java gt lt General gt tab gt Delete Files gt Delete
569. the next processing Status Update Displaying current data management execution status 2003 10 20 14 21 19 2003 10 20 14 21 20 Export completed Standard ROM 2 When abnormally completed e According to the error code confirm the error status and take corrective action Refer to Section 9 3 e According to the file name label name or item name confirm the error detected location and reexamine the setting Status Update Displaying current data management execution status 2003 10 20 14 25 04 2003 10 20 14 25 05 ESA Export failed ERR 04301 Compe 6 118 6 FUNCTIONS 5 6 119 MELSEC Q Execution of CSV import Import the setting data from the CSV file a Select the standard ROM or Compact Flash card as a location to which the setting data file is imported CSV import Execute Importing the setting information from CSV files Standard ROM CompactFlash card b Click the Execute button to execute CSV import c On Status confirm the CSV import execution status As the drive name the source drive name standard ROM or Compact Flash card is displayed Click the Update button to confirm the current status When CSV import is being executed click the Update button again to confirm that the executed operation is completed 1 When normally completed CSV import is complete Start the next processing Status Update Displaying current data management exe
570. the switch setting of GX Developer o PLC PLC D 0 Intelli QU71WS96 ooo 0003 161 5 13 5 13 5 CONNECTING WEB SERVER MODULE TO NETWORK 2 MELSEC Q After writing the PLC parameters to the PLC CPU power the PLC off and then on or reset the CPU module The settings of the Web server module are as follows 1 System setting e IP address 192 168 3 3 e Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 e Connecting through LAN or the router e Use the default HTTP port number 80 e Use the default FTP port number 21 e System name QU71WS96 e Do not execute network diagnoses ping e Automatic connection to network at start up 2 Account setting e User name QJ71WS96 All in uppercase e Password MITSUBISHI All in uppercase e Access authority Device write Tag component write Administrator e Initial screen Standard screen top page 3 IP filter setting e Pass the IP packet that has not been set in Filter setting Without filter setting Reset of switch setting of GX Developer After setting the Web server module with the Web browser reset the default setting in the switch setting of GX Developer a Write 0000H to Switch 2 in the switch setting of GX Developer b c Switch setting for 170 and intelligent function module Input format HEX x Model name Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3f Switch 4 Switch 5 Type E Fa Fe 1 o o Intelli DJ7TWS96 ooo 00
571. tification setting IP filter setting Refer to Section 4 6 6 Account setting IP filter setting Power off the PLC and disconnect the crossing cable from the Web server module Connect the Web server module to the LAN modem Refer to Section 4 4 etc 1 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q Web server ka 1 Power the PLC ON and connect the Web server Refer to Chapter 5 module to the network Obtain an address for the Web server module using the Address Notification function Start up the Web browser on a personal computer and Refer to Section 4 6 2 access the Web server module Set various functions from the Administrative menu Tag setting Logging setting Event setting Refer to Chapter 6 Click on Update button on the Setting update screen or power the PLC OFF and ON or reset the CPU module to update the settings on the Web server module Refer to Section 4 6 2 Monitor each operation on the monitor screen to Refer to Section 6 2 confirm the setting 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 3 Part Names and Functions This section indicates the part names of the Web server module When LED cover is closed l RD R Rig Al TL d APUL CF CARD CH1 10BASE T 100BASE TX U Ye 1 4 2 LO
572. ting Dial up setting Address notification setting Account setting Power the PLC OFF and connect the Web server For connection to ADSL modem refer to Section 4 4 1 module to ADSL modem Power the PLC ON 3 Network connection of Web server module The network module is automatically linked to the network at start up Using address notification obtain the Web server 4 Receiving the account notification by personal computer module s address Start a Web browser on the computer and access the 5 Access to Web server module Web server module Monitor device data on the Device monitor screen For device monitor refer to Section 6 2 1 Completed 5 CONNECTING WEB SERVER MODULE TO NETWORK MELSEC Q 1 Contract with Internet service provider a To connect the Web server module to the Internet a contract with an Internet service provider is required Contact the Internet service provider for service details and how to sign up for the service b Create a proper environment for the external device personal computer so that Internet connection is available It is recommended to confirm in advance that access to the Internet is available from the personal computer etc using the connection account of the Web server module 2 Network setting of Web server module a Make setting to connect the Web server module to the network b From the Admin
573. ting Section 6 4 4 y When sending an e mail upon event occurrence Refer to make the setting on the E mail setting Section 6 6 3 y Make event setting on the Event setting Referto Section 6 5 3 Completed 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 6 5 3 Event setting Setting Purpose 1 In the common setting set each number of event historical data 2 Inthe CPU event setting make setting to monitor the operation status of the PLC CPU 3 In the tag event setting make setting to compare the tag data and condition value 4 Inthe time interval event setting make setting to monitor the time interval Start Procedure 1 Common setting Refer to 1 Administrative menu Event setting gt lt lt Common setting gt gt tab gt Common setting 2 CPU event setting Refer to 2 Administrative menu Event setting lt lt CPU event setting gt gt tab gt CPU event setting Select CPU event setting No and click on Edit gt Edit screen 3 Tag event setting Refer to 3 Administrative menu gt Event setting gt lt lt Tag event setting gt gt tab gt Tag event setting Select tag event setting No and click on Edit gt Edit screen 4 Time Interval event setting Refer to 4 Administrative menu gt Event setting gt lt lt Time Interval event setting gt gt tab Time Interval event setting Select time interval event setting No and
574. tion The stored file can be displayed in the Web browser or downloaded by FTP Peon FTP operation At event occurrence e mail can be sent as necessary Used to send e mail E mail function E mail transmission by PLC CPU Section 6 6 E mail transmission by event monitor function Used to transfer a file between the Web server module and external device FTP server function FTP client function f Backs up restores the standard ROM formats the compact flash card and Section Data management function f performs CSV export import 6 10 Section Diagnostic function Used to perform self diagnostics and connection test of the Web server module 6 11 User screen creation Creates user original Web screens using the standard supplied user parts j Chapter 7 function applet SSI CGI 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 6 2 Monitor Function 6 2 1 Device monitor Setting Purpose This monitoring function is used to specify one type of device to execute batch monitor Users with the device write authority can write data in word unit or operate ON OFF data in bit unit Start Procedure Monitor screen Device monitor refer to 1 Device test Device test refer to 2 1 Device monitor Setting screen ry Device monitor Home Monitor screen gt Device monitor CPU name Data type Display form 16bit integer DEC 32bit integer HEX x Stop monitor Real number ASCII character Devic
575. tion account Sets the account for connecting to the Internet service provider Access poit Sets the access point for the Internet service provider Dial method Sets the dialling method Sets the items related to network connection retries Modem attribute Sets the modem attribute Saves the settings Save The settings are updated when the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset Discards new data and return to the old setting 4 SET UP AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Q 1 Connection method Set the connection method of the Web server module a b Select the method of connecting the Web server module to the Internet from Modem or ADSL Make the settings of 2 to 6 according to the selected connection method The items unnecessary for the selected connection method are disabled Input to the column cannot be made Connection account Set the account for connecting to the Internet service provider a Set the account data for connecting to the Internet service provider 1 Username 1 to 128 characters Enter the user name user ID registered for the connection target Internet service provider Refer to Appendix 4 2 for the characters applicable to the user name 2 Password 1 to 128 characters Enter the password registered for the connection destination Internet service provider Refer to Appendix 4 2 for the characters applicable to the password 3 Confir
576. to be monitored e CPU event Refer to 2 e Tag event Refer to 3 e Time Interval event Refer to 4 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 CPU event The CPU event history is monitored The contents of ROM WWW EVENT CPUWATCH CSV are displayed Event type J CPU event x b c d Event number Status CPU name Operation status E mail sending Occurence 01 Control CPU 1 Restoration 01 Control CPU Normal RUN 2002 11 13 18 03 31 1 Occurence 01 Control CPU Normal STOP Date The date and time when the event occurred was restored is displayed Example 2002 08 05 08 58 17 Event number 1 The event number of the event occurrence restoration is displayed 2 The event number is the No set in CPU event setting of the event setting Status The occurrence restoration of the event is displayed CPU name 1 The name of the CPU where the event occurred was restored is displayed 2 The setting No and CPU names set in the access target CPU setting are displayed in the CPU name column 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q e Operation status The operation status of the PLC CPU in which the event occurred was restored is displayed Normal STOP The PLC CPU is stopped with no error Normal RUN The PLC CPU is running with no error PAUSE The PLC CPU is pausing Warning STOP 1 The PLC CPU is stopped with a continue error Warning RUN The PLC CPU is running with a continue e
577. tory Address http 192 168 3 3 user smpwtcen htm z Go Links Sample screen for CGI write part Tag No 1 Component No 1 Value 100 sali BELIH baa z Intemet Confirmation screen Result screen E http 77192 168 3 37WSWriteC cgi Microsoft Internet Explorer E http 77192 168 3 37WSWriteC cgi T agNo 1 amp EImNo 1 amp Confirm 0 amp Result 0 amp La Bfm Ele Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ea File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ea ig Of ala m g e o n alea me g Back Stop Refresh Home Search Favorites Media History Back Stop Refresh Home Search Favorites Media History Address je http 192 168 3 3 WSwriteC cai z Go Links Address je http 192 168 3 3AWSWriteC cgi T agNo 18EImNo 18 amp Confim 0 amp Resul 7 Go Links 100 will be written to device A Writing is completed normally Is it OK to proceed back Caution PC control may be affected Be sure to confirm the safety before execution as TITLE cancel E Done D Intenet Done Intenet 7 52 7 52 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q e Precautions for using the CGI write parts 1 Writing a value to a tag component with the CGI write part may change the control of the PLC CPU Ensure safety before execution When CONFIRM 1 the following confirmation screen appears Z http 192 168 3 3 WSWriteC cgi
578. trative mem gt FTP setting gt Edit screen Save Back Load FTP server name fise 166 3 10 1 to 64 characters Login user name uri ws96 1 to 32 characters Login password p 0 to 16 characters Confirm login password p Directory path QJ71WS96 USER 0 to 64 characters 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Setting item Sets the FTP server name of the file transfer destination using the IP address or domain name Login username Sets the login user name for the FTP server Login password Sets the login password for the FTP server Confirm login password Sets the login password again to confirm the login password Directory path Sets the directory path of the FTP server Saves the setting Savel The settings are updated when the Update button on the Setting update screen is clicked the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset Back Cancel Discards the changed setting and returns to the FTP setting screen Select FTP setting No Loads the parameters of the No selected in FTP setting No and displays them on the Edit and click on Load screen a FTP server name 1 Set the FTP server name using the IP address or domain name 2 When the domain name is used for setting make setting as described below e Enter all the host and domain into the FTP server name setting column Example ftpserver ne jp hel Host Domain x When using the domain name
579. tting ete F Sn tag TEE a rnin rsa on rse Tecay one De Ta Neer ofa torre Eales FTP aoe C 1 system1 systeml CSV Standard ROM same as the tag sampling interval Start at start up Do not stop Specification for number of lines 1000Lines Do not add Do not add Do not add 1 Overwtite Do not send Do not transfer 3 Click on the Update button on the Setting update screen to update the setting 7 29 7 29 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q Creation of HTML file File name SMPHSGEN HTM The HTML source is indicated below b lt DOCTYPE html PUBLIC W3C DTD HTML 4 01 Transitional EN gt lt html gt lt head gt lt meta http equiv Content Type content text html charset iso 8859 1 gt lt meta http equiv Pragma content no cache gt lt title gt Sample screen for historical graph display part lt title gt lt head gt lt body gt lt h1 gt Sample screen for historical graph display part lt h1 gt lt Communication part gt lt applet code WSCom class codebase PARTS width 0 height 0 gt lt param name INTERVAL value 1 gt lt applet gt lt Historical graph display part gt lt applet code WSHsigrp class codebase PARTS width 800 height 400 gt lt param name LOGNO value 1 gt lt param name GRAPHNO value 5 gt lt param name ELMNO1 value 1 gt lt param name ELMNO2 value 2 gt lt param name ELMNO3 value 3 gt lt param name
580. tting of the tag setting Refer to Section 6 3 3 for Component setting of the tag setting 2 The Component name drop down list displays the setting No and component names of the Component setting Data type The data type of the selected component is displayed Setting value Set the setting value according to the data type of the selected component 1 When the data type is single word double word or real number set a new value in decimal 1 2 2 When the data type is Bit set ON OFF 3 When the data type is String set a character string 1 When operation specification has been set to the target component carry out an inverse operation to operation specification for the setting value and write the result to the device Example When 100 is set as the setting value for the component in which Single word has been set as Data type and lt 2 as Operation specification 100 2 50 is actually written to the device Note that an error may be produced between the setting value and the actually written component value Example When 107 is set as the setting value for a component in which Single word has been set as Data type and 2 as Operation specification 107 2 54 is actually written to the device The component value to be displayed on the Tag data monitor is 54 X 2 108 Tag component test Although 107 has been specified 108 will be written to pressure according to the
581. tting is used Refer to Section 4 6 5 for the account setting External device FTP a Ka E peer data Ee b The range accessible by FTP changes depending on the access authority of the account Refer to Appendix 3 for the directory accessible by FTP 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 3 Setting procedure for FTP function Make access target CPU setting on the Access target Refer to Section 4 6 CPU setting FTP function is available with the setting in Section 4 6 Login to the Web server module to operate files Refer to Section 4 Completed 4 Example of access to FTP server The following provides an example that a user HTML file is written from Microsoft Corporation s Internet Explorer 5 5 of the personal computer using the FTP server function of the Web server module a Log into the Web server module 1 Start Microsoft Corporation s Internet Explorer 5 5 and enter the address of the Web server module Refer to Section 4 6 3 for the IP address setting Address a ftp 192 168 3 3 a IP address or host name for Web server module 2 As the user authentication screen Login As screen is displayed when access is made to the Web server module enter the account Refer to Section 4 6 5 for the account setting Login As D gt Either the server does not allow anonymous logins or the 3 e mail address was not accepted FTP Server 192 168 3 3 User Name adm
582. ttribute Agaiton set Section s Addition AT command string status area 4 6 4 Modem attribute CALL function 0 None 1 Provided 134 Modem attribute Disconnect function Disconnect time Unit Minute 135to 139 Use prohibited _ System area aa ae 140 Error code Section 0 Normal Other than 0 Error code 3 8 5 133 Current error 141 ystem area Use prohibited 1 142 to 145 Time Section 3 8 5 146 to 149 Use prohibited System area 150 Number of times of error occurrence 151 i m 3 fe lt fo Ce D jej Q 5 2 0 lt Error code 0 Normal Other than 0 Error code Error log 1 ie Error log 3 Same as Error log 1 Section 3 8 6 Error log 12 Same as Error log 1 Error log 14 236 to 241 242 to 247 248 to 249 Use prohibited System area Continued on the next page 152 153 154 to 157 158 to 163 164 to 169 170 to 175 176 to 181 182 to 187 Error log 188 to 193 194 to 199 200 to 205 206 to 211 212 to 217 218 to 223 224 to 229 230 to 235 15810163 Error log 2 17010175 Error log 4 17610181 Error log 5 18210187 Error log 6 18810193 Error log 7 19410199 Error log 8 20010205 Error log 9 20610211 Error log 10 21210217 Error log 11 22410229 Error log 13 23610241 Error log 15 24210247 Error log 16 n 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address a Application Decimal 250 to 251 252 253 254 to 255 256 257 to 260 261 to
583. turns on 0 Event not occurred 1 Event occurred b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bd b4 b3 b2 bi b0 Address 3001 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4j 3 21 1 c A CPU event occurs when the monitoring condition set in CPU event setting of the event setting is satisfied 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 CPU event monitor error data Address 3002 a b Address 3002 This area stores the CPU event monitor error data The bit corresponding to the CPU event setting No of a CPU event monitor error turns on 0 No CPU event monitor error occurred 1 CPU event monitor error occurred b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bd b4 b3 b2 bi bl 16 c 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 24 1 The following is observed when a CPU event monitor error occurs Example When an error occurs in CPU event monitor of the CPU event setting No 16 e CPU event monitor error X13 turns on e CPU event monitor error data area address 3002 bit 15 of the buffer memory turns on e The error code is stored into the CPU event monitor 16 error code area address 3018 of the buffer memory 4 CPU event monitor 1 to 16 error code Address 3003 to 3018 The error code that indicates the error status is stored into the corresponding CPU event setting No area Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code 3 8 14 Tag event monitor status area 1 Address 10000 to 10447 The status related to the tag event monitor
584. twork connection status or line disruption by the Internet service provider the Web server module makes reconnection to the network automatically only once c When the number of retries and multiple access points have been set in the dial up setting reconnection is performed for the number of retry times multiplied by the number of multiple access points 7 Number of times of connection retry occurrence Address 36 This area stores the number of connection tries including initial time during network connection the number 05 multiplied by the number of access points 8 Number of disconnection Address 37 This area stores the cumulative number of disconnection from the network Refer to X4 of Section 3 6 2 1 for the trigger of disconnection from the network 9 Number of disconnection by request signal Y7 Address 38 This area stores the cumulative number of disconnection from the network by Network disconnection request Y7 10 Number of automatic disconnection Address 39 This area stores the cumulative number of automatic disconnection from the network Refer to X4 of Section 3 6 2 1 for the trigger of disconnection from the network 11 Number of line lost times Address 40 This area stores the cumulative number of unintentional disconnection from the network due to cable disconnection in a network connection status or line disruption from the Internet service provider 12 Total connection time Address
585. update screen is clicked the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset Cancel Discards the changed setting and returns to the Logging setting screen Select logging setting Loads the parameters of the No selected in logging setting No and displays on the Edit No and click on Load screen 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC O a Tag name 1 Set the tag name to be logged 2 Select the tag name set in the tag setting Refer to Section 6 3 3 for the tag setting 3 When using the logging function it is required to set the tag in advance 4 The tag whose data are collected at high speed can be selected in only one logging setting Multiple setting not allowed For the tag whose data are collected at high speed its displayed tag name is followed by Example 04 Process A b File name 1 Set the file name of the logging file 1 to 8 characters 2 Refer to Appendix 4 8 for the characters applicable to the file name c Savein 1 As the location where the logging file will be saved select either the standard ROM or Compact Flash card 2 The standard ROM can be selected for only the logging setting No 1 to 4 e For the logging setting No 5 and later the file saving location is fixed to the Compact Flash card e When the tag whose data are collected at high speed is selected the file saving location is fixed to the Compact Flash card d Timing As th
586. upply used by the system Failure to do so may cause failure or malfunctions of the module e Do not mount remove the module onto from base unit more than 50 times IEC61 131 2 compliant after the first use of the product Failure to do so may cause the module to malfunction due to poor contact of connector e Do not drop the battery installed to the module and do not give it a shock Doing so may damage the battery causing battery fluid leakage in the battery If the battery has been dropped or given a shock do not use it but dispose of it e Always make sure to touch the grounded metal to discharge the electricity charged in the body etc before touching the module Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the module Operating Precautions lt DANGER e Before controlling a running PLC e g modifying data fully ensure safety e Do not write any data into the System area of the buffer memory of the intelligent function module Also do not output turn on the Use prohibited signal which is one of the output signals from the PLC CPU to the intelligent function module If data is written to the System area or the Use prohibited signal is output there is a risk that the PLC system may malfunction Disposal Instructions A CAUTION e Dispose of this product as industrial waste Transportation Precautions A CAUTION e When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them
587. us of the LOGDEL instruction Normally completed Remains off Abnormally completed Turns on in the END processing of the scan where the LOGDEL instruction is completed and turns off in the next END processing 8 22 8 22 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q Operation at execution of LOGDEL instruction When the LOGDEL instruction is completed the completion device bit device set in D 0 turns on in the END processing of the completed scan and turns off in the next END processing When an error occurs the completion device set in D 1 turns on and the error code is stored into the completion status ie device set in i 1 Sequence program Scan alate Scan procaseing Scan Scan arene a oara ee nee eee ee ete f Instruction execution LOGDEL instruction Completion device f E R a e paaa a a pa ge aa i Completion device 1 A AR a e eee le SN A AE Ee ENE ANAA EAE or T E A Tet File deletion Error When the dedicated instruction is abnormally completed the abnormal completion signal D 1 turns on and an error code is stored into the completion status S 1 Check the error status according to the error code and take corrective action Refer to Section 9 3 for the error code Program example Program with which the Web server module mounted in the position of I O numbers X Y00 to X Y1F deletes the saved file of the logging data when M24 is turned on
588. us setting a IP address notification Notify an IP address at network connection 1 Address notification is made to the selected transfer destination FTP server when connecting to network 2 The target FTP server set in the FTP setting can be selected b Option setting 1 Notification file name 1 to 8 characters e Set the file name of the HTML file to be transferred to the FTP server Default QU71WS96 e Refer to Appendix 4 3 for the characters available for the notification file name 2 Link character string Up to 64 characters e Set the character string for link to the Web server module described in the HTML file Default QU71WS96 e Refer to Appendix 4 2 for the characters available for the link character string 6 105 6 105 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q After changing the settings make sure to click on the Save button The settings are updated when the Update button on the Setting update screen is clicked the PLC is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset Execution of address notification 1 Address notification is made to the selected transfer destination FTP server when connecting to network 2 The file data transferred to the FTP server is as indicated below File name QU71WS96 HTM Set at Notification file name File data lt html gt lt head gt lt title gt QJ71WS96 URL Information lt title gt lt head gt lt body gt lt a href http 192 168 3
589. utside the setting range or the item does not exist CF card or set another CF card Display Display Display Display Continued on the next page 9 20 and execute CSV export again Refer to Section 6 10 4 e Add the file displayed in Status on the data management screen and execute CSV import again Refer to Section 6 10 4 e Add a necessary label to the file displayed in Status on the data management screen and execute CSV import again Refer to Section 6 10 4 Appendix 6 e Check the item of the file displayed in Status on the data management screen and execute CSV import again Refer to Section 6 10 4 Appendix 6 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC Q From the previous page Error ee i d Error name Error definition Corrective action Error type code 0436h Reference error Duplicate label error Component type error CF card initialization error CF card drive data retrieve error 0490h 0491h 0492h 0493h System error CF card format error CF card check error CF card response error The setting referred to by the item value does not exist The same labels exist A string type component was specified in the tag event setting The CF card cannot be initialized The drive data of the CF card cannot be read Failed to format the CF card Failed to check the CF card A time out occurred during waiting for a response from the CF card when access was made to t
590. ver module a Make setting to connect the Web server module to the network b From the Administrative menu set as follows For other than the following settings the default values will be used Administrative menu System setting Refer to 1 gt E mail setting Refer to 2 gt Address notification setting Refer to 3 Account setting Refer to 4 1 System setting Refer to Section 4 6 3 Item Set value Network type setting Select Connecting through LAN or the router IP address setting Select Obtain an IP address automatically DNS server setting Select Obtain a DNS server address automatically Automatic network connection setting at start up Select Automatic connection to network at start up 2 E mail setting Refer to Section 6 6 3 Item Set value Enter the e mail setting of the Web server module e SMTP server name e E mail address From e User name example mitsubishi ne jp example MITSUBISHI e Confirm password example MITSUBISHI example mailserver ne jp i example mailaddress ne jp Send e mail account setting e Password Enter an e mail address To of the personal computer E mail address To setting to p 3 e No 1 example pcmailaddress ne jp 3 Address notification setting Refer to Section 6 9 2 IP address setting Item Set value e Select Notify the IP a
591. ves please refer to Section 3 1 3 Cable in Chapter 3 EMC Directive and Low Voltage Directive in the User s Manual Hardware of the CPU module used or the PLC CPU supplied with the base unit How to Use This Manual For the Web server module QU71WS96 the explanation sections are indicated by the purpose of use Use this manual when you need to know the following 1 Features functions and components a Features and functions 1 Chapter 1 describes the features of the Web server module 2 Chapter 3 describes the common functions specifications etc of the Web server module b Supplied products and network components 1 The Packing List before Chapter 1 indicates the products included with shipment of the Web server module 2 Chapter 2 describes the system configuration of the Web server module Parts and members other than the supplied products should be obtained by users separately 2 Procedures required before startup of the Web server module a Startup procedure Section 4 2 describes the rough procedure prior to the operation of the Web server module b Connection to the Internet 1 Section 2 2 describes the devices required for network connection 2 Section 4 4 describes the network connection method by connection type 3 Chapter 5 describes the examples of connection to the network c Processing required before startup of the Web server module 1 Section 4 6 describes the setting from the Web browse
592. x device A will be written to 10 according to the component setting Is it OK to proceed Caution Control of the PLC may change Ensure safety before execution Yes No Warming Applet Window 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 A user without the tag component write authority is not allowed to write a value to a tag component with the write button part When awrite is attempted the following screen appears Write button part No write authority is identified Log in again with a user name that has write authority enabled and then execute again ERR 0903h OK Warning Applet Window 3 When Device write disable request YA has been set to Disable writing to a tag component with the write button part is not available When a write is attempted the following screen appears Writing to device is disabled Turn OFF the device write disable signal and re execute ERR 0908h OK Warming Applet Window 4 When Data write of the tag setting has been set to Disable writing to a tag component with the write button part is not available Refer to Section 6 3 3 for the tag setting When awrite is attempted the following screen appears Write button part x Disable is set in Data Write in Tag setting Enter Enable to Data Write in Tag setting and re execute ERR 0909h OK Warning Applet Window 7 USER SCREEN CREATION FUNCTION
593. x 6 16 ACCOUNT CSV Account setting 1 File format File name accounrt csv File contents Account setting Refer to Section 4 6 5 y y USERNAME PASSWORD DWRITE TWRITE ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT1 QJ71WS96 MITSUBISHI ES ACCOUNT2 USER1 USERUSER1 NO ACCOUNT12 USER2 USERUSER2 NC NO AERE NE USER3 USERUSER3 NO Ez y y INITIAL FILENAME FOLLOWING USER usrindix htm File format E Item row Cannot be set by the user L Label column Setting area Set by the user Account setting E Account setting Home gt Administrative Save Back Load Account setting No or gt facministrator001 1 to 20 characters Password 45 8 to 14 characters 4 6 Confirm passwor Access authority M Device write M Tag component write M Administrator Initial screen TOP page index htm User specified screen 1 to 64 characters ERE J aae to Set the items of account setting No 1 to 16 EE oun 6 Enter only the necessary labels Labels that are not set need not be entered App 59 App 59 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 3 Setting items Setting Item Description Set value requirement E USERNAME sername name 1 to 20 characters ee E xssworo Password 8 t0 14 characters oO Access Mark DWRITE authority Device Access TWRITE authority Tag O component write Do not mark NO A authority Administrator ADMINISTRATOR Do not mark NO 1 nitial screen
594. xcessive number of ak tk l specified in the component setting characters error i is outside the range f Invalid setting was made in Decimal Exponential 4 Display form of the component form setting error f setting Invalid setting was made in Operation setting error Operator Operand of the component setting e Check the access target CPU setting Refer to Section 4 6 7 e Check the tag setting Refer to Section 6 3 3 e After initializing the module refer to Section 4 13 perform the tag setting refer to Section 6 3 3 again e After initializing the module refer to Section 4 13 perform the tag setting refer to Section 6 3 3 again e Check the logging setting Refer to Section 6 4 4 e After initializing the module refer to Section 4 13 perform the tag setting refer to Section 6 3 3 e Specify the existing access target CPU e Check the component setting Refer to Section 6 3 3 e Check the component setting Refer to Section 6 3 3 e Check the component setting Refer to Section 6 3 3 e Check the component setting Refer to Section 6 3 3 n n e e xe xe Continued on the next page 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC Q From the previous page Error code Invalid setting was made in e After initializing the module refer Logging specification Timing of the logging setting or to Section 4 13 perform the error the logging setting file is logging setting
595. y a c Processing of large data volume Large volume of data that is beyond capability of the PLC CPU can be processed using the standard ROM and Compact Flash card Saving device data in file format and accessing them from a remote location is available using Web browser or FTP Backup Restoration of standard ROM data The data setting information logging data user HTML etc of the standard ROM can be backed up on the Compact Flash card It is also possible to restore the data of the Compact Flash card onto the standard ROM Power off without shut down operation The file protection battery allows power to be switched on off any time without troublesome shut down operation When a battery is installed 15 Prevention of illegal access by user authentication and IP filter functions a b Plant Production field __ _______ 1 11 Web server module By basic authentication of the user name and password the Web server module can restrict access of users and setting operations User authentication function The IP address of the access source can be identified to restrict access IP filter function Example Using IP filter function When access is made from an intra company LAN client 1 2 registering the IP address of the proxy server to the IP filter shuts off external access client 3 enabling access from only the intra company LAN Client 3 Client 2
596. y 1 Access by HTTP 2 Access by FTP transfer to directory 3 Reading file by FTP 4 Writing or deleting file by FTP x x x x x x x x BEEP T bbb lolel f Allowed x Not allowed App 7 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 4 Applicable Characters and ASCII Code Tables by Setting Items 1 ASCII code table wo a fo IN jN 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 gt I IN I lt x EF lt C A In iI olv jo Pre Re IN K Ix Jz lt c O Iz IZ Im JA Je IIT IM mT im Io lo JW I gt Ja TIMID IOI I gt lo Jo IN JO la a j n o 2 ASCII characters User name password server name e mail address directory path external device name etc Alphanumeric characters can be used However double quotation is not available The hatched area is available Note that colon must not be used in a user name s OQ SO 10 IN IO JO A V N j o gt l BIN I lt Ix IZ lt Ic 4 lo D O U za c la In amp Ix lz j lt c TIM Io IO W I gt lo jo IN o jala Jw n o O1Z JZ Ir Jz Je J JZ IO JT m 0 lo W gt App 8 App 8 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 3 File name directory name The ASCII characters other than lt gt canbe used The hatched area is available A Q TO IN

Web Server Module User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents